Navigator RIP for

Windows 2000/2003/XP

Operator Manual
™
Navigator RIP 7.0 Release
March 2005
Copyright and Trademarks
Navigator RIP 7.0 Release Operator Manual is based on the Harlequin RIP OEM Manual
™
Navigator 7.0 is based on the Harlequin RIP Genesis Release
March 2005
Global Graphics Part number: HK–7.0–OEMXP–GENESIS
Document issue: 102
Copyright © 1992–2005 Global Graphics Software Ltd. and 2005 Xitron, Inc.
All Rights Reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permis-
sion of Global Graphics Software Ltd.
The information in this publication is provided for information only and is subject to change without notice. Global
Graphics Software Ltd and its affiliates assume no responsibility or liability for any loss or damage that may arise from
the use of any information in this publication. The software described in this book is furnished under license and may
only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of that license.
Harlequin is a registered trademark of Global Graphics Software Ltd.
The Global Graphics Software logo, the Harlequin at Heart Logo, Cortex, Harlequin RIP, Harlequin ColorPro, EasyTrap,
FireWorks, FlatOut, Harlequin Color Management System (HCMS), Harlequin Color Production Solutions (HCPS),
Harlequin Color Proofing (HCP), Harlequin Error Diffusion Screening Plugin 1-bit (HEDS1), Harlequin Error Diffusion
Screening Plugin 2-bit (HEDS2), Harlequin Full Color System (HFCS), Harlequin ICC Profile Processor (HIPP), Harle-
quin Standard Color System (HSCS), Harlequin Chain Screening (HCS), Harlequin Display List Technology (HDLT),
Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS), Harlequin Micro Screening (HMS), Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS),
HQcrypt, Harlequin Screening Library (HSL), ProofReady, Scalable Open Architecture (SOAR), SetGold, SetGoldPro,
TrapMaster, TrapWorks, TrapPro, TrapProLite, Harlequin RIP Eclipse Release and Harlequin RIP Genesis Release are
all trademarks of Global Graphics Software Ltd.
Protected by U.S. Patents 5,579,457; 5,808,622; 5,784,049; 5,862,253; 6,343,145; 6,330,072; 6,483,524; 6,380,951.
Other U.S. Patents Pending
Protected by European Patents 0 803 160; 0 772 934; 0 896 771.
Portions licensed under U.S. Patent No. 5,212,546; 4,941,038.
LZW licensed under U.S. Patent No.4,558,302 and foreign counterparts.
TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
The ECI and FOGRA ICC color profiles supplied with this Harlequin RIP are distributed with the kind permission of the
ECI (European Color Initiative) and FOGRA respectively, and of Heidelberger Druckmaschinen AG (HEIDELBERG).
The IFRA ICC profiles supplied with this Global Graphics Software are distributed with the kind permission of IFRA
and of GretagMacbeth.
International Cooperation for Integration of Processes in Prepress, Press and Postpress, CIP4, Job Definition Format,
JDF and the CIP4 logo are trademarks of CIP4.
Adobe, Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Type Manager, Acrobat, Display PostScript, Adobe Illustrator, PostScript, Distiller
and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States
and/or other countries which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
 ®
Global Graphics Software Ltd is a licensee of Pantone, Inc. PANTONE Colors generated by ScriptWorks are four-color
process simulations and may not match PANTONE-identified solid color standards. Consult current PANTONE Color
® ®
Publications for accurate color. PANTONE , Hexachrome , and PANTONE CALIBRATED™ are trademarks of Pan-
tone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 1991.
Other brand or product names are the registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
US Government Use
This Harlequin RIP software is a computer software program developed at private expense and is subject to the following Restricted Rights Legend: “Use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in (i) FAR 52.227-14 Alt III or (ii) FAR 52.227-19, as appli-
cable. Use by agencies of the Department of Defense (DOD) is subject to Global Graphics Software’s customary commercial license as contained in the
accompanying license agreement, in accordance with DFAR 227.7202-1(a). For purposes of the FAR, the Software shall be deemed to be ‘unpublished’
and licensed with disclosure prohibitions, rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.” Global Graphics Software Incorporated, 5875
Trinity Parkway, Suite 110, Centreville, VA 20120.
Contents

Navigator RIP Preface 11

1 Introduction to the Navigator RIP 19

What is the Navigator RIP? 19
Why use the Navigator RIP? 21
The Navigator RIP in depth 22

2 Running the Navigator RIP 45

Machine requirements 46
Installing printer interface cards 51
Navigator RIP folder structure 51
Starting up the Navigator RIP 57
Menus affected by optional features 64
Stopping the Navigator RIP 66

3 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP 69

A simple Navigator RIP session 69
A more complex use of the Navigator RIP 80
Using the Navigator RIP with a spool folder 83
Monitoring the Navigator RIP 84

4 Navigator RIP Output Methods 87

Historical overview 87
Page buffering modes 88

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 5

 The throughput system 91
Advanced details of page buffering modes 105
Page buffering modes: a summary 109

5 Configuring Output Formats 111

Creating and managing page setups 111
Page Setup Manager dialog box 112
Edit Page Setup dialog box 115
Selecting different devices 118
Sending output to the screen 123
Output to Preview 128
Output to None 128
Output to TIFF 129
Sending output to a printer 147
ProofReady plugins 148
Multiple device output plugins 150
Output plugin dialog boxes 154
Separations, Screening and Color 154
Advanced Media Saving 156
Media and time saving using optimization 166
Default page size 167
Margins 167
Printing effects 169
Control strip 170
Scaling the image 183
Features 184
Cassette management 187
Page Setup Options 187
Page Setup Option Extras 193
PDF Options 199
Calibration 200
Other page setup options 202

6 Screening 203
Managing separations styles 203
Separations Manager dialog box 204
Edit Style dialog box 205

6 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 Halftoning 206
Screen angles 213
Dot shapes 215
Halftone frequency 219
Screening options and number of gray levels 220
Job settings and Navigator RIP settings 225
Harlequin Precision Screening 226
Harlequin Screening Library 235
Automatic detection of color separations 243
Using Harlequin Harpoon PCI 244

7 Configuring the RIP 245

Configure RIP dialog box 246
How the Navigator RIP controls files 246
Control of page buffering modes 248
Job timeout 251
Threads and parallel processing 252
Network buffer size 252
Printer buffer size 253
Extras 254
Specifying prep files 256
Navigator RIP memory allocation 256
Minimum free disk space 258
Disable sounds 258
Resetting the Navigator RIP to default values 258
Choosing the user interface language 259

8 Configuring Input 263

Input management 264
Managing input plugins 266
Using the AppleTalk input plugin 270
Using the NT Print input 271
Using the NT Pipe input 276
Using the Spool Folder input folder 280
Using the Socket input plugin 286
Using the Asynchronous Socket plugin 294
Using the Asynchronous Socket Quit plugin 295

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 7

 Using the Serial input plugin 295
Using more than one method 302
Using the Print File command 302
Printing PostScript-language files 304
Printing PDF files 304
Printing JPEG and JFIF files 323
Printing GIF files 323
Printing TIFF/IT files 323
Printing TIFF 6.0 files 328
Printing page buffer files 331
Entering PostScript-language code by hand 333

9 Media Management 335

Why manage your media? 335
Advancing and cutting media interactively 338
Advancing and cutting media automatically 340
Monitoring media 346

10 Simple Imposition 357

What is Simple imposition? 357
Input file formats 358
How to activate Simple imposition 358
The Imposition Manager 358
Configuring Simple imposition 360
Example impositions 374

11 JDF-Enabled RIP 381

System description 381
Installation of the JDF Enabler 383
Starting the JDF Enabler 385
JDF Enabler configuration 389
Using the JDF-Enabled RIP 389

12 Fonts 399
Supplied fonts 400
Types of font 400
The DLD1 format 402

8 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 Installing fonts in the Navigator RIP 402
Pre-loading fonts 406
Producing a list of installed fonts 406
Proofing fonts 407
Removing fonts 409
Composite fonts (Type 0) 410
Font substitution 411
The HqnFontSetStubs start up files 412
Font Backup 413
Font Emulation 413

13 Calibration 419
Why calibration is needed 419
Calibration and linearization 421
Calibration in the Navigator RIP 422
Example procedure 424
Editing calibration sets 435
Consistency of calibration 439
Tone curves 441
Press calibration 442
Using a combination of calibration sets 446
Print Calibration dialog box 447
Calibration Manager dialog box 450
Edit Calibration dialog box 455

14 Color Separation 467

Introduction 468
What color separations are 471
Producing color images from separations 475
How color separations are produced 478
Creating and managing separations 480
Separations Manager dialog box 480
Edit Style dialog box 484
Color Setup 493
Color separation angles in job 508
Trapping features 508
Pages in the Output Controller 509

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 9

 Appendix A Troubleshooting 513
Appendix B Jobs Containing Color Management Data 535
Appendix C Using Genlin 539
Glossary 549
Index 567

10 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Navigator RIP Preface

É É
WELCOME to the Harlequin PostScript language compatible interpreter. This man-
ual is a complete guide to using the Navigator RIP, and provides technical details
when necessary. For details of how to install the RIP, see the separate Installation
Guide.
This manual is intended for anyone using or evaluating the graphical user interface
version of the Navigator RIP for PC platforms running Microsoft Windows 2000,
Windows Server 2003 and Windows XP Professional. The guide covers the features
of the Navigator RIP in a structured way, giving examples that show you how to per-
form a wide variety of useful tasks in the RIP. For more details about the other ver-
sions of RIPs available, see Chapter 1, “Introduction to the Navigator RIP”.

Contents of this manual

This manual discusses basic concepts at an early stage, leaving more complex issues
for the later chapters. In addition, each chapter starts with a basic description of the
relevant features before describing in detail the more technical issues involved.
™
Changes to the Navigator RIP Genesis Release v7.0 include:
• PDF 1.5 support for: JPEG 2000, optional content, X-ref streams, compressed
object streams and 16-bit images.
• Font emulation implementation. For more information see “Enable font emula-
tion” on page 191.
• PDF/X 2003 revisions for both 1.1a and 3 specifications.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 11

 • Implementation of Simple Imposition. For more information see “Simple
Imposition” on page 357.
• JDF Enabler version 2.0. For more information see “JDF-Enabled RIP” on
page 381.
• TrapProLite is discontinued.
• Media Saving renamed to Advanced Media Saving. This helps to differentiate it
from the Media Saving Optimization option. For more information see
“Advanced Media Saving” on page 156.
• Support discontinued for Mac OS 9, Solaris, Irix, Windows 98 and Windows
NT 4.0.
• Addition of the Use late color management feature, see Section 14.8.2 on
page 502.
Changes to the Navigator Release SP4 of the RIP include:
• The installation of the Harlequin License Server with all Navigator Release
SP4 (and later) RIPs. For more information see the Installation guide for your
platform and the License Server manual.
• The Navigator 6.4 RIP is JDF ready. For more information see the JDF Enabler
User’s Manual.
• The Output to TIFF section has been updated, see Section 5.8 on page 129.
• Changes have been made to the media saving module, see Section 5.15 on
page 166.
• The way that the Minimum shaded fill levels work has been changed, see
Section 5.23.12 on page 192.
Changes to the Navigator 6.0r3 RIP include:
• The addition of a control strip, see Section 5.19 on page 170.
• The addition of Enfocus preflight checking of PDF files, see Section 8.14.6 on
page 312.
• RIP executables are supplied with associated shared library files, see
Section 2.4 on page 57.

12 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 • The following options are added to the Media Saving section: Switch Roam
Color to Black, Name Flat after and Tracking of media width to aid automatic
cassette selection. See Section 5.14 on page 156.
• The addition of a control for the handling of features found in jobs from Adobe
InDesign, see Section 5.24.3 on page 197.
• New options provided under Delete on error and a new Suppress on Startup
option in the Spool Folder Configuration dialog box. See Section 8.6.1 on
page 281.
• Extra information on PDF/X standards is provided in the Printing PDF files
section, see Section 8.14.1 on page 305.
Changes to the Navigator 6.0r1 RIP include:
• Relocation of the MediaSaving directory.
• Additional font support.
• A change to the way image interpolation works.
• The addition of the Minimum shaded fill levels option.
Changes to the Navigator 6.0 RIP include:
™
• Harlequin ColorPro with new enhanced user interface.
• Support for N-color and Gray Profile ICC profiles.
• Press/Proof simulation added to color products (RGB proofing workflow).
• Black threshold parameter added to custom rendering intent GUI.
• ProofReady Plugin support on Mac OS X.
• Harlequin 1 bit and 2 bit EDS plugins.
™ ™
• SetGold v1.2 and SetGoldPro on Win NT only.
• TrapPro™ trapping.
• Trap Zone support for PDF files.
• PDF/X-1a and PDF/X-3:2002 support.
• PDF 1.4 including: transparency, JBIG2, 128 bit encryption, output intents, and
referenced PDF. Because of this, the InFlight checker has been removed.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 13

 • Support for Palette color (Index color) TIFF files.
Items which have been relocated in this version include:
• The Color Options button is removed from the Page Setup dialog box and is
replaced by a Color Setup Manager and Color Setup dialog box.
• Trapping controls appear in the Trapping section of the Edit Page Setup dialog
box.
• Ink set options have been removed from the Edit Separations dialog and placed
within their own Ink Set Manager. See the TrapPro User Manual for more infor-
mation.
• Honor Color Management (PDF and PS) options were previously in the Page
Setup > PDF Options dialog and Page Setup Options > Extras dialog. The option is
now called Override color management in job and is available in the Color Setup
dialog.
Changes to v5.5r1a include:
• The addition of a Mac OS X version of the manual.
• A small number of corrections, deletions and additions, all highlighted by
change bars.
Changes to v5.5r1 include:
• AcroForms support, see Section 8.14.5 on page 309.
• Convert RGB blacks to true black, see Section 14.3 on page 501.
• The way calibration works has been changed. For more information see
Section 13.4.4 on page 432.
The following changes were made for v5.5.
• Image Interpolation support, see Section 5.4.2 on page 120.
• Media Saving feature, see Section 5.14 on page 156.
• PDF 1.4 InFlight checker.
Less significant changes include:
• Automatic creation of Font resources for installed CID fonts, see Section 12.2
on page 400.

14 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 • Font substitution changes, see Section 12.10 on page 411.
• Change to the messages when calibrating, see Section 13.4.2.2 on page 428.
®
• Changes to the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, see Section 14.1.2.1 on
page 470.
The first three chapters contain information about what the Navigator RIP does, and
how to get it up and running on your machine.
Chapter 1, “Introduction to the Navigator RIP”, gives a description of what the
RIP does and the kind of tasks for which you can use it. This chapter also gives
a broad overview of the different versions of RIP that are available.
Chapter 2, “Running the Navigator RIP”, describes your machine requirements,
and how to start up the Navigator RIP once it is installed.
Chapter 3, “Getting Started with the Navigator RIP”, describes the most funda-
mental elements of the system. It shows you how to do useful work without
learning a large number of new skills.
The next four chapters form a more comprehensive account of the software.
Chapter 4, “Harlequin RIP Output Methods”, introduces the different ways in
which the RIP can operate, and how you can get the best performance out of the
software for the jobs you are running. The chapter moves from general princi-
ples to more specific examples of the best way to use the RIP.
Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”, describes the flexibility the Naviga-
tor RIP provides for configuring the appearance of any printed page. The tools
described in this chapter will be used on a regular basis, and are important for
anyone who will make extensive use of the product.
Chapter 6, “Screening”, explains the control the Navigator RIP gives you over
screening techniques. This chapter includes a complete description of using
Harlequin Precision Screening.
Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”, shows you how you can configure the Navi-
gator RIP to give the best performance in your environment. You will probably
want to experiment with the options described in this chapter, but once you are
satisfied that the RIP is running as you want it, you will not need to alter them
on a regular basis.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 15

 The later chapters of the manual deal with specific facilities that the Navigator RIP
offers, and may be used as reference.
Chapter 8, “Configuring Input”, describes the different ways in which you can
send PostScript-language code and other forms of job as input to the Navigator
RIP, either working on a stand-alone machine, or as part of a network.
Chapter 9, “Media Management”, gives you complete details of the media
management facilities available in the Navigator RIP.
Chapter 10, “Simple Imposition”, provides details on how to use the imposition
features of the Navigator RIP.
Chapter 11, “JDF-Enabled RIP”, provides basic details on the JDF Enabler.
This includes information on installation and use. For more detailed configura-
®
tion information you should consult the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP
User and System Guide.
Chapter 12, “Fonts”, describes the use that the Navigator RIP makes of fonts,
the different font formats that are available, and the special built-in facilities that
the RIP has to make handling fonts easy and more efficient.
Chapter 13, “Calibration”, discusses the ways in which the Navigator RIP can
help you ensure accurate calibration of your output.
Chapter 14, “Color Separation”, describes the facilities the Navigator RIP pro-
vides for controlling the printing of individual colorants in both composite and
separated output.
Appendix A, “Troubleshooting”, provides solutions to common problems that
occur when running the Navigator RIP.
Appendix B, “Jobs Containing Color Management Data” describes how jobs
and images with attached color management data interact with related settings
in the Navigator RIP.
Appendix C, “Using Genlin” describes a utility program providing semi-auto-
matic measurement of calibration targets generated by the Navigator RIP.
Lastly, the “Glossary” explains terminology used throughout the manual.

16 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Assumptions
The Navigator RIP runs in the Microsoft Windows Server 2003, Windows 2000 and
Windows XP Professional environment. It is important that you are familiar with the
appropriate operating system, at least to the level of using the file Explorer and a sim-
ple text editor or word processor such as Notepad or WordPad. If you are not, please
refer to the Microsoft Help or manuals.
In complex installations, you may wish to send jobs between PCs, Macintosh comput-
ers, and computers running the UNIX operating system. This manual describes the
details special to the Navigator RIP, but not the fundamentals of networking connec-
tions and services. You are likely to require assistance from technical support staff for
initial configuration and occasional maintenance of such installations.

Conventions
This manual uses some conventions to make it clear where you give keyboard com-
mands or choose from the menus and dialog boxes, as described in the following sec-
tions.

The keyboard
You can execute many of the commands available in the Navigator RIP either by
using the mouse or by using a keyboard shortcut. This is a combination or sequence of
key presses that executes a command without you having to choose a menu option
with the mouse. Keyboard shortcuts for individual commands are discussed, in con-
text, throughout the manual.

Shift
The Shift key is often used when selecting a group of objects from a list. For example,
when selecting a group of files to print. It is also used in keyboard shortcuts and in
some mouse actions.

Ctrl
The Control key is used in keyboard shortcuts and in some mouse actions. For exam-
ple, you can often hold down Control while pressing another key or a mouse button.
Whenever this manual describes one of these actions, the text shows which key or

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 17

 mouse button to use: for example, when you can use the Control key and the letter key
K in combination, the text shows Ctrl+K.
The Control key is also used when selecting several objects from a list that do not
form a contiguous block. For example, you can use this key when selecting a number
of files to print.
Some keyboard shortcuts are specific to a particular window and only operate when
that window is active. When using a windowing system, ensure that the relevant win-
dow is active before using one of these keyboard shortcuts.

Fonts and formats

The following fonts and styles are used throughout this documentation.
1. Paragraphs that are numbered and use this font contain instructions which you
should follow in the shown order.
Text written in this sans-serif bold face represents a menu title, a menu item, or a con-
trol item in a RIP dialog box. Text including an angle bracket ( > ) indicates both a
menu and the option in that menu. For example: “choose the Navigator RIP > Start
Inputs option” is a shorthand method of referring to the Start Inputs menu option in the
Navigator RIP menu.

Text written in this typewriter face represents a piece of PostScript-language code,

a file name, or text displayed by the Navigator RIP.
If a term is written in italic, it is the first mention of an important concept. This con-
cept is explained in the text immediately following, in the glossary, or both.
Note: Text indicated by starting with a bold word in the left margin is important and
should be read carefully. A Note, like this one, is often a suggestion that may save you
work, improve performance, or improve the quality of output.
Warning: Like a Note, a Warning is important and often indicates the need for care to
avoid loss of files or settings.

18 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1

Introduction to the
Navigator RIP

This chapter provides an introduction to the capabilities of the Navigator RIP.

• Section 1.1 on page 19 defines the Navigator RIP.
• Section 1.2 on page 21 describes the advantages of using the Navigator RIP.
• Section 1.3 on page 22 describes various features of the Navigator RIP.

1.1 What is the Navigator RIP?

The Navigator RIP is an application that takes a document or job describing images or
pages and produces output from that job on an output device—which can be a printer,
imagesetter, computer screen, or a file on disk. The term output device is used
throughout this manual, except where the nature of the device is important.
In general, a software application or hardware device that performs this task is known
®
as a Raster Image Processor (RIP) or, where the PostScript language is involved, a
PostScript-language compatible interpreter.
The Navigator RIP is a software RIP management system. It contains both a software
RIP and a collection of supporting functions that help the RIP perform its task effi-
ciently. For example, the RIP accepts jobs from various sources, handles previewing
and output of processed pages, and performs the associated file handling.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 19

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.1.1 Input and output formats

The Navigator RIP accepts jobs and produces output in several formats, with the exact
options depending on your configuration of the RIP.
The range of input formats includes: PostScript-language and Encapsulated PostScript
(EPS) files, Portable Document Format (PDF) files, TIFF/IT-P1 files, (16-bit)
TIFF 6.0 baseline files, and JPEG and JFIF files. The Navigator RIP supports modern
versions of these files including PostScript LanguageLevel 3, PDF version 1.5, and
derived standards such as PDF/X. The RIP also has controls for special handling of
older versions of these files if necessary.
The Navigator RIP can produce output in a variety of formats, to suit various physical
output devices and file formats. The ability to produce TIFF 6.0 files is a standard fea-
ture but it is easy to add output options for other formats such as TIFF/IT-P1 files and
CIP3 PPF files. Similarly, there are options for output to many proofing printers and
final output devices.

1.1.2 Versions of the Navigator RIP

The Navigator RIP is available in different configurations and is able to operate on
different computer platforms. The configuration that is best for you depends very
much on your individual needs. This manual should help you assess the functionality
that meets those needs.
In particular, a version of the Navigator RIP with a full graphical user interface (GUI)
is available for: Power Macintosh computers running Mac OS X and computers (PCs)
using Intel or compatible processors and running, Windows Server 2003,
Windows 2000 and Windows XP Professional. The Navigator RIP may be used on
both single and multiple processor machines running the, Windows Server 2003,
Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems.
This manual describes the version of the Navigator RIP for Windows Server 2003,
Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
The Navigator RIP is appropriate for a wide range of output devices including high-
resolution imagesetters, lower-resolution plain-paper setters, and medium to high-res-
olution printers and plotters. It supports the special features of these devices, and max-
imizes their overall productivity.

20 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.2 Why use the Navigator RIP?

1.2 Why use the Navigator RIP?

The Navigator RIP has proven itself to be a fast, versatile, and powerful PostScript-
language compatible interpreter, and more. There are many reasons for choosing it
above other similar interpreters, the most important of which are discussed here.
The Navigator RIP is effective, compatible, and robust; and shows real benefits in
everyday use.
• The Navigator RIP is effective because it processes jobs quickly, is able to pro-
cess jobs of virtually any size, and can re-output selected pages or a complete
job without re-interpretation.
• The Navigator RIP is compatible because it is kept up to date with: PostScript,
PDF, and font specifications; image file formats; and relevant standards from
independent bodies.
Note: The Navigator RIP is able to use proprietary extensions internally for
quality of output, speed, and efficiency without losing compatibility.
• The Navigator RIP is also compatible because it supports several networking
protocols for use in many kinds of networks, whether or not all the computers
are of the same type.
• Robustness comes from experience with many real jobs. You can configure the
Navigator RIP to override poor settings in incoming jobs (and avoid office
printer quality screening on expensive media), use its ability to detect poorly
labeled color separations, and so on.
• The Navigator RIP is flexible enough to support many workflows, including:
composite or preseparated color; PostScript, PDF, or TIFF/IT-P1. Some of
these input formats require the Navigator RIP options.
A system using the Navigator RIP is easy to extend and to upgrade when necessary
because the Navigator RIP is a software-based RIP.
• You can add options, such as advanced screening, color management, and trap-
ping. In many cases you can do this by entering passwords and in other cases
with software-only procedures.
• You can add more output options with software plugins to support imageset-
ters, platesetters, proofing and display printers, and workflow integration.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 21

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

• A PostScript-language programmer can add simple fragments of PostScript

code to provide features such as marking pages with draft or similar overprint
and color bars.
• It is possible to upgrade hardware and software independently. The Navigator
RIP is very similar on all platforms so there is little or no need for retraining if
you need to add another type of computer.
• When you upgrade the Navigator RIP you can transfer your existing settings to
the new version of the RIP and most optional output plugins.
• Basic imposition
Section 1.3 discusses many of these features in more depth.

1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

Section 1.2 on page 21 described some of the advantages of using the Navigator RIP.
This section describes the features that contribute to those advantages.
• Characteristics of a software RIP. See page 23.
• File format and version support. See page 24.
• Extended color capabilities. See page 26.
• Screening options. See page 32.
• Harlequin ColorPro. See page 33.
• Graphics formats. See page 34.
• Input and output methods. See page 35.
• Complex jobs. See page 37.
• Throughput control. See page 38.
• Previewing. See page 39.
• Page buffer compression. See page 39.
• Fonts and font handling, including composite fonts. See page 40.
• Convenience features. See page 41.

22 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

1.3.1 Software RIPs compared to hardware RIPs

Many PostScript-language-compatible interpreters are based on hardware rather than
software. That is, most PostScript-language printers come supplied with a RIP that
runs on its own special hardware. Sometimes a RIP may run on only one type of
printer.
The Navigator RIP contains a software RIP, carefully written to support a number of
computing platforms and output systems.
There are a number of advantages to using a software RIP:
• If you have a hardware RIP and wish to take advantage of new hardware, you
must either pay for an upgrade of the old hardware or stop using it. With a soft-
ware RIP such as the Navigator RIP, you can use your old hardware for other
purposes—you still have a usable computer. Thus, taking advantage of new
technology in the hardware industry is much more cost effective if you have a
software RIP.
• You can easily take advantage of new features if you have a software RIP. If
new features are added to a hardware RIP, the only way to take advantage of
those features is to buy the new version of the hardware, or to have a firmware
upgrade. Both of these options incur considerable time and expense. Doing the
same thing for a software RIP is much simpler and cheaper—improved ver-
sions of the Navigator RIP can be run on the same hardware as older versions,
and can be sent to you on disk.
• When you buy a hardware RIP, you buy a dedicated machine which is special-
ized for performing one task: interpreting the PostScript language. With a soft-
ware RIP, the non-dedicated hardware you buy is a computer, which can be
used for many purposes other than running the Navigator RIP.
• It is much more expensive to customize a hardware RIP to individual require-
ments than it is to customize a software RIP.
Even if, despite these points, you feel that a hardware RIP is still the best solution for
your particular case, it need not be traditional, dedicated hardware. It is possible to use
hardware accelerators to assist a software RIP such as the Navigator RIP.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 23

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.2 File format and version support

The Navigator RIP supports several file formats and maintains this support across the
widely-used versions of these formats, as well as the latest versions.
Note: The Navigator RIP limits all user created names or file names to 31 bytes. This
is equivalent to 31 characters when using standard ASCII text, and 15 characters when
using double-byte character sets, such as Kanji.
®
For example, the Navigator RIP is a PostScript LanguageLevel 3-compatible RIP
management system but still supports features of PostScript Level 2 and earlier. The
RIP also recognizes uses of PostScript code specific to common image creation and
page layout applications.
The reason for supporting older versions of files and applications is that almost all
PostScript-language and PDF page descriptions are created automatically by applica-
tions. Those applications can only use the features of the page description language as
they existed at the time of writing the application, and those features are subject to
change.
The PostScript language was first created and used in the mid-1980s and since that
time it has undergone many improvements and changes. Throughout this period, peo-
ple have been trying to create PostScript language page descriptions that, above all,
work—despite any bugs in the interpreters which may have existed at the time.
To cope with this situation, the Navigator RIP is compatible not only with the Post-
Script-language jobs of today, but with the jobs of yesterday. There are two aspects to
dealing with older jobs: dealing efficiently with features that are now better supported
by more modern versions of the page description language; dealing with work-around
methods for bugs in older versions of the page description language. The Navigator
RIP does both.
It might not be immediately obvious why it is necessary to deal with bugs and work-
around methods, but consider this example.
What happens if a bug is fixed in a widely-used PostScript language interpreter?
Newer RIPs and applications no longer have to cope with that bug, but problems arise
if you wish to interpret old PostScript language page descriptions (generated with an
application written before the bug was fixed) with your new RIP. The old page
descriptions take the bug into account, but the new RIP does not, so the hard copy pro-
duced with your new RIP is wrong. If your RIP cannot accommodate this, as the Nav-

24 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

igator RIP can, your old PostScript language files (and indeed your application if you
still use it) are useless.
The input file formats that the Navigator RIP supports are:
• PostScript LanguageLevel 3, Level 2, and Level 1.
• PDF versions up to and including PDF 1.5 files.
• PDF/X-1a:2001, PDF/X-1a:2003, PDF/X-3:2002 and PDF/X3:2003
• JPEG and JFIF.
• TIFF 6.0 and optionally TIFF/IT-P1.
• GIF.
• PCL4.
See Section 5.23 on page 187 and Chapter 8, “Configuring Input” on page 263 for
more details.
Note: RIP versions 5.3 and 5.5 included support for PDF/X-1:1999, this has been
dropped in the Eclipse Release of the Navigator RIP, and replaced with support for
PDF/X-1a:2001 and PDF/X-3:2002.
The Navigator RIP can also enable substitution of high resolution images for Post-
Script-language jobs, using an in-RIP implementation of the Open Prepress Interface
(OPI), versions 1.3 and 2.0, and Desktop Color Separation (DCS), versions 1.0 and
2.0. See Section 5.21 on page 184 for details.
Additionally, the Navigator RIP can be configured to support special features—color
management, font substitution, duotones, and vignettes—of jobs produced by several
image creation and page layout applications. These applications include:
®
• Adobe Photoshop
®
• Adobe Illustrator
®
• QuarkXPress
® ®
• Macromedia FreeHand
See Section 5.24 on page 193 for more details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 25

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.3 Extended color capabilities

The Navigator RIP supports the use of color capabilities introduced with PostScript
LanguageLevel 3. This support includes use of N-color or HiFi color systems using
varying number of colorants, whether those colorants mimic CMYK systems (photo-
ink systems) or use obviously different colorants.
The RIP provides separations management, preview, screening, calibration, and plu-
gin support for the popular N-color systems.
The RIP also has the ability to calibrate and screen spot colors separately from process
colors. This feature greatly simplifies the management of spot colors in the RIP.

1.3.3.1 /DeviceN and N-color

The /DeviceN color space allows better control of PostScript-language code in envi-
ronments where the number of separations is no longer dominated by the CMYK,
RGB, and monochrome color models. “N” represents the number of process color
separations. Using the /DeviceN color space, CMYK corresponds to N=4, RGB to
N=3, and monochrome to N=1. This color space allows the Navigator RIP to access
separations where N=2 (duotones) or greater than 4 (N-color).
The /DeviceN color space provides the functionality to support HiFi color or N-color
systems where colorants in addition to CMYK enhance the attainable gamut of an out-
put process. It also provides solutions for minimizing the number of spot colors
required by an output device.
The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later uses this color space to extend separations
management, Roam, and plugin capabilities. Depending on your specific device and
workflow, additional plugin development may be required to make use of the
expanded number of color channels.

1.3.3.2 Duotones, tritones, and quadtones

Some applications (for example, Photoshop versions 2.5 and later) convert duotones
involving spot colors to CMYK colors when producing composite PostScript-lan-
guage jobs. While the composite output is correct, when such jobs are submitted to a
RIP that uses in-RIP separation, the duotones are drawn on the process color separa-
tions and not on spot color separations as expected.

26 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

Photoshop has the ability to produce spot color separations when in-RIP separation is
selected for a LanguageLevel 3 RIP. This eliminates the problem just described for
output generated by Photoshop 5.0 when sent to any LanguageLevel 3 RIP.
In addition to producing correct output from Photoshop 5.0 jobs, the Navigator RIP
correctly handles jobs from Photoshop versions 2.5 through 4 as well. The Navigator
RIP detects this construct in Photoshop jobs and correctly diverts the duotone to spot
color separations. Note that you must configure the Navigator RIP to generate these
spot color separations for this to work.
For more information see Section 5.24.1, “Adobe Photoshop features”.

1.3.3.3 Patterns and Smooth Shades

LanguageLevel 3 implements new features that improve the quality of PostScript-lan-
guage fills. In addition, it allows shades to be output smoothly at the resolution of the
output device target. The RIP extends this capability by allowing for vignette replace-
ment, in which existing vignettes in PostScript-language and PDF jobs are replaced.
This functionality greatly improves the quality of gradients and shades on output.

1.3.3.4 Images
The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later supports type 3 and 4 image dictionaries (for
uses such as masks). This allows an application to produce masks using multiple
images in a more efficient fashion. This mask technique also improves performance
by eliminating the need for a detailed PostScript-language clipping path. This feature
is best suited to lower-resolution output devices and workflows.

1.3.3.5 settrapparams
LanguageLevel 3 includes a new software interface that allows the description of trap
settings within a PostScript-language file.
The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later incorporates the settrapprams interface
and uses this for setting trapping parameters. Harlequin has extended settrappa-
rams to include those trapping parameters that are not covered by the 3010
specification.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 27

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.3.6 Type16 halftones

The Navigator RIP 5.0 version and later supports type 16 halftones, which can contain
more than 256 shades of gray. Harlequin has always supported an arbitrary number of
gray levels, even in the PostScript Level 1 compatible RIPs. In the Navigator RIP
version 5.0 and later, this support for more shades of gray is also accessible using the
LanguageLevel 3 constructs.

1.3.3.7 Idiom recognition

The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later uses idiom recognition to detect PostScript-
language procedures and replace procedures that are bound when defined. This
extends to procedures some of the benefits that Harlequin’s shadowop operator pro-
vides for operator redefinition. Once the PostScript-language code is intercepted, the
Navigator RIP replaces it with optimized code.
This operator has many potential uses that include detecting level 2 code in a Post-
Script-language file and replacing it with LanguageLevel 3 code.

1.3.3.8 Type 32 fonts

RIP version 5.0 and later recognizes and supports Type 32 fonts.

1.3.3.9 Other operators

RIP version 5.0 and later supports the LanguageLevel 3 operators that are defined in
the 3010 LanguageLevel 3 specification. The Navigator RIP accepts PostScript-lan-
guage output from applications using these LanguageLevel 3 operators.
PostScript LanguageLevel 3—3015—operators setoverprintmode and
currentoverprintmode were included starting with 5.5r1a version RIPs.

1.3.3.10 File filters

The Navigator RIP supports the required file filter additions documented in the 3010
LanguageLevel 3 specification.

28 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

1.3.4 Color, screening, and Roam functionality

RIP version 5.0 and later contains several new capabilities relating to color, screening,
and roam. Where appropriate, Harlequin has taken care to enable the end-user to con-
trol the underlying functionality from the user interface.
Not all of the new functionality is applicable to all output devices or workflows. You
will find some features more relevant than others for particular output devices and
workflow instances.

1.3.4.1 Color API

Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later contains a programming interface (API) that
allows you to set the options for the Harlequin color management modules from Post-
Script-language code. This provides control over all color options, including the
installation of ICC profiles, without a user interface.

1.3.4.2 Spot color screening and calibration

The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later has the capability to calibrate and screen spot
colors as well as process colors. This feature greatly simplifies the management of
spot colors in the Navigator RIP.

1.3.4.3 UseCIEColor
This operator improves color control in the PostScript-language code by allowing
device-dependent input data to be translated to a device-independent CIE color space.
The input colors are mapped to the device-independent color space using an input pro-
file. The colors may then be transformed ready for printing on another output device.
Harlequin has provided this functionality for some time through the color manage-
ment modules the latest being ColorPro. You can choose to use the color management
specified in the job by UseCIEColor, or to override this and instead use the more
detailed controls provided with ColorPro.

1.3.4.4 Embedded ICC profiles

When ColorPro is enabled, the Navigator RIP can detect and use ICC profiles embed-
ded in Photoshop EPS, TIFF, or JPEG images. See the ColorPro User’s Guide for
details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 29

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.4.5 Colorimetric roam

Provided a system is using an sRGB display (monitor and display card) and the moni-
tor is properly calibrated, Roam approximates colorimetric output on the display.

1.3.5 Memory management

Harlequin has a continuous program for improving the performance of the Navigator
RIP memory management. A new architecture has been put into place within the Nav-
igator RIP 5.0 and later for the Windows, UNIX and Macintosh platforms. This archi-
tecture not only provides the groundwork for future memory features and
enhancements, but also allows for a level of dynamic memory management within the
Navigator RIP.
There are new GUI controls for setting memory. As in the past, it is possible to specify
the memory used by the Navigator RIP, but there is a significant difference.
• In previous versions, the Navigator RIP put a claim on the entire amount of
memory specified so that the operating system and other applications could not
use this memory even if the Navigator RIP did not require it at a particular
time. (The Macintosh implementation, because of operating system differences,
varied slightly with respect to this functionality.)
• With the new implementation, the specified memory is not held exclusively for
the Navigator RIP. Instead, the Navigator RIP takes only the amount of
memory it requires at the time. This amount rises while processing a job but
once the job is processed the memory is returned to the system. This allows the
Navigator RIP to co-exist better on a system with the operating system and
other applications.
The new implementation also makes it possible to specify a reserve amount of mem-
ory, available for short-term use by the Navigator RIP. For example, the Navigator
RIP may use this reserve in time-critical operations, where the alternative would be to
use disk storage, as long as the reserve is large enough to keep the operation in mem-
ory.

1.3.5.1 Garbage collection

From the Eclipse Release of the Navigator RIP, garbage collection has been imple-
mented. Garbage collection is performed when memory is low and reclaims the mem-

30 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

ory occupied by composite objects that are no longer accessible to the PostScript
program.
This helps some jobs that allocate a lot of memory, but not all. Some jobs that could
not partial paint will now need significantly less memory than before.
When garbage collection starts, a message is displayed on the console window.
Garbage collection is controlled using the PostScript Language operator vmreclaim.
For more information on garbage collection, see section 3.7.4 of the The PostScript®
Language Reference (3rd Edition).

1.3.6 Headless RIP Option

The headless RIP functionality that was introduced in Navigator RIP versions 4.5 and
4.6 is also available in Navigator RIP 5.0.

1.3.7 FlatOut
RIP version 5.0 and all subsequent Navigator RIP releases are capable of stitching sin-
gle-page PGB files into a predefined flat. This feature enables the development of
page-based workflows around the Navigator RIP.
Three components are required to produce a stitched flat:
1. A background PGB file. You can create a background in a page layout applica-
tion and then convert the PostScript-language code to a PGB using the Naviga-
tor RIP. This flat background contains a slot for each page. This background
may contain sluglines, crop marks, and so on.
2. Single-page PGB file(s). For example, to produce an eight-page flat, eight
single-page PGB files must be generated.
3. A flat description file. This file describes the location of the background and
single-page PGB files on disk. The flat description file also indicates the posi-
tioning of pages on the flat.
The flat description file is presented as an input to the Navigator RIP and the PGB
files are stitched into a single flat for output to the specified output device.
The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later accepts PGB files from Navigator RIPs ver-
sion 4.5. It also accepts PGB files from any other Navigator RIP platform. This

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 31

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

extends the ability to interchange PGB files between Windows platforms, which was
introduced in the Navigator RIP 4.5.
For additional information on how to generate a flat description and more on PGB
stitching, please refer to the FlatOut User Guide.

1.3.8 Screening options

The Navigator RIP has several screening features and options, designed to produce
high quality output on devices ranging from imagesetters to inkjet proofing printers.
There is generalized screening support for color systems that go beyond straightfor-
ward CMYK process colors, but you need an output plugin and device able to support
these color systems.
The Navigator RIP is able to create extra gray levels (with HPS) and to control the
number of extra levels, even with PostScript Level 1 jobs. This feature helps to elimi-
nate stepping in vignettes and to avoid posterization, while enabling you to set a limit
on the number of levels that is appropriate to the required image quality. The RIP also
supports more than 256 shades of gray when they are specified using PostScript
LanguageLevel 3 constructs.

1.3.8.1 Harlequin Precision Screening

For very high quality output, Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS) has been pro-
duced. This is a proprietary feature that eliminates objectionable moiré patterning
when producing color separations.
Once correctly set up, and with sufficient memory available, the Navigator RIP can
produce output with HPS at speeds comparable to those obtained when using tradi-
tional lower-quality rational tangent screening.
HPS has been designed for automatic operation, without the need to refer to complex
tables of magic numbers, and you can choose to override any bad settings in the job.
This is especially useful for print bureaus, who often receive PostScript-language code
that is not set up for high quality screening.
Some RIPs have restricted dongles that do not allow HPS. In such cases, HPS can be
activated with a password in the Configure RIP Extras dialog box.

32 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

1.3.8.2 Harlequin Screening Library

Global Graphics has developed a number of special screening strategies for very high
quality press work, particularly when printing in color. They are included in the Harle-
quin Screening Library (HSL), and require separate passwords to become enabled.
HSL includes Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS), Global Graphics’s patented Fre-
quency Modulation (FM) screening technology. Moiré patterning is impossible with
HDS, and it gives finer detail for a given device resolution. Also included are Harle-
quin Chain Screening (HCS), which is particularly good at creating smooth flat tints
and at holding detail in continuous tone regions, and Harlequin Micro Screening
(HMS) which allows a greater range of tones to be used even at high screen rulings.

1.3.8.3 Screening for extended color systems

Several color systems require more than the four screens used for CMYK work. The
Navigator RIP contains screens suitable for use with HiFi color systems such as the
®
PANTONE Hexachrome Color Selector system or the various photo-ink technologies
using different densities (light and dark versions) of one or more colorants.

1.3.9 Harlequin ColorPro™

It is possible to add and use the advanced color management facilities provided by
Harlequin ColorPro which as an optional extra provided with the Navigator RIP and
requires a password for it to be enabled
ColorPro is a comprehensive color management system which replaces all the previ-
ous offerings such as HIPP, HCMS, HFCS and HCPS.
™
ColorPro together with SetGoldPro profile making software is Global Graphics’
color science solution for ensuring color quality and accuracy for proofing and emula-
tion. ColorPro provides the largest realizable color gamuts for the final print market
and allows greater accuracy than would be possible using standard profiles.
Harlequin ColorPro embraces open systems, industry standards and device-indepen-
dent color science, and is able to make full use of them. If you have ICC profiles with
which you already achieve good results you can use these profiles with ColorPro. You

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 33

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

should however be aware that ColorPro contains color science that is optimized for
the Navigator RIP and is easily utilized with the introduction of SetGoldPro.
ColorPro allows you to specify different gamut-mapping algorithms in the reproduc-
tion of a page. For example, you can simultaneously specify Absolute colorimetric to
reproduce some elements of the page and yet specify Perceptual to reproduce the
photographs. The end result is that, on a single page, the color for photographs are
each calculated without affecting other elements on the page.
Harlequin ColorPro allows processing of colors in page data using ICC profiles
produced by OEMs, third parties, or end-users using third party characterization and
profiling tools. ICC profiles specify a translation between two color spaces. Each
profile is prepared for a specific set of imaging conditions. One device may have more
than one profile. The profiles may correspond to running the device with different
combinations of resolutions, inks, and paper.
New profiles can be easily added to ColorPro, and previously installed profiles can be
selected without the need to reinstall each time a profile is used.
An option to uninstall ICC profiles is also provided.
In addition, ColorPro allows the use of profiles prepared in the Navigator RIP format.
Global Graphics supplies a number of profiles for commonly used systems.
When ColorPro is enabled, the Navigator RIP can detect and use any ICC profiles that
Photoshop has embedded in EPS, TIFF, or JPEG images.
This manual describes the Navigator RIP without ColorPro, but mentions areas where
ColorPro would modify your use of the Navigator RIP. The extra facilities are
described in the separate manual Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide.
For information on color facilities provided in the Navigator RIP as standard see
Section 14.8 on page 493.

1.3.10 Graphics formats

The Navigator RIP can produce halftone output, 8-bit grayscale output, 8- and 10-bit
run-length encoded (RLE) output, and color contone (continuous tone) output in N-
color, CMYK and RGB formats. This allows the RIP to be used for driving contone
color printers as well as imagesetters.

34 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

This output is passed to an output plugin (described in Section 1.3.11), and from there
to the output device controlled by that plugin. Output devices are often physical print-
ers producing images on paper or film; but devices can also be files on disk, storing
the images in a specific graphics format.
An output plugin that creates disk files provides a simple method of translating from
the input format to another graphics format. Using such an output plugin extends your
ability to transfer graphics defined in the PostScript language or PDF to other software
applications or systems. For example, you can produce a graphics image without
dependencies on external fonts or color management. Also, you may wish to send a
page description to someone who does not have access to PostScript-language tools
but who can use files in the Tagged Image File Format (TIFF). TIFF is a commonly-
used graphics format and a TIFF output device is supplied with the RIP.

1.3.11 Input and output methods

The Navigator RIP performs most of its input and output using plugins, small auxil-
iary programs that the RIP loads when it starts up.
You can install new plugins into an existing installation of the Navigator RIP to add
new input and output capabilities. Several optional plugins are supplied with an
installer program, and it is always better to use an installer if it exists, but the basic
operation is file copying.

1.3.11.1 Output plugins

The RIP sends all output to printers and other output devices through output plugins,
thereby allowing the quick and straightforward addition of support for new output
devices.
Typical output plugins support single output devices or families of similar devices and
may be supplied with special screens, calibration and color management, and other
features appropriate to the device, such as control of exposure or cutting media.
Optional output plugins support file formats useful in workflow systems, advertising
distribution, and setting up printing presses. These formats include TIFF/IT-P1 and the
CIP3 Print Production Format (PPF).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 35

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.11.2 Input plugins

Input plugins provide communication between the Navigator RIP and other systems,
primarily as sources of input.
The standard input plugins provided with the Navigator RIP include:
• AppleTalk
An AppleTalk network connects together a mixture of Apple and other comput-
ers and printers in order to share disk resources and printing services. AppleTalk
runs on LocalTalk and Ethernet and is a widely supported network protocol.
AppleTalk networks often include multiple printers, and are available to Mac
OS X users through the Print Center. Because the Navigator RIP behaves as any
other printer on AppleTalk, you can send print jobs to the RIP running on a
machine connected to the AppleTalk network, in the same way as any other
printer. (The Navigator RIP can emulate several, differently configured, printers
if you wish.)
• Spool Folder
This plugin allows you to set up the Navigator RIP so that it continually scans or
polls a folder (directory)—for example, on a central server—for input files.
When these files appear and are complete, the RIP processes them. The spool
folder uses the network file access provided by your machine—for example,
Network File System (NFS) on machines running the UNIX operating system.
You can use multiple configurations (as described in “Multiple inputs” on page
37), allowing you to have several scanned folders, each with a different associ-
ated page setup.
• NT Print
This publishes the Navigator RIP as a printer available to the Windows NT print
services.
• NT Pipe
This provides a named pipe allowing high speed communication with an appli-
cation such as an Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server.

36 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

• Serial Port
With this plugin, PCs and other computers can be connected using their serial
ports and communicate with one another. The data transfer speed, however, is
very slow. This plugin supports the Adobe Serial Lines Protocol.
• Sockets
With this plugin, the Navigator RIP can accept input from a network socket
client program, which may be part of a larger workflow system. This plugin
supports TCP/IP and UNIX socket protocols.

1.3.11.3 Multiple inputs

For some input types, it is possible to have available several configurations or page
setups (where parameters such as resolution, output device, rotation, and negation are
given specific values). Using AppleTalk, several different virtual printers can be made
available on the network using a single running copy of the Navigator RIP, each
printer with a different page setup. When using the Spool folder plugin, several spool
folders can be made available, each with an associated page setup.
You can enable multiple types of input allowing, for example, AppleTalk and Spool
folder inputs to operate at the same time.

1.3.12 Complex jobs

Given enough memory and disk space, the Navigator RIP can interpret arbitrarily
complex jobs. The same is not true for many other high resolution RIPs.
This is achieved with a feature called partial page buffering (or “painting partial
pages” in some messages). Essentially, if a particular job is so large that it cannot all
be fitted into memory at once, the RIP interprets only as much of the page description
as does fit into memory, and places the interpreted image in a partial page buffer. Hav-
ing dealt with part of the image, the RIP gains enough free memory to deal with the
next part—the effect being that the page description is divided into manageable sec-
tions, which are interpreted one at a time. Disk space is used to hold what has been
interpreted so far until the whole image has been processed, and printing can com-
mence.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 37

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

1.3.13 Throughput control

In almost all circumstances, it is desirable to produce page images as quickly as possi-
ble while maintaining high quality. All Navigator RIPs are written with this aim in
mind and can benefit from operating with fast hardware. Beyond this, and especially
when using high resolution imagesetters, special techniques can help maximize the
rate of producing useful output. The Navigator RIP can use these techniques, collec-
tively called throughput control, when either of the multiple page buffering modes is
selected. See Section 4.2 on page 88 for more details of multiple and single page buff-
ering modes.
The Navigator RIP increases job throughput in two ways.
Firstly, the RIP differs from other RIPs in the way bitmaps are produced and sent to an
output device. A traditional RIP must interpret a page and send the bitmap directly to
the output device before continuing with the next page. Because of this, if you have to
change cassettes or some fault occurs with the output device, the current page cannot
be output until the fault is cleared; productive work stops until the situation is
resolved.
The Navigator RIP can be operated in this way if desired, but it offers a powerful
alternative that overcomes these limitations—by saving bitmaps on disk in the form of
page buffers, before bitmaps go from the disk to the output device. Many page buffers
can be stored on disk (as many as will fit into the available disk space), and the RIP
can continue to produce and save page buffers, even if the device is not ready to out-
put. If a printer jam occurs in an overnight job, the RIP is still able to process the job
and the page buffers are ready for output the next day. In a high volume environment,
this ability can be invaluable.
Even when there are no problems with the output device, you can still save time—if
you need to produce more than one copy, you do not need to reinterpret the page
description, because the bitmaps are still retained on disk. This means, for example,
that if a page gets damaged in the developer or there is a problem with ink delivery
then it is easy to print another copy.
Secondly, the Navigator RIP increases job throughput by allowing job interpretation
and output to occur simultaneously. While some pages of a job are being interpreted,
other pages, which have already been interpreted, can be sent to the output device.
This can greatly increase throughput when outputting several pages in succession.
With a fast computer, it is possible to drive the imagesetter continuously for several

38 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

pages. Even with fast output devices, time can be used effectively, because the RIP
can be interpreting data while the output device starts up.

1.3.14 Previewing
The Navigator RIP allows you to preview pages, at their output resolution on screen to
check them for mistakes before they are output, at their full output resolution. You can
preview halftone, contone and grayscale images using the full color capabilities of the
display system.
You can request a reduced view of the entire page in a separate window. This provides
a better idea of what the whole page looks like, and also acts as a navigation aid to
help you to display any part of the page at full resolution, to check fine detail.
The remaining functionality depends on the page buffering mode. (Section 4.2 on
page 88 describes page buffering modes.)
Using either of the multiple page buffer modes, you can view several separations or
pages, overlaid or separately. This allows a good check of the page, including check-
ing image positioning, trapping, and so on. You can view separations in their natural
colors, thus obtaining a realistic impression of final output, or in false colors, to high-
light differences between similar separations or composite pages.
In either of the single page buffer modes, you can view only individual separations or
a composite image, and only in the natural colors.

1.3.15 Page buffer compression

When producing jobs at high resolutions or on large format devices, large amounts of
disk space are often required if page buffers are used. The RIP makes the most of the
available disk space by compressing page buffers as they are created and placed on
disk, and then uncompressing them as they are read from disk and printed or dis-
played.
Compression saves a great deal of disk space and often means that large jobs can be
printed without stopping the imagesetter, because compressed data can be read from
disk more quickly. Stopping an imagesetter part way through a job can lead to a loss in
output quality, so this facility can be of great benefit. (See the description of data
underrun on page 107, which explains one problem that page buffer compression can
help avoid.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 39

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

Page buffer compression always produces buffers of the same size as or smaller than
the original. For color pages, it typically achieves a compression ratio of 3:1, and for
newspaper pages a typical ratio of 10:1. That is, the compressed page buffer could be
less than a third of the size of an uncompressed one for color pages, and a tenth of the
size for newspaper pages. For color images, this can mean reducing disk requirements
from 150 MB to only 50 MB.
Page buffer compression in the RIP is a completely lossless procedure. The quality of
your output is fully preserved when compressing and then uncompressing the page
buffers. For details of the amount of disk space you need to reserve for page buffers,
see “Ability to RIP a job” on page 48.
From version 5.5 files greater than 2 GB can be read and written. The most likely use
of this is the ability to generate page buffers greater than 2 GB.

1.3.16 Fonts and font handling

To print text, the relevant fonts must be installed in a RIP before interpreting a job, or
the fonts must be supplied with that job.
If the interpreter sees that a Times-Roman font is needed for a particular job, it must
know what a Times-Roman font is. The Navigator RIP comes ready-supplied with the
35 standard fonts found on most PostScript-language printers and several additional
fonts. (See page 400 for a description of the supplied fonts.) Thousands of other fonts
are commercially available, as is software to help you design your own fonts from
scratch. The RIP can load any PostScript font into the RIP for use in interpretation
(unless the font is encrypted using some proprietary encryption mechanism).
The Navigator RIP enables you to download, list, and proof fonts easily and quickly.
You have complete control over which fonts are loaded when the RIP is run, and can
remove any unwanted fonts at any time.
The Navigator RIP can convert any Type 1 PostScript font into its own format, DLD1.
DLD1 fonts consume much less memory and disk space than normal Type 1 descrip-
tions, and so reduce processing time—but with no change in output quality.
The 35 standard hinted fonts are provided with the Navigator RIP in DLD1 format.
Font hinting is essential when previewing images or printing at low resolution, where
it greatly improves the quality of the output.

40 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

1.3.16.1 Composite fonts

The Navigator RIP supports composite fonts, in both Original Composite Format
(OCF) and Character Identifier (CID) formats, which allow you to use large or com-
plex fonts such as those for Chinese, Japanese, or Korean characters. Composite fonts
support large character sets and are especially important in the Far East.
There are several features to allow easy composite font installation without requiring
complex structuring of the fonts. Also, because of the high value of such complex
fonts, the Navigator RIP provides a way of encrypting fonts, so that they can only be
used with a particular copy of the RIP.

1.3.17 Convenience features

The Navigator RIP provides some useful facilities for monitoring media on cassette-
loaded devices such as imagesetters and for using or testing fragments of PostScript
code. These fragments, page features, can do such things as labelling output or per-
forming basic imposition and media saving.
Most of these facilities require little or no knowledge of the PostScript language.

1.3.17.1 Media management

Output devices vary greatly in the type of output media they can use and the amount
of manual intervention required. Some devices use a single source of roll-fed or sheet-
fed material and the output is ready to use, while other devices can accept media from
a variety of sources or require processing of the output. Equally, different users make
very different demands on their imagesetters with respect to film and paper handling.
The Navigator RIP includes a sophisticated media manager.
For example, you can keep track of the media left on the rolls of up to sixteen input
cassettes; a variety of materials and media widths can be set, and the system allows
you specify automatic media cutting at predetermined places, such as after a particular
number of pages or before the take-up cassette gets too full.
In addition, the Navigator RIP warns you when a cassette is nearly empty, and allows
you to define how much space should be left between pages, between jobs, and
between film cuts. It will even save media by automatically rotating pages to use the
minimum amount of film.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 41

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

New for version 5.5 is a Media Saving feature. For more information see Section 5.14
on page 156.

1.3.17.2 Page features

Sometimes you may want to apply a special effect to your jobs. For example, you may
want to have the word Draft overprinted on every page. Because these can be one-off
needs—you may want to produce a special copy of a document while it is at draft
stage—it is preferable not to alter the job if at all possible.
The Navigator RIP provides this facility by allowing you to specify a fragment of
PostScript-language code, independent of your main job, to be processed in conjunc-
tion with it. A fragment such as this is known as a page feature.
A page feature carries out some process on your job, leaving the original untouched.
Often, the effect of the process is to produce a desired printed effects but some page
features produce no printed output because their purpose is to report some properties
of the job.
A number of page features are provided with the Navigator RIP for immediate use or
as examples. You can choose any of those for immediate use from a menu in a dialog
box. See Section 5.21 on page 184 for details.
As with plugins, you can add new page features by placing them in a particular folder.

1.3.17.3 Interactive sessions

The Navigator RIP has a feature known as the executive, which allows you to run an
interactive PostScript-language session. This means that you can type fragments of
PostScript-language code and have them interpreted immediately. This can be very
useful when debugging and testing small parts of jobs.
The executive feature is available in the Navigator RIP on all supported platforms.

1.3.17.4 Page imposition

Page imposition is the process of laying out several pages of a document on one large
sheet of paper or film. Using a combination of PostScript-language operators and an
extension to the language, it is possible to take several pages and produce output on a
large sheet of paper, each page being printed in an orientation and position determined
by you.

42 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 1.3 The Navigator RIP in depth

Page imposition can be useful both for saving media—pages can be orientated so as to
use the optimum amount of paper—and for printing pre-imposed sheets of paper, for
instance when printing a book where certain pages are made out of the same piece of
paper. Some understanding of the PostScript language is useful here, but the Naviga-
tor RIP is supplied with several imposition templates which can be used immediately.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 43

 Introduction to the Navigator RIP

44 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2

Running the Navigator RIP

This chapter is a short guide to getting the Navigator RIP running on your machine. It
does not contain complete installation details because these differ between different
combinations of computer, operating system, and output device. For full details, see
the separate Navigator RIP Installation Guide for your platform (combination of com-
puter and operating system).
This chapter provides details for the following:
• Machine requirements, described in Section 2.1.
• Connecting your machine to an output device, described in Section 2.2 on
page 51.
• The files and folders used by the RIP, described in Section 2.3 on page 51.
• Starting up the Navigator RIP and an introduction to the standard menus and
dialog boxes, described in Section 2.4 on page 57.
• Some menus that appear only when options are enabled, described in
Section 2.5 on page 64.
• Stopping the Navigator RIP, described in Section 2.6 on page 66.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 45

 Running the Navigator RIP

2.1 Machine requirements

This section covers the hardware requirements that you need to run the Navigator RIP.
Do not worry if you are not familiar with the RIP technical terms used in this section.
As you work through the manual, all of these terms will be explained. The “Glossary”
on page 549 explains many of these terms.
Hint: Follow the basics of this section on first reading to get a working installation of
the RIP. When you are more familiar with the RIP, use this section for reference, so
that you can improve the RIP’s performance in your environment.

2.1.1 Performance
For a given processor type and speed, the most important things affecting the perfor-
mance of the Navigator RIP are the built-in or physical memory (RAM) and the speed
and size of disks.
It is recommended that you use a 450 MHZ or faster Pentium based PC running
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 with 256 MB or more of random
access memory (RAM) for the RIP and a minimum of 4 GB of free disk space.
Note: Please check the Install guide for the latest specification information.
In addition the following points should be considered:
• There must be sufficient space to hold page buffers on disk.
• There must be sufficient PostScript-language virtual memory available for the
job. This is especially important when using composite fonts.
• For some output devices, a disk with a certain minimum performance may be
required.
Important: The general rule is that the more memory, the better the performance.
Note especially that if you use the following features, we recommend that you add
extra RAM:
• Add an additional 8 MB RAM for each composite PostScript font used in a
single job.
• Add an additional 12 MB RAM for when using Harlequin Precision Screening
(HPS).
• Add an additional 256 MB RAM when using TrapPro.

46 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.1 Machine requirements

• Add an additional 32 MB RAM for EDS Screening in the output plugin.

• When using Harlequin ColorPro, add extra RAM. The required amount can
vary according to the functions you use.
• There are some instances when the Navigator RIP cannot paint partial page
buffers to disk: for example, when recombining preseparated jobs or using
TrapPro. In such cases, the RIP will need extra memory and must have enough
memory to complete the job. See Section 7.10, “Navigator RIP memory alloca-
tion”, the TrapPro User Manual and Navigator RIP Installation Guide for
details.
• For large format devices, more memory may be required.
In general, if a job uses more than one of these features, add together the extra mem-
ory required by each feature. For example, if a job uses composite fonts and you are
using HPS add together the extra amounts of RAM. You will also need enough extra
RAM to accommodate any printer and network buffers you want to set up.
For more details, see Chapter 6, “Screening”, Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”, and
Chapter 12, “Fonts”.
Note: This manual uses conventions of font and style to describe special key combi-
nations and to highlight the titles of programs, options in menus and dialog boxes, and
text that we suggest you type. For details, see the “Conventions” on page 17 in the
Preface.
Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 use disk space as virtual
memory.
For Windows 2000, Windows XP and Windows Server 2003, the defaults suggested
when you install Windows are satisfactory for use with the Navigator RIP. If you later
install more disk space or memory, you should update the virtual memory setting. To
do this, open the System control panel and display the Performance tab. In the Virtual
Memory section, click the Change button and use the recommended figures.

In summary, as well as the memory and disk allocations discussed here, the perfor-
mance of the RIP also depends on the following:
• The speed of the processor.
• The amount of additional RAM on your machine. (Additional RAM is RAM
above the basic requirement.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 47

 Running the Navigator RIP

• The disk speed of your machine.

• The interface used to send data to the output device, especially if it is a high-
performance device.
Performance issues are described throughout this manual, but see especially Chapter
7, “Configuring the RIP”, and Appendix A, “Troubleshooting”, for details about
optimizing the performance of your hardware.
For further details on machine specifications you should consult the relevant installa-
tion guide.

2.1.2 Ability to RIP a job

Depending on what page buffer mode you choose, the Navigator RIP will usually cre-
ate one or more page buffers on disk when you process any job (see Chapter 4, “Har-
lequin RIP Output Methods”, for full details). This allows the RIP to print any job on
a machine of any performance, no matter how complex the job is. The only require-
ment for your machine (apart from a minimum requirement of RAM) is that it must
have sufficient free disk space to hold these page buffers.
By default, the Navigator RIP compresses page buffers as it creates them: the com-
pression is always lossless and does not affect the output quality in any way. This
compression can reduce the disk space required to anything from half to a tenth of the
uncompressed file, or even less. However, you do not have to compress page buffers if
you do not wish to. See Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”, for full details.
Note: Crop marks can greatly increase the actual size of the page (by adding largely
blank surrounds to the image) and hence create a need for more disk space. If you ask
the Navigator RIP to compress page buffers as they are created, the extra space
required by crop marks compresses well, as does the other blank space between text
and images.
Typical free disk requirements, for both compressed (C) and uncompressed (U) page
buffers, are shown in the following table, giving details for output at different resolu-
tions and for different page sizes. These figures are for halftone page buffers holding a
monochrome page or one separation of a separated page. All figures are given in MB.
Contone page buffers or composite color page buffers are bigger than monochrome
page buffers when uncompressed, by a combined factor taking account of the number
of bits used per color and the number of colors in the page buffer. For example, when

48 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.1 Machine requirements

US Letter A4 Tabloid A3 Broadsheet

Resolution U C U C U C U C U C
300 dpi 1.00 0.20 1.00 0.20 2.00 0.40 2.10 0.41 4.60 0.93
400 dpi 1.70 0.36 1.80 0.37 3.60 0.71 3.70 0.74 8.20 1.60
600 dpi 4.00 0.80 4.10 0.83 8.00 1.60 8.30 1.70 19.00 3.70
800 dpi 7.10 1.40 7.40 1.50 14.00 2.90 15.00 3.00 33.00 6.60
900 dpi 9.00 1.80 9.30 1.90 18.00 3.60 19.00 3.70 42.00 8.30
1200 dpi 16.00 3.20 17.00 3.40 32.00 6.40 34.00 7.20 74.00 14.80
1524 dpi 26.00 5.20 27.00 5.40 52.00 10.40 54.00 10.80 120.00 24.00
2400 dpi 64.00 12.80 68.00 13.60 128.00 25.60 136.00 27.20 296.00 59.20
3048 dpi 104.00 20.80 108.00 21.60 208.00 41.60 216.00 43.20 480.00 96.00

Table 2.1 Typical free disk requirements for page buffers

uncompressed, a four-color page using 8 bits per color (256 tonal values) would use
32 times more memory than the figures given here. It is harder to predict the relative
sizes of compressed page buffers because the contents of the page have a large effect.
For example, the compression ratio achievable for a page filled with an unchanging
background tint is likely to be better for a contone page buffer than for a halftone page
buffer.
In addition, you must ensure you have enough disk space to hold workspace for pro-
cessing the scanned images on any one page of your job. For example, when printing
the Seybold Musicians test job (a full-color scanned image), 8 MB of extra disk work-
space will sometimes be required in addition to the figures shown above. (Whenever
possible, the Navigator RIP uses RAM in preference to disk space.)
If you have spare memory after allocating memory for the considerations described in
“Performance” on page 46 and in the separate Navigator RIP Installation Guide, you
may be able to use this surplus to create a RAM disk in which to place page buffers.
To be useful, the RAM disk must be at least large enough to hold a single page buffer,
and if you want to use throughput (using either of the multiple page buffer modes), it
should ideally be large enough to hold at least two page buffers.
For 2540 dpi color work, a RAM disk of around 100 MB is desirable. For 1016 dpi
monochrome output, a RAM disk of around 30 MB may be enough.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 49

 Running the Navigator RIP

2.1.3 Driving a printer effectively

The machine requirements discussed so far have concerned the production of a page
buffer. Meeting these requirements is sufficient for you to view the page buffer on
screen or for the Navigator RIP to convert it into a file in a useful graphics format.
When you want to convert the page buffer to an image on physical media, you must
transfer the data to an output device. This transfer is another factor determining over-
all performance and often imposes other requirements on the computer system run-
ning the RIP.
Many output devices need data to reach them at a sustained high speed; in general, this
speed becomes higher and harder to achieve as the resolution of the device increases.
Table 2.2, page 50, shows examples of required data transfer rates (in kilobytes per
second) for typical output devices supported by the various versions of the Navigator
RIP.

Rate Resolution
Output device
(KB/s) (dpi)
200 300 Large format inkjet printer
2000 300 Dye-sublimation printer
750 2400 Slow imagesetter
1500 1270 Fast imagesetter
8000 4000 Large format drum recorder

Table 2.2 Required data rates for typical output devices

With simple jobs, these data rates can be achieved without using a page buffer on disk.
However, with complex jobs, a page buffer may be required, which means that the
disk on your computer must be fast enough to supply data at these rates. If the disk is
too slow and your printer is not capable of stop / starting without abandoning the page,
it is not possible to output the whole page. If your printer can stop / start in the middle
of a page, then achieving the required data rate is less important, but the quality of the
output may still be affected, depending on the device.

50 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.2 Installing printer interface cards

When you look at the data rates in this table, note the following:
• The disk speed of your machine must be slightly faster than the data rate of the
output device in order to drive it successfully—the extra speed allows for the
overhead of transferring the output to the printer. For example, a machine with
a disk speed of 1.3 MB/s may be required to drive a slow imagesetter at
750 KB/s.
• To smooth out peaks and troughs of disk performance and other system and
RIP functions, the Navigator RIP uses a printer buffer in memory. Typically,
you should make this buffer large enough to hold between 5 and 10 seconds of
output to the device: for example, 7.5 MB for a device that outputs at
750 KB/second. You can set the size of the printer buffer in the Configure RIP
dialog box: see Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”.
We strongly recommend that you use compressed page buffers. If this is done, the
Navigator RIP can achieve higher data rates because less data has to be read from
disk. Compressing page buffers also lets you run the RIP on a slower disk than would
be required were page buffers not compressed. There are very few situations where it
is not desirable to compress page buffers.

2.2 Installing printer interface cards

If you want to produce output on a printer or imagesetter, there must be a suitable way
of connecting the output device to the computer running the Navigator RIP. Many low
or medium resolution devices can connect to standard communications ports or printer
ports on your computer. Using a high resolution or high speed output device may
mean that you must install a special printer interface card in the computer.
There should be installation instructions supplied with any interface card and there are
some general guidelines in the separate Navigator RIP Installation Guide for each
platform.

2.3 Navigator RIP folder structure

The folder in which the Navigator RIP is installed contains the Navigator RIP applica-
tion itself, and a folder called SW, as well as other support files. The SW folder contains
the files that the RIP needs in order to run, such as device driver files, PostScript-lan-
guage header files, and fonts. You can install new device drivers, features, and so on—

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 51

 Running the Navigator RIP

in many cases by placing the relevant folders or files directly into the appropriate
folder, but it is safer to use a supplied installation program if there is one.
Warning: Do not delete any files from the SW folder, except in the limited cases where
this manual or the Navigator RIP support staff advise you to do so.
Note: Installing the Navigator RIP creates some of the following items immediately:
other items are created later, as required by later reconfiguration of the RIP or the use
of particular options such as screening features or spooled input.
The SW folder contains the following items:
• The caldata folder, which is created when you first use the Output > Print
Calibration menu option to print a calibration target, and is updated as you print
more targets. This folder holds files and folders describing the printed targets.
If you use the Genlin program to measure a printed target, it generates a file of
results in this folder.
• The categories folder contains the categories resource.
• The charstrings folder contains the file StandardCharStrings, which
contains the standard name-to-character mappings used by most fonts. Other
mapping files may also be stored here.
• The CIDFont folder contains fonts defined in the CID (character identifier)
format.
• The CMap folder contains information for use with CID fonts.
• The colorrenderings folder contains color rendering resources.
• The colorspaces folder contains resources for the color spaces defined in the
Navigator RIP.
• The Complete folder is provided as a default location for the spool folder
input to place files that it has successfully processed.

52 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.3 Navigator RIP folder structure

• The Config folder contains all the configuration files for the Navigator RIP.
These include files detailing such things as the current page setup and Config-
ure RIP settings, as well as folders for information including the configuration
for available devices, default color profiles, and target definitions.
In the Config folder, the Factory Settings subfolder contains the default
configuration for the Navigator RIP when it is shipped. This is essentially a
copy of the Config folder itself.
In the Config folder, the Page Setups subfolder contains all the page setups
you have saved within the Navigator RIP.
• The Crdgen folder contains the color rendering dictionary (CRD) generator
plugin executables. You can only manipulate CRDs in the Navigator RIP with
the ColorPro option enabled.
• The Devices folder contains all the output plugin files (possibly within sub-
folders) for the various output devices.
• The encodings folder contains the font encodings for the fonts installed in the
RIP.
• The Error folder is provided as a default location for the spool folder input to
place files that it cannot process.
• The Extensions folder can contain folders or files used to implement exten-
sions to the RIP.
• The FlatPgbDir folder provides space for the page buffer files used by
FlatOut. See the FlatOut User Guide for details.
• The fonts folder contains fonts used by the Navigator RIP (including the fonts
installed with the RIP).
• The FontSet folder is used for PostScript LanguageLevel 3 font sets, often
used with CFF fonts. It may be empty.
• The forms folder contains resources for bitmap forms.
• The halftones folder contains halftone resources.
Note: The comments in these halftone resources files show how you can define
custom dot shapes in capable graphics and layout applications, and have these
dot shapes linked to Harlequin screens in the generated PostScript-language
files.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 53

 Running the Navigator RIP

• The icccrd folder contains the color rendering dictionaries (CRDs) produced
from ICC profiles.
• The IdiomSet folder contains idiom set resources. Each idiom set in this
folder is loaded when the RIP starts.
• The Inputs folder contains all input plugin files (Spool, and any others).
• The Messages folder has been moved to the same level as the SW folder and
contains localized message files. The appropriate file is selected the first time
the RIP is started
• The MediaSavingDir contains page buffers that are marked for media saving.
From Eclipse Release SP1 the MediaSavingDir is located as a subfolder to
the PageBuffers folder.
• The NamedColor folder is the location of files defining a resource type
/NamedColor, which stores color values referred to by name. It is accessed by
the Install ICC Profile dialog box present when using ColorPro, as well as by
the Harlequin core RIP.
• The NamedColorOrder folder contains files defining the orders in which
resources of type /NamedColor, are searched when the Navigator RIP is look-
ing for the definition of a named color.
• The Page Features folder contains all the PostScript-language header files
that are available in the Enable Feature drop-down list of the Edit Page Setup
dialog box. This menu is generated dynamically from the files available in this
folder. If a feature is turned on in the relevant page setup, the appropriate file is
run at the beginning of the job. Additional example page features are available
in the folder called Examples within this folder. The example files supplied
with the RIP show you how to do such things as produce draft copies, perform
page imposition, resubmit page buffers, and use image replacement with DCS
files. You can add your own files if you wish.
• The PageBuffers folder provides space for rendered pages that are written to
disk. From Eclipse Release SP1 the MediaSavingDir is located as a sub-
folder to the PageBuffers folder.
• The Passwords folder may be empty but is available for files used to install
passwords for optional parts of the Navigator RIP. The RIP installs all new
passwords automatically, as it starts. Files with extension .pwd are files to be

54 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.3 Navigator RIP folder structure

used by the RIP, files with numeric extensions (.001, .002, and so on) have
been installed, and files with extension .pwx are files that the Navigator RIP
has failed to install.
• The patterns folder contains resources for PostScript-language patterns.
• The PrepFiles folder contains all the prep files used by the Navigator RIP.
• The procsets folder contains various patches to the PostScript language, as
well as other functionality that is not built directly into the Navigator RIP.
Patches for specific applications are held here, as well as calibration test jobs.
• The ReproductionCriteria folder is the location of files defining a
resource type /ReproductionCriteria. This is used to link color rendering
dictionaries (CRDs) to the criteria which created them. This allows the Naviga-
tor RIP to test whether a CRD needs to be regenerated or whether one already
exists.
• The Screenin folder contains screening plugins for use by the Navigator RIP.
In many installations, there are no screening plugins.
• The Screens folder is used when halftone screens are cached (saved to disk
for later use). There is a subfolder here for each dot shape cache known to the
Navigator RIP, either as supplied or as created during use.
• The Separation Features folder performs a similar task to Page Fea-
tures but applies only when separating jobs in the Navigator RIP.

• The Spool folder is a default location used by the Spool folder input plugin for
receiving jobs.
• The Sys folder includes HqnStart, the Harlequin-specific startup file, and
Bootlist, a list of files to be executed upon booting (starting) the Navigator
RIP. This folder also contains HqnProduct, which contains PostScript-lan-
guage startup code specific to that product, and HqnOEM, which may contain
additional startup PostScript-language startup code created by the RIP supplier
(or OEM).
• The targeteps folder contains any EPS files that are incorporated in custom
calibration targets (and potentially other targets). This folder is referred to from
target definitions while interpreting a target file, especially in response to the
Print Calibration dialog box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 55

 Running the Navigator RIP

• The tmp folder is used as a location for temporary files.

• The TrapParams folder is used for PostScript LanguageLevel 3 trapping
parameters. It may be empty.
• The Usr folder contains several files needed by the Navigator RIP.
• The Utilities folder contains files, each of which can perform a useful func-
tion when run as a job (using the Print File menu option):
• BackupConfiguration.ps
This file enables you to make a backup file containing all your configura-
tion settings for an installation of the Navigator RIP.
• BackupFonts.ps
This file enables you to make a backup file containing all your fonts, both
the standard set and any additional fonts that you have installed.
You can store such a backup file elsewhere for security and, for example, use it
as a simple way to restore a complex configuration if you need to reinstall the
same version of the Navigator RIP. (You can restore backed-up fonts to a newer
version of the RIP but you can only restore configuration settings to the same
version of the RIP.)
• The WorkSpace folder provides space for any temporary workspace files cre-
ated by the RIP.
• The LOGFILE file contains a record of all transactions with the Navigator RIP
monitor. This file can be saved and its size restricted. For more information see
Section 3.4, “Monitoring the Navigator RIP”.
• The files FILERED.PS and FILEMAP.DAT (replacing FILEMAP.PS, which is
still present for short-term compatibility) contain important information for use
in file name mapping. The RIP manages these files automatically: you must not
change these files manually.
File name mapping is necessary because PostScript-language file names can be
very long, can contain characters that have special meanings for file systems on
the computer running the Navigator RIP, and are case sensitive. For each Post-
Script-language file name that could be a problem, the RIP creates a unique and
acceptable file name in the file system and records both file names together as a
mapping in FILEMAP.DAT.

56 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.4 Starting up the Navigator RIP

You may find it useful to inspect FILEMAP.DAT, if you need to associate a par-
ticular file name with the other name in its mapping. For example, this is a typi-
cal mapping (between Press and PRESS):
(Press)(PRESS)M

Note: The file names are all uppercase, exactly as shown in this manual. It is
possible for Explorer in Microsoft Windows to display these names with only a
leading capital letter.
• The version file contains text describing the version of the Navigator RIP, for
use by some RIP utilities. Do not edit or remove it.

2.4 Starting up the Navigator RIP

You should refer to the installation guide for your platform for details on how to install
and configure the Navigator RIP.
Note: Prior to the Eclipse Release all RIPs were supplied as a single executable. From
the Eclipse Release the RIP executables are supplied with associated shared library
files. A consequence of this is that the RIP executable is now significantly smaller in
size. The associated shared library files must be in the same folder as the RIP execut-
able otherwise the RIP will not start.
To start up the Navigator RIP application, choose the Navigator RIP entry from the
Start menu, or double-click the Navigator RIP icon in the install folder:

<company>.exe

An initial dialog box is always displayed while the program starts up. Some extra
things happen in special circumstances:
• When you are starting up the RIP for the first time after installation, you see a
dialog box asking you to choose the language to be used in dialog boxes,
menus, and messages. The dialog box shows you which languages are avail-
able. (A language is available if the entries after its name are all Present or
Yes.) If you are in doubt, choose English (United States) initially; you
can switch to another language later, using the Navigator RIP > Language menu
option, as described in Section 7.14 on page 259. Select your chosen language
and click OK.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 57

 Running the Navigator RIP

• When you have installed a plugin or other option, that option may require
enabling with a password. The RIP can read the password from a file if the
installation process for the plugin supplied one. If the RIP reads a password
file, it displays a dialog box with a message similar to this but with differences
to the italic text.
Imported password file Passwords/1234-56-variable-string.pwd

Click OK to dismiss this dialog box.

• If you have chosen to reset the Navigator RIP to its factory settings, you see a
series of dialog boxes asking you which settings you wish to reset. See
Section 7.13 on page 258 for details of how to do this.
When the RIP has finished loading, a window containing the following menu items
appears:

Figure 2.1 The Navigator RIP menus

Some windows appear, as described in Chapter 3, “Getting Started with the Navigator
RIP”. That chapter describes some basic procedures that you can use to familiarize
yourself with the Navigator RIP. The remainder of this chapter introduces the menus,
tool bar, and status bar; and describes how to stop the RIP.

2.4.1 The menus

There are several menus:
• The Edit menu contains the common window-based edit facilities of Cut, Copy,
Paste, and Clear.

58 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.4 Starting up the Navigator RIP

• The next menu changes name to indicate which device it is controlling. This
menu contains commands for controlling output and cutting the media being
used on any printers connected to the computer. Because the displayed name
can change, this documentation refers to it as the Device menu. (Figure 2.1,
page 58, shows Preview in this position.)
The device does not necessarily have to be a physical output device connected
to your machine. The RIP is equally capable of saving an image to a file in a
particular format, such as TIFF. You can find out more about these options in
“Selecting different devices” on page 118.
• The Color menu contains commands for starting the Separations Manager and
for color management. The color management commands depend on optional
parts of the Navigator RIP. See Section 2.5.1.
• The Output menu contains commands for controlling calibration, media man-
agement, and output.
• The Fonts menu contains commands for installing, deleting, and proofing fonts
within the RIP.
• When required, the RIP can display other menus to the right of the permanent
menus mentioned so far. For example, the Print File menu appears when you
have used the Print File command to print a file, and contains commands allow-
ing you to control printing of that file.
All standard commands in these menus are described in later chapters of this book
together with the situations and operations that require you to use them. See
Section 2.5 on page 64 for details of menus affected by optional features in the Navi-
gator RIP.

2.4.2 The tool bar

All versions of the Navigator RIP have a tool bar containing icon buttons and a status
area. The buttons provide rapid access to frequently used menu options and dialog
boxes, as described in Section 2.4.2.1 on page 60. The status area shows what the RIP
is doing, as described in Section 2.4.2.2 on page 62.
The tool bar is part of the main window.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 59

 Running the Navigator RIP

2.4.2.1 Tool bar buttons

These tool bar buttons have the following uses:

Print File Displays the Print File dialog box, where you can choose a
file to print. This is equivalent to the Navigator RIP
> Print File command.

Print Calibration Displays the Print Calibration dialog box, where you can
print various patterns of calibration target for use in cali-
brating output devices, including printing presses. This is
equivalent to the Output > Print Calibration command.

Start Inputs Starts any enabled inputs. This is equivalent to the Naviga-
tor RIP > Start Inputs command when the inputs are
stopped.

Stop Inputs Stops any enabled inputs. This is equivalent to the Naviga-
tor RIP > Start Inputs command when the inputs are
enabled.

Page Setup Manager Displays the Page Setup Manager dialog box, where you
can create and edit page setups. This is equivalent to the
Navigator RIP > Page Setup Manager command.

Device Manager Displays the Device Manager dialog box, where you can
instantiate (create) and configure devices driven from a
multiple device driver. This is equivalent to the Navigator
RIP > Device Manager command.

60 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.4 Starting up the Navigator RIP

Separations Manager Displays the Separations Manager dialog box, where you
can create and edit separation styles for the selected
device. This is equivalent to the Color > Separations
Manager command.

Color Setup Manager Displays the Color Setup Manager dialog box, which
allows you to create and edit color setups with or without
color management depending on whether the password-
enabled ColorPro option is activated. See the Section 14.8
on page 493 and Harlequin ColorPro User Guide for
details. This is equivalent to the Color > Color Setup Man-
ager command.

TrapPro Manager Displays the TrapPro Manager dialog box, which allows
you to create and edit trapping setups. TrapPro is a layered
option and requires a password for it to be activated. See
the Harlequin TrapPro User Guide for full details. This is
equivalent to the Output > TrapPro Manager command.

Calibration Manager Displays the Calibration (Dot Gain) Manager dialog box,
where you can create and edit calibration sets. This is
equivalent to the Output > Calibration Manager command.

Cassette Manager Displays the Cassette Manager dialog box, where you can
create cassettes and edit their information. This is equiva-
lent to the Output > Cassette Manager command.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 61

 Running the Navigator RIP

™
Imposition Manager From the Navigator RIP Genesis Release this option dis-
plays the Imposition Manager dialog box, which allows
you to create and edit Simple imposition setups. Pre-con-
figured imposition schemes are provided as standard.
Editing existing and creating new setups is a layered
option and requires a password for it to be activated. See
Chapter 10, “Simple Imposition” for full details. This is
equivalent to the Output > Imposition Manager command.

Input Controller Displays the Input Controller dialog box. Also, this button
hides the controller if it is already displayed. This is
equivalent to the Navigator RIP > Input Controller com-
mand.

Media Manager Displays the Media Manager dialog box, where you can
set up automatic media management. This is equivalent to
the Output > Media Manager command.

Note: The Device Manager, Separations Manager, Color Setup Manager, Calibration Man-
ager, and Cassette Manager buttons are also available from the Edit Page Setup dialog
box.

2.4.2.2 Status area

The status area has three sub-areas: one shows what the input system and interpreter
are doing, one shows what the output system is doing, and a final one shows the most
recently used output device.

62 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.4 Starting up the Navigator RIP

Figure 2.2 shows some typical contents of the status area.

Figure 2.2 The status area of the tool bar

The meanings of these example status bars are:

1 Idle The RIP is not looking for jobs on its inputs.

2 Scanning The RIP is looking for input but none is arriving.

3 Interpreting The RIP is interpreting a job.

4 Printing The RIP is sending a job to an output device.

In all these examples, the output device is the Preview device. The text can change to
show other types of output, including output to graphics files and real printers and
imagesetters.
This completes a brief description of the controls and status indicators in the Naviga-
tor RIP. If you want to try using the RIP, see Chapter 3, “Getting Started with the Nav-
igator RIP” on page 69. If you want to stop the RIP, see “Stopping the Navigator RIP”
on page 66.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 63

 Running the Navigator RIP

2.5 Menus affected by optional features

A number of commands and options in dialog boxes appear only if your copy of the
Navigator RIP has been supplied with certain optional features and these are enabled.
The major features that have this effect are:
• Harlequin ColorPro. See Section 2.5.1.
• Harlequin Screening Library (HSL). The visible changes are limited to new dot
shapes in the screening part of the Edit Style dialog box, as described in Chap-
ter 6, “Screening”.
• TrapPro. See Section 2.5.2.
• Media Saving. See Section 5.14.

2.5.1 ColorPro™ menus

ColorPro is a color management system that can work as an integrated part of the
Navigator RIP. If relevant options within ColorPro are present and enabled, the fol-
lowing commands appear. See the separate manual entitled Harlequin ColorPro User
Guide for full details.
In the Color menu:

Color Rendering Intent Manager

This command allows you to create and edit custom color
reproduction strategies in ColorPro. It appears only when the
ColorPro option is enabled.

Color Setup Manager

A standard set of options is available with the Color Setup
Manager without ColorPro including Black generation and
UCR control and color management override options. When
ColorPro is activated an extended set of options is available.
You can create and edit color setups including the selection of
input and output profiles, rendering intents and press emula-
tion.

64 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.5 Menus affected by optional features

Install ICC Profile

This command supports the use of industry-standard color
profile files which enable portable definitions of the charac-
teristics of printers, printing processes, presses, scanners, and
other equipment. It appears when Harlequin ColorPro is
enabled.

Uninstall ICC Profile

This command uninstalls ICC profiles and appears when Har-
lequin ColorPro is enabled.

2.5.2 TrapPro™
TrapPro is an option for the Navigator RIP that can be set up to perform trapping. If
TrapPro is present and enabled, the following command appears in the Output menu.
See the separate TrapPro User Manual for full details.
TrapPro Manager
This command displays a dialog box where you can inspect and create different
sets of rules for trapping. These rules become available in the Trapping section
of the Page Setup dialog box. See Section 14.10, “Trapping features” for details.
Ink Set Manager
This command displays a dialog box where you can configure various types of
ink including normal, opaque and transparent.

2.5.3 Media Saving

Media Saving is a layered option for the Navigator RIP which is enabled using a pass-
word. If Media Saving is present and enabled, the Media Saving option appears in the
Output menu.
Media Saving
This option displays a dialog box where you can view the various flats being
created and view, roam or delete the various pages used to make up the flats.
See Section 5.14, “Advanced Media Saving” for details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 65

 Running the Navigator RIP

2.6 Stopping the Navigator RIP

You can stop the RIP whenever you wish but you should keep it running as much as
possible whenever you expect jobs to be input. There are very few cases where you
must stop the RIP: for example, you must stop the RIP when you shut down the com-
puter running the RIP or when you update your copy of the RIP.
The state of the RIP when you stop it is also the state that the RIP assumes when you
next start it. For example, if you quit the RIP when inputs are active then the RIP
restarts with the same inputs enabled.

2.6.1 Quitting the Navigator RIP

If you are the only user of the RIP, all you must do is ensure that no jobs are in
progress and choose the Quit command in the Navigator RIP menu. Take more care if
there are other users, as described here.
If the RIP is providing a network service, warn the other users that there will be an
interruption of service.
Disable output, by selecting the check box labeled Disable output in the Output Con-
troller, if you are operating in either of the multiple modes. This shuts down the output
cleanly, by allowing the current job to complete but not starting any other jobs. (When
you restart the RIP, output is re-enabled automatically, though you will have to answer
a question if there are any jobs waiting to be output in the Active Queue.)
Wait for any active jobs to complete.
Leave the RIP settings in their usual state, unless you know that you will be making
significant changes to the RIP, the computer, the network, or connected output
devices.
• If you leave settings unchanged, you need only restart the RIP to have it start
responding to all its previous inputs.
• If you are making changes, you may prefer to disable inputs from other com-
puters until you have restarted the RIP and proved that there are no resultant
problems.
From the Navigator RIP menu, choose Quit (or press Ctrl+Q) to exit the RIP.

66 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 2.6 Stopping the Navigator RIP

2.6.2 Stopping the computer

If you are also stopping the computer, exit any other applications and follow the usual
procedure described in the manual for your computer or operating system.
Once you have followed the procedure, wait until you see a message saying that you
can remove power. Switch off the computer.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 67

 Running the Navigator RIP

68 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3

Getting Started with the Naviga-

tor RIP

Chapter 1 gave a broad overview of the kinds of tasks the Navigator RIP can perform.
In this chapter you will learn how to process simple jobs, and how to switch between
different configurations.

3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

Once the Navigator RIP is installed and running on your machine, you can start to use
it. “Starting up the Navigator RIP” on page 57 describes how to start the RIP and gives
an overview of the menus and tool bar.
It is a good idea to start with a short test job and to view it on screen so that you avoid
wasting materials. (Even when you are familiar with the RIP you should consider
using such an on-screen test when processing a new kind of job for the first time.)
Note: This manual uses some conventions of font and style to describe special key
combinations and to highlight the titles of programs and dialog boxes, options in
menus and dialog boxes, and text that we suggest you type. For details, see “Conven-
tions” on page 17 in the Preface.

3.1.1 Creating a page setup

First, you need to create a convenient page setup—a collection of settings that the RIP
uses to process the jobs submitted to it:

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 69

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

1. Choose the Page Setup Manager option from the Navigator RIP menu. If you
cannot choose this option, stop inputs to the RIP. To do this, click the tool bar
button that shows a red arrow and traffic light, or choose the Navigator RIP >
Start Inputs menu option.

2. In the Page Setup Manager, as shown in Figure 3.1, select a page setup.
Default Page Setup is a safe choice: select it and click Edit to display the
Edit Page Setup dialog box. If you want to create a new page setup, the easiest
way is to copy the Default Page Setup. Select Default Page Setup and
click Copy to display the New Page Setup dialog box.

Figure 3.1 Page Setup Manager dialog box

3. In the Edit Page Setup dialog box, shown in Figure 3.2, set the Device to None
and the Vertical and Horizontal resolutions to something small, say 72 dpi. If you
change the Device, you must choose a separations style listed in the Style drop-
down list and, for some devices, a cassette name from the Cassette drop-down
list.
For the purposes of this example, you can select any option from these lists. For
more information about the options in this dialog box, see Section 5.3, “Edit
Page Setup dialog box” on page 115.
The None device does not produce any printed output, but does perform all the
necessary processing for the job, including producing page buffers—as defined
on page 559 in the “Glossary”. This device can be used for testing and timing
jobs, and is especially useful for previewing the job on screen.

70 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

Figure 3.2 Edit Page Setup dialog box

4. Click OK. (Click Save As if you are working in the New Page Setup dialog box,
and save the page setup as Default Page Setup; this changes the original
page setup but it is convenient for use this name during this session.)
5. Click OK again to close the Page Setup Manager dialog box.
The Output Controller/Monitor window must be displayed for you to see the pro-
cessed output for the None device. If you cannot see this window: first choose the
Configure RIP option from the Navigator RIP menu and check that the option shown
against Page buffering is Multiple (Parallel); then display the Output menu and
look at (but do not choose) the option Output Controller.
If there is a check mark next to the menu option, the RIP is displaying the window but
it may be hidden behind another window. The Output > Output Controller menu option

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 71

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

can be used to toggle between opening and closing the Output Controller/Monitor.
Each time that you open the Output Controller/Monitor it opens in front of all other
RIP windows.
Note: The Output Controller is only available in either of the multiple page buffer
modes. You can also view a page in one of the single modes by setting the output
device to Preview instead of None. In the following description we assume that you
are working in Multiple (Parallel) mode. If you are using one of the single
modes, see “Sending output to the screen” on page 123 for more details about pre-
viewing pages.
For the example job described next, make sure that you have deselected the Disable
output check box in the Output Controller/Monitor. This box is selected by default, so
that you can hold pages for on-screen viewing before sending the pages to real output
devices.

3.1.2 Creating a simple job

You also need to set up a sample job. Usually, jobs are files created by another appli-
cation, but you can create a simple job within the RIP, as follows:
1. From the Fonts menu, choose Proof Fonts. A window appears with a list of the
available fonts, which the Navigator RIP can use with any of its possible output
devices. (See Figure 3.3.)

Figure 3.3 Proof Highlighted Fonts dialog box

72 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

2. Select between one and six fonts. To select a range of fonts, click on the first
font of that range and then hold down the Shift key when you click to select the
last font.
3. From the Page Setup drop-down list, select Default Page Setup.
4. Click the Proof button. Several things happen on screen, with some items
appearing and quickly disappearing again:
• A Print File menu appears alongside the other RIP menu titles. This menu
disappears when the job is complete.
• The status area on the right of the tool bar in the Navigator RIP window
shows an animated picture of a hand writing a page. “None” appears in the
status area on the right. (When you use other output devices, you see other
animations and names.)
• Text reporting the progress of the job appears in the scrolling text area of
the Navigator RIP window as the RIP starts the job and reads the necessary
fonts.
• At least one progress dial window also appears and shows what is happen-
ing. For example, the Read Dial shows how much of the job the RIP has
read and disappears when the RIP has processed the complete job. With a
small job like this proof and a fast computer, the Read Dial may not
appear; Figure 3.4 shows the dial. Other dials can appear, depending on the
size of the job and the settings in your copy of the RIP.

Figure 3.4 Read Dial

Notice what happens in the Output Controller/Monitor window. A job called

1. fontlist appears in the list on the left, the Active Queue. After a few moments its
name moves into the box at upper center of the window, to show that the RIP is pro-
cessing it, and then to the Held Queue on the right. (The job is called 1. fontlist, to
show that it is the first page of the fontlist job. This job is probably only one page
long, unless you chose several fonts.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 73

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

3.1.3 Previewing the image on screen

This job has now been processed by the Navigator RIP and sent to an output device.
The output device you chose was None, a dummy device provided for test runs like
this one and for previewing, so no physical printing has happened. However, you can
look at an on-screen view of the page you have created:
1. Select the job in the Held Queue (by clicking), and then click the Roam button. A
Roam window appears. Note that you can preview any page in the Output Con-
troller.
The Roam window displays samples of the fonts you selected. (See Figure 3.5.) This
window also displays the title of the page, 1.fontlist, the color of the page, and the
resolution.
For most sizes of page, there are also horizontal and vertical scroll bars at the edges of
the Roam window. (The scroll bars appear only when the window is too small to dis-
play the whole page at one time.) When there are scroll bars, you can use them to
move your view to different parts of the page image. Alternatively, you can drag the
page image around by holding down the left mouse button when the cursor is over the
image and moving the mouse. For more information about navigating in the Roam
window, see Section 5.5.3 on page 125.

Figure 3.5 Roam window

Note: When viewing a higher resolution image, the Roam > Reduced Roam menu
option is probably available. It allows you to see more of the image in one view.

74 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

When you have finished inspecting the page preview, close the window. To do this,
choose the Close option in the window control menu. Alternatively, you can use the
standard methods for your operating system.
Note: You must close the Roam window (and the Reduced Roam window if you
opened it) before you can roam another page.

3.1.3.1 Other pages in the job

If there are other pages in the job, the RIP has probably processed them in the time
you spent inspecting the first page: if so, there are appropriate messages in the Naviga-
tor RIP window and new entries in the Held Queue on the right of the Output Control-
ler/Monitor. Any following pages are called 2. fontlist, 3. fontlist, and so
on. You can:
• View one of the processed pages by selecting it and clicking the Roam button.
• Stop processing any remaining pages by using the Kill Current Job option in the
Print File menu. Any pages already processed stay in the Held Queue until
deleted.

3.1.3.2 Killing jobs and error messages

After killing a job and depending on what stage the job had reached, you may see a
PostScript-language error message in the Navigator RIP window. Error messages look
similar to the following:
%%[Error: interrupt; OffendingCommand: interrupt; File: %disk0%tmp/fontlist]%%
Job Not Completed: fontlist

Such error messages are harmless if you stopped the job: they simply report that the
job stopped before it was complete.
In other circumstances, an error message alerts you to a possible problem with a job.
The details of the message may help a PostScript-language programmer or your sup-
port organization to diagnose the cause of that problem.

3.1.4 Outputting to a real device

Your installation of the Navigator RIP has probably been set up to be able to talk to a
real printer or imagesetter and, if this is so, you can try sending some output to it. (If
you do not have a suitable physical output device, try using None again but vary the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 75

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

screen resolution to a value in the range 300 through 600 dpi, so that you can see more
detail. Run another job proofing fonts, then move to the next section, “Sending a job
to the Navigator RIP” on page 78.)
To send output to a physical device:
1. First display the Navigator RIP menu and choose the Page Setup Manager option
(which this manual often describes as choosing the Navigator RIP > Page Setup
Manager option).

2. In the Page Setup Manager dialog box, select Default Page Setup and click
Copy to display the New Page Setup dialog box. The New Page Setup dialog
box is very similar to the Edit Page Setup dialog box, shown in Figure 3.2 on
page 71.
3. Select your preferred physical device from the Device drop-down list.
Note: If the device is not listed in the Device drop-down list, you may need to
configure it using the Device Manager, available from the button next to the
Device list and described in Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”. It is
probably easier to use the None device to do another screen preview.
4. Assuming that you have successfully chosen a physical device, set the resolu-
tion and any other required options in this New Page Setup dialog box. Note
that if you change the Device, you have to choose a separations style from the
Style drop-down list and, for some devices, a cassette name from the Cassette
drop-down list.
5. Click Save As; the RIP displays the Save Setup dialog box. In the Save As text
field type a name: Default to Printer is suitably descriptive, so type that
name then click Save.
Note: The Navigator RIP limits all user created names or file names to 31 bytes.
This is equivalent to 31 characters when using standard ASCII text, and 15 char-
acters when using double-byte character sets, such as Kanji.
6. Click OK to close the Page Setup Manager.
7. Choose Media Manager from the Output menu and select the Disable media man-
agement box. (You need to configure the media management before using it—
that topic is covered in Chapter 9, “Media Management”.)

76 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

8. Now create a new sample job as before, by choosing the Fonts > Proof Fonts
command and choosing some fonts from the Proof Highlighted Fonts dialog
box.
9. From the Page Setup list, select Default to Printer and click Proof.
The RIP displays the same indicators of activity: text in the Harlequin RIP window, an
animated picture, and one or more progress dials. Another fontlist job appears in
the Active Queue and a large, empty rectangle appears just above the center of the Out-
put Controller/Monitor and starts to fill with gray. This rectangle is known as the
progress box. Note that in either of the single modes, the progress box appears in a
separate window.
This time, when the job is being processed, watch the two gray bars that successively
fill the progress box, a light gray and a dark gray spreading from the top. The light
gray bar represents the amount of data the RIP has processed; the dark gray bar repre-
sents the amount that has been sent to the output device (printer).
Note: The bottom edge of the light gray bar should always be ahead of (below) the
dark gray. If the dark gray catches up, the page may not be output properly—it
depends how the printer reacts to having to wait for data. In this case the RIP printer
buffer has probably been set too small, and you should increase its size. You can do
this in the Configure RIP dialog box available from the Navigator RIP > Configure RIP
menu command. Typical sizes are in the range 4 MB through to 12 MB.
When the dark gray has reached the bottom of the progress box, the RIP has finished
the job and the progress box clears. If the job was processed successfully, you can now
pick it up from your output device. If the job does not output, or stops and starts while
outputting, you may need to reconfigure the RIP or the host machine. (To help you
identify a problem, the text window in the Navigator RIP window displays and
records any error messages.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 77

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

The Output Controller/Monitor provides another two useful facilities:

• If you want to reprint a page once it is in the Held Queue, you can do so easily:
just drag it with the mouse back into the Active Queue. Try that with the top
fontlist job now: it is sent again to the same device, which should be None.
If you did the same to the other fontlist job (which was sent to your image-
setter or printer), the RIP would produce another hard copy.
It is very quick to output a page like this again, because it has already been pro-
cessed once; the RIP stores the raster data, and just sends this data again to the
relevant output device. By default, the RIP deletes processed jobs from the Held
Queue only when it is necessary to free up disk space for new jobs.

• If you select a job and click on the Info button (or just double-click on the job),
the RIP brings up the Throughput Info dialog box, which contains the settings
for that particular job. You can change some of these settings before reprinting
the job.
Note: If you are roaming a page, there are fewer available options in the Output Con-
troller. For example, you must close the Roam window (and the Reduced Roam win-
dow if you opened it) before you can roam another page.

3.1.5 Sending a job to the Navigator RIP

You have seen how the Navigator RIP processes a simple job, created within the RIP.
Now it is time to see how to send a real job.
If you want to print a file, you can do so directly by choosing Print File from the Navi-
gator RIP menu and specifying that file. Try printing a file now, if you have a small
file available: for example, a PostScript-language file. The RIP interprets the file and
sends it to the printer or on-screen preview, according to the page setup that you
choose in the Print File dialog box.
Section 8.12 on page 302 describes this method and the following sections describe
other types of files that the Navigator RIP can print.
Usually, however, you will want to let the RIP accept input directly from other appli-
cations. We shall see how to do this using AppleTalk, and publish a printer visible to
Macintosh computers on your network. For more details on supplying jobs to the RIP,
see Chapter 8, “Configuring Input”.

78 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.1 A simple Navigator RIP session

3.1.5.1 Publishing a setup with AppleTalk

Note: AppleTalk is not always enabled in the Windows operating system. The Navi-
gator RIP Installation Guide describes how to install and enable AppleTalk. If Apple-
Talk is not already enabled or you do not have a suitable Macintosh computer, you can
create the page setup described here but use a spool folder input as described in
Section 3.3 on page 83.
First, if you are outputting to an imagesetter and want to produce color separations,
you should turn on HPS, Global Graphic’s proprietary high-quality screening system.
To do this:
1. In the Page Setup Manager select the page setup that uses this output device—
we suggested Default to Printer—and click Edit.
2. Click the Separations Manager button (next to the Style list) in the Edit Page
Setup dialog box to open the Separations Manager.
3. In the Separations Manager select an appropriate style from the list, for example
CMYK Separations (Halftone), and click Edit to open the Edit Style
dialog box.
4. In the Edit Style dialog box, select the check box marked Use Harlequin Precision
Screening—this enables a high-quality screening method (HPS). Click OK to
save your change and close the Edit Style dialog box, and then click Select to
close the Separations Manager. The name of the style that you just edited
appears in the Style list.
5. Click OK twice more to exit the Edit Page Setup and Page Setup Manager
dialog boxes.
Because this may be the first time you have used this screening method, HPS has to
cache (save) information on disk; this may take a few minutes. This happens with each
new resolution, dot shape, and screen frequency you use: the RIP displays a suitable
progress dial as it caches each screen. For more information about the options in the
Edit Page Setup dialog box, see Section 5.2 on page 116.
To publish a printer on the network:
1. Choose Input Controller from the Navigator RIP menu (or bring that window to
the front if there is already a check mark against that menu option).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 79

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

2. When the Input Controller dialog box appears, click New to display the Input
Channel Edit dialog box.
3. In the Input Channel Edit dialog box, choose a Name for the printer you are
about to publish, say Brill-O-Print, and type it in. Select AppleTalk from
the Type menu list and select Default to Printer from the Page Setup menu
list. Make sure that the Enabled box is selected and click OK.
Note: The RIP may fail to publish an AppleTalk input. If so the relevant entry in the
Status column of the Input Controller dialog box shows Stopped.

You can leave the Input Controller dialog box displayed or close it. See if there is a
check mark in front of the Start Inputs option in the Navigator RIP menu; if there is no
check mark, choose this menu option. You will see a progress dial appear as the new
setup is published.
Now go to a Macintosh computer elsewhere on your network, and try to print a docu-
ment. Among the available printers shown by the Chooser, you should now see
Brill-O-Print. If you send a job to this printer, the RIP again displays the progress
box filling with light and dark gray bars to show the job being processed in the usual
way. The progress box is part of the Output Controller in either of the multiple modes,
or a separate window in either of the single modes.
To disable a single AppleTalk input or other input temporarily, select it in the Input
Controller and click Off. To remove an input permanently from the Input Controller,
select the entry and click Delete.
See “Using the AppleTalk input plugin” on page 270 for more information.

3.2 A more complex use of the Navigator RIP

You have seen how the Edit Page Setup dialog box lets you choose the output device
and a variety of effects that control the appearance of the pages you display.
Many publishing environments deal with more than one kind of document. For exam-
ple, suppose that you need to print a product manual in draft and final versions: draft
documents need not be printed at a high resolution, but final versions should exploit
the full printing quality of the output device.
The Navigator RIP processes documents according to page setups. Each page setup
specifies a complete page format in terms of the orientation, resolution, size, and so

80 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.2 A more complex use of the Navigator RIP

on; and provides a way to recall that page format, easily and exactly. For full details,
see Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”.

3.2.1 Saving a page setup

To make and save a new page setup:
1. Stop inputs to the Navigator RIP if necessary. In the Navigator RIP menu, make
sure that there is no check mark in front of the Start Inputs option. Choose the
Start Inputs option if there is a check mark: this stops inputs. Alternatively, click
the Stop Inputs button in the tool bar.
2. Choose Page Setup Manager from the Navigator RIP menu or click the Page Setup
Manager button in the tool bar. The Page Setup Manager dialog box appears,
where you have two choices. If there is already a similar page setup, select it
and click Copy to display the Edit Page Setup dialog box. (If there is no similar
page setup, click New to display the very similar New Page Setup dialog box.)
3. Edit the settings in the New Page Setup dialog box to give the configuration you
want. Click Save As.
4. The Save Setup dialog box appears, and you can specify a name for your new
page setup in the Save As text field. (See Figure 3.6.) Click Save to save the setup
and return to the Page Setup Manager dialog box.
You can verify that the setup was saved under this name by looking at the
entries in the Page Setup Manager dialog box. Whenever you want to output a
job manually you can use this setup by selecting its name in the Page Setup menu
in the relevant dialog box: for example: the Print File or Proof Highlighted
Fonts dialog box. You can also configure the Navigator RIP to make named
page setups available to jobs submitted by other users and applications, as
described next.
Note: You can reorder the entries in the Page Setup Manager dialog box by
selecting one or more entries and dragging with the mouse. The order in the
Page Setup Manager is the order of appearance in menus where you choose a

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 81

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

page setup—typically when configuring a managed input (described in

Section 8.2 on page 266) or interactively printing a file (described in
Section 8.12 on page 302).

Figure 3.6 Save Setup dialog box

3.2.2 Associating a page setup with an input

Creating and saving page setups also allows you to make a published printer use a spe-
cific page setup: this allows all users of the RIP to choose a suitable page setup for a
particular job by choosing the associated printer. Try the following to see how this
works with just two published printers on the network:
1. Display the Page Setup Manager. Copy the page setup Default to
Printer—select it and click Copy. In the New Page Setup dialog box, make no
changes, just click Save As. Give this page setup the name Pos.
2. In the Page Setup Manager, select Pos and click Copy to make a copy and start
editing that copy. In the Effects section of the New Page Setup dialog box, select
the Negative check box and click Save As.
3. Save the new page setup with the name Neg. Click OK to close the Page Setup
Manager.
4. Display the Input Controller and create two new AppleTalk devices, as before,
called Pos-O-Print and Neg-O-Print. While using the Input Channel Edit
dialog box, select the page setup Pos for Pos-O-Print and Neg for Neg-O-
Print.

82 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.3 Using the Navigator RIP with a spool folder

Once you have enabled the new inputs, and used Navigator RIP > Start Inputs, the RIP
publishes the two new printers on the network. Sending a job to Pos-O-Print causes
it to be output as normal, while jobs sent to Neg-O-Print are output in negative.
You can publish several more inputs to the Navigator RIP, each with different page
setups. As well as changing the Negative setting, you can change the output device,
output resolution, rotation, screening strategies, and many other settings.

3.3 Using the Navigator RIP with a spool folder

Using a Spool Folder input, you can configure the Navigator RIP to print files placed
into a common folder, usually one accessible from other computers on your network.
This means that various users or applications can write files into a spool folder. The
RIP repeatedly checks this folder, and when it finds a new file, it processes the file.
The RIP deletes each file from the spool folder after printing it but, using the Spool
Folder Configuration options, you can instruct the RIP to save the file in another
folder after printing.
The RIP associates each spool folder with a page setup, giving the benefits described
in Section 3.2, “A more complex use of the Navigator RIP”, when the RIP was pub-
lished as a network printer. In particular, you can define several spool folder inputs,
each with a different page setup, to match the needs of different users or applications.
(If you find it convenient, you can use the same page setup with a spool folder and
other types of input.)
To define a spool folder, follow these steps:
1. Choose Input Controller from the Navigator RIP menu (or bring that window to
the front if there is already a check mark against that menu option). When the
Input Controller dialog box appears, click New. In the Input Channel Edit dialog
box, choose a Name for the output device you are about to publish, say Spool-
Print, and type it in. Choose SpoolFolder from the Type menu and for Page
Setup choose an appropriate page setup.
Click Configure to specify the folder. The default folder is called Spool in the
SW folder. You can use any other folder that the RIP can access. See “Using the
Spool Folder input folder” on page 280 for more information. Exit the Spool
Folder Configuration dialog box by clicking OK.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 83

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

2. In the Input Channel Edit dialog box, select the Enabled box and click OK to
exit. If necessary, choose Start Inputs from the Navigator RIP menu. You will see
a dial appear as the new setup is published.
This starts the spool folder and any other enabled inputs. If there are files
already in the spool folder, the RIP asks if you want to start by printing them.
Files that are put into the folder after this input is enabled are rendered and
printed in order of arrival in the folder.
Note: The RIP may fail to publish a spool folder input. If so the relevant entry
in the Status column of the Input Controller dialog box shows Stopped. The
most likely reason is that you have tried to use a folder already in use by another
spool folder input: return to the Spool Folder Configuration dialog box and
choose a new folder.
3. When you want to stop running the spool folder (and all other enabled inputs),
choose Start Inputs in the Navigator RIP menu again.
To disable a spool folder temporarily, select it in the Input Controller and click Off. To
remove a spool folder’s entry in the Input Controller, select the entry and click Delete.
(Removing the entry does not remove the associated folder on disk, nor any contents
of that folder.)
Note: Even though PostScript Language compatibility level 1 is rarely used, you
should note that the spool folder plugin does not work with page setups set to Post-
Script Language compatibility level 1. See Section 5.23.1 on page 188 for more infor-
mation. If this is attempted an “undefined” on “findresource” error will occur.

3.4 Monitoring the Navigator RIP

The Navigator RIP window shows the progress of jobs through the Navigator RIP.
The text displays information about timing, errors, job completion, fonts, and other
messages.

84 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 3.4 Monitoring the Navigator RIP

Figure 3.7 shows some example messages in the Navigator RIP window.

Figure 3.7 Navigator RIP window messages

The window displays only messages since the start of the RIP session and can display
the last 32,000 characters of these messages. (Within this limit, you can scroll back to
inspect the messages for old jobs: the window scrolls back to the end when new text
appears.) In Multiple (Parallel) mode—the default page buffer mode—timings require
careful interpretation, because the RIP may be outputting and interpreting jobs at the
same time. Also, if the RIP has to pause (for example, to wait for disk space to be
freed), the timings may be misleading because of the variable time spent freeing
space.
The RIP adds a copy of all the messages appearing in the text window to a file, called
LOGFILE, in the SW folder.

The size of the log file can be restricted by editing the GeneralPreferences text
file found within the Config folder in the SW folder.
By changing the value of /MaxLogfileSize to any value other than 0 will specify
the maximum size of the file in bytes. When this maximum value is reached LOGFILE
will be changed to LOGFILE.OLD.
The size of the file is checked when the RIP is started and each time a message is writ-
ten to the file. Only one LOGFILE.OLD is retained. Therefore, you must be aware of
the size of the log files and rename them to keep all messages.
Note: You will only see messages that have been added to the log file since you
started the current RIP session. To view the entire contents of the log file including
messages from any earlier sessions, you must use a text editor like Notepad or Word-
Pad, provided with Windows.
The log file is an important source of information when difficulties arise. Refer to it if
you have any problems.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 85

 Getting Started with the Navigator RIP

Note: From Eclipse Release SP3 Font backup no longer backs up logfiles with the
prefix LOGFILE. Thus copies of logfiles whose names do not start with LOGFILE will
be included in font backup files.

86 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4

Navigator RIP Output Methods

This manual uses the term throughput to mean the productivity of your RIP work-
flow— how much work you are completing in a given time. The Navigator RIPNavi-
gator RIP provides a comprehensive set of tools that allow you to maximize your
throughput.

4.1 Historical overview

The Navigator RIP is able to overcome many of the problems which have beset tradi-
tional PostScript-language compatible RIPs.
RIPs have traditionally operated in a serial fashion—that is, the RIP processes a page
of PostScript language and then outputs it, then processes the next page and outputs it,
and so on.
The Navigator RIP can operate in this manner. This approach to processing (which
includes both interpreting and rendering) and output is usually adequate with low to
medium resolution devices.
However, with higher resolution devices this approach becomes wasteful, because
periods are spent with the output unit idle while the RIP is working, and then with the
RIP idle while the output unit is working. The RIP allows you to overlap processing
and output for greater throughput.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 87

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

Also, if you need to change cassettes or deal with a printer fault or media jam, most
RIPs must wait until the fault is cleared before they can output the current page and
continue. If you are processing a long job and a fault occurs, it must be reinterpreted
once the fault has been detected. For an overnight job, the fault will probably not be
detected until the morning, in which case a lot of time will have been wasted.
The Navigator RIP overcomes these limitations by allowing you to choose one of four
different modes of operation.

4.2 Page buffering modes

Depending on the job involved, and the configuration of your hardware, you can
choose whichever mode is most suitable and overcome many of the problems
described above.
There are two general methods of operation in the RIP—multiple and single. Multiple
modes allow you to write each interpreted page to disk, ready for later printing and
reprinting. Single modes only interpret one page before printing must occur (and
hence make the RIP operate in a more traditional manner).
The four specific modes are: Single, Single (if required), Multiple, and Multiple (Par-
allel). Table 4.1 introduces and compares these modes.

Table 4.1 Comparison of page buffer modes

Mode Behavior

Single (if required) Only buffers a page to disk if the page is too complex to
process in working memory—deletes this buffer after
printing.
Otherwise, sends output directly to the output device.

Single Always buffers a page to disk before printing it.

Deletes the page after printing.

Multiple Always buffers a page to disk before printing it.

Retains on disk all pages created for a job, for ease of
reprinting.

88 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.2 Page buffering modes

Table 4.1 Comparison of page buffer modes

Mode Behavior

Multiple (Parallel) Always buffers a page to disk before printing it

Retains on disk all pages created for a job, for ease of
reprinting.
Sends interpreted pages to the output device while inter-
preting other pages at the same time.

Note: For normal use, you should use Multiple (Parallel) mode. This gives the best
overall performance from the RIP and the best control over every page processed. The
RIP uses this mode by default.
Refer to Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”, for details of how to select different page
buffering modes in the RIP.

4.2.1 Operating modes

Figure 4.1 presents an overview of the behavior of the Navigator RIP in the single and
multiple modes.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 89

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

When the RIP is in either of the single modes, it sends each page straight to the output
device once it has been interpreted. If the RIP buffers a page to disk, that page buffer
is deleted once the page has been printed.

Single Modes Multiple Modes

Interpreter Interpreter
....../manualfeed ....../manualfeed
exch def exch def
/paperheight /paperheight
exch def exch def

Jobs Jobs
Page buffer
file
Page buffer
files

Output device Output device

Figure 4.1 How the Navigator RIP behaves in Single and Multiple Modes

When in one of the multiple modes, pages are always buffered, and they are not usu-
ally deleted (until disk space is required for new pages) so they can be reprinted at a
later point. The throughput system tools can be used to oversee printing—allowing a
range of benefits, which are described below. See Section 4.3, “The throughput sys-
tem”.
Note also that when in Multiple (Parallel) mode, interpretation can take place at the
same time as outputting an earlier page to a printer or imagesetter, but this is not true
of either of the single modes. This is not illustrated in the diagram.
Even though the increase in job throughput is significant when in Multiple (Parallel)
mode, there may be cases—usually because of hardware limitations—when you will

90 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

need to use one of the other modes provided. For example, you may not have enough
disk space to store any page buffers, or the combination of a slow disk and an output
device with a high data rate may mean that working in Multiple (Parallel) mode
becomes impractical. See Section 4.3 for more details.

4.3 The throughput system

This section describes the Output Controller, which is the central part of the through-
put system, and discusses how it can be used to increase throughput. The Output Con-
troller is available when either of the multiple modes is selected (see Section 7.3,
“Control of page buffering modes”, for details on how to change the page buffer
mode).
The Output Controller gives you powerful facilities for controlling any jobs output by
the RIP. These include:
• Reprinting without reinterpreting the original page description.
• Changing the order of the pages to be printed.
• Control over a variety of page characteristics without reinterpreting the page
description.
• Aborting any page before it is completely printed.

4.3.1 Output Controller

To display the Output Controller (if it is not already displayed), select Output Control-
ler from the Output menu, or type Ctrl+O. It will appear as a separate window on your

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 91

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

screen, as shown in Figure 4.2. If you want to remove it, choose the menu option
again. By default, the Output Controller is displayed when you start up the RIP.

Figure 4.2 Output Controller / Monitor dialog box

4.3.1.1 The Active Queue and Held Queue

The Active Queue and Held Queue in the Output Controller can contain a number of
items, each representing a page of output.
The Active Queue contains pages which are currently queued for printing. Pages listed
at the top of the Active Queue will be printed first.
The Held Queue contains pages which are being held on your hard disk. They may
have already been printed, or you may have moved them there yourself. (See
Section 4.3.1.3).
The number of items in a queue, together with the amount of disk space they use, is
displayed below each queue.
If a page is currently being printed, it is shown in the box at the top of the Output Con-
troller between the Active Queue and Held Queue.
As pages are printed, there is a constant flow from the Active Queue to the Held Queue.
After a page has been interpreted, it will be placed at the end of the Active Queue,
printed in its turn, and then transferred to the Held Queue where it will be retained until

92 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

disk space is needed for new pages, when it will be automatically deleted. This is
illustrated in Figure 4.3.

4. Print page buffer

3. Place page buffer in 5. Retain page buffer in

Active Queue Held Queue

2. Interpret job

1. Issue print command

Figure 4.3 Flow of a page buffer between the active and held queues

4.3.1.2 Interrupting output

The Disable output check box can be used at any time to stop printing. When it is
selected, pages will remain in the Active Queue until you clear the check box to resume
the printing.
Disable output does not stop the current page printing, if there is one. To stop a page
while it is printing, drag the page name from the top box into the Held Queue or Active
Queue.

If pages are interpreted while output is disabled, the new pages created are added to
the Active Queue as normal. Disabling output does not prevent you from processing
jobs.
You will find Disable output useful if you need to renew the media in an output device,
or if there is a fault on a device, but you wish to continue interpreting and preparing
more pages for output.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 93

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

The RIP automatically disables output when certain errors occur, for example if a
device determines that the wrong cassette is mounted.

4.3.1.3 Moving page buffers

You can move any of the pages shown in the Output Controller between the Active
Queue and Held Queue by selecting and moving them with the mouse.

To move a page buffer, do the following:

1. Select the desired file.
2. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the file between the queues.
The selected page will move with the mouse pointer and enter the list at the position
where you release the mouse button.

Shift
If you wish, you can move a block of several pages at once. To select a block, select
the first one, then hold down the Shift key and select the last one.

Ctrl
You can also select several page buffers which do not form a contiguous block. Hold
down the Control key while selecting the page buffers.
You can reprint or abort a job, or reorder the pages in the queue, easily and quickly, by
moving the pages between the queues, as follows:
• To reprint a page, move it from the Held Queue to the Active Queue.
• To stop a page before it is printed, move it from the Active Queue to the Held
Queue.

• To abort the page that is currently being printed, move it from the box between
the queues to the Held Queue.
• To change the order of the pages in a queue, move them within the queue.
• If you are moving a lot of pages at once, disable output first to ensure that none
of them are inadvertently printed before you are able to move them.

94 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

4.3.1.4 Page buffer information

Information about each page is displayed in the Active Queue and Held Queue. Refer to
Figure 4.2 on page 92 to see examples of this. The following items of information are
displayed:
• The delete permission for each page.
• Whether or not the page was created by an older version of the RIP.
• The page number of the original job.
• The original job name.
• The color for printing the page.
The delete permission for (or origin of) each page
You can configure the RIP so that it automatically deletes pages once they have been
printed, or when space on the hard disk is low. However, you can still retain an impor-
tant page by changing its delete permission. See “Deleting buffered pages” on page
98, for details on deleting pages automatically, and “Operations on buffered pages” on
page 99, for details on retaining important pages.
The mark, if any, to the left of each page in the Active Queue and Held Queue indicates
its delete permission.

x—The page is locked and cannot be deleted automatically

—(no mark) The page is unlocked and can be deleted automatically

<—The page was created in an earlier version of the Navigator RIP

Note: The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later can read page buffers created by
version 4.5, and you can roam or print these buffers. The mark ( < ) in front of the
name of an older buffer is there to remind you that there are some limitations on what
you can do with earlier versions of page buffers: see Section 4.3.3 on page 104 for
details.
The page number of the original job
The page number of the original job from which the page buffer comes is displayed on
the right of the delete permission.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 95

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

For example, if you are producing separated CMYK color, the RIP produces four
monochrome pages for each original page of the job. The first four pages represent the
Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black separations for the original page 1. The next four
represent the CMYK separations for the original page 2, and so on. Separated pages
produce pages with the original number labeled by color. Thus the four separations for
page 1 are called 1. Jobname (C), 1. Jobname (M), and so on.
If you only print a range of pages from a document, they are labeled in the original job
from 1 upwards, rather than with the true page number in the document. For example,
pages 3 through 7 of a document are labeled from 1 through 5 in the job.
The original job name
The name to the right of the page number is the job name. This is not necessarily the
same as the file name of the job.
If the job name for a PostScript-language job is not specified in the page description,
then one of the following will apply:
• If the input came from a file, the file name will be used.
• If the input came from the Executive, then the value of %exec% will be used.
• If the input came from an AppleTalk network, then the value of
%ip:atalkname% will be used. The atalkname is the AppleTalk printer it
came from.
For other types of jobs, the file name will be used.
The color for printing the page
Color separation pages in the Output Controller are labeled with their separation name
(for example: C, M, Y, or K; or the spot color name), or Composite if there are several
colors on one page, for example when using the PackDrum page feature. (PackDrum
is intended for use with drum imagesetters, and it is an example so you must add it
before use, as described in “Features” on page 184.)

4.3.1.5 Monitoring progress

The Output Controller can be used to monitor the progress of each page as it is
printed: the large box between the two queues gives you an indication of the progress
of the job. As soon as a buffer begins to print, the shape of this progress box changes
to reflect the aspect ratio of the page. For instance, if it is a portrait page, the box will

96 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

have greater height than width, and if it is a landscape page, it will be wider than it is
high.
As the page is printed, the box starts to fill from the top with a light gray pattern, fol-
lowed by dark gray. Figure 4.2, page 92, shows this happening.
• The amount of dark gray in the progress box indicates the proportion of the job
that has already been printed.
• The amount of light gray in the progress box indicates the proportion of data
currently in the printer buffer, waiting to be printed.
• The amount of white space in the progress box indicates the proportion of data
not yet printed and not yet buffered.
• When the progress box is completely filled with dark gray, the page has
finished printing, though margins and extra feeds may require a few more sec-
onds.
In addition, the time taken for the current page buffer is displayed in the message area
below the progress box.
Some printers may also buffer the data internally, so they may not start printing until
some or all of the data has been received.
The message area and the progress box are both used to display additional information
when problems arise. For example, if your printer becomes low on media, an icon will
be displayed in the progress box, together with an appropriate status message. See
Appendix A, “Troubleshooting”, for a full description of these error messages.
Note: In either of the single modes, the Output Controller is not available and the
progress box appears in a separate window.

4.3.2 Job management

The Output Controller gives you control over a variety of page attributes. Using the
Output Controller you can for example:
• Ensure that certain pages will never be automatically deleted.
• Specify the number of copies of any page to print.
• Change individual page characteristics without having to interpret the job
again.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 97

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

There are two general methods of controlling these attributes: configuring the RIP so
that it carries out certain tasks automatically, and changing them yourself.

4.3.2.1 Deleting buffered pages

When the RIP is in either of the multiple page buffering modes, pages are kept buff-
ered on disk. When the hard disk fills up, however, there is no room for new pages,
and so the RIP cannot interpret any further jobs. To proceed, the RIP deletes some
existing pages to make room for new ones.
The drop-down list labeled Delete in the Output Controller lets you specify one of
three strategies to follow. Choose whichever option you prefer.
• The default strategy is When necessary. As disk space is required for new
page buffers, the oldest ones will automatically be deleted from the Held Queue.
Pages which have been locked will not be deleted. (See Section 4.3.2.4, “Lock-
ing important pages”, for details of how to lock pages.) The amount of hard
disk space currently available is displayed at the bottom of the Output Control-
ler, so you can tell when old page buffers are likely to be deleted. (The number
displayed does not include any space you have reserved for the system—see
Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”).
• Choosing Always will cause pages to be deleted immediately after they have
been output. This means that page buffers will never be retained for reprinting,
unless they have been locked before printing was completed. (See
Section 4.3.2.4, “Locking important pages”, for details of how to lock pages.)
When switching to Always from another strategy, any unlocked pages in the
Held Queue will be automatically deleted if you answer yes to a prompt.

• Choosing Never will cause pages to be locked as soon as they have been out-
put, which means that they will never be deleted automatically. If this strategy
is used for long periods of time, the hard disk will eventually fill up, and no
more jobs will be processed until you manually remove pages or otherwise
create more disk space.
Note: The option When necessary offers a good way to retain newer page buffers
and manage disk space automatically. If you choose Never or Always for some spe-
cial purpose, we strongly suggest that you return the setting to When necessary as
soon as possible—the RIP remembers and uses the option you choose for Delete, even
between RIP sessions.

98 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

In When necessary and Always modes, it is possible for the RIP to get so far ahead
of the output device that the disk becomes filled with pages in the Active Queue. In this
case, the RIP will temporarily suspend creating more pages until some of the existing
ones are output and can be deleted to allow it to continue. The Navigator RIP window
displays a message warning that the system has temporarily run out of disk space.
If disk space runs out when there are no pages that can be removed and no pages still
to be output, the RIP will continue anyway, and if the disk reserve is used up then it
will abort the job.

4.3.2.2 Operations on buffered pages

There are a number of useful tasks that you can perform on buffered pages, as listed
below. Some of the options are only available for pages which are not currently being
output or when no pages are being output.
Using the lists of page buffers, and the Roam button, you can:
• View pages on the screen.
• Select several color separations and view them on the screen.
Using the Info button and the Info dialog box, you can:
• Lock and delete page buffers.
• Print multiple copies of page buffers.
• Change a page to print in negative or vice versa.
• Change the exposure with which page buffers are printed.
• Trim excess white space from the output.
• Select the output device and cassette for page buffers (when appropriate).
• Set margins and center the page on the media (when appropriate).
• Change the colors used to Roam page buffers.
You can apply these changes to the selected page only, or to all the pages of a job.
These options are available in the Info dialog box. (Some options can be unavailable:
either temporarily while you are Roaming a related page buffer or permanently
because the output plugin requires particular settings.) Display the Info dialog box by
selecting a page and pressing the Info button, or by double-clicking on the page.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 99

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

Note: The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later can read page buffers created by
version 4.5. The mark ( < ) in front of the name of an older buffer is there to remind
you that there are some limitations on what you can do with earlier versions of page
buffers: see Section 4.3.3 on page 104 for details.

4.3.2.3 Viewing pages with the Roam function

You can view one page or several pages or separations at the same time.
By selecting one page buffer and clicking Roam, you can preview the selected page.
This prevents wasted film and time by letting you check that an image has processed
correctly before it is printed. While roaming a page, the RIP is still able to process
other jobs, but not to output them. You cannot roam a page while the RIP is output-
ting, so you should disable output when using Roam.
To roam more than one page at once, select all the pages you wish to view and click
Roam; the selected pages will be overlaid in the Roam window. For example, this
allows you to preview all separations of a color image together. Remember, you can
select several buffers using the Shift and Control keys.
When viewing a higher resolution image, the Roam > Reduced Roam menu option is
probably available. It allows you to see more of the image in one view. You must close
the Roam window (and the Reduced Roam window if you opened it) before you can
roam another page.
For more details about the Roam function see “Roam and Preview windows” on page
125.

4.3.2.4 Locking important pages

To lock a page buffer so that it is not deleted by the RIP when disk space is low, select
the Don’t delete page check box in the Info dialog box. Page buffers which have been

100 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

locked in this way are displayed in the Output Controller with a mark on the left of the
job name, as described on page 95.

Figure 4.4 Info dialog box

You can delete any buffers from the hard disk—whether locked or not—by selecting
them and clicking on the Remove button in the Output Controller. A warning dialog
box appears which lets you cancel the operation if necessary.

4.3.2.5 Printing multiple copies

Multiple copies of any page buffer can be printed by specifying the number of copies
required in the Copies to print text box of the Info dialog box for the appropriate page
buffer. The next time that buffer is printed, the specified number of copies will be pro-
duced, with the number in the Copies to print text box reducing with each copy until
the value is 1. The Copies printed value keeps count of how many pages have been
printed in total.

4.3.2.6 Printing in negative

You can produce a negative copy of a positive page buffer or a positive copy of a neg-
ative page buffer by selecting the Negative check box in the Info dialog box. The
default value taken by this option is the one specified in the page setup for the selected
job; for instance, if the page setup specifies negative printing, you can use this option
to produce a positive copy. See Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”, for details
of page setups and how they are defined.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 101

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

Note: If you have calibrated your output device, selecting this option from the Info
dialog box may produce incorrectly calibrated output. If so, select the Negative option
in the Edit Page Setup dialog box instead, and output the job again.

4.3.2.7 Trimming blank space

You can trim white space from the top and bottom of a page by selecting the Trim page
check box in the Info dialog box. The default trim page setting is specified in the page
setup for the selected job. See “Other options that save media” on page 166, for
details. Trim page is switched off as a default.

4.3.2.8 Changing the output device or cassette

You can change the selected output device or cassette for a page by choosing the one
you want in the Output device or Cassette drop-down lists of the Info dialog box. Next
time the page is printed, the new output device or cassette will be used. The default
value taken by these options is the one specified in the page setup for the selected job.
See Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”, for details.
Only output devices suitable for the page buffer are shown in the Info dialog box.

4.3.2.9 Changing the exposure

If an appropriate output device is selected, you can change the exposure for the
selected page. Type in the new value in the Exposure text box of the Info dialog box.
Next time the buffer is printed, the new exposure value will be used. You should con-
sult the documentation for your output device to find appropriate exposure values, and
also see Chapter 13, “Calibration”.

4.3.2.10 Changing the color

You can specify the color of a job separation to roam from the Info dialog box. Click
the Change roam color button to use the Change Roam Color dialog box, as described
in Section 14.11.3 on page 511.
When roaming color images, this lets you assign different colors to different separa-
tions and view the resulting image without having to interpret the job again.

102 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.3 The throughput system

4.3.2.11 Specifying page layout

You can change a variety of margin settings for a page buffer by clicking Page layout in
the Info dialog box. The Page Layout dialog box will then be displayed, as shown in
Figure 4.5. It is the same as the Page Layout dialog box that you can display by click-
ing Page layout in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, as described in “Default page size”
on page 167.

Figure 4.5 Page Layout dialog box

This dialog box allows you to change the margins for the selected page buffer. Type
the margin size you want into the appropriate text boxes. You can choose the units of
measurement you require from the Select units drop-down list. In addition, you can
center the selected page on the media by clicking on the Center page on Media Width
and Center page on Media Length check boxes. The default value for each option is
taken from the page setup for the selected page buffer. If you override any of these
values, they will take effect next time you print the page buffer.
Some of the fields in the Info dialog box may not be editable, depending on the type of
device.

4.3.2.12 Changing attributes for the whole job

Each of the options described above only affects the selected page buffer. However,
many jobs consist of more than one page, and very often you will want to make the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 103

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

same changes to all of the page buffers produced by the job, not just one. Making
changes to each buffer individually can be tedious, if not impractical, so an option is
available which allows you to change all the page buffers produced by a job at once.
To propagate changes in the current page to all other pages produced by the job, make
your changes for one page buffer then select the Change all pages in job check box in
the Info dialog box before clicking OK to close the dialog box. This change affects
pages in both queues. If the current page is from a job currently being processed and
pages are still being created, the new pages will get the new attributes if this option is
selected.

4.3.3 Page buffers produced by older versions of the Navigator RIP

The Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later can read and print page buffers created by
version 4.5. The newer installation of the RIP must have an output device that matches
the output device used to create the page buffers. There are some limitations on what
you can do with earlier versions of page buffers, depending on the way in which you
access the older page buffers.
There are several ways to use older page buffers with a newer version of the RIP:
• You can copy the older page buffers into a special transfer folder used only for
that purpose by the newer version of the RIP. This is the safest method because
it avoids any interaction between the two versions of the RIP, but it uses more
disk space and requires you to manage two page buffer folders in the newer
version. Choose Navigator RIP > Configure RIP, then click Change to change the
folder used to hold page buffers.
• You can copy the older page buffers directly into the page buffer folder used by
the newer version of the RIP. You may need to restart that version of the RIP
before the RIP displays the page buffers.
Warning: Take care not to copy page buffers with the same file names as ones
already in the destination folder.
• You can leave the page buffers in the page buffers folder of the older version of
the RIP. In the newer RIP version, choose Navigator RIP > Configure RIP, then
click Change to change the folder used to hold page buffers.
Note: If you use Reduced Roam on a page first in the newer version of the RIP,
this prevents you using Reduced Roam on that page in the same folder when
using the older version of the RIP.

104 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.4 Advanced details of page buffering modes

You can inspect the information displayed in the Info or Page Layout dialog boxes for
an older page buffer but you cannot change anything. The main consequences are that
you cannot change the number of copies to be printed and you cannot change the per-
mission for automatic deletion.
You can Roam older page buffers without any problems beyond a small color change,
which is most pronounced in continuous tone, unscreened page buffers.

4.4 Advanced details of page buffering modes

This section gives more details about each page buffer mode. As mentioned earlier,
you should use Multiple (Parallel) mode whenever possible, but if this proves diffi-
cult, you can specify a different mode in the Configure RIP dialog box, described in
Chapter 7, “Configuring the RIP”.
Recall that a page is buffered to disk into a file of rasterized data, produced as the RIP
interprets the data on the page. When the page has been interpreted, the data in the
buffer file is sent to the output device and printed.
Using buffers on disk means that complex pages can be interpreted without requiring
large amounts of working memory.
This section provides more specific details than the brief description in Section 4.2 on
page 88. You may find this section useful if you wish to experiment with running the
RIP in different modes.

4.4.1 Multiple (Parallel) mode

Multiple (Parallel) mode is a highly efficient way of increasing throughput, utilizing
your computer to the full, and is the recommended mode for most cases. However, if
you have an output device that can stop / start, you may want to use the Single (if
required) mode, especially if the data rate of the printer is high.
Interpretation of pages can proceed while other, already interpreted, pages are being
output. In addition, multiple page buffers are created and saved on disk in this mode.
These are not deleted after the pages have been output, allowing pages to be reprinted
whenever necessary. This is extremely useful if a problem such as a developer jam
occurs with the output device.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 105

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

All the available processor time on your machine is used in this mode—priority goes
to the task of sending bitmap data to the output device, and any processor time not
used in that way can be used to interpret the next page of data.
It is possible for several pages to have been written to disk, but not yet sent to the out-
put device. This may occur if there are pages which are quick to interpret, or if the
printer is relatively slow or is not ready.
Eventually, of course, this will fill up the hard disk. When this happens, interpretation
is suspended until enough pages have been output and deleted, or disk space has been
freed up by another application. When the disk fills up, the Navigator RIP window
displays this message:
System warning: Insufficient Disk Space

In Multiple (Parallel) mode, you can customize the RIP so that when disk space runs
out, it automatically deletes pages which have been output. See Section 4.3.2.1 on
page 98 for details.

4.4.2 Multiple mode

In Multiple mode, like Multiple (Parallel) mode, page buffers are kept on disk. (This is
in contrast to the single modes, where only one page can be held on disk at a time.)
Before reprinting, the Output Controller can be used to change many characteristics of
the interpreted pages, meaning that time is not wasted in interpreting jobs again.
As in Multiple (Parallel) mode, it is possible that the hard disk will become full—you
should ensure that page buffers are deleted when necessary to free up disk space. You
can let the RIP delete pages for you, preserving important pages which you do not
want deleted, or you can delete page buffers yourself whenever you want.
The main difference between this Multiple mode and Multiple (Parallel) mode is that
interpreted pages cannot be output while other pages are being interpreted.
In Multiple mode, when a page is ready, interpretation is suspended until it has been
output, in a similar fashion to the way the single modes operate. The advantage of
Multiple mode over either of the single modes is that, because multiple page buffers
can be written to disk, interpretation can continue even if the output device is not
ready to accept data (for instance, if there is a media jam or if it has been turned off).

106 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.4 Advanced details of page buffering modes

Multiple mode should be used if you experience a lot of data underrun in Multiple
(Parallel) mode. This is only likely to happen with very complex jobs or an output
device that requires data to be supplied at a very high speed.
Note: Data underrun occurs when an output device does not receive data to print at a
fast enough rate. Some devices will signal an error and stop when this occurs. Others
may continue to feed through media—with the consequence that large bands will
appear in the output. Still others will attempt to stop and restart. This may result in a
loss in quality of the image, and in any case is likely to be slower. For more informa-
tion about using the Navigator RIP with such printers, see “Using a printer that can
stop / start” on page 248. See also “Printer buffer size” on page 253.

4.4.3 Single mode

When running in this mode, the RIP interprets a page of a job and sends it to the out-
put device, then interprets the next page and sends it, and so on, until all the jobs spec-
ified have been printed.
Note: To run successfully in Single mode, as in Multiple mode, it is important that the
RIP can send data to the output device as quickly as the output device requires it.
In this mode, the RIP always creates a single page buffer, sends the data in it to the
output device, and then deletes the page buffer to make room for the next one. This
means that you cannot use the throughput system tools.
By default, if a data underrun occurs and data cannot be read from the page buffer fast
enough to keep up with the printer, the RIP tries once more to output the page and, if it
still fails, aborts the job.
Note: The RIP does not display the Output Controller/Monitor in Single mode and
Single (if required) mode.
In this mode, the Output menu, on the main Navigator RIP window, contains a Hold
and Reprint option. (You can also select this option by pressing Ctrl+H.) Selecting this
option allows you to choose whether or not to reprint each following page without
having to reinterpret it. This can be used to print more copies of a page.
When you have selected the Hold and Reprint option, the RIP displays a dialog box at
the end of processing each page—asking if you want to reprint the page. You can
answer: Yes, in which case the RIP reprints the page and redisplays the dialog box; or
No, in which case the RIP deletes the page buffer and interprets the next page.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 107

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

Note: As a side effect of using Hold and Reprint, the RIP displays a harmless error
message in the Navigator RIP window:
%%[PrinterError: re-print for hold and re-print]%%

4.4.4 Single (if required) mode

This mode is similar to Single mode, except that a single page buffer will be created
only when it is necessary. The RIP will attempt to output a page to the printer without
using a page buffer at all, but will create one in either of the following cases:
• It is not possible to interpret the page quickly enough to keep up with the
printer, and the printer does not have a stop and restart function.
• All the available working memory on your computer has been filled by inter-
preted data before the page has been completed.
In the second case, the interpreted data is placed in a page buffer, thus freeing mem-
ory. More data is interpreted, and when memory is exhausted again the data is merged
into the original page buffer, and memory is again available to continue the job. This
process continues until all the data for the page has been interpreted, at which point
the data in the page buffer is sent to the chosen output device, as for Single mode.
This mode is very productive but robust where there is an unpredictable mix of simple
and complex jobs, and is especially useful when most jobs are relatively simple. It is
productive because the RIP processes the simple jobs without creating disk buffers
and achieves maximum throughput for these jobs. It is robust because, when a job is
complex enough to require buffering, the RIP creates and then sends the page buffer:
this takes some extra time but the time is taken only when required.
In some cases, Single (if required) mode provides the quickest way to output a job.
The Output menu on the main Navigator RIP window, contains a Hold and Reprint
option, as described for Single mode.

4.4.5 Multiple (Parallel) compared to Single (if required) mode

The preferred mode for maximum performance and convenience is Multiple (Parallel)
mode. The Single and Multiple modes will always be slower than Multiple (Parallel)
mode: they are available only to help you cope with very demanding output devices
that are not able to stop/start, when there is very little memory to use as a printer
buffer.

108 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 4.5 Page buffering modes: a summary

However, in some circumstances, it is possible that the Single (if required) mode will
be faster than Multiple (Parallel) mode. This is because the bitmap of an output page
does not need to be compressed, written to disk, read back from disk and decom-
pressed again, before being printed. If you run in Multiple (Parallel) mode, and the
page buffer folder is on a RAM disk, the disk time required is minimal, but you still
have to compress and decompress the page. It is a question of speed versus conve-
nience. Multiple (Parallel) mode offers much greater convenience, and will usually
also offer the best performance.
However, you should use Single (if required) mode if you are either only outputting a
single page, (so there can be no benefit from the overlapping of outputting and inter-
preting) or if the time to compress and decompress the page to and from disk is large.
®
This is true, for example, of the Seybold Rainbow Islands test job, where 30% time
savings are possible if Single (if required) mode is used at 2400 dpi.
The main problem with Single (if required) mode is that if the job is too complex, then
the printer will catch up, a paint to disk will be necessary, and the page output again:
wasting the time spent on the failed page and some media.
Another potential inefficiency of Single (if required) mode is that if the page is rela-
tively simple, a lot of processing time is wasted when the page is outputting, which
could be used to get the next page ready (as happens in Multiple (Parallel) mode).

4.5 Page buffering modes: a summary

The table below provides a summary of the major capabilities of each page buffering
mode.

Single (if Multiple

Will the Navigator RIP… Single Multiple
required) (Parallel)
Ever create a page buffer? 3 3 3 3

Always create a page buffer? 7 3 3 3

Ever create more than one page 7 7 3 3

buffer?
Retain any page buffers on disk? 7 7 3 3

Table 4.2 Summary of the capabilities of each page buffering mode

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 109

 Navigator RIP Output Methods

Single (if Multiple

Will the Navigator RIP… Single Multiple
required) (Parallel)
Always output as soon as a page 3 3 3 3
is ready?
Always stop interpreting while 3 3 3 7
outputting?
Interpret pages while outputting 7 7 7 3
other pages?
Allow pages to be output again? 3 3 3 3
Allow modification of page 7 7 3 3
buffer settings without
reinterpretation?
Allow previewing the page? 7 7 3 3

Table 4.2 Summary of the capabilities of each page buffering mode (Continued)

110 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5

Configuring Output Formats

Navigator RIP, presented some of the basic ways of getting output from the RIP. That
chapter introduced the Page Setup Manager and Edit Page Setup dialog box and
showed how you can use page setups to choose the output device and many output
options.
This chapter describes the details of these dialog boxes and discusses likely output
devices.

5.1 Creating and managing page setups

Every job that you supply to the RIP takes its imaging options from a named page
setup. This is true both for jobs arriving through a managed network input defined in
the Input Controller, and for jobs that are the result of you choosing a menu option in
the RIP, for example: Proof Fonts or Print File. (These menu options can be a useful
way to test new page setups.)
You can keep a number of different page setups which you use regularly—perhaps
one that has Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS) turned on, and one that does not,
one that previews images, and one that sends output to a particular printer. You can
save as many configurations as you wish.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 111

 Configuring Output Formats

Page setups are such an important part of the RIP that you must name each one as you
create and save it. You can use up to 30 characters in a name. It is useful to give each
page setup a meaningful name, without being too specific about its contents.
• Choose a meaningful name because the page setup name appears in several
menus where you have to choose a page setup. Also, for each job, the RIP dis-
plays a message in the RIP Monitor saying which page setup it used.
Choose a form of name that suits the variety of jobs and output devices that you
work with. Consider making the name contain parts indicating the output
device, and settings such as resolution. Another tactic might be to label a page
setup with its general purpose, for example: proofing or final output.
• Try not to be too specific because you can change the settings within a page
setup without changing its name.
For example, this can be useful if you change the device you use for proofing. If
you have several networked inputs that each use the same page setup, it is easier
to edit just one page setup than to create a new page setup and then change all
the inputs to use the new page setup.
You can give an experimental page setup a less carefully chosen name, but try to make
it clear that it is not for routine use.

5.2 Page Setup Manager dialog box

The Page Setup Manager dialog box appears when you choose Page Setup Manager
from the Navigator RIP menu, or when you type Ctrl+S. (You must stop inputs before
you can display the Page Setup Manager: if necessary, choose the Navigator RIP > Start

112 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.2 Page Setup Manager dialog box

Inputs menu option or click the tool bar button that shows a red arrow and traffic
lights.)

Figure 5.1 Page Setup Manager dialog

The Page Setup Manager contains a list of all existing page setups, showing the name
of each page setup, the corresponding output device and some important settings: the
output resolution, the calibration set in use, and the separations style.
In a new installation of the RIP, there is always one page setup called Default Page
Setup. This page setup uses a set of options that can be expected to work with any
installation of the RIP, producing a low-resolution on-screen preview. You can delete
or redefine this page setup to suit your installation.

5.2.1 Controls and actions

The controls below the list allow you to create new page setups, and to edit, copy, or
delete existing page setups. You can also choose the units in which to view the resolu-
tion of output listed for each page setup.

Edit Select a page setup and click this button to edit it in the Edit
Page Setup dialog box. A shortcut is to double-click a page
setup. See Section 5.3 on page 115 for details of using this
dialog box.
Note: To rename a page setup, copy it and save the copy with
the desired name, before deleting the original.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 113

 Configuring Output Formats

New Click this button to create a new page setup and edit it in the
New Page Setup dialog box. See Section 5.3 on page 115 for
details of using this dialog box.

Copy Select a page setup and click this button to edit a copy in the
New Page Setup dialog box.

Delete Select one or more page setups and click this button to delete
them.
If any of the page setups are in use by a managed input, the
RIP displays a warning dialog box for each used page setup.
Click Yes if you are certain that you want to delete the page
setup.

5.2.2 Reordering page setups

You can also select page setups and reorder them by dragging them to new positions in
the list. The order in the Page Setup Manager is the order of the page setups listed in
the Print File, Proof Fonts, and Print Calibration dialog boxes and in the Select Page
Setup dialog box shown before entry to the Executive window.

5.2.3 Selecting several page setups

You can select multiple page setups when you want to delete or reorder them. Use the
following keys:

Shift
To select a block of setups that appear together in the list, select the first setup in the
block, then, while holding down the Shift key, select the last setup in the block.

Ctrl
To select several setups, regardless of whether they form a continuous range, hold
down the Control key while selecting the setups you wish to delete.

114 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.3 Edit Page Setup dialog box

5.2.4 Closing the Page Setup Manager

You must close the Page Setup Manager before you can use any tool bar buttons or
menu options in the RIP: for example, to start inputs.
You have these choices:
• Click OK to confirm all the changes you have made in the Page Setup Manager
or in the Edit Page Setup or New Page Setup dialog boxes.
• Click Cancel to discard all changes.

5.3 Edit Page Setup dialog box

The Edit Page Setup dialog box (shown again in Figure 5.2) appears when you click
Edit in the Page Setup Manager. The New Page Setup dialog box appears when you
click New or Copy. The New Page Setup dialog box is the same as the Edit Page Setup
dialog box, except that the OK button is labeled Save As. See Section 5.3.2, “Closing

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 115

 Configuring Output Formats

the New Page Setup dialog box” for details. References to the Edit Page Setup dialog
box throughout this manual also apply to the New Page Setup dialog box.

Figure 5.2 Edit Page Setup dialog box

The options you can configure from the Edit Page Setup dialog box include:
• The device to which the RIP sends output.
• The separations to be created from each job, together with the output format.
• The halftone screening to be used with each job.
• The calibration to be applied to each job.
• The color setup for the job.
• The effects to be applied to input jobs.

116 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.3 Edit Page Setup dialog box

Section 5.4 on page 118 through Section 5.27 on page 202 describe the options within
these categories. Many options involve subsidiary dialog boxes.
All the information that you need to create a page setup is available from the Edit Page
Setup dialog box. You can call the Device Manager, Separations Manager, Color
Setup Manager, Calibration Manager, and the Cassette Manager from the Edit Page
Setup dialog box.
The changes you make in these managers are independent of the page setup you are
creating. For example, you can use the Separations Manager to create a separations
style, even if you do not want to use that separations style in the page setup.

5.3.1 Closing the Edit Page Setup dialog box

You must close the Edit Page Setup dialog box to save your changes. You must also
close the Page Setup Manager before you can use any tool bar buttons or menu
options in the RIP: for example, to start inputs.
Click OK to confirm all the changes you have made in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
This confirmation is provisional: you must also click OK in the Page Setup Manager
to finally save your changes.
Alternatively, click Cancel to discard your changes immediately.
Note: If you open one of the other managers from the Edit Page Setup dialog box,
changes that you make in that manager are independent of the Edit Page Setup dialog
box. For example, if you open the Separations Manager and create a separations style,
as long as you close the Edit Style and Separations Manager dialog boxes with OK or
Select, the new style will remain even if you click Cancel in the Edit Page Setup dialog
box.

5.3.2 Closing the New Page Setup dialog box

You must close the New Page Setup dialog box to save your changes. You must also
close the Page Setup Manager before you can use any tool bar buttons or menu
options in the RIP: for example, to start inputs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 117

 Configuring Output Formats

If you click Save As in the New Page Setup dialog box, a dialog box appears, request-
ing that you enter a name for the new page setup. Figure 5.3 shows this dialog box.

Figure 5.3 Save Setup dialog box

The dialog box shows a list of existing page setups. You have these options:
• Type a name in the Save As text box and click Save. The new page setup is
added to the list in the Page Setup Manager.
• Select a name from the list of the page setups to transfer it to the Save As text
box. You can edit the name first or click Save immediately to overwrite the
existing setup.
• Click Cancel to return to the New Page Setup dialog box.
If you attempt to save a setup using an existing name, the RIP asks you to confirm the
action before overwriting the existing setup. If you answer No, you return to the Save
Setup dialog box where you can choose another name.
Once you have saved the page setup, you must also click OK in the Page Setup Man-
ager to finally save your changes.

5.4 Selecting different devices

The Device drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box allows you to specify
where your output is to be sent once the job has been interpreted.
You can send output to a physical printer, write it to a file in a specified format, or pre-
view the file on your screen. Although the precise configuration of available devices

118 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.4 Selecting different devices

may vary, the following output devices are always shipped with the evaluation copy of
the RIP:
• Preview—enables you to preview on your monitor any jobs processed. This
output device is available in both single and multiple modes.
• None—does not produce any printed output, but does perform all the necessary
processing for the job, including the production of page buffers. This can be
used for testing and timing jobs, and is especially useful for previewing on
screen when you want to jump between pages or overlay separations using the
Output Controller. The Output Controller is available in either of the multiple
modes.
• TIFF—produces TIFF (Tag Image File Format) files. Most desktop publishing
applications can import this format of file.
And, depending on which physical output devices are available:
• Plugin devices, for example, Ultre, PelBox and Hewlett Packard HP650.
Note that if you change the Device, you may have to choose a separations style from
the Style drop-down list and a cassette name from the Cassette drop-down list before
you can save the page setup.

5.4.1 Setting the resolution

Under Resolution, there are two options that allow you to specify the resolution of the
image to be printed. The resolution defines the detail with which an image is printed
or displayed, and is given in terms of dots per inch (dpi).
The list of available resolutions varies between output devices. Most physical output
devices support a limited number of resolutions and you must choose from the values
shown in the drop-down lists. For some devices (such as TIFF) you can either type in
a resolution or choose one of the values.
Normally the vertical and horizontal resolutions should be the same value: this is your
only option when the screening method is HDS or when the chosen output device
requires the same vertical and horizontal resolution. For other screening methods and
with other output devices you can set the resolutions to different values—if you need
to.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 119

 Configuring Output Formats

• Set both resolutions at once by defining just the vertical resolution—the hori-
zontal resolution is automatically set to the same value.
• Set different vertical and horizontal resolutions by setting first the vertical and
then the horizontal resolution.
Note: The resolutions shown in this dialog box always take effect for jobs that do not
specify a resolution. If the job attempts to specify the resolution, you must select the
Override resolution in job check box if you want to produce the resolution shown here.

5.4.2 Image interpolation

When an image is at a different resolution to the device on which it is to be imaged,
artifacts can be introduced with various degrading visual effects. Image Interpolation
attempts to eliminate these effects, using extra processing to effectively recreate the
image specifically for the device.
Image Interpolation works both ways: reducing the resolution of the image to match
an output device with a lower resolution and increasing the resolution of an image to
match an output device with a higher resolution.

5.4.2.1 Increasing image resolution

If you input an image that has a resolution which is slightly lower (between 50%-
100%) than the resolution of the output device, the resulting image appears with “jag-
gies”. Image interpolation will generally eliminate this type of problem, with very lit-
tle (if any) perceptible loss of image quality.
If you input an image that has a resolution which is significantly lower (50% or less)
than the resolution of the output device, the resulting image appears “blocky”. Image
interpolation will smooth such images giving a blurry look. If the resolution of the
original image is reduced more when compared to the output device, the output
becomes more blurry.
In practice, you can still get jaggies when the image has a resolution that is signifi-
cantly lower in resolution, but their effects are not as pronounced as in the slightly
lower case.
It is a good idea to run some tests and decide whether or not to use image
interpolation.

120 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.4 Selecting different devices

Image interpolation works by producing a smooth transition between adjacent sample

values rather than painting all pixels covered by a source sample with the same color.
There is a performance penalty when interpolation takes place, and this penalty is
related to the area of the output image, and to whatever color management is taking
place.
Because it may increase the time required to render the image, image interpolation is
disabled by default; and is only enabled when the width or height (or both) of an
image on the device is larger than the corresponding dimension of the source. If either
dimension of the image on the device is less than that of the source, the filter will be
deactivated.
Image interpolation only ever takes place if the Interpolate flag in an image or mask
dictionary is set to “true” and this is set by the generating application.
Image and mask interpolation is disabled by default.
You can specify that image and mask interpolation takes place if the Interpolate flag in
an image or mask dictionary is set to “true”, or you can force all images to be
interpolated.
Note: Interpolation (image and mask) is not supported for type 4 images.
Image interpolation increases the resolution of the image to the device resolution by
increasing the bit depth of the image. For example, a 1 bit grayscale image will inter-
polate to, say, an 8 bit image, with a smooth gray scale transition between each black
and white pixel.
Image mask interpolation produces output that is 4 times higher in resolution than the
input, but it can run up to three times in a row, providing at most 64 (4 x 4 x 4) times
higher resolution output. The mask interpolator uses two criteria to choose if higher
resolution output is needed:
• If the source mask width and height are both higher than the device resolution,
stop.
• If either the source mask width or height are more than 150% of device resolu-
tion, stop.
• Otherwise, interpolate again.
The second check is concerned with images whose source data is not square, but they
have been transformed so that on the device they are close to becoming square. This is

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 121

 Configuring Output Formats

to avoid the larger side of the image becoming very large as the smaller side tries to
achieve the device resolution.

5.4.2.2 Reducing image resolution

When an image is reduced on an output device, rows and columns of the source image
are discarded to make the image fit in the desired area.
Some images are generally unaffected by this process—photographs for example.
However, some images, such as technical drawings, can become badly affected. When
an image contains many fine horizontal and vertical lines they can become badly dis-
torted or even lost completely by the process naively discarding whole columns and
rows.
The image reduction filter eliminates this kind of problem by resampling the whole
image to the device resolution, ensuring that all pixels in source image are represented
on the output. Thin lines on a white background would become more faint as the
image is reduced, rather than be discarded completely.
Any reduced image may benefit from the reduction filter—however images contain-
ing fine line detail will show the most benefit.
Although some processing time is required, the reduction filter can, in some cases,
speed up processing as it reduces the amount of information the RIP has to work with.
In particular, large, high-resolution images being output on a relatively low-resolution
device (1200 dpi image on a 300 dpi device) may notice a speed improvement, partic-
ularly if the job is using color management.
The image reduction filter only becomes active when the width or height (or both) of
an image on the device is smaller than the corresponding dimension of the source. If
either dimension of the image on the device is greater than that of the source, the filter
will be deactivated.

5.4.2.3 Alphamask and Interpolation

When specifying an alphamasked image, any interpolation setting in the mask dictio-
nary is ignored; instead the interpolation setting in the image data dictionary is applied
to both the image and mask.

122 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.5 Sending output to the screen

Since alphamasks are contone, they are interpolated in the same way as image data.
Image and mask data (that is, contone and binary data) are normally interpolated
differently.

5.5 Sending output to the screen

There are two output devices that are provided for sending output to the screen:
Preview and None. None is the more flexible choice if you are running the RIP in the
Multiple or Multiple (Parallel) page buffer mode.
None is a dummy device provided for test runs and for previewing, so no physical
printing takes place. You can preview the pages sent to the None device using the
Roam command from the Output Controller in the same way as you can preview the
pages sent to an actual device. You can roam several pages at once if they are the same
size, which allows you to view selected separations of a color image together or to
compare buffers for the same page when processed with different page setups. You
can also hide one or more separations when previewing a composite image. The Out-
put Controller is only available in either of the multiple page buffer modes.
Preview is also a dummy device, and it enables you to preview individual separa-
tions, a composite image, or selected colors of a composite image in all page buffer
modes. The Preview device does not allow you to combine pages or separations for
viewing, and jobs sent to Preview do not appear in the Output Controller.

5.5.1 Using the Preview device

By setting the output device to Preview, you can preview any jobs processed on your
monitor. As a separate output device, Preview is most useful when running in Single
or Single (if required) modes, when the Output Controller is not available. The RIP
pauses all job processing while you are viewing a page and resumes only when you
close the Preview window.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 123

 Configuring Output Formats

When you print a file to the Preview device, a new window appears containing the
image processed, as shown in Figure 5.4.

Figure 5.4 Preview window

You have already seen an example of screen roam in Chapter 3, “Getting Started with
the Navigator RIP”. Using screen preview as a device gives you the same options as
screen roam. You can preview up to 24-bit RGB or 32-bit CMYK raster images, as
long as you have sufficient memory. If you have installed an N-color device, you can
also roam N-color images.
Navigation in the Preview window is the same as in the Roam window. For details see
“Roam and Preview windows” on page 125. You can hide one or more separations
when previewing a composite image. See Section 5.5.3.1, “Roam Options and Pre-
view Options dialog boxes” for details.

5.5.2 Using the None device

When running in a multiple page buffering mode, you can preview pages from within
the Output Controller by clicking the Roam button. (See Section 4.3.2 on page 97.) By
setting the output device to None, you can carry out test runs, and preview pages and
separations.
You have already seen an example of screen roam in Section 3.1, “A simple Navigator
RIP session” on page 69. As you saw in that example, when you print to the None
device, you can select a page in the Held Queue of the Output Controller and click
Roam. The Roam window appears. The title bar of the Roam window contains the
name of the file, the resolution and the color of the page or pages. You can view any

124 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.5 Sending output to the screen

page in any queue of the Output Controller, not just the pages you printed to the None
device.
To roam more than one page at once, select all the pages you wish to preview and
click Roam; the selected pages will be overlaid in the Roam window. For example, this
allows you to preview some or all separations of a color image together. Remember,
you can select several page buffers using the Shift and Control keys.
If you roam the separations of a color image or if you are roaming a composite image
then the combined image may become difficult to interpret, particularly if any of the
separations have similar colors. There are ways to reduce the complexity:
• You can hide one or more separations as you are roaming the separations until
all but one separations are hidden. See Section 5.5.3.1 on page 126 for details.
• You can choose to display a separation in any color (in the Info dialog for that
separation) before starting to roam it. See Section 14.11.3 on page 511 for
details.
The Roam and Preview windows are described in detail in the following sections.

5.5.3 Roam and Preview windows

Note: This description applies to both Roam and Preview windows. For ease of
description, this section refers to the Roam and Reduced Roam windows only: the
same description applies to the Preview and Reduced Preview windows except that
the word Roam in menus becomes Preview.
When previewing pages, the size of the image is proportional to the resolution chosen
in Edit Page Setup: the higher the resolution, the larger the image appears. Choose a
high resolution if you want to look at a processed image in fine detail; choose a lower
resolution to see the whole image at once.
When you are viewing a higher resolution image, the Roam > Reduced Roam menu
option is probably available in the Roam window. It allows you to see more of the
image in one view. You must close the Roam window (and the Reduced Roam win-
dow if you opened it) before you can roam another page.
For most sizes of page, there are horizontal and vertical scroll bars at the edges of the
Roam window. (The scroll bars appear only when the window is too small to display
the whole page at one time.) When there are scroll bars, you can use them to move
your view to different parts of the page image. Alternatively, you can drag the page

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 125

 Configuring Output Formats

image around by holding down the left mouse button when the cursor is over the
image and moving the mouse. While you are dragging the image, the shape of the
mouse cursor changes to a hand. The hand speed determines how quickly the image
moves when you move the mouse. You can set the hand speed, together with other
options, in the Roam Options dialog box. See Section 5.5.3.1 for details.

Shift
Hold down the Shift key to see cross hairs marking the location of the view, in propor-
tion to the size of the Roam window. For example, if the cross hairs are shown in the
bottom right of the window, the window contains the bottom right portion of the page.
Hold down the Shift key and click the mouse (Shift-click) to jump to another part of
the page. For example, if you Shift-click on the middle of the window, the window
scrolls to show the middle of the page.

5.5.3.1 Roam Options and Preview Options dialog boxes

Note: This description applies to the options for both the Roam windows and the Pre-
view windows. For ease of description, this section refers to the Roam and Reduced
Roam windows only: the same description applies to the Preview and Reduced Pre-
view windows.
Display this dialog box by choosing the Options command from the Roam menu in
either the Roam window or the Reduced Roam window.

Figure 5.5 Roam Options dialog box

The Roam Options dialog box contains a list of the separations shown in the Roam
window and the Reduced Roam window.

126 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.5 Sending output to the screen

You can use this dialog box to choose the separations that are displayed. Select a sepa-
ration, or use the Shift or Control keys to select multiple separation names, then click
one of these buttons:

On Displays the selected separation or separations.

Off Hides the selected separation or separations. You cannot use

this button if using it would hide all separations.
The other controls do not require a selected separation.

Color display By default, the RIP displays the page image as quickly as
possible. If you prefer a more accurate (but slower) display of
colors, select Accurate from the Color display drop-down list.
(This control may be unavailable if there are restricted dis-
play colors because of hardware limitations or display modes
chosen in the operating system.)

Hand speed The hand speed determines how quickly the image moves
when you move the mouse. If you find that the page image
moves too quickly, you can slow down the hand speed by
selecting Medium or Slow from the Hand speed drop-down list.
You can close the Roam Options dialog box using the Roam > Options menu option
again. Alternatively, closing the Roam window will also close the Roam Options dia-
log box. If you do not close the Roam Options dialog box explicitly, it will be dis-
played the next time you preview pages.

5.5.3.2 Reduced Roam and Reduced Preview windows

When viewing a large or high resolution image, the Roam > Reduced Roam menu
option is probably available in the Roam window. It allows you to see more of the
image in one view. You must close the Roam window (and the Reduced Roam win-
dow if you opened it) before you can roam another page.

Shift
If you Shift-click at a particular point in the Reduced Roam window, the view in the
Roam window scrolls to center on that point on the page.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 127

 Configuring Output Formats

Shift
If you Shift-drag with the mouse (hold down Shift key, then press and hold the mouse
button), you can range over the part of the page which is visible in the Reduced Roam
window.

5.6 Output to Preview

By setting the output device to Preview in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, you can
preview any jobs processed on your monitor. Using screen preview as a device gives
you the same options as screen roam. As well as navigating a preview of an image,
you can display a reduced preview window, which shows the same image reduced in
size.
If you are running the RIP in one of the multiple modes and wish to preview jobs, you
may find it useful to process those documents using None, and then preview each
page buffer separately from within the Output Controller by clicking the Roam button.
Under Separations, Screening & Color, the Style drop-down list contains all the separa-
tions styles created for the Preview device. The choice of separations style deter-
mines the color space and format of the output.
See Section 5.5 on page 123 for further information about the Preview and None
devices.

5.7 Output to None

The None device option available in the Edit Page Setup dialog box does not produce
any printed output, but it does perform all the required processing for the job, includ-
ing the production of page buffers in the appropriate modes. This can be used for test-
ing and timing jobs, and is especially useful for previewing on screen when you want
to jump between pages or overlay separations using the Output Controller.
Under Separations, Screening & Color, the Style drop-down list contains all the separa-
tions styles created for the None device. The choice of separations style determines
the color space and format of the output.

128 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

Note: The Output Controller is only available in either of the multiple modes. You can
preview a page in one of the single modes by setting the output device to Preview
instead of None.
See Section 5.5 on page 123 for further information about the Preview and None
devices.

5.8 Output to TIFF

The Navigator RIP can produce TIFF (Tag Image File Format) files, which you can
choose by selecting the TIFF output device in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. Most
desktop publishing applications can import this format of file.
The Navigator RIP produces TIFF files which are compatible with TIFF 5.0,
Classes B (bilevel), G (gray scale), and R (RGB color). CMYK color separations are
also supported as defined in the published TIFF 6.0 specification, Appendix K.
Note: From Eclipse Release SP4, if a TIFF file of 4GB or more is produced the output
will abort, and a “File size overflow” message will appear.
Under Separations, Screening & Color, the Style drop-down list contains all the separa-
tions styles created for the TIFF device. The choice of separations style determines
the color space and format of the output.
Note: The TIFF file is complete when it appears in the file system with the name
requested by the user, primarily to ease any subsequent, automatic processing of the
file. (To make this possible, the RIP produces, and then removes, an intermediate file
with the suffix .TMP , or the suffix .TEM if the requested name has extension .TMP .)
You can configure how the RIP produces and names TIFF files by clicking Configure
Device in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, when the selected output device is TIFF.
Alternatively, if you are running the RIP in one of the multiple modes, the device of
any page buffer in the Output Controller can be configured by clicking Configure
Device in the Info dialog box of that page buffer.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 129

 Configuring Output Formats

Figure 5.6 shows the TIFF Configuration dialog box.

Figure 5.6 TIFF Configuration dialog box

The options in this dialog box fall into categories—location and naming, file format,
and post processing—as described in the following subsections.

5.8.1 TIFF file location and naming options

Choose the folder in which the Navigator RIP places files by clicking the Folder but-
ton and choosing a folder from the dialog box— open the folder in the list and then
click OK. The TIFF Configuration dialog box then shows the path to the folder that
you chose.
If Path includes resolution is selected, the RIP places any TIFF files created in a sub
folder of your chosen folder with the name of that sub folder set to the resolution of
the job: for example, 300 or 2400.
From the Navigator RIP Eclipse Release SP4 two naming options are available; Con-
ventional and Template-based file name generation. Conventional file naming is much
the same as previous versions. Template-based file naming uses various tags to gener-

130 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

ate the name. This method has previously been used in a number of Navigator RIP
plugins.
Choose the method you wish to use by selecting the option in the File name generation
field.

5.8.1.1 Template-based name generation

Selecting Template-based in the File name generation text box allows you to specify the
automatic generation of an output file name using a template of fixed text and tags.
When this method is selected, only the Template field is used for file name generation.
All options in the Conventional name generation section are ignored (including the
Suffix field).

Most tags are content tags, representing variables such as the date and time a job is
processed; the other tags allow you to reject names that would be illegal in a specified
operating system.The maximum length of variables can be specified by preceding the
tag name with an integer. For example, <5jobname> truncates the job name to a max-
imum of five characters. Tags that produce numeric values are truncated from left to
right, whereas tags that produce alphanumeric strings (strings containing the charac-
ters a-z, A-Z, and 0-9) are truncated from right to left. See the example below for fur-
ther details.
Fixed text can be part of the file name stem or extension. For example,
stem_<3unique><sepname><dot>tif would generate a file name of the form:
stem_000Cyan.tif, in which stem_ can be any identifying text.

Try to use a file name extension that does not clash with any established convention.
Note: This file naming scheme does not provide useful file names derived from job
names that contain double-byte characters.
The default when Template-based is selected but the template field is left blank is:
TIFF<2unique>.TIF

This means that when 100 files have been processed the RIP will stop.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 131

 Configuring Output Formats

The following tags are available and can be used in any order:

Tag Description

<colorant> The color space of the device, such as DeviceCMYK, DeviceRGB, or

PhotoInk.
<colorname> The name of the separation, such as Cyan.

<date> The date when the job is processed, in the format YYYYMMDD, unless a trun-
cated form is specified.

<dot> Separates the stem of the file name from the file extension, and appears as a
period character ( . ) in the file name. For example, stem<dot>ext
appears as stem.ext. The use of the <dot> tag enables the verification of
the stem and extension lengths.

<exposure> The exposure setting, a device specific integer.

<job#> The job number allocated by the RIP. Automatic numbering means that succes-
sive jobs have incremented job numbers: 000, 001, 002, 003, and so on.

<jobname> The page buffer name without the page number prefix and without characters
illegal to the operating system. Whitespace characters are used, if present in the
job name.

<jobname1> The page buffer name without the page number prefix, and using only alphanu-
meric characters (a-z, A-Z, 0-9). Whitespace characters are not used.

<page#> The page number (allocated by the RIP), within the current job. For example:
002.
<prefix> The page number prefix from the page buffer name, such as 1., 2., and so on.

<prefixonly> You can use this tag to include the characters from the prefix before the full point
in the job name.

<realpage#> The page number is determined using the HqnPageCounter procset. This is zero
if the HqnPageCounter procset is not available.

<time> The time when the job is processed, in the 24-hour format HHMMSS, unless a
truncated form is specified.

<unique> A unique sequence number used to make file names unique when outputting
files to a directory.

<xres> The horizontal resolution of the page, as specified in the page setup.

<yres> The vertical resolution of the page, as specified in the page setup.

Table 5.1 Output file name tags

132 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

The legality of an automatically generated file name is always checked against the
requirements of the operating system on which the RIP is running.
To enable portability of files from one operating system to another, you can also use
tags to specify the operating system for which generated file names must be suitable.
The use of these tags changes the rules by which a file name is deemed valid. The tags
do not modify the file names generated, but cause error messages if the file name is
invalid.
For example, you can create the template <dos>Averylongfilename.tif, but an
error is generated. This error occurs because DOS file names require the 8.3 format
for stem and extension, which this template fails to meet by having 17 characters in its
stem. Table 5.2 lists the operating system tags.

Tag Description

<dos> Verifies that the file name is a legal file name for the MS-DOS operating system.

<mac> Verifies that the file name is a legal file name for the Macintosh operating system.

<macosx> Verifies that the file name is a legal file name for the Mac OS X operating system.

<unix> Verifies that the file name is a legal file name for the UNIX operating system.

<win32> Verifies that the file name is a legal file name for Windows operating systems.

Table 5.2 Operating system tags

Note: Illegal characters which would cause an error on a particular platform are
removed. The template format means that it is not currently possible to include less-
than (<) or greater-than (>) characters in a template due to their use as tag delimiters.
The following examples demonstrate the format of strings produced by individual
tags. Some examples also show how the tags may be used in combination to form a
template. The examples are based on these job details:
Page buffer name: 1. TestPage: Section 20-Book 9
Date: 12th of May, 2004
Note: When creating multiple copies of a file, the same page buffer provides tag infor-
mation. If a template contains dynamic tags (such as <time>, where the value
changes each time that a page buffer file is output), then multiple copies of the file are

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 133

 Configuring Output Formats

created. If the template contains just static tags (such as <jobname>, where the job
name remains constant), a single output file is created. If there is no uniqueness in the
name, because the file already exists, a message to that effect is sent to the RIP moni-
tor and output fails with a file creation error.
<colorant>

This tag includes the color space of the device in the file name string.
For example, the template <colorant><dot>tif produces a file name of the
form PhotoInk.tif for a device using a PhotoInk color space.
<colorname>
The tag <colorname> can be used to include the name of the separation in a
file name, for example: Cyan. You can include just the first letter of the separa-
tion by using the tag <1colorname>, which truncates the separation name to its
first letter. If a composite style is used this is indicated by the string Compos-
ite. If a monochrome style is used this is indicated by the string Gray.
<date>
The template <date><dot>tif produces the file name 20040512.tif. You
can remove the year information by using the tag <4date> to produce the file
name 0512.tif.
<dos>

The use of this tag verifies that the file name is suitable for use in a DOS operat-
ing system. Illegal characters, such as a colon and whitespace characters which
would cause an error, are removed.
For example, the template <dos><jobname><dot>tif, would generate an
illegal file name because the job name is greater than the eight characters
allowed in DOS operating systems. Truncation can be forced by using the tem-
plate <dos><8jobname><dot>tif, which produces the file name
TestPage.tif.
<dot>
This tag separates the file name stem from the file name extension and enables
the verification of their lengths. It is particularly necessary when creating file
names compatible with DOS and Windows, otherwise the extension may be
considered as part of the file name.

134 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

For example, the template <dos><8jobname>.tif would cause an error

because the dot is removed as an illegal character and tif is then considered
part of the file name stem.
<job#>

You can use this tag to include the job number in the file name string. The
default length of the number is three digits, so the first file name created with
this tag would be 000, unless a different length is specified. You can specify the
length of the job number by preceding the <job#> tag with an integer. For
example, <5job#> creates job numbers five digits long.
In multi-page jobs use the <page#> tag as well as the <job#> tag to differenti-
ate between the different pages of a job.
<jobname>

This tag ensures that only legal operating system characters are used in the job
name.
For example, in the RIP running under any Microsoft Windows operating sys-
tem, the template <jobname><dot>tif produces the file name TestPage
Section 20-Book 9.tif. The colon character ( : ) is removed from the file
name, because this is not a valid file name character for any version of
Microsoft Windows.
<jobname1>
This tag ensures that only alphanumeric characters are used in the job name.
For example, in the RIP running under a Windows operating system, the tem-
plate <jobname1><dot>tif produces the file name
TestPageSection20Book9.tif. The colon and whitespace characters are
removed from the file name, because they are not alphanumeric characters.
<mac>

The use of this tag verifies that the file name is suitable for use in a Macintosh
operating system. Illegal characters such as an asterisk, colon, and quotation
marks cause an error. The maximum length of a file name is thirty-one charac-
ters (including the file extension).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 135

 Configuring Output Formats

For example, using the template <mac><28jobname><dot>tif produces the

file name TestPage Section 20-Book 9, in which the colon has been
removed.
<page#>

You can use this tag to include the page number in the file name string.
For example, the template <page#><dot>tif produces a file name of the
form 001.tif. It is advisable to use this tag with the job number tag to differ-
entiate between the same pages of different jobs.
<prefix>

You can use this tag to include the page number prefix from the page buffer
name in the file name string.
For example, based on the page buffer name above, this tag produces the string
1.

<time>

You can use this tag to include the time a file is processed in the file name
string.
For example, if printing to file at 15:39:36 (approximately 3:39 pm) this tag
produces the string 153936.
<unique>

You can use this tag to generate a unique sequence number for the page. The
default length of the number generated is four digits long, so the first number
would be 0000. The length of the number can be specified, as detailed in the
example for the tag <job#>.
When restarting the RIP, the unique numbering will attempt to restart at its ini-
tial value, for example: 0000. However, if a file exists with that number, the
next available unique number is used.
<unix>

The use of this tag verifies that the file name is suitable for use in the UNIX
operating system. Illegal characters such as an asterisk, colon, and quotation
marks cause an error. The <dot> tag cannot be used with this tag because file

136 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

names in UNIX are composed of a single string and are not considered to have
separate file extensions.
For example, using the template <unix><255jobname>.tif produces the file
name TestPageSection20-Book9.tif, in which the colon and whitespace
characters have been removed.
<win32>
The use of this tag verifies that the file name is suitable for use in a Windows
operating system. Illegal characters such as an asterisk, colon, or quotation
marks cause an error.
For example, the template <win32><jobname><dot>tif produces the file
name TestPage Section 20-Book 9.tif, in which the colon has been
removed.
<xres>

You can use this tag to include the horizontal resolution of the page in the file
name string.
For example, you can differentiate between pages with a resolution of
1440 x 720 dpi and 720 x 720 dpi by using this tag. This tag produces a string
such as 1440 or 720, depending on the horizontal resolution.
<yres>

You can use this tag to include the vertical resolution of the page in the file
name string. For example, on a page with the resolution 1440 x 720, this tag
produces the string 720.

5.8.1.2 Conventional name generation

Selecting Conventional in the File name generation text box allows you use the previ-
ously employed method of generating file names.
In general, the RIP names each file within a folder uniquely by combining characters
from some of the following character strings:
• The page number of the job.
• A stem—fixed or variable.
• The name of the separation.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 137

 Configuring Output Formats

• A sequentially increasing number.

• A suffix.
If the combined length of these character strings is sufficiently long, the RIP truncates
the stem to stay within the maximum length of a file name on the computer running
the RIP or an optional tighter limit providing greater portability between different
types of computers.
To impose the limit for portability, select the box Use 8.3 Filenames. This specifies a
maximum length of 8 character names with 3 character extensions: for example,
TIFF3001.tif. This limit is necessary if you wish to move the TIFF files to a PC
running some older versions of MS-DOS or Windows.
Specify the suffix of the file name (that is, the file extension) by typing a string into the
Suffix text box. By convention, many applications expect the suffix of a TIFF file to be
.tif or .TIF.

The stem of the name can be a fixed stem or a variable stem based on the jobname.
You can specify the fixed stem of the file name produced (that is, the first part of the
file name) by typing it into the Stem text box. For example: TIFF.
The RIP creates a simple file name based on the stem, a sequentially increasing num-
ber, and the suffix. For example, for a stem of TIFF the sequence is: TIFF00.tif,
TIFF01.tif, TIFF02.tif, and so on. If any of these files already exists, the RIP
creates the lowest numbered file that does not clash and increases the numbers from
that starting point, avoiding any other existing files.
Alternatively, the RIP can use the job name itself as the variable stem of the file name
if you select Use jobname as stem. The job name is truncated if necessary to keep within
the allowed length of file name.
In this case, the RIP creates a file name based on the page number of the job, the job
name, the color of the separation, a number, and the suffix. For example, when sepa-
rating a color job called jobname.ps, you might see: 1jobnamepsC00.tif,
1jobnamepsM00.tif, 1jobnamepsY00.tif, 1jobnamepsK00.tif,
2jobnamepsC00.tif, 2jobnamepsM00.tif, 2jobnamepsY00.tif,
2jobnamepsK00.tif.

If a file already exists, the RIP creates the next file in the sequence.

138 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

If you do not want the page numbers to appear at the start of the file name, select the
Del page num prefix check box. In this case, the RIP creates file names such as
jobnamepsC01.tif. This option is only relevant if you select Use jobname as stem.

The Use jobname unchanged option is designed to support jobs arriving with names that
include double-byte characters, as used in several Oriental languages and other
extended alphabets. Previously, the output file name was constructed after testing
characters byte by byte, and discarding characters that were potentially illegal in file
names. This is still the safe and strongly recommended option, but when there are ille-
gal characters it can produce files with unpredictable names, which may be difficult to
use in complex workflows.
To retain the previous behavior, leave the check box Use jobname unchanged
unselected.
To enable the new option, select the check box Use jobname unchanged. (For this
option to work, you must also select Use jobname as stem.) The result is that each TIFF
file has a predictable name but that name may be illegal because of length or charac-
ters used in the name. It is very dangerous to use this option where the form of incom-
ing job names is not known before submission to the RIP.
To recap, the full path and name of a TIFF file can be as complex as the following
example:
D:\RIP\TIFF_Folder\300\1jobnamepsM00.tif

In this example, 300 is the resolution of the TIFF file. The preceding text is the path to
the selected folder and the following text is the file name.
The Unique Filenames option ensures that a ## number is added to the filename, and is
selected as a default (providing the same behavior as previous versions of TIFF out-
put). If the Unique Filenames option is not selected, the filename does not have the
unique ## number added to it.
Shown below are examples of template-based file name generation that give similar
(but not necessarily identical) results to the conventional name generation method.
These examples are based on the assumption that the conventional name generation
fields “stem” and “suffix” are set to TIFF and TIF respectively.
The template-based method uses a fixed-length uniqueness field. The template-based
method will always fail to generate a unique name when files exist in the output folder

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 139

 Configuring Output Formats

using every possible number (whereas the conventional method increases the number
of digits in the uniqueness number).
Template-based and Conventional name generation comparison.

Conventional options Template-based equivalent

Use jobname as stem (on its <prefix><jobname1>.TIF

own)
or
<prefixonly><jobname1>.TIF
Note: The first example is not identical because <prefix>
includes a space. The second example is available from 3.10r4.

Use jobname as stem <jobname1>.TIF

Del page num prefix
Del page num prefix (on its TIFF.TIF
own)
See Note 1.

Use 8.3 filenames (on its own) TIFF.TIF

See Note 1.

Use jobname unchanged (on TIFF.TIF

its own)
See Note 1.

Use jobname as stem <prefix><jobname>.TIF

Use jobname unchanged Note: Not identical—the template method strips characters
which are not allowed in file names on the relevant platform,
such as colon and slash (all platforms).

Use jobname as stem <prefix><jobname1><2unique>.TIF

Unique names or
<prefixonly><jobname1><2unique>.TIF
Note: The first example is not identical because <prefix>
includes a space.
The second example is available from v3.10r4.

Use jobname as stem <dos><prefix><3jobname1><2unique>

<dot>TIF
Use 8.3 filenames
Unique names

Table 5.3 Conventional and Template-based equivalents

140 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

Conventional options Template-based equivalent

Use jobname as stem <dos><prefix><3jobname><2unique>

<dot>TIF
Use 8.3 filenames
Not identical.
Use jobname unchanged
See Note 2 and 3.
Unique names

Use jobname as stem <dos><6jobname1><2unique><dot>TIF

Del page num prefix See Note 2.
Use 8.3 filenames

Use jobname as stem <dos><6jobname><2unique><dot>TIF

Del page num prefix See Note 2.
Use 8.3 filenames
Use jobname unchanged
Unique names

Table 5.3 Conventional and Template-based equivalents

Notes on the table:

1. These Conventional name generation options always generate the name
TIFF.TIF.

2. <dos> does not shorten names (which the conventional method's option does),
so the tags used to make up the stem need to total eight. To allow for more char-
acters in the prefix, the jobname would need to use less. You must use <dot> to
separate the name and the extension when using <dos>.
3. Because <dos> strips space and full-stop characters, <prefix> and <prefix-
only> become equivalent when <dos> is used.

5.8.2 TIFF file format options

All the remaining options in the dialog, with the exception of Anti-Aliasing and the Post
Processing section, provide different ways of storing the data in the file but do not
affect the viewed image. These different ways of storing the data may be required by
the specific application that will read the TIFF files or may improve the portability or
speed of access of the files.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 141

 Configuring Output Formats

You can choose the basic internal format used for the file from the TIFF Format drop-
down list. TIFF files can either contain the image data in a Single strip (all in one
chunk) or Multiple strips (several chunks).
Use the Style drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box to choose the color
space and interleaving style.
To produce TIFF files with reverse bit ordering, select the Reverse bit order check box.
This reverses the order of bits in a byte in the raster data of a halftoned TIFF file
(monochrome), so if the byte was 11010001 it becomes 10001011.
Select the Pad to 32 bit alignment box to make each line of the TIFF file data end on a
multiple of 32 bits. This is an efficiency setting, for monochrome output only, that
may make the file faster to read in some applications.
You can choose between Macintosh and IBM PC byte ordering from the Byte ordering
drop-down list. This option lets you select the byte ordering to be that used by Intel
(IBM PC) machines (little endian machines), or Motorola (Macintosh) machines (big
endian machines). This is the order of bytes in a word, needed by the TIFF reader to
correctly interpret the TIFF header. Most TIFF readers can read both sorts of header.
You can choose the compression format used for the file from the Compression drop-
down list. The choices are: None, CCITT Huffman, CCITT Group 3, CCITT
Group 4, LZW, or Packbits.

Note: The CCITT compression formats are only suitable for monochrome output.
Finally, for all except monochrome files, you can choose a level of anti-aliasing in
which intermediate colors are used to visually smooth boundaries. (Anti-aliasing is
most useful at low or medium resolutions.) Select the desired option from the Anti-
Aliasing drop-down list box. None is the fastest option but provides no anti-aliasing.
Of the other options, the higher numbers provide more smoothing, but also require
more time to prepare a given image.
Note: If you output any job to TIFF CMYK Composite (Pixel) with anti-aliasing set at
8x8, the following error will appear for the TIFF device if the resolution is greater
than 300 dpi:
%%[Warning: band size too small - please increase size]%%

To overcome this problem, you should increase the value in the Band size for printing
buffer option. For more information see Section 7.3.4 on page 250.

142 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

5.8.3 TIFF file post processing

You can use this section of the dialog box to define extra actions after the RIP has cre-
ated each TIFF file. To do this, you type text specifying a command and its options in
a way similar to typing in a command prompt or terminal window. The command can
be a simple batch file or a complex application, provided that you can give the com-
mand all necessary options and information on the command line; a command need-
ing operator interaction is likely to cause problems.
You can use such post-processing commands to convert the file to a different format
or to send the data to a destination that is not directly supported by TIFF output from
the RIP. There are several other possibilities, such as extracting information for use in
reports, limited only by your ability to obtain or create a suitable application and to
supply information to it.
The controls in this section of the dialog box are:

Enable Select this check box to enable a post-processing command,

as entered in the Command text field. Leave it unselected to
disable post-processing.

Create Window Check this box to display a command prompt window: for
example, to display any messages produced by the post-pro-
cessing command. The command window closes at the end of
the command so, to read any messages, you may need a
timed delay before the command finishes. (A wait for a key-
press may be useful for testing but becomes unworkable with
many output files.)

Command The entry in this text field is a string specifying a post-pro-

cessing application, which must be available on the computer
running the RIP. Optionally, you can supply options under-
stood by the application, and data such as the name of the rel-
evant input or output files. The command string can contain
substitution codes. The RIP expands the codes and runs the
command at the end of each output file.
Section 5.8.3.1 lists the recognized substitution codes.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 143

 Configuring Output Formats

The string should normally include the file extension and the
full path name of the application file. However, you can type
just the file name if the command file has extension .EXE
and is in one of the folders specified by the PATH variable.
File names passed to the application as data are assumed to
be in the folder receiving the TIFF files, unless you type a
different path name.

5.8.3.1 Post processing substitution codes

The Navigator RIP recognizes the substitution codes shown in Table 5.4. You can
insert an integer between the percent character and the letter code, to restrict the max-

144 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.8 Output to TIFF

imum number of characters used in the result string. For example:%6j represents the
first six characters of the job name.

Code Meaning

%c The current separation color, represented by a string of default length one

character. Typical separation names are Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black. Examples for length one are: C, Y, M, and B.

%d The current date. In the case of the TIFF plugin, this defaults to a length of 6
digits (YYMMDD).
For example: 26 October 1998 becomes 981026.
%8d gives YYYYMMDD.

%e The job exposure, as entered in the Page Setup dialog box. For example:
221.

%f The output TIFF file name, not including the full path. For example, based
on jobname and not suppressing the page number:
1ColdfacepsC05.TIF.

%g A fixed jobname using the following rules:

1. Skip over the leading nn.which the RIP pre-pends.
2. Remove all non-alphanumeric characters.

%j The current page buffer name, as shown in the Output Controller/Monitor.

For example: 1. Coldface.ps (C).

%n The current job number, an integer that the Navigator RIP increments each
time it processes a new job. For example: 115.

%o The full output directory path set by the Folder button (but not the resolu-
tion, if the check box to include resolution has been checked; nor the file
name). For example: C:\S\TIFF\.

%p The current page number within the job. For example: 13.

%r The job resolution, in dots per inch. For example: 72.

Table 5.4 Post processing substitution codes

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 145

 Configuring Output Formats

Code Meaning

%s The current job name, after removal of characters that would be illegal in a
file name. For example: Coldfaceps.
%s uses the following rules:
1. Skip over the leading nn. which the RIP pre-pends.
2. Remove all parenthetical expressions.
3. Remove everything which comes before delimiter characters - : (colon),
; (semi-colon), @ (commercial at), - (hyphen), and control characters.
Delimiters within parentheses do not count.
4. Remove all non-alphanumeric characters.
5. If rules 1-4 result in an empty name, start over again and just use rule 4.

%t The current time in the format HHMMSS, using the 24 hour clock. The
default length is 6. For example, a time just after 7:30 pm would be shown:
193211.

%x The current file name suffix. For example: TIF.

%z The output file name stem, is taken from the job name if Use jobname as
stem is selected, otherwise it will be taken from the Stem text field.
For example: if Stem is set to TIFF, and Use jobname as stem is not
selected; %z will produce TIFF00, TIFF01, and so on for the output files
TIFF00.tif, TIFF01.tif and so on.

Table 5.4 Post processing substitution codes

5.8.3.2 Checking the Command string

The RIP reports each command and the working folder (directory) in the main win-
dow, in the following form. Italics show which text can vary with different jobs and
page setups.
Running post-job command
"C:\RIP\myproc.bat C:\S\TIFF\Coldfaceps.TIF" in directory C:\S\TIFF\

For a more thorough test of how the command behaves when used at the command
prompt of the operating system, select the Create window box and try creating a batch

146 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.9 Sending output to a printer

(.BAT) file with these contents and using the name of the batch file as the application
in your command string.
echo %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
pause

Note: If you have problems with a command, test it outside the RIP by opening a
command window and running the command manually. If you think that you have
used any substitution code from which the RIP might generate an element containing
characters with a special meaning to Windows, try surrounding that code with double
quotes. For example, use "%f" in the Command field rather than just %f. If there are
no special characters involved, look at the number of substitution codes that you are
using and the length of the command string both before and after expansion of the
substitution codes. The limit on the length of the expanded command string varies
with the Microsoft Windows environment but you should have no problems with up to
125 characters in the string after expansion.

5.9 Sending output to a printer

You can use the Navigator RIP to produce output on a variety of different imagesetters
and printers. The options available depend on the device drivers that have been
installed with your copy of the RIP.
If any device drivers have been installed, you can select one of these drivers in the
Edit Page Setup dialog box from the Device drop-down list. Selecting Ultre, PelBox,
or HP650, for example, sends output to the corresponding printer, provided that some-
body has done any necessary configuration to suit the way that the printer is connected
and configured.
You can gain the ability to send output to many other types of device by adding other
output plugins. A simple plugin may add a single device driver, and this manual usu-
ally talks about the device that the driver supports. Complex output plugins can sup-
port several device drivers and provide preconfigured page setups, screening, or color
management. Such complex plugins can require several steps during installation:
hardware installation, system software modifications, software installation in the Nav-
igator RIP, and enabling specific devices or RIP options with passwords. There is
likely to be a separate installation or operator’s manual for such plugins and, perhaps,
a special installation program.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 147

 Configuring Output Formats

Note: It is often dangerous to attempt to re-install or update an installed plugin in the

same copy of the Navigator RIP, because of file name mapping (described briefly on
page 56) and other issues. It is much safer to make a fresh installation of the RIP,
install the new plugin, and then transfer your setting to the fresh installation. The sep-
arate Migrate program can help you make this transfer.
Where a plugin supplies a single device type, the device type becomes ready for use as
soon as it has been installed and, if necessary, enabled with a password. Multiple
device output plugins appear first as one of the options in the Device Manager, where
you can choose which device you want to use. See Section 5.11 on page 150.
Once installed, the name of a device added with a new output plugin appears as one of
the device options in the Edit Page Setup dialog box and you can select it just like any
other device.
Under Separations, Screening & Color, the Style drop-down list contains all the separa-
tions styles created for the current device. The choice of separations style determines
the color space and format of the output.
Note: Some output plugins allow you to select the color generation mode using the
Configure Device button. When this is the case, the Style drop-down list contains only
the separations styles corresponding to the selected color generation mode.
For certain types of output device, a text box labeled Exposure becomes active in Edit
Page Setup. By specifying a number in the text box, you can change the exposure of
the chosen output device: this varies the power of the laser used to create the image,
which in turn makes the image lighter or darker. Refer to the documentation for your
output device to see if it has an exposure control. Choosing the correct exposure is
described in Chapter 13, “Calibration”.
Media and cassette monitoring and management facilities are available for all continu-
ous feed printers supported by the Navigator RIP. For details of how to use these facil-
ities, see Chapter 9, “Media Management”, and “Cassette management” on page 187.

5.10 ProofReady plugins

ProofReady plugins allow the RIP to provide page images to a supported printer.
When you create a Page setup for a ProofReady device a default color setup is applied,
using input and output profiles, and rendering intents defined within the plugin. You

148 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.10 ProofReady plugins

must have ColorPro enabled to use this automatic color management feature. You can
also create your own color setup if you do not wish to use the default settings.
ProofReady plugins have the following capabilities:
• Instant color management using supplied profiles
• A choice of resolution for the output page image for all media sizes and types
supported by the model of printer in use
• User choice of output quality
• Availability of Harlequin screening techniques
• Preview of the screened output
Using the ProofReady plugin is straightforward. You select the required device, con-
figure it, select a profile from the ProofReady menu and then print.
If you would like to improve color accuracy and you have a measurement device
available, you can print an uncalibrated target, measure it with Genlin and then import
the data and make a new calibration set.
You then go back to the Page Setup and select this calibration with the ProofReady
Setup unchanged and proof using the calibration and the ProofReady setup combined.

5.10.1 Using ProofReady plugins

Each ProofReady plugin is supplied ready to use with preconfigured color manage-
ment for several types of media.
With a ProofReady plugin, the way that you apply color management is simpler than
with ColorPro because the setups are ready to use. The special color setups appear in
the ProofReady menu in the Output Device section of the Page Setup dialog box, each
named for a particular combination of media and resolution. Choosing one of the
entries from the ProofReady menu, gives you a default color setup that produces good
results for most jobs.
When an option is selected from the ProofReady menu, the options in the Separations,
Screening and Color section of the Page Setup dialog are enabled. This allows you to
create and edit ProofReady color setups or separation styles. However, non-compati-
ble separation styles and color setups cannot be selected or created.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 149

 Configuring Output Formats

If you want to create a calibration set for your printer rather than using the reference
calibration profile, you can print an uncalibrated target and import the data using Gen-
lin. Once you have created a calibration set, you must choose it from the Calibration
menu.
You can also expand the capabilities of a ProofReady plugin, by creating and using
custom color setups built upon the same profiles used to create the default color set-
ups.
For more details of ProofReady plugins, see the user guide for the relevant Proof-
Ready plugin.

5.11 Multiple device output plugins

The Navigator RIP lets you install multiple device output plugins, which allow you to
drive a number of different devices without needing a separate output plugin for each
one.
Note: Many output plugins intended for use with a range of similar output devices,
such as inkjet printers, are multiple output plugins but are supplied with preconfigured
devices ready for use in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. You should only need to use
the description given here if the installation procedure for a plugin fails to install a
device of the type you want.
This discussion uses the following terms:

Device A device is often a physical piece of equipment which pro-

duces output. It can also be a way of producing a graphics file
in a format like TIFF. A device can be selected by name from
the Device drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

Device type Any particular device is of a certain type. For instance, some
printers are of type Ultre, and some are of type ExxtraSetter.
Distinguishing different device types is like distinguishing
different models of computer. Some options (for example, the
resolutions or media types available) depend on the device
type.

150 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.11 Multiple device output plugins

Output plugin The output plugin is the software you install into the RIP to
make it drive a particular device. It tells the RIP the name and
type of the devices it drives, as well as the address of the
device (that is, where to find the device—in terms of the
computer rather than physical location).
With ordinary output plugins, one plugin can drive only one device. If you want to
install a large number of devices, you need many different output plugins. This can
make configuration of the system cumbersome.
Multiple device output plugins allow you to drive a number of different devices using
just one plugin. You can have any number of devices of a particular type.
Figure 5.7 shows you the configuration of an imaginary system using both single and
multiple device drivers.

Device Driver Multiple Device

Driver

U U U E E
Device1 Device2 Device3 Device4 Device5
Ultre Devices (marked U) ExxtraSetter Devices (marked E)

Figure 5.7 The use of multiple device drivers in the Navigator RIP

Five devices are shown, driven by two output plugins. Device1 is of type Ultre, and
is driven by an ordinary output plugin.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 151

 Configuring Output Formats

However, the remaining four devices are all driven by one multiple device output plu-
gin. Two of these devices are of type Ultre, and two are of type ExxtraSetter, so
this driver must know about at least two device types—it may well know about others.

5.11.1 Installing and using multiple device plugins

Install a multiple device output plugin, just as you would for an ordinary output plugin
and as described in Section 5.9 on page 147. The plugin then appears as one of the
options in the Device Manager dialog box, shown in Figure 5.8.
You create and configure devices driven from a multiple device driver using the
Device Manager. To open the Device Manager click the Device Manager button, which
is the icon button under Output Device in Edit Page Setup. The Device Manager is also
available from the Navigator RIP menu.

Figure 5.8 Device Manager dialog box

The Plugin drop-down list shows the multiple device output plugins currently installed
in the RIP. You can install several multiple device plugins, and this drop-down list lets
you choose between them. The devices driven by the selected plugin appear in the
table listing: each line displays the name, type, and address of one device. For
instance, in Figure 5.8 the dialog box lists devices linked to the Epsonvsd multiple
device plugin.
Note: Both the name and the values entered for each device are used here for illustra-
tion only. There are several multiple device plugins but their names and the acceptable
values vary greatly, so they are documented separately.

152 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.11 Multiple device output plugins

The Device Manager has the following uses:

• To change the configuration of a device, select its entry in the list and click Edit
then use the Device Manager Edit dialog box.
• To add a new device, click New then use the Device Manager Edit dialog box.
• To add a device that is similar to an existing device, select its entry in the list
and click Copy then use the Device Manager Edit dialog box. You must give
the copy a new name.
• To delete a device from the current multiple device driver, select it in the
Device Manager and click Delete. This removes the driver immediately.
When you click the New, Edit, or Copy button, the RIP displays the Device Manager
Edit dialog box shown in Figure 5.9.

Figure 5.9 Device Manager Edit dialog box

This dialog box has three fields that you can edit:
• Specify a name for the device in the Name text box. This is the name that
appears in the Device drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, and
elsewhere.
• Choose the device type from the Type drop-down list—a list of all the device
types that the selected multiple device output plugin supports. The device types
are preset during the manufacture of a plugin and are not subsequently config-
urable. You cannot tell a multiple device driver to look for a device with a type
not listed here.
• Use the Address text box to type in the address of the device you are adding or
editing. This text box provides device information such as a multiplex address,
a SCSI port, or a file name; all highly dependent on the type of device. For
details of what to enter here, refer to the documentation (available from your
supplier) for the specific multiple device output plugin.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 153

 Configuring Output Formats

Click OK when all values in the Device Manager Edit dialog box are as you want
them. This confirmation is provisional: you must also click OK in the Device Manager
to finally save your changes. If you opened the Device Manager from the Edit Page
Setup dialog box, you can also save the changes by clicking the Select button. In addi-
tion to saving the changes, the Select button displays the selected device in the Edit
Page Setup dialog box. Click Cancel to discard all changes.

5.12 Output plugin dialog boxes

Many devices have features which only apply to that device. For example, a certain
printer may be able to print on both sides of the paper, a feature called duplexing. Such
features may be controllable, in which case the device driver offers a dialog box
unique to that driver containing, for example, a check box to turn duplexing on or off.
For example, the device TIFF can have its output file name and format configured (as
shown in Figure 5.6, page 130). If the driver does not have any configurable options,
the Configure Device button is disabled.
Some output plugins allow you to set the color generation mode using the Configure
Device button. In these cases, the Style drop-down list contains only the separations
styles corresponding to the selected color generation mode. Otherwise, the choice of
separations style determines the color space and format of the output.

5.13 Separations, Screening and Color

The options under Separations, Screening & Color allow you to choose the separations
style and color setup for the current page setup.

Style The Style drop-down list allows you to choose a separations

style for the currently selected device. A separations style
contains information on separations and screening (where
appropriate), which you can use in one or more page setups.
The choice of separations style determines the color space
and format of the output.
Note: Some output plugins allow you to set the color genera-
tion mode using the Configure Device button. In this case, the
Style drop-down list contains only the separations styles cor-
responding to the selected color generation mode.

154 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.13 Separations, Screening and Color

If you change the Device, you may have to select a corre-

sponding separations style for the new device before you can
save the page setup.
Click the Separations Manager button to create or edit a sepa-
rations style.

Separations Manager
This icon button is next to the Style drop-down list. It opens
the Separations Manager dialog box, from which you can cre-
ate or edit a separations style. See Chapter 14, “Color Sepa-
ration” for details.
The Separations Manager is independent of the Edit Page
Setup dialog box. You can create or edit a style in the Separa-
tions Manager, even if you do not want to use it in the current
page setup. If you do want to use a new or changed style for
this page setup, select the style in the Separations Manager
and click the Select button.

Color The Color drop-down list allows you to choose a color setup
for the currently selected device and color space. The choice
of separations style determines the color space. Click the
Color Setup Manager button to create or edit a color setup. See
Section 14.8 on page 493 or the separate manual Harlequin
ColorPro User’s Guide.

Color Setup Manager

This icon button is next to the Color drop-down list. It opens
the Color Setup Manager dialog box, from which you can
create or edit a color setup. See the separate manual
Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide.

Separations Manager
This icon button is next to the Style drop-down list. It opens
the Separations Manager dialog box, from which you can cre-
ate or edit a separations style. See Chapter 14, “Color Sepa-
ration” for details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 155

 Configuring Output Formats

The Separations Manager is independent of the Edit Page

Setup dialog box. You can create or edit a style in the Separa-
tions Manager, even if you do not want to use it in the current
page setup. If you do want to use a new or changed style for
this page setup, select the style in the Separations Manager
and click the Select button.

TrapPro Manager
The TrapPro Manager is independent of the Edit Page Setup
dialog box, and is only available if TrapPro is enabled under
Configure RIP > Extras. You can create or edit trapping setups
in the TrapPro Manager, even if you do not want to use them
in the current page setup. If you do want to use a new or
changed trapping setup, select the trapping setup in the Trap-
Pro Manager and click the Select button.
For more information see Section 14.10 on page 508.

5.14 Advanced Media Saving

Media saving is provided as an extra layered option that allows you to instruct the
Navigator RIP to automatically fit pages onto the output media in a way that makes
the most efficient use of the media. For example, when imaging A4 pages they would
normally be placed one above the other on the output media. With media saving
enabled, the A4 pages could be placed side-by-side thus utilizing more of the media
width.

5.14.1 How to activate Advanced Media Saving

To make use of the Advanced Media Saving, you must enter a valid password in the
Configure RIP > Extras dialog. For more information on how to activate a password
protected option see Section 7.8 on page 254.
This option is especially useful with Capstan and Drum devices. For more information
on how to select the extra features supplied with the RIP see Section 7.8, “Extras”.

156 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.14 Advanced Media Saving

Media saving is enabled for each page setup by clicking the Advanced Media Saving
option situated in the lower left, Cassette & Page section of the Edit Page Setup dialog
box.

Figure 5.10 Advanced Media Saving option

With the Advanced Media Saving option selected, jobs processed in the RIP are auto-
matically grouped together with other jobs according to resolution, bit depth, paper
type and output device. The jobs are only output to the device when the page is full. A
collection of jobs on a page is known as a ‘flat’.
For example, you may have a 32 inch roll installed in the output device and a queue of
three A4 sized jobs waiting to be output. Instead of printing a single job along the
width of the roll, the RIP will fit all three jobs along the width of the roll—ultimately
saving media.
The Media saver works by receiving page buffers from the RIP. In the pagebuffer
header there are fields specifying the media width and media height, page width and
page height. The Media saver uses the media width and media height values as the
size of the flat and page width and page height value as the size of the page.
If the device supports cassettes, the media width and media height values are defined
in the Cassette manager. If the device is a roll, media height in the page buffer is the
same as the page height and is ignored by the media saver.
If the device does not support cassettes, the media width and media height values are
those entered by the user in the Page Layout dialog box. Again the roll device rule
applies.
Note: A Watermark RIP cannot currently be used in conjunction with the media sav-
ing option. For this reason, the Advanced Media Saving check box in the Page Setup
dialog box is disabled when using a Watermark RIP.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 157

 Configuring Output Formats

5.14.2 Tracking media width for automatic cassette selection

From Navigator RIP Eclipse Release SP3, the width of media used is tracked to aid
the use of automatic cassette selectors.
For roll fed devices, the length of the media that needs to be exposed when outputting
a flat has always been tracked, with the assumption that the width value is constant.
However, because automatic cassette selection devices are starting to be used, it is
now important for the RIP to track the width of the media used in addition to the
length.
If the width of the flat is reduced, a cassette with smaller width media can be selected
leading to a shorter exposure time and saving of media.
When enabled, the RIP Output menu contains the Advanced Media Saving option,
which on selection displays the Media Saving dialog.

Figure 5.11 Media Saving dialog box

158 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.14 Advanced Media Saving

5.14.3 The Media Saving dialog box

The Media Saving dialog box displays all the information required for you to keep
track of which jobs are being combined into flats. Jobs will only be added to a flat if
the resolution, bit depth, paper type and device are all the same—if any of these are
different a new flat will be created.
As soon as a flat is full it will be output to the device. A flat is deemed ‘full’ when it
reaches that stage where any new page of the same specification will not fit in the flat.
You can send a flat to the output device before it is completed by highlighting the flat
to be output followed by clicking the Print Flat button.
You can ensure enough space is placed around each job by specifying a value in the
Margin between pages option. The Media saver ensures that there is the same given
margin between the edges of the paper and the pages of jobs—it achieves this by abso-
lute positioning of the pages on the flat. Shown below is a diagram illustrating how
pages are position on the flat.

Margin between
pages value

Cut mark
between flats

Figure 5.12 Margin media saving control

Note: If when using media saving you get output that is clipped, you should make the
Margin between jobs value greater than the value of the unprintable margin for the
device.
For a TIFF output device (or any other device with an unlimited media width and
height) the media width and height end up being the same as the Page Size, and the
size of a TIFF flat would be the same as the first page buffer on the flat.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 159

 Configuring Output Formats

From Eclipse Release SP4 the TIFF media width and TIFF media height text boxes are
added to the Media Saving dialog. These options are designed for use with the TIFF
output device (and any other device with unlimited width and height). The values in
these fields are used to calculate the size of the TIFF flat.
If you want to avoid the possibility of a flat never being output, because there may
never be enough page buffers of the same type, you can click the Time to wait between
pages option and enter either a number of minutes or hours. When an incomplete flat
has been displayed in the Media Saving dialog box for the defined time out period, it
will automatically be output to the selected device. When Time to wait between pages is
not checked, partially filled flats will always wait for new pages of the same specifica-
tion to arrive.
You can Roam individual pages displayed in the Media Saving dialog by selecting
them and clicking the Roam button. Similarly, you can delete individual pages by
selecting them and clicking the Delete button.
When a flat is printed, the page buffers that the flat references are deleted from the
disk. Because of this, the Print Flat button is disabled when a Roam window is open.
If a flat is going to be printed because the time out period has expired and a Roam
window is open, the flat is placed in a queue and is printed as soon as all Roam win-
dows are closed.
By default, if the device is roll fed (for example part drum or capstan), the buffered
pages are placed on the flat in one row along the width of the media. The height of the
flat is ultimately that of the tallest page placed on the flat, and the width of the flat is
as specified in the Page Layout dialog.
From Navigator 6.4 Release this default behavior can be changed in two ways.
• For part drum devices, the Fill whole drum (for part drum devices only) check box
controls the behavior that defines the media height as that of the device width,
allowing multiple rows of page buffers on the flat, and as such allowing the
whole of the drum to be utilized.
• For part drum and capstan devices (that is, roll fed devices), the Track flat width
(for roll fed devices only) check box controls the width of the flat. If it is checked,
the flat width will be the width of the widest row of pages on the flat.
You may encounter problems when you are outputting to a device that specifies a min-
imum media width. If a flat is submitted which defines a media width that is smaller

160 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.14 Advanced Media Saving

than the device's minimum media width, the plugin will reject the flat and display the
message:
"Error - The media width is less than the minimum allowed" - and
the job is aborted.

Also note, that if you are outputting separations and the flat size is being tracked
(either width or height), it can occur that the separations will have different sizes. You
are therefore unable to Roam these separations together.
From the Eclipse Release SP3 an option to Switch roam color to black is added to the
Media Saving dialog. This is only enabled when the Order of pages on flat option is set
to none, that is, when more than one separation color is allowed on the same flat.
When selected, the Roam color of the resulting flat is black. This option does not
apply to composite output.
Note: You are able to change the Roam Color from the Throughput Info dialog. See
Section 4.3.2.10 on page 102 for more information.
From version 5.5r1 an extra media saving option is provided called Order of pages on
flat. The Order of pages on flat option provides a drop-down list with the following
options:

none Page buffers are placed on flats if they fit, regardless of color
in the same way media saving worked in version 5.5 of the
Navigator RIP.

by separation
Each flat is dedicated to a particular separation name, there-
fore page buffers with different separation names cannot
appear on the same flat. For example, cyan separations can
only appear on cyan flats. However, once allocated to its flat,
a page buffer may be positioned anywhere on that flat.

by separation, page position

Each flat is dedicated to a particular separation name, in the
same way as described in the by separation option above.
The page buffers for a given job must all be at the same posi-
tion on their respective flats. But no consideration is given to
what other separations may be on these flats. Therefore, it is

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 161

 Configuring Output Formats

not guaranteed that the group of flats that contains all the
page buffers for any one job also contains all the page buffers
for the other separations on the flat.
Note: This option will not work for preseparated jobs,
because the RIP treats each separation as a different job.

by separation, page position, job

Each flat is dedicated to a particular separation name. The
page buffers for a given page must all be at the same position
on their respective flats. It is additionally guaranteed that the
group of flats that contains all the page buffers for any one
job also contains all the page buffers for the other pages on
the flat. Empty spaces will be left for separations that are not
available or missing.
Note: This option will not work for preseparated jobs,
because the RIP treats each separation as a different job.
From the Eclipse Release SP3 a Name flat after option is provided in the Media Saving
dialog which controls the job name of the flat. The default setting is to name the flat
after the 1st PGB in flat which is how it always has worked. That is, the flat is
named after the first job placed on the flat. The alternative option is to name the flat
after the flat number. With this option the job name uses the flat number as it
appears in the dialog, so “Flat 1” will have the job name; 1. Flat 1. Subsequent
new flats will be named incrementally. When the RIP is stopped and started the name
of the first flat will be; 1. Flat 1 unless an existing flat is detected in the media sav-
ing, in which case any new flats will be named incrementally from the name of the
detected flat.
Note: If you decide to change this option midway through a RIP session, any previ-
ously created flats will not be renamed, that is the change will only affect any subse-
quent flats that arrive.

162 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.14 Advanced Media Saving

The following examples illustrate the differences between the by separation,

page position and by separation, page position, job options.

Incoming Job by separation, page by separation, page Flat

position position, job No.

position 1 position 2 position 1 position 2

—, —, —, K1 K1 K4 K1 — Flat 1

C2, M2, Y2, — C2 C4 C2 — Flat 2

—, M3, Y3, — M2 M3 M2 M3 Flat 3

C4, —, Y4, K4 Y2 Y3 Y2 Y3 Flat 4

— Y4 C4 — Flat 5

— — Y4 — Flat 6

— — K4 — Flat 7

Table 5.5 Media saving—example 1

Table 5.5 shows an example where four incoming jobs are placed on flats differently
according to the selection of either; by separation, page position or by sep-
aration, page position, job.

With by separation, page position selected, the first incoming job contains
only a black separation (K1) which is placed on the first flat in position 1. The second
job (C2, M2, Y2) contains no black separation and therefore creates three new flats (2,
3, and 4). The third job contains only magenta and yellow separations (M3, Y3).There
is space on existing flats for this job, magenta flat 3, position 2 and also yellow flat 4,
position 2. The fourth job contains cyan, yellow and black separations, (C4, Y4, K4).
There is space on black flat 1, position 2 for K4, and also space on cyan flat 2, position
2 for C4. However, yellow flat 4 already contains a separation, therefore a new flat (5)
is created and the yellow separation is placed in position 2.
It can be seen from this that each flat contains separations in no particular order. A sin-
gle job can appear on earlier or later flats as long as there is space.
With by separation, page position, job selected, the first three incoming
jobs are treated as before. The black separation in the first job (K1) is placed on the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 163

 Configuring Output Formats

first flat in position 1. The second job (C2, M2, Y2) creates three new flats (2, 3, and
4). And the third job (M3, Y3) finds space on existing flats on, magenta flat 3, position
2 and also yellow flat 4, position 2.
The fourth job contains cyan, yellow and black separations, (C4, Y4, K4). Even though
there is space on black flat 1, position 2 for K4, there is no corresponding space in
position 2 of flat 3 and flat 4 for the magenta and yellow plates. This is because this
option keeps the separations for each job together. Therefore, new flats 5, 6 and 7 are
created to accommodate (in position 1), the cyan, yellow and black separations from
incoming job 4.
This illustrates that using this option, jobs stay together and appear on consecutive
flats.

Incoming Job by separation, page by separation, page Flat

position position, job No.

position 1 position 2 position 1 position 2

C1, M1, —, — C1 C3 C1 — Flat 1

—, M2, Y2, — M1 M2 M1 M2 Flat 2

C3, M3, Y3, — — Y2 — Y2 Flat 3

— M3 C3 — Flat 4

— Y3 M3 — Flat 5

— — Y3 — Flat 6

Table 5.6 Media saving—example 2

Table 5.6 shows an example where three incoming jobs are placed on flats differently
according to the selection of either; by separation, page position or by sep-
aration, page position, job.

With by separation, page position selected, the first incoming job contains a
cyan and magenta separation (C1, M1) which are placed on flat 1 and 2, position 1.
The second job, (M2, Y2) can use the second position in flat 2 for the magenta and cre-
ates a new flat (3) for the yellow. The third job contains cyan, magenta and yellow
separations (C3, M3, Y3).There is space on flat 1 for the cyan separation, but no space
on flats 2 and 3, position 2 for the magenta and yellow. (The yellow cannot go onto

164 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.14 Advanced Media Saving

flat 3, position 1 because it would not be in the correct position for registration).
Therefore, new flats (4 and 5) are used and the cyan and magenta separations are
placed into position 2.
Again, each flat can contain separations in no particular order. A single job can appear
on earlier or later flats as long as there is space.
With by separation, page position, job selected, the first two jobs behave
as before. The first incoming job contains a cyan and magenta separation (C1, M1)
which are placed on flat 1 and 2, position 1. The second job, (M2, Y2) can use the sec-
ond position in flat 2 for the magenta and creates a new flat (3) for the yellow.
The third job contains cyan, magenta and yellow separations (C3, M3, Y3).There is
space on flat 1 for the cyan separation, on flat 1, position 2 but it is not used because
the next flats do not have space. Therefore, new flats (4, 5 and 6) are created and the
cyan, magenta and yellow separations are placed into position 1 on those flats.
This illustrates that using this option, jobs stay together and appear on consecutive
flats.

5.14.4 Media Saving dialog box example

The following example of the Media saving dialog box shows a number of flats in var-
ious stages of construction:

Figure 5.13 Example flats

In this example there are three flats in construction: Flat 10 is destined to be output
on a Capstan device and has two jobs called Box.ps and Box1.ps using 67% of the
flat. Flat 11 is destined for output on a Drum device and has three jobs using 20% of
the flat. Flat 12 is also destined for output on a Capstan device but at a different res-
olution to Flat 10.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 165

 Configuring Output Formats

5.15 Media and time saving using optimization

The Navigator RIP provides media and time saving options in the Optimization drop-
down list in the Processing section of the Page setup dialog box. These options are
only available if your output device supports them. If your output device does not sup-
port these features, the options will not appear in the list.
The media saving described in this section is different to the Media saving option
described under Section 5.14 and does a different job. Using the two options together
may give unpredictable results.
The Optimization drop-down list allows you to instruct the RIP to rotate pages auto-
matically if doing so saves time or media. For capstan and drum type devices you can
choose Media Saving. For drum type devices you can also choose Time Saving.
If you choose Media Saving in the Optimization drop-down list, the RIP rotates the
image if it calculates that media can be saved by doing so. You should ensure that the
media width is correctly set within the Cassette Manager to make this option work
effectively. (See Chapter 9, “Media Management”.) If the current device is a drum
recorder, you can choose Time Saving, which rotates the page in whichever direc-
tion takes the least time to output.
Note: Some applications, such as QuarkXPress, generate a page size for the job which
is dependent on the media width set in the application. Media saving often cannot
work when processing jobs generated by these applications. To avoid this problem,
make the media width in the application the same as the width of the page being cre-
ated (including any crop marks which are to be printed).

5.15.1 Other options that save media

Selecting the Trim page check box in the Effects section causes the RIP to trim any
white space off the top and bottom of each page.
When printing an image which does not contain a PageSize definition (such as an
EPS), and also which is smaller than the currently configured page size, the Trim Page
feature will trim the page size to that of the image size. For example, printing an A5
image to a Page Setup which has A3 defined as the Page Size would normally result in
a roll output device printing onto media A3 in size with an A5 image on it. With Trim
Page selected, a roll output device will produce media A5 in size with an A5 image on
it. This example illustrates that the amount of media used is considerably reduced.

166 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.16 Default page size

Note: Trim page will trim to the full size of the image whether or not that image con-
tains white space.
Note: If you are sending output to a device fed with fixed size sheets, such as a typical
laser printer, using Trim page does not save media and is very likely to alter the regis-
tration between pages: for example, when the content of those pages has a variable
outline or bounding box.
Several features listed in the Enable Feature drop-down list of the Edit Page Setup dia-
log box instruct the RIP to use media as economically as possible. In general, these
features pack pages together so that, for example, more than one page is imaged side
by side in the length of media that would otherwise be used by one page. See “Fea-
tures” on page 184 for a fuller description.

5.16 Default page size

Normally a job sets its own page size and overrides the default page size. However, in
some cases (such as when using the Proof Fonts command), the RIP uses the default
page size.
You can specify the default page size by clicking Page layout (in the Edit Page Setup
dialog box) to display the Page Layout dialog box. You can specify either a standard
page size by name, or the absolute page width and height.
If you do not want to use a standard page size using Page size, specify your preferred
values in the Page width and Page height text boxes. Sizes can be in inches, millimeters,
picas, or points, depending on the current selection in the Select units drop-down list
to the right of the Page width box. When you have specified a nonstandard size, the
RIP displays Other in the Paper size drop-down list.

5.17 Margins
You can specify margins for a job by clicking Page layout to display the Page Layout
dialog box. This dialog box varies slightly, depending on the type of device. The
example in Figure 5.14 is for a sheet fed device.
You can set the margins by typing values into the appropriate text boxes. Any margins
you specify are added to values set within the job.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 167

 Configuring Output Formats

Choose the units to use from the Select units drop-down list. When you specify the left
margin, the right margin is calculated automatically, based on the total width of the
media and the size of the image. If you wish, you can specify a negative value for any
margin. For example a -1.0 inch left margin would clip 1 inch off the left hand side of
the page.

Figure 5.14 A typical Page Layout dialog box

You can center the page on the media by selecting the relevant option. Note that the
page is always centered if you choose this option, even if the job itself explicitly sets
the page width.
If you are using one of the multiple modes, the Page Layout dialog box is also avail-
able from the Info dialog box. This dialog box is displayed when you click Info in the
Output Controller (see Section 4.3.2.2 on page 99). When chosen from the Output
Controller, the page layout options are specific to the selected page or, optionally, to
all pages in the same job. When chosen from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, the
options are applied to all jobs subsequently interpreted with that setup.
The output device dimensions are built into the driver for the current device, and can-
not be changed. You can set the media width in the Cassette Manager. For details of
how to use the Cassette Manager and other media management facilities, see Chapter
9, “Media Management”.

168 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.18 Printing effects

5.18 Printing effects

The Effects options in the Edit Page Setup dialog box allow you to produce output
using assorted effects.
The dialog box displays a representation of a page (near the Effects label), in which the
letters AB are written. You can either click the Rotate, Negative, and Mirrorprint
options to select the effects, or you can click the Effects page to cycle through all the
possible combinations of effects.
The Effects page changes as you select any of the options, illustrating the effects of
using the selected combination.

The Rotate drop-down list allows you to select 90, 180, and 270
degree rotations. The image itself remains unchanged. If the job
was already set to rotate in the opposite direction, the two rotations
cancel, giving non-rotated output. Similarly, if the job rotates in the
same direction, the two rotations add.

If Negative is selected, the page produced is in negative. If the job

was already in negative (that is, a negative image is defined in the
page description), the two negatives cancel each other out, giving
positive output.
Using this option may affect the proper choice of calibration set—
see Chapter 13, “Calibration”.

If Mirrorprint is selected, the RIP produces a mirrored image

which is reflected about the vertical axis. However, if the job being
sent was already reflected, selecting the Mirrorprint option cancels
this out, giving a non-mirrored image.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 169

 Configuring Output Formats

Eclipse Release SP3 and later of the Navigator RIP includes a Con-
trol Strip check box in the Effects panel of the Page Setup dialog
box.
For more information see “Control strip” below.

5.19 Control strip

If you select this check box, a control strip is added to your job, based on the area
available on the output medium. This is particularly helpful when creating proofs,
because the control strip indicates the settings used for the job and allows you to ana-
lyze the print quality.
Note: The control strip is not suitable for use when outputting to platesetters.
The control strip includes:
• Logos identifying the RIP as a Navigator RIP, including a Global Graphics
Software (GGS) logo.
• A color bar for both visual and colorimetric analysis of the print quality.
• A text slugline carrying data about the job file itself and the print configuration.
The color bar printed on cut-sheet media may be constructed using one, two or four
lines of color patches, depending on the space available. It may include the following
groups of patches:
• Step wedges, containing different numbers of patches at different tint values.
These may contain CMYK or spot colors.
• Graduated linear tints.
• Progressives (secondary and tertiary colors built from Cyan, Magenta and Yel-
low).
• Neutral patches comparing CMY combinations with plain Black, and using
values from a variety of standardized printing conditions, such as SWOP and
ISO 12647-2.

170 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

™
• ChipCheck —a patent-pending approach that allows the color accuracy of the
proof to be tested quickly and cheaply without requiring the use of a colorime-
ter.
• PDF/X status, showing whether the job being printed is PDF/X compliant or
not, and whether it claims to be.
• Orientation—showing the orientation of the page, and whether or not it is
saved in negative in the original document.
• Feed direction—showing how the output was fed through the printer, as an aid
to resolve some kinds of print artifacts.
• Enfocus Status Check reporting.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 171

 Configuring Output Formats

A sample control strip is shown below:

Harlequin Logo

Page orientation Job name

Paper feed
Registration Job style
Paper measurement Page number
Job file name

File modification date and time

™
ChipCheck

Output device

Print date and time

Process step wedges Resolution

Page setup name

Color setup name

Screening

Anti-alias factor

RIP version
Progressives

Serial number
Neutrals

Global Graphics
Software Logo

172 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

5.19.1 Control strip elements

The control strip contains some of the following elements, depending on your job con-
figuration and the available space on your media.

5.19.1.1 Harlequin At Heart logo

Figure 5.15 Harlequin at Heart logo

The Harlequin at Heart logo is always part of a control strip and is located at the left
end of the strip.

5.19.1.2 Orientation icon

Figure 5.16 Orientation icon

The orientation icon indicates the orientation of the job, that is, whether the job has
been rotated and so on. It also shows as black on white if the incoming job was nega-
tive and forced to positive by the RIP.

5.19.1.3 Paper feed icon

Figure 5.17 Paper feed icon

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 173

 Configuring Output Formats

The paper feed icon indicates the direction in which the paper is fed through the
printer.

5.19.1.4 Registration icon

Figure 5.18 Registration icon

The registration icon allows you to check for any misregistration errors.

5.19.1.5 Paper measurement icon

Figure 5.19 Paper measurement icon

The paper measurement icon allows you to take a paper white reading for the purposes
of calibrating your measurement device.

5.19.1.6 PDF/X validation icon

Figure 5.20 PDF/X validation icon

When processing a PDF file the PDF/X validation icon will be displayed. If the file
claims to be PDF/X-1a:2001 or PDF/X-3:2002 then the RIP will validate that claim

174 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

during interpretation. The claimed conformance level will be displayed above the
PDF/X validation icon, and the characterized printing condition for which it was pre-
pared will be displayed below it.
If the file is a valid PDF/X file the icon to the right will be a tick, otherwise a cross
will be shown.
A PDF file that does not claim to be PDF/X compliant will show Baseline PDF on the
green background.
Files that claim to be PDF/X conformance levels that are not explicitly supported by
the RIP will not be validated, and will show a question mark in the black box to the
right.This also applies to files that claim to comply with a conformance level which
are not fully validated in the current page setup. For example, PDF/X files will not be
validated if the option in the Accept Type(s) menu of the PDF Options dialog box has
been set to Any PDF <= 1.4 as basic PDF, for instance.

5.19.1.7 PDF file status check icon

Figure 5.21 PDF file status check icon

If you select the Do status check check box in the PDF Options dialog box, you will see
one of the above icons in your control strip.
The first icon in Figure 5.21 appears when a certified PDF file is printed, and when the
PDF profile used to certify it matches one of the profiles selected in the PDF Options
dialog box.
The second icon in Figure 5.21 appears when a certified PDF file is printed, but the
PDF file was made with a PDF profile that does not match one of the profiles selected
in the PDF Options dialog box.
The third icon in Figure 5.21 appears when a PDF file is printed that is not certified.
That is, the PDF was file was never certified, or was certified but has changed since.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 175

 Configuring Output Formats

No icons are shown if the file printed is not a PDF, or if the Do status check check box
has not been selected in the PDF Options dialog box.

5.19.1.8 ChipCheck strip ™

™
Figure 5.22 ChipCheck strip

™
ChipCheck is designed to allow very rapid and easy validation that a proofer has been
correctly configured without requiring the use of instruments. It will identify whether
an error has been introduced by, for example, the wrong media selection in the RIP
interface, or whether the required calibration has not been performed. It can also
quickly check whether a stored proof has aged enough to alter the colors significantly.
To read the strip, compare chips from a valid Pantone Coated swatch book with the
patches in the color bar under appropriately controlled lighting (typically D50).
For even faster and easier checking of proofs, build a strip of Pantone chips in the cor-
rect order to compare with the patches.

5.19.1.9 Process step wedges

Figure 5.23 Process step wedges

The process step wedges allow you to measure the process colors at various incre-
ments. The increments used depend on the space available.

176 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

5.19.1.10 Progressives strip

Figure 5.24 Progressives strip

The progressives strip allow you to measure color combinations. Each patch has a
label above it indicating the colors used in the patch, for example, CM is a patch con-
taining Cyan and Magenta. The percentage of each color varies, according to the
space available. For example, the first six patches in the strip in Figure 5.24 contain
100% of each named color, and the last six patches contain 50% of each named color.

5.19.1.11 Neutrals strip

Figure 5.25 Neutrals strip

The neutrals strip allows you to test the neutral grays produced by your job settings.
The neutral patches compare CMY combinations with plain Black, and use values
from a variety of standardized printing conditions, such as SWOP and ISO 12647-2.
The appearance of the neutrals strip varies depending on the space available.
Combined with ChipCheck (see Section 5.19.1.8), this provides a very rapid method
of checking the configuration of the proofing device. If the CMY combinations do not
match the K tints you may have selected the wrong media in the RIP, or you may need
to recalibrate the printer.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 177

 Configuring Output Formats

5.19.1.12 Company logo

Figure 5.26 Company logo

The company logo always appears on the control strip and represents the distributor of
the Navigator RIP.

5.19.1.13 Job name icon

Figure 5.27 Job name icon

The job name icon precedes the job name.

5.19.1.14 Job style icon

Figure 5.28 Job style icon

The job style icons indicate the separations, screening and color Style used for the job,
as specified in the page setup.
The first icon in Figure 5.28 indicates a composite color job; the second icon indicates
an unrecombined, preseparated job, and the third icon indicates a recombined, presep-
arated job (monochrome jobs will be marked as composite)

178 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

5.19.1.15 Page number icon

Figure 5.29 Page number icon

The page number icon precedes the page number. Note that the page number is the
page number within the current file. If for example, you have printed to PostScript
from your design application and chosen to print just pages 7 and 8, then they will be
labelled as pages 1 and 2 on the proofs.

5.19.1.16 Job file name icon

Figure 5.30 Job file name icon

The job file name icon precedes the job file name.

5.19.1.17 File modification date icon

Figure 5.31 File modification date icon

The file modification date icon precedes the date and time at which the file was last
modified. The file modification date will only be shown if it is recorded in the file.
Note: The brackets and slashes within the control strip delimit different parts of the
strip. The date in the first set of brackets is the file modification date (if available), and
the date in the second set of brackets is the print date.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 179

 Configuring Output Formats

5.19.1.18 Print date icon

Figure 5.32 Print date icon

The print date icon precedes the print date and time.
Note: The brackets and slashes within the control strip delimit different parts of the
strip. The date in the first set of brackets is the file modification date (if available), and
the date in the second set of brackets is the print date.

5.19.1.19 Scale icon

Figure 5.33 Scale icon

The scale icon precedes details of the scale factor, for example, 50.0%.

5.19.1.20 Clipped icon

Figure 5.34 Clipped icon

The clipped icon is a warning that not all of the 'page' of the job may be shown. This
may be due to the fact that the non-printing margins of the output device have not
been accounted for. See Section 5.19.2.2 for more details.

180 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.19 Control strip

5.19.1.21 File creator icon

Figure 5.35 File creator icon

The file creator icon precedes the name of the person and/or machine that created the
PostScript or PDF file. This information is only displayed if it is recorded in the file.

5.19.1.22 Output device icon

Figure 5.36 Output device icon

The output device icon precedes the name of the output device, for example, TIFF.

5.19.1.23 Page setup name icon

Figure 5.37 Page setup name icon

The page setup name icon precedes the page setup name.

5.19.1.24 Color setup name icon

Figure 5.38 Color setup name icon

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 181

 Configuring Output Formats

The color setup name icon precedes the name of the color setup. If the default color
setup is being used, then the text (No Color Management) is displayed.

5.19.1.25 Screening icon

Figure 5.39 Screening icon

The screening icon precedes details of the type of screening used, for example, HDS
Fine.

5.19.1.26 Resolution icon

Figure 5.40 Resolution icon

The resolution icon precedes the resolution details, for example, 300.0 dpi.

5.19.1.27 Anti-alias factor icon

Figure 5.41 Anti-alias icon

The anti-alias icon precedes the details of the anti-alias factor, for example, 3x3. The
Anti-Aliasing option is available in the Configuration dialog box of various plugins,
such as the TIFF plugin.

182 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.20 Scaling the image

5.19.1.28 Serial number icon

Figure 5.42 Serial number icon

The serial number icon precedes the Navigator RIP serial number details. This allows
you to identify the Navigator RIP that produced the proof.

5.19.2 Configuration

5.19.2.1 Page image positioning

The page image will normally be placed in the lower left corner of the imageable area
of the printer (after allowance for the control strip). It can be centered in the imageable
area in either dimension using the Center page on Media Width/Length check boxes in
the Page Layout dialog box. These options will not move the control strip, which will
remain along one side of the sheet or roll.

5.19.2.2 Margins file

In some cases, the following warning may be displayed in the RIP Monitor window:
%%[ WARNING: Control Strip: no margins file found, output may be
clipped ]%%

If necessary, speak to your plugin supplier for further details on margins files.

5.20 Scaling the image

You may not always want to print your job at its original size. The horizontal and ver-
tical scaling boxes in the Edit Page Setup dialog box allow you to print out any job at
a specified scale. This changes the page size.
All scales are expressed as a percentage of the original size. Thus, to print out a copy
of a job at half the linear size, specify 50 in both the horizontal and vertical scaling
text boxes. To print it out at twice the size, specify 200.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 183

 Configuring Output Formats

You can specify different horizontal and vertical scales if you wish. Note that the
aspect ratio of the image changes unless the values in the horizontal and vertical scal-
ing boxes are the same.
Screen ruling is not affected by the scale at which a job is output.

5.21 Features
You may sometimes want to apply a special effect to your jobs that is not otherwise
available from the Edit Page Setup dialog box. You can do this in the Navigator RIP
by using features. These are both powerful and easy to use.
For instance, you can use a feature to perform a simple page imposition that prints two
pages side by side (and at reduced-scale if required) on one normal sized page to
reduce media consumption when in the draft stages of document production. Another
feature scans PostScript-language jobs for the use of spot colors and reports the colors
on screen before you print.
You can use features by choosing one from a drop-down list, without knowing how
they work, but with a little knowledge you can add new features. A Navigator RIP fea-
ture is a fragment of PostScript-language code which is executed just before a job is
run. The fragment specifies the changes to be made to the interpretation of that job,
but is completely independent of it.

5.21.1 Using features

Several page features are supplied with the RIP, ready for immediate use. To use one
of these features, select the Enable Feature check box and select a feature from the
drop-down list. Make any other settings you wish and save the page setup. The feature
is applied to all jobs using that page setup until you clear the check box.
Many of the features enable you to save media by packing pages on large format
devices, or to get more information about jobs and any errors arising from jobs. In
addition, one feature (Image replacement) enables substitution of high resolution
images for PostScript-language jobs, using Open Prepress Interface (OPI) and
Desktop Color Separation (DCS) schemes.

184 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.21 Features

The page features currently supplied and supported are:

2 across This imposes two pages side by side on the film. By default
no space is left between the pages—the OptimalGutter
value below may be edited to change this effect.

2 up This imposes two pages one above the other on the film. By
default no space is left between the pages—the Optimal-
Gutter value below may be edited to change this effect.

Bounding Box This will read BoundingBox and PageBoundingBox com-

ments in PostScript files interpreted through the RIP and will
use the page size and origin position set in these comments as
long as no page size has already been explicitly set by the job.
This is useful for processing EPS files which should not
explicitly set page sizes, but which may have an origin at
some distance from the lower left corner of the image.

Crop Marks This will add crop marks and gray wedges to a page output
through the RIP. If the page is monochrome, register marks,
crop marks, file name, time & date of processing and a single
gray wedge will be added.
If the page is a composite page being auto-separated by the
RIP, register marks, crop marks, file name, time & date will
be added, along with a step-wedge for each of CMYK, and a
set of progressive patches for ink-trapping and neutral density
tests.
If the job is preseparated, the RIP will also detect the color of
each plate and add the appropriate marks.
If the page is being auto-separated and also includes spot sep-
arations, crop and register marks will be added to each spot
separation plate, and a note of the plate name included.

Error Handler (Long and Short)

Error messages generated by the RIP are generally fairly con-
cise. These page features make the RIP generate longer and
shorter (but longer than normal) error messages.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 185

 Configuring Output Formats

Fill Film This puts as many pages of a multi-page job onto the output
media as will fit. The size of the input pages is determined by
the setpagedevice or setpageparams call, or the first
BoundingBox or PageBoundingBox comments if there is
no setpagedevice, and as Letter if there is no indication at
all. The output page size is taken as it stands on entry, typi-
cally from the page setup.

Image Replacement
This will load both OPI and DCS image replacement code.

List Spot Colors

This lists to the system monitor / console the names of all the
spot colors accessible in the current job. Also loads the level
1 separator so all level 1 spot colors are also displayed.

Print info on error

Use this to add additional information related to PostScript
errors to the output, and to image the page interpreted so far.

Print page on error

Use this file as a page feature (or a boot option in HqnOEM) to
print partial pages when a PostScript error other than inter-
rupt or timeout occurs.
Note: Each page feature is a simple text file and contains a similar description, some-
times with more detail, as a comment.

5.21.2 Adding other features

The Enable Feature list provides a number of commonly useful features, but there are
other supplied examples that you can add to the list and a PostScript-language pro-
grammer can create many more. One of the supplied examples (Draft) prints the
word Draft on each page. Another one (Pack Drum) saves film by packing images on
a drum recorder in the way that Fill Film does on a sheet-fed device and Pack
Capstan does on a capstan recorder. Finally, PGB hot folder enables you to
resubmit page buffers to the version of the RIP that produced them.

186 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.22 Cassette management

Note: All page features in the Examples folder are supplied as an illustration of what
is possible with the Navigator RIP. The page features are believed to work as
described but they are not supported as a part of the Navigator RIP. Page features that
appear in the Enable Feature list are supported but are documented only in the Post-
Script-language files.
A feature appears in the Enable Feature list only if there is a corresponding PostScript-
language file in the Page Features folder in the SW folder where you have installed
the RIP. The name of the feature in the dialog box is the same as the file name.
All the other supplied examples are files in an Examples folder in the
Page Features folder. There is also a file called Read Me that describes the exam-
ple features and how to create others. To make an example feature available, copy the
file from Examples into the enclosing Page Features folder and display the Edit
Page Setup dialog box.
Similarly, to remove a feature, move it from the Page Features folder into the
Examples folder.

You can add other, new, features by creating appropriate PostScript-language files and
placing them in the Page Features folder.

5.22 Cassette management

If you are using the media management facilities to keep track of the amount of media
you have left in your output devices, or if you are using media optimization, you must
specify the cassette which is to be used with the page setup. Do this using the Cassette
drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. Note that if you change the Device,
you have to choose a cassette name from the Cassette list, unless media management is
disabled for that device.
See Chapter 9, “Media Management”, for more details.

5.23 Page Setup Options

The Page Setup Options dialog box, shown in Figure 5.43, provides several options
that affect the way the RIP processes jobs. Display this dialog box by clicking the
Options button in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 187

 Configuring Output Formats

Several options provide compatibility with jobs using PostScript LanguageLevel 2 or

LanguageLevel 1. Other options deal with more general fault conditions or are conve-
nience features. (Click the Extras button in this dialog box to see options specific to
job-creating applications: see Section 5.24 on page 193 for details.) This section
describes each option in the dialog box.

Figure 5.43 Page Setup Options dialog box

5.23.1 PostScript Language compatibility level

This option allows you to choose the level of PostScript-language compatibility for
jobs submitted to this page setup. You can choose PostScript LanguageLevel 1, 2,
or 3.
By default, this option is set to 3, because most jobs run correctly and this setting
allows the RIP to use the maximum number of PostScript-language features and Nav-
igator RIP extensions. The result is often faster operation or increased output quality.
You may need to set the value to 1 or 2 for a small number of older jobs to run cor-
rectly. For example: if you set this option to 2, the RIP interprets jobs using the
Level 2 PostScript-language conventions, together with any non-conflicting Harlequin
extensions. This means that level 2 jobs run in exactly the expected environment.

188 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.23 Page Setup Options

Well-constructed level 3 jobs also run but are likely to operate more slowly if they use
features better supported in LanguageLevel 3.

5.23.2 Run prep at start of job

Prep files are libraries of PostScript-language routines that can be downloaded into a
RIP and used whenever necessary. Many LaserWriter drivers require certain libraries
to be loaded before they can be used. See Section 7.9.1 on page 256, for details.
If the box for this option is selected and a prep file chosen from the drop-down list, the
chosen prep file is run at the start of every job that is interpreted with the relevant page
setup.
By default, this option is not selected.

5.23.3 Remove color operators

This option also provides PostScript language compatibility. There are two cases
where you should consider using it.
• One case occurs because of a bug in LaserWriter Driver 6.0. If you are using
this driver and get a PostScript-language error, especially if the sending appli-
cation is Freehand (formerly from Aldus, now Macromedia), then select this
option and output the job again.
• Some applications use PostScript Level 1 extended color operators incorrectly,
producing incorrect (for example, blank) output. If you select this option, the
RIP uses basic color operators instead, and output appears correctly.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Language compatibility level
option is set to 1. Color operators are always available in PostScript LanguageLevel 2
and 3.

5.23.4 Fast patterns

This option enables Level 1 PostScript patterns defined as halftone screens to be pro-
cessed more quickly, but at a lower resolution than normal. You should not use this
option if you require high quality images, since the option makes the output of any
user defined patterns have a more grainy texture than normal at resolutions above
300 dpi.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 189

 Configuring Output Formats

By default, this option is not selected.

5.23.5 Emulate old imagemask behavior

This option is used to overcome a now rarely seen bug in a previous version of the
Adobe interpreter. The effects of this bug may still be present in some older files of
PostScript-language code.
By selecting the Emulate old imagemask behavior check box, you can print these old
jobs correctly.
By default, this option is not selected.

Consider the case where a page of PostScript-lan-

guage code contains a negative image mask. If the
page is itself printed in negative, the image mask
appears normal, as illustrated on the left.

In older jobs, negative image masks are still

printed in negative, producing the error illustrated
on the left. This is because the PostScript-lan-
guage code in the job is attempting to rectify a bug
that is no longer present.

5.23.6 Add showpage at end of job if necessary

Certain PostScript-language file formats, such as EPS, EPSF, or EPSI (all forms of
encapsulated PostScript), do not necessarily include a showpage operator at the end
of the job. To print these files directly from a RIP, a showpage may need to be added.
If this option is selected, the RIP automatically appends a showpage to jobs when
necessary.
Note: If a job containing a PostScript-language error is aborted, any partially com-
plete page is processed and output.
By default, this option is not selected.

190 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.23 Page Setup Options

5.23.7 Abort if calibration on, and the selected cal set does not
match job
If you require job calibration, select this option to prevent the RIP printing jobs with
an inappropriate calibration set. The calibration set is specified in the page setup. See
Chapter 13, “Calibration” for details.
By default, this option is not selected.

5.23.8 Abort the job if any fonts are missing

Select this option to ensure that a job is aborted if any font it uses is not available. If
you leave this option unselected, the RIP attempts to use a suitable replacement for
any missing font.
By default, this option is not selected.
You are able to specify Default fonts in the SW/Config/FontSubstitution file.
See Section 12.10 on page 411 for more details.

5.23.9 Enable font emulation

If a font is missing from a job, and is not available in the RIP, you can select this
option to substitute the missing font with suitable facsimile text based on the charac-
teristics of the missing font in terms of style, spacing, height and width. In this way, a
suitable readable font with similar characteristics of the target font is used in place of a
missing font.
Font emulation is often acceptable when digital printing, and can be preferable to the
file not being produced at all.
For more information see Section 12.13 on page 413.

5.23.10 Preserve monochrome and preseparated jobs

Select this option only if it is important to emulate the behavior of a traditional sepa-
rating workflow when a monochrome or preseparated job is submitted to the RIP
using a page setup that is intended for automatic separation of composite color jobs.
This option helps you avoid the extra non-useful, sometimes blank, separations that
can be produced when a monochrome or preseparated job is accidentally submitted
using a page setup that is intended for automatic separation of composite color jobs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 191

 Configuring Output Formats

Selecting this option ensures that the RIP generates correctly labeled separations.
Select this option to make monochrome jobs produce a single black separation, and to
make preseparated color jobs produce correctly labeled separations.(Even though cor-
rectly labeled, the separations may also be blank.)
Note: You can avoid blank separations by selecting Not Blank in the Print column of
the Edit Style dialog box, as described in Section 14.7.1 on page 486. That option is
slightly different because if it is used alone on preseparated jobs in a separating work-
flow then the resultant separation may have the wrong label: for example, a presepa-
rated job for CMYK may produce only four K (black) separations. It can be useful to
use both options together.

5.23.11 Number of copies to print

This text box contains the number of copies of a job that are to be printed. You can
type a new value into the box to specify a particular number of copies.
By default, this option is set to 1 (one).

5.23.12 Minimum shaded fill levels

With the introduction of PostScript LanguageLevel 3 and PDF version 1.3, it is possi-
ble to construct vignettes using Shaded Fills. There are a number of controls available
to impact the quality of these Shaded Fills and one which is particularly important is
the smoothness setting.
This option essentially controls the number of steps used to produce a vignette. Some
applications set smoothness to a value which will not produce good results on some
devices (Adobe Acrobat sets a value of 50). In this case, vignettes are constructed in a
way which reveals noticeable banding. Typically, the creating application can be set to
use a more sensible default value, however this can be difficult to implement for all
creators of PDF files. For this reason the Minimum shaded fill levels option is available.
This option allows you to set sensible override values.
Minimum shaded fill levels sets a limit which controls the minimum number of steps
that can be used in constructing a vignette. This is important in ensuring vignettes do
not have banding.

192 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.24 Page Setup Option Extras

From Eclipse Release SP4 the default Minimum shaded fill levels value is Auto which
optimizes the value to suit the currently selected page setup, and in particular the
screening setting.
The Minimum shaded fill levels option has a drop down menu allowing selection of var-
ious pre-configured values. The higher the value you select, the more shaded fill lev-
els are created, and the more work the RIP has to do to create those levels, resulting in
reduced output rate. If Auto is selected, the RIP automatically optimizes the Minimum
shaded fill levels to suit the current page setup. For example, if the current page setup
employs screening that allows only 64 shades of gray, the RIP will optimize the Mini-
mum shaded fill levels so that it uses only 64 shades. In addition to this, if the page setup
allowed 256 shades you can make the RIP run faster by manually selecting a lower
value, such as 128.

5.24 Page Setup Option Extras

The Page Setup Option Extras dialog box, shown in Figure 5.44, enables you to alter
the way the RIP processes jobs produced by specific applications. The topics include
color management, font substitution, and vignettes in spot colors.
Note: The treatment of embedded color management and spot color vignettes is the
same whether the job submitted to the RIP is a file produced directly by the named
application, or a file produced by a page make-up application and referencing or con-
taining a file from the named application. There are differences in what is possible
with different file formats from some applications, as noted for each option. Typically,
an EPS file is handled better than a PostScript-language file printed directly from the
named application.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 193

 Configuring Output Formats

Display this dialog box by clicking the Extras button in the Page Setup Options dialog
box. This section describes each option in the dialog box.

Figure 5.44 Page Setup Option Extras dialog box

5.24.1 Adobe Photoshop features

These options control handling of features found in jobs from Adobe Photoshop.
Note: The Honor ‘PostScript Color Management’ check box has been removed.
The option is now called Override color management in job and is part of the
Input Document Controls within the Color Setup Manager. See Section 14.8 on
page 493 for more details.
To make fullest use of jobs containing device-independent color definitions,
enable a color option in the Configure RIP Extras dialog box.

194 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.24 Page Setup Option Extras

Separate spot color duotones, tritones & quadtones to spot color plates...
This option enables the interception of Photoshop duotones,
tritones, and quadtones when encountered in EPS files. Select
this box if you want to separate spot color duotones, tritones,
and quadtones to spot color separations.
For this option to take effect, select a RIP separations style
that creates separations and that enables the relevant spot
color separations. The separations style must either specify a
separation for each spot color or have (Other colors in
job) set to Yes. See Section 14.7.1, “Producing separations”
on page 486 for details.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Lan-
guage compatibility level option is set to 3. It is only relevant
for Photoshop versions 2.5 through 4; Photoshop version 5
does this automatically if imaged in LanguageLevel 3.
For more information see Section 1.3.3.2, “Duotones, tri-
tones, and quadtones”
By default, this option is selected.
Note: Photoshop images saved to EPS always include the input profile from Photo-
shop, which a job may not want to actually have applied when color managing. For
details on overcoming this, see Appendix C of the Navigator RIP Extensions manual.

5.24.2 Adobe Illustrator features

These options control handling of features found in jobs from Adobe Illustrator.

Don’t let files silently substitute Courier for missing fonts

Illustrator 7 checks for font availability and replaces any
unavailable fonts with Courier. This means that changing the
default font or selecting the Abort the job if any fonts are miss-
ing option in the RIP would have no effect.
If you select this option, the RIP ignores the font substitution
in the Illustrator PostScript-language code. You can then
change the default font or select the Abort the job if any fonts
are missing option. This options applies to both PostScript and
EPS files from Illustrator.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 195

 Configuring Output Formats

By default, this option is selected.

Separate spot color vignettes to the spot color plate...

For both Illustrator 6 and 7 files: if you select this option, the
RIP places the spot color vignettes on the appropriate spot
color separations, if available.
There are limitations: all vignettes appear in process separa-
tions when the job submitted to the RIP is a PostScript file
printed directly from Illustrator; and vignettes from a spot
color to a process color appear in process separations even
when the job is in EPS format.
For this option to take effect, select a RIP separations style
that creates separations and that enables the relevant spot
color separations. The separations style must either specify a
separation for each spot color or have (Other colors in
job) set to Yes. See Section 14.7.1 on page 486 for details.
For Illustrator 6 files: if you do not select this option, the RIP
honors the information in the job and places spot color
vignettes on the process color separations rather than the spot
color separations.
For Illustrator 7 files: if you do not select this option, the
result depends on the separations style and on the information
in the job.
If the separations style generates a separation for a particular
spot color, the RIP places a vignette in that spot color on the
spot color separation.
However, if (Other colors in job) is set to Yes the
RIP will generate a separation for a spot color if it encounters
a flat tint in that color, but not if it encounters a vignette in
that color. Once the spot color separation exists, the RIP will
add a vignette in that color to the separation. If the spot color
separation does not already exist, the RIP places the spot
color vignette on the process color separations.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Lan-
guage compatibility level option is set to 3.

196 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.24 Page Setup Option Extras

By default, this option is selected.

5.24.3 Adobe InDesign features

This option controls handling of features found in jobs from Adobe InDesign.

Act on InDesign page comments when recombining...

From the Navigator 7.0 Release this option is selected as the
default. This option should be left selected if you wish to
recombine preseparated jobs submitted directly from InDe-
sign, where there may be missing separations. With this
option selected, the RIP is able to recombine InDesign jobs
by analyzing comments in the job. For example, the RIP can
detect which separations to recombine into a page when
given a sequence of separations such as MYKCMYK…
By default, this option is selected.

5.24.4 QuarkXPress features

This option controls handling of features found in jobs from QuarkXPress.

Separate spot color vignettes to the spot color plate...

The PostScript-language code generated by QuarkXPress
places spot color vignettes on the process color separations
rather than the spot color separations.
If you select this option, the RIP places the spot color
vignettes on the appropriate spot color separations, if avail-
able. (This option applies fully to PostScript files printed
from QuarkXPress.) For this option to take effect, select a
RIP separations style that creates separations and that enables
the relevant spot color separations. The separations style
must either specify a separation for each spot color or have
(Other colors in job) set to Yes. See Section 14.7.1
for details.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Lan-
guage compatibility level option is set to 3.
By default, this option is selected.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 197

 Configuring Output Formats

Act on XPress page comments when recombining...

From the Navigator 7.0 Release this option is selected as the
default. This option should be left selected if you wish to
recombine preseparated jobs submitted directly from
QuarkXPress, where there may be missing separations. With
this option selected, the RIP is able to recombine QuarkX-
Press jobs by analyzing comments in the job. For example,
the RIP can detect which separations to recombine into a
page when given a sequence of separations such as MYKC-
MYK…
By default, this option is selected.

Replace XPress graduated fills with smooth shading

Select this check box to replace graduated fills produced by
QuarkXPress with LanguageLevel 3 smooth shading (shaded
fills). Shaded fills generally produce better visual quality and
may be faster to generate. You can use this selection if you
are using the TrapPro trapping option. This is because
TrapPro can handle shaded fills.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Lan-
guage compatibility level option is set to 3.
By default, this option is not selected.

5.24.5 Macromedia FreeHand features

This option controls handling of features found in jobs from Macromedia FreeHand.

Separate spot color vignettes to the spot color plate...

The PostScript-language code generated by FreeHand places
spot color vignettes on the process color separations rather
than the spot color separations. If you select this option, the
RIP places the spot color vignettes on the appropriate spot
color separations, if available.

198 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.25 PDF Options

There is one limitation: all vignettes appear in process color

separations when the job submitted to the RIP is a PostScript
file printed directly from FreeHand. Use the EPS file format
to enable this option to work correctly.
For this option to take effect, select a separations style that
creates separations and that enables the relevant spot color
separations. The separations style must either specify a sepa-
ration for each spot color or have (Other colors in
job) set to Yes. See Section 14.7.1 on page 486 for details.
Note: This option is available only when the PostScript Lan-
guage compatibility level option is set to 3.
From Eclipse Release SP4 this option is not selected as a
default. This is because selection of this option with certain
Freehand files using a composite or a separating (with other
colors) page setup with Recombine, caused incorrect Pantone
colors to be used.
To ensure spot colors are on the correct plate from Freehand
jobs, the Level1Separator procset must be enabled. This is
done by ensuring the Use level 1 spot colors option in the Edit
Separations Styles dialog is enabled (which it is by default).
See Section 14.7.2 on page 489 for more details.
By default, this option is not selected.

5.25 PDF Options

This button displays the PDF Options dialog box, in which you can set the options for
printing PDF files. Using these options you can, for example, print a range of pages
rather than the whole file or specify which versions of PDF file to accept. You can also
supply a user password, to enable the RIP to print password-encrypted files. In addi-
tion, you can apply Enfocus PDF preflight checking to incoming PDF documents.
See Section 8.14, “Printing PDF files” on page 304 for details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 199

 Configuring Output Formats

5.26 Calibration
The Navigator RIP can apply one or more calibration sets to a job. If you are printing
to a direct output device, the page setup can include a calibration for the output device
and a tone curve calibration.
If you are preparing a job for a printing press, the page setup can include an imageset-
ter calibration, a tone curve calibration, and calibrations for the intended and actual
presses. If the page setup uses an ColorPro color setup, the intended press calibration
is disabled.
Calibration sets are created for a particular device and color space. You can only select
a calibration set for the currently selected device and color space. The choice of sepa-
rations style determines the color space. Note that, while an imagesetter is not a multi-
color device, you can create a calibration curve for each color in the separations style,
to take account of the different screen angles likely to be used for the colors.
To create or edit a calibration set, click the Calibration Manager button, which is the
icon button in the Calibration & Dot Gain section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
See Chapter 13, “Calibration”, for more information.

5.26.1 Device calibration

The Calibration drop-down list contains a list of all calibration sets for the currently
selected device and color space. Select (None) for no device calibration.
Typically, you select a calibration set that has been prepared for the resolution, screen
frequency, dot shape, positive/negative setting, and exposure of the page setup that
you are editing. The dot shape and screening details are set in the separations style.
Some output plugins—for example, ProofReady plugins—are supplied with reference
calibration profiles, typically named in this form: (Media_name Resolution),
where Media_name and Resolution represent values suitable for the output device.
These profiles appear in the list of calibration sets and you can use these profiles in the
same way as any other calibration set. The additional feature of these profiles is that
selecting a reference calibration profile, or a calibration set that you have based upon
one, is enough to apply a default color management setup provided that you have
enabled an color management option. See the manual for the relevant output plugin or
the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details.

200 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5.26 Calibration

5.26.2 Press calibration

The Actual Press drop-down list contains a list of all calibration sets created for the
Printing Press device in the current color space. Select (None) for no press cali-
bration. There is default entry supplied for (SWOP (CGATS TR001)), and there may
be others.
Note: Some of the press calibration sets may be derived from profiles when you are
using ColorPro. See the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details. You can add
other entries, as described in Chapter 13, “Calibration”.

5.26.3 Use of a different printing press

If you are not using ColorPro, you can retarget a job from its intended printing press to
another printing press, using the Intended Press option.
This is a complex topic in the general case, discussed more fully with reference to cal-
ibration in Section 13.8 on page 442.
In summary, the overall effect of press calibration in the output path is to first apply
any primary calibration (for example, as required for an imagesetter), to remove com-
pensation for the gain of the Intended Press, and then to compensate for the gain of the
Actual Press.

The Intended Press calibration is not available when ColorPro is enabled. Instead, sev-
eral options are provided for processing color data ahead of the transfer to press.
These options include emulating the output of one press on another type of press. For
details, see the separate Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide. The calibration set speci-
fied in Actual Press is always used.
The Intended Press drop-down list contains a list of all calibration sets created for the
Printing Press device in the current color space. If you have a scanned image that
was not aimed at a specific press, select (None) for no intended press calibration.
There is a default entry supplied for (SWOP (CGATS TR001)), and there may be oth-
ers.
Note: Some of the press calibration sets may be derived from profiles when you are
using ColorPro. See the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details. You can add
other entries, as described in Chapter 13, “Calibration”.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 201

 Configuring Output Formats

5.26.4 Tone curves

Tone Curves allow you to make another set of color adjustments, in addition to the
device calibration and the press calibration. The Tone Curves drop-down list contains a
list of all calibration sets created for the Tone Curves device in the current color
space. Select None for no tone curves calibration.
See Section 13.7 on page 441 for more details.

5.27 Other page setup options

Accelerate The Accelerate button displays a dialog box to control the
optional Harpoon PCI screening accelerator, consisting of
hardware and special control software.
The Accelerate button is grayed out when you have chosen an
inappropriate output device or there is no screening plugin:
Harpoon PCI can be used with any screened output (bitmap)
plugin. See Appendix D, “Harpoon PCI Screening Accelera-
tor” for details.

202 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6

Screening

This chapter describes halftone screening in monochrome and color work, and the dif-
ferent types of screening offered by the RIP. You use the screening options in the RIP
in combination with the options that control color separations, to create a combined
color separations style.
The RIP does not restrict the concept of color separation to producing separated out-
put. When processing any job, the RIP creates a separation for each process colorant
and also, where appropriate, for spot colorants. The output format determines whether
the separations are printed together as a composite, or separated. By configuring these
separations you can control the printing of individual colorants in the job. Although
there is only one separation in the monochrome color space, the RIP provides the
same options for configuring that separation.
Separations information is saved together with screening information in a separations
style, which can be used in several page setups. You can keep a number of separations
styles that you use regularly, for example to define different screening options.

6.1 Managing separations styles

Separations styles are created and managed in the Separations Manager, as shown in
Figure 6.1. You can open the Separations Manager by clicking the Separations Man-
ager icon button next to the Style drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, or
by choosing the Color > Separations Manager command.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 203

 Screening

6.2 Separations Manager dialog box

Figure 6.1 Separations Manager dialog box

The Separations Manager displays a list of all existing separations styles for the cur-
rent device, showing the name of each separations style, the corresponding color
space, and the output format.
From the Separations Manager you can create separations styles, and edit, copy, or
delete existing separations styles. This chapter describes how to set the screening
options for an existing separations style. For details about creating separations styles,
see Chapter 14, “Color Separation”.
Select a separations style from the list and click Edit. The Edit Style dialog box
appears. If the output format of the separations style supports screening, the Edit Style
dialog box contains screening options, as shown in Figure 6.2. For example, if you
choose a separation style with an output format of halftone separations, the Edit Style
dialog box contains screening options.
The screening options do not appear if the output plugin for the selected output device
does not support screening. This usually means that the output device supports contin-
uous tone (contone) output or that the device accepts contone data and performs its
own screening. For devices that can be configured to support either contone or
screened output, the screening options in the Edit Style dialog box do not appear when
you select a contone separations style, unless you are using external screening, such as
the Harpoon PCI screening accelerator.
Some proofing output plugins list two entries (for Device in the Edit Page Setup dialog
box) for each model of printer that the plugin supports. One entry is for a device that
uses the screening options in the RIP, which appear in the Edit Style dialog box for

204 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.3 Edit Style dialog box

that device. The second device performs its own screening, such as error diffusion
screening (EDS), and does not have screening options in the Edit Style dialog box.

6.3 Edit Style dialog box

The Edit Style dialog box (shown in Figure 6.2) appears when you select a separations
style and click Edit in the Separations Manager.

Figure 6.2 Edit Style dialog box with screening options

The screening options in the Edit Style dialog box include some familiar to anyone
who has used screening and some that are specific to the Navigator RIPNavigator RIP.
• Section 6.4, “Halftoning”, is a quick introduction to concepts if you are unfa-
miliar with screening and halftoning.
• Section 6.5, “Screen angles”, on page 213, Section 6.6, “Dot shapes”, on
page 215, and Section 6.7, “Halftone frequency”, explain how to use three
basic screening functions.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 205

 Screening

• Section 6.8, “Screening options and number of gray levels” on page 220
describes an area where the Navigator RIP technology provides some uncon-
ventional and valuable functionality.
The remaining sections in this chapter describe more subtle controls and some
optional features of the Navigator RIP.

6.4 Halftoning
Halftoning is the process of approximating gray levels or color shades with a pattern
of dots. In many halftoning systems, the dots can have only one color value but can
vary in size to alter the ratio of dot color to background color. The simplest use of this
technique is approximating gray levels with a pattern of black dots against a white
background, as illustrated in Figure 6.3.
Here, the size of the dots varies to represent different shades of gray. You see an area
of small dots as a light gray, while an area of larger dots (each nearly filling its
allowed space in the pattern of dots) is seen as dark gray. More strictly, it is not the
size of the dots but the resultant ratio of black area to white area that represents the
gray value.

206 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.4 Halftoning

Figure 6.3 An example of halftoning

Color shades are approximated with three patterns of dots, each in a primary color—
cyan, magenta, and yellow—used with or without a fourth pattern of black dots. (This
description of halftoning assumes three patterns—in fact, the fourth pattern of black
dots is almost always used, for technical reasons that do not affect the principles of
halftoning.)
Within each color separation, the size of the dots (in relation to their background) is
proportional to the amount of the primary color in the composite shade. When the sep-
arations are combined, typically by overprinting in registration, they create the illu-
sion of shades of color. The cyan, magenta, and yellow dots cannot be distinguished
when viewed from a distance—instead, the pattern of color dots appears to be an area
of a shade of color.

6.4.1 Dots, halftone cells, and screens

The dots that this section has discussed are the visible part of halftoning and most
halftoning can be described in terms of patterns of these dots. The industry-standard
terms used to describe the organization of these dots into manageable structures are
halftone cells and screens.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 207

 Screening

Each dot is considered to occupy a halftone cell. (Figure 6.4 shows two groups of four
halftone cells.) Every halftone cell is used to represent a gray level or color intensity.
A dot can have any area in the range 0% of the area of the halftone cell (a completely
white cell) through 100% of the area of the halftone cell (a completely black cell).
Dots of intermediate areas create the illusion of gray levels. The number of pixels in
the halftone cell defines how many intermediate areas of dot are possible and, in most
systems, this defines the number of reproducible grays.

Cell spacing (related

to screen frequency)

Figure 6.4 Halftone cells, screen frequency, and dot shapes

A screen is an invisible grid that is superimposed on the image—each square in the

grid is a halftone cell. For a particular dot shape, the important characteristics of a
screen are its spatial resolution, referred to as screen frequency, and the screen angle
(as shown in Figure 6.5).

Screen frequency
is the number of halftone cells per inch or centimeter. The
corresponding units are lines per inch (lpi), lines per centime-
ter (lpcm), or lines per millimeter (lpmm). For example, a
screen frequency of 100 lpi means halftone cells spaced
every hundredth of an inch.

Screen angle is the angle between one side of the halftone cell and an axis
on the output device (not a fixed axis on the page): the refer-
ence axis is usually the direction of the slow scan. The screen
angle becomes important when you are combining the sepa-
rate patterns of dots used for color reproduction. The most
important consideration is the angular separation of the dif-
ferent screens, not their absolute angles relative to the device
axes.

208 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.4 Halftoning

Note: For most screens, you can use the box Rotate screens
according to page rotation in the Edit Style dialog box to main-
tain screen angles relative to the page axes. This may help
you diagnose the cause of problems with patterning in the
output.
°
0

Screen angle

×° ×°
90 270

×°
180

Figure 6.5 Halftone cells and screen angle

6.4.2 Dot shape

The choice of the shape of each dot that is generated in a halftoned image is essential
to the quality of the eventual image. Figure 6.4 shows circular and elliptical dots, but
dots can have other shapes and need not even form a connected shape within the half-
tone cell. Indeed, there are screens where the black pixels are distributed (dispersed)
around the halftone cell without being joined into one dot. The way in which pixels
are produced physically makes it difficult to manage dispersed pixels, though Harle-
quin Dispersed Screening (HDS) exploits this effectively to produce a less prominent
pattern in the output.
There are two common ways of producing dot shapes: spot function screens and
threshold screens. Both kinds of halftone work by telling the RIP which pixel within a
screen cell to mark next to obtain the next darker gray level.
®
The Navigator RIP supports all the screen types defined by The PostScript Language
Reference Manual (2nd Ed) and the non-proprietary types added in The PostScript®
Language Reference (3rd Edition). This means support for HalftoneType values of
1 through 6, 10, and 16.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 209

 Screening

Note: If you create a Separations style using Eclipse Release SP1, and you decide to
change the Dot Shape used, if both the original and new Dot Shapes are genuine Spot
Functions (such as changing from Euclidean to Square), the screening settings
remain as set, that is, they are not reset to the default values.
If however, either or both the original or new Dot Shapes are a Halftone Dot Shape
(such as an HDS dot shape), the screening settings, such as the screen angles, and the
Yes/No Print? values are reset to their defaults. The default values are defined in the
Screen Names file.
Note: Screen Names files created with the Eclipse Release or later RIPs are incompat-
ible with previous versions. That is, you cannot transfer a Screen Names file from pre
Eclipse Release RIPs to Eclipse Release or later RIPs.

6.4.3 Spot function screens

Spot functions describe the dot shape using a mathematical function which, given the
position of a pixel within a halftone cell, produces a number which says where in the
sequence of pixels that pixel should be marked. This technique is very flexible,
because it allows a single function to define a halftone cell at any size or angle.
In the Navigator RIP the common dot shapes are provided by spot function screens.
This means that all the screening options in the Edit Style dialog box are available,
including the benefits of using Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS).

6.4.4 Threshold screens

As an alternative to a spot function screen, a threshold screen describes a halftone to
the Navigator RIP by providing the order in which to mark pixels explicitly in a table.
The table has as many entries as there are pixels in the halftone cell.
A consequence of this is that a threshold screen is always defined in terms of a fixed
cell size in pixels, whereas a spot function can be applied to arbitrary sizes of screen
dot. This means that the screen cell for a spot function will occupy more pixels, but
the same physical area on the output, if either the resolution is increased or the fre-
quency (number of halftone cells per device independent unit distance) decreased, but
a threshold screen will get physically smaller and its frequency increase if the resolu-
tion is increased.

210 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.4 Halftoning

A further consequence is that HPS and other techniques which vary the actual pixels
of a screen cell cannot be applied to threshold screens. On the other hand, threshold
screens can be controlled very precisely, pixel for pixel, and are therefore suitable for
describing Frequency Modulated (FM) screens if the cell is large enough. While
threshold screens can be used to describe conventional “clumped” dots, they are less
flexible because of their resolution dependence and absence of rotation to a specified
angle (at least in their simplest form). Neither kind of screen is suitable for describing
non-tessellating screening techniques, such as error diffusion.
The PostScript language offers several variations on threshold screens, which allow
greater or lesser control over the sizes of the tables involved and the tessellation of the
tiles (equivalent to the “angle”) in a spot function.
There are no threshold screens in the standard set supplied with the RIP but it is possi-
ble to use threshold screens embedded in a job, or installed in the RIP by your sup-
plier.

6.4.4.1 Using threshold screens

In the Edit Style dialog box, when you have selected a threshold screen in the Dot
shape list and Override dot shape in job is selected, the following options are not avail-
able:
• Frequency

• Override frequency in job

• Angles (for all process and spot colors)

• Override angles in job

• Use Harlequin Precision Screening

• Rotate screens according to page rotation

Note: If you clear the Override dot shape in job check box, these options are enabled, so
that you can override some parameters of spot function screens supplied in the job.
For more details of these options, see Section 6.5 through Section 6.7, and
Section 6.10.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 211

 Screening

6.4.5 Halftone options

The Navigator RIP provides a number of options to control halftone generation. Using
them appropriately can improve the quality of your image, depending on the output
device, media, and resolution used. You can also override any screening parameters
that might be specified within the page description itself.
These are the three main features that are affected by the halftone strategy you choose:
• The shape of the dots created. See Section 6.6, “Dot shapes”, for the relevant
controls.
• The frequency and angle of the dot pattern created. See Section 6.7, “Halftone
frequency”, on page 219, for the relevant controls.
• The accuracy of the screens generated. There is no general way of controlling
accuracy. One way of getting good accuracy is to use Harlequin Precision
Screening (HPS), described in Section 6.10, “Harlequin Precision Screening”,
on page 226.

6.4.6 Dot gain

When a halftone image is printed, the ink used to create each dot tends to flow out-
wards as it is absorbed by the paper. This phenomenon is known as dot gain. Simi-
larly, dots printed on a laser printer tend to spread outward when the toner is bonded to
the paper. As a result, any printed dot tends to be larger than the calculated dot size.
Dot gain can affect the quality of printed images. For example, if there is a significant
amount of dot gain, images tend to appear too dark. For more details, see Chapter 13,
“Calibration”.

6.4.7 Suggested background reading

If you do not have a reasonable grounding in halftoning systems then you may find the
following books helpful. This is by no means an exhaustive list and you can probably
find alternatives in a good book store or technical library.

212 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.5 Screen angles

Real World Scanning and Halftones (David Blatner & Steve Roth, Pub: Peachpit
Press, Inc., ISBN: 1-56609-093-8)
If you ignore the fact that the authors are very insistent that the PostScript lan-
guage can only produce 256 gray levels, then this is an excellent introductory
text for PostScript halftoning.
PostScript™ Screening: Adobe Accurate Screens (Peter Fink, Pub: Adobe Press,
ISBN: 0–672–48544–3)
A very good introduction to digital halftoning, which then continues into discus-
sion of process work and advanced screening techniques. Some of the book is
specific to Adobe Accurate Screens™, but many of the concepts are common to
HPS as well. This book also has an interesting section on factors affecting
device calibration and other causes of poor film and press output.
An Introduction to Digital Color Prepress (AGFA Corporation)
This booklet was produced to sell Agfa imagesetters, but many of the ideas dis-
cussed are common to all digital halftoning systems.
Electronic Color Separation (Dr. R.K. Molla, Pub: R.K. Printing and Publishing,
ISBN: 0–9620453–0–6)
This book refers to analog color scanners and does not discuss digital halfton-
ing. The example scanning systems are somewhat dated, but the halftone con-
cept has not changed since the book was written.

6.5 Screen angles

The Navigator RIP offers you complete control of screen angles for both process and
spot colors. There are a number of reasons for choosing screen angles carefully:
• A long-established reason for choosing the screening angles (and frequencies)
of color separations has been to pick a set of values that minimize inaccuracies
in the screens and consequent moiré patterning when they are superimposed.
This reason is becoming less important as the accuracy of screen generation
increases. For example, the RIP includes Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS),
a technology that provides more accurate screening and reduces moiré without
unduly limiting the choice of screen angle and frequency. See “Harlequin Preci-
sion Screening” on page 226 for details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 213

 Screening

• You may wish to override a set of angles requested in a job. This is especially
useful if the job has requested a set of angles that optimize the output quality
for a particular output device, such as a laser printer, but that may diminish the
quality on other devices, such as an imagesetter.
• You may want consistency: for example, on all pages of a single publication
when the jobs come from different sources. Enforcing settings in the RIP is the
simplest way of getting such consistency.
A good choice of angles for general use with color separations in offset litho work is a
set in which the colors are separated by 30°, for example: 15°, 75°, 0°, and 45° respec-
tively for CMYK (and related sets using these angles plus or minus multiples of 90°).
For use with elliptical dots, a separation of 60° is recommended, leading to angles of
15°, 75°, 0°, and 135° for CMYK.
Note: The angles shown in the Edit Style dialog box (shown in Figure 6.2, page 205)
always take effect for jobs that contain no screening requests. If the job attempts to set
screening, you must select the Override angles in job check box if you want to use these
values.

6.5.1 Changing angles for separations

The list of separations shows all colorants (including the standard process colors and
any spot colors) and their screen angles.
The boxes below the list of separations allow you to control the printing of process
color separations, and change the screen angles.
Note: From the Eclipse Release of the Navigator RIP ink types are decided using the
Ink Set Manager which is only available when one of the TrapPro options are enabled.
See the documentation supplied with TrapPro for more information.
If the chosen output format supports additional colorants, you can also control the
printing of spot color separations. Any spot color not explicitly listed is controlled by
the (Other colors in job) settings. With the default settings, if a job calls for
spot colors not named in the list of separations, the RIP converts those spot colors to
the appropriate combination of process colors.
To change the settings for a particular colorant, select the colorant from the list and
edit the values in the boxes below. To change the screen angle, type the new value in

214 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.6 Dot shapes

the Angle text box. For details of the other options, see Section 14.7, “Edit Style dialog
box” on page 484.
Note: The Angle column and text box are both blank when the selected Dot shape does
not have a controllable angle. Typically, this is because the dot shape belongs to a
threshold screen (which does not have a conventional angle) or because the screening
is being done in an output plugin or hardware device.
Each colorant has its own screening angle, which allows you to avoid moiré problems
when a job has several spot colors used in duotone combinations with each other or
with the standard process colors.
The angles shown in the Edit Style dialog box always take effect for jobs that contain
no screening requests. If the job attempts to set screening, you must select the Override
angles in job check box if you want to use the values shown in this dialog box.

6.6 Dot shapes

Manipulating the dot shape generated can greatly influence the amount of dot gain in
an image.
The Navigator RIP offers a variety of dot shapes; your choice between them might
depend on the output device, resolution and media used, and the type of image. Dot
shapes are controlled from the Dot shape drop-down list, which is one of the screening
options in the Edit Style dialog box.
Depending on the output device that you choose, you may see different entries in the
Dot shape list. Output plugins can modify the contents of this list, either to add screens
suitable for the output device or to remove the names of inappropriate dot shapes.
Note: The PostScript language allows you to specify an arbitrary dot shape by defin-
ing a spot function. This offers great flexibility but there are some possible problems
®
as outlined in the The PostScript Language Reference Manual (2nd Ed). One proba-
ble consequence of having a spot function defined in the PostScript language is slower
rendering of jobs using that spot function: it is almost always preferable to use a dot
shape provided by a RIP in place of one implemented in the PostScript language. The
RIP includes efficient implementations of many commonly used dot shapes to offer
both speed and choice.
Jobs often specify their own dot shape. To force the RIP to use your chosen dot shape
instead, select the Override dot shape in job check box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 215

 Screening

A Euclidean dot-shape strategy produces better saturated grays at gray values above
50%, especially at finer (higher) screen frequencies. Euclidean strategies increase the
fill of halftone cells from the corners, instead of the centers, when the gray value
exceeds 50%. That is, when the gray value is less than 50%, the dots are black, the
background is white, and the dot size increases as the gray value increases; when the
gray value reaches 50%, the dots become white, the background becomes black, and
dot size decreases as the gray value increases.

6.6.1 Common dot shapes

Sections 6.6.1.1 through 6.6.1.4 describe a number of commonly used dot shapes.

6.6.1.1 Round
This is a commonly used dot shape, but dot gain can be a problem in the shadow areas,
since the white diamond at the center of four adjoining circles can easily become filled
with black as the dot size grows. However, round dots give a smooth appearance in the
highlights and middle tones.
To use round dots, choose Round from the Dot shape drop-down list.

6.6.1.2 Round Euclidean

This dot shape reduces dot gain in the shadow areas and is good for general-purpose
use. (It is common in newspaper production, for example.) To use round Euclidean
dots, choose Euclidean from the Dot shape drop-down list.

216 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.6 Dot shapes

6.6.1.3 Elliptical Euclidean

This dot shape is used to avoid a fairly sharp transition at around 50% that can occur
with the round Euclidean dot shape with some imagesetters. To use it, choose Ellip-
ticalP from the Dot shape drop-down list. This is an excellent dot shape for general
use.

A variant of EllipticalP is Elliptical1.

Note: The CMYK screen angles used for all elliptical dot shapes must be 60 degrees
apart, instead of the normal 30 degrees. This is because of the asymmetry of the ellip-
tical dot.

6.6.1.4 HDS, HMS, and HCS

Global Graphics has developed a number of special screening strategies to provide
better quality, control, and performance than standard forms of screening. These are
not supplied with the Navigator RIP by default, but may be purchased separately. For
details of Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS), Harlequin Micro Screening (HMS)
and Harlequin Chain Screening (HCS), see Section 6.11 on page 235 describing the
Harlequin Screening Library.

6.6.2 Other dot shapes

The dot shapes in this section are mostly used only for special effects or purposes; for
general purpose use, the shapes in “Common dot shapes” on page 216 tend to be bet-
ter.

6.6.2.1 Elliptical
Elliptical dots generally produce a smoother transition than round dots, because the
ellipses initially intersect only along one axis, though this can produce a lined effect.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 217

 Screening

To use an elliptical dot shape, choose Elliptical1, Elliptical2,

EllipticalQ1, or EllipticalQ2 from the Dot shape drop-down list.

Note: As mentioned for Elliptical Euclidean, the screen angles used for all elliptical
dot shapes must be 60 degrees apart, instead of the normal 30 degrees. This is because
of the asymmetry of the elliptical dot.

6.6.2.2 Square
Square dots are rarely used, except for particular effects. Images produced with square
dots tend to have dot gain problems, particularly in the shadow areas. To use the
square dot shape, choose Square2 from the Dot shape drop-down list.

6.6.2.3 Square Euclidean

Another form of square dot shape. To use square Euclidean dots, choose Square1
from the Dot shape drop-down list.

218 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.7 Halftone frequency

6.6.2.4 Rhomboid
This dot shape is very similar to the square Euclidean shape, but generally gives a
somewhat smoother result. You should consider using it instead of the square dot
shape. To use this dot shape, choose Rhomboid from the Dot shape drop-down list.

6.6.2.5 Line
Line-shaped dots are generally used only to produce special effects, since there tends
to be a lot of dot gain. To use the line dot shape, choose Line or Line90 from the Dot
shape drop-down list.

6.7 Halftone frequency

Another way to improve the quality of halftoning is to increase the halftone frequency,
the density with which the image is covered by halftone cells. Increasing the fre-
quency is rather like increasing the resolution of an image: more dots are produced
and each dot is smaller. However, the more you increase the frequency, the fewer gray
levels you can print. Section 6.8, “Screening options and number of gray levels”, dis-
cusses how many gray levels you can obtain and how many are required for various
types of graphic elements. See also Section 6.10.1, “Controlling extra grays in HPS”,
on the extra grays feature available when using Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS).

6.7.1 Changing the halftone frequencies

In the Edit Style dialog box there is a list of halftone frequencies: one for each device
resolution, or for a range of resolutions. The list of available resolutions depends on
the chosen output device. The RIP uses the frequency that corresponds to the resolu-
tion selected in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. The controls below the list allow you
to change the frequency for the selected row, and to change the frequency and resolu-
tion units.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 219

 Screening

To change the halftone frequency for a particular resolution, or range of resolutions,

select the row in the list and type the desired frequency into the text box below. You
can change the units for the resolution to dots per inch (dpi), dots per centimeter
(dpcm), or dots per millimeter (dpmm). You can change the units for the frequency to
lines per inch (lpi), lines per centimeter (lpcm), or lines per millimeter (lpmm).
Sometimes the job itself specifies a screen frequency to use when rendering. If this is
the case, the halftone frequency you specify in the Edit Style dialog box is ignored. To
force the RIP to use your screen frequency instead, select the Override frequency in job
check box. Always consider selecting this box if you use HPS. (See Section 6.10,
“Harlequin Precision Screening” on page 226.)

6.8 Screening options and number of gray levels

It is an occasional requirement to know, and possibly control, the number of gray lev-
els produced on a rendered page.

6.8.1 How many gray levels can you see?

Many studies have been published explaining just how many gray levels the human
eye can distinguish, or how many levels a printing press can produce from halftones.
The results vary from around a hundred to over a thousand depending on defined
viewing conditions and the exact definition of what constitutes a distinguishable dif-
ference. The most worrying aspect of these studies is that most of them are correct—
under the circumstances in which they were carried out, they determined the right
result. The only thing to do at this stage is to throw away such studies and build on
observations of real-world printing.

6.8.2 How many gray levels do you get?

Conventional screens can produce a maximum number of gray levels linked to the res-
olution of the output device and the screening frequency.
If you do not enable extra grays you get as many gray levels as the number of laser
spots in a halftone cell (plus one for all spots off—that is, white). This number is given
by the expression:

resolution ⎞ 2
⎛ ----------------------------------------
⎝ screen frequency⎠ + 1

220 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.8 Screening options and number of gray levels

Thus at 100 lines per inch (lpi) and 2540 dots per inch (dpi) you get 646 gray levels …
2
⎛ 2540
------------⎞ + 1 = 646
⎝ 100 ⎠
… but at 175 lpi and 1270 dpi you get only 53 gray levels:
2
⎛ 1270
------------⎞ + 1 = 53
⎝ 175 ⎠
If you switch on Generate extra gray levels in the Edit Style dialog box then you get as
many gray levels as you define with the Limit number of distinct gray levels drop-down
list. It is a feature of HPS that the number of levels can exceed the maximum defined
in this expression.
Some RIP screening options do not follow this expression:
• Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS) is able to produce more gray levels than
predicted by the conventional expression.
• HDS does not have a conventional frequency to apply in the expression—
though it is possible to establish a rough correspondence between each HDS
setting and a conventional screen of a particular frequency at a particular reso-
lution.

6.8.3 How many gray levels do you need?

The number of grays you need depends on what you are trying to produce. Some types
of images with varying needs for number of gray levels are:
• Flat tints
• Contone scans
• Graduated tints and blends
Images vary within these categories, but the following discussion of each category
should show you the principles to apply in judging how many grays are needed.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 221

 Screening

6.8.3.1 Flat tints

If you are using a few flat tints behind text or in a simple diagram then you may not
need more than a dozen gray levels. Do not enable extra grays in the RIP solely to
reproduce flat tints.

6.8.3.2 Contone scans

If you are using a small desktop flat-bed scanner that is producing contone images for
output then you are usually able to work with output producing as few as 64 gray lev-
els. A few scans may benefit from up to 128 gray levels—and the distinction is usually
as much to do with which desktop scanner you are using as with the image content. In
general, images with very gentle tonal or color graduations (for example: a cloudy, but
not stormy, sky) need the most gray levels, but even in these cases the best 6-bit
(64 gray levels) scanner can produce better output than many 8-bit (256 gray levels)
competitors.
For scans made on a drum scanner or a high-quality flat-bed scanner, you can usually
obtain adequate output with this low number of gray levels, but the quality of the out-
put normally increases with up to 256 gray levels. Several scanners are available
which produce 10, 12, or even 16-bits-per-channel image data, and it is possible that
you can increase the output quality of these images by allowing more gray levels on
output—PostScript LanguageLevel 3 includes the facility for 12-bit-per-channel
images to be output (4096 gray levels), and this is supported in the Navigator RIP. The
increased number of gray levels from the scanner is intended more to allow input
noise to be removed, and to reduce the information loss inherent in tonal adjustment,
than for passing on to the final output device.
Finally, any image manipulation software that produces some of its tonal alteration
effects by means of the PostScript-language operator settransfer (or any similar
mechanism) and which therefore ends up requesting a nonlinear gray scale from the
RIP may require an increased number of grays to reflect these changes adequately.
Although applications such as Adobe Photoshop allow transfer functions to be saved
in EPS files, they apparently intend this for device linearization rather than for tone
curve control.
Note: Adjusting tonal data in image manipulation software often benefits from an
original scan with as many levels of gray as possible to reduce quantization effects

222 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.8 Screening options and number of gray levels

when changing brightness or contrast, but this does not directly affect the number of
gray levels that are required from the output device.

6.8.3.3 Graduated tints and blends

It is in these areas that the requirement for extra gray levels really shows. To avoid
confusion, the word vignettes is used here to cover both graduated tints and blends.
The minimum number of gray levels required is 256, but some long vignettes, or those
over a relatively short range of tints, may require more. The rule of thumb is that no
single step in a vignette should be more than 0.03 inches (0.75 mm) wide.
Thus a vignette from 20% to 70% tint that is 6 inches long requires at least 400 gray
levels:

100 6
---------------------- × ---------- = 400
( 70 – 20 ) 0.03
This rule varies with the screen frequency that you are using, with the particular tint
range (because steps are most obvious in dark graduations), with the hardness of the
dots produced by the output device and with the size of the difference in gray levels
between steps, but it serves very well as a basic starting point. Because of the variation
with the size of the difference in gray levels between steps it is very unlikely that you
should ever require more than 1024 gray levels, and in many instances 512 or 256 lev-
els are sufficient.
If you are producing blends in applications such as Adobe Illustrator® or FreeHand®
(formerly from Aldus, now Macromedia) then you should make sure that you create
blends with enough steps—the RIP cannot add more steps into the blend. You may
also need to use switch on extra grays and use Harlequin Precision Screening with its
ability to exceed the conventional limit of gray levels in order to display all the
requested gray levels.
Graduated tints from many older applications do not produce more than 256 gray lev-
els:
• Some applications always produce 256 grays for a 0 to 100% graduation.
Examples are FreeHand and QuarkXPress® (version 3.11 and later) when print-
ing to a PostScript LanguageLevel 2 compatible device.
• Some always produce 256 gray levels in a single blend, even a short one such
as 10% to 30%. An example is QuarkXPress version 3.1.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 223

 Screening

• Some calculate the number of gray levels which the current resolution and
screen frequency could produce on a RIP that does not support extra gray level
functionality and use that. Examples are FreeHand and QuarkXPress
(version 3.11 and later) when printing to a PostScript LanguageLevel 1 com-
patible device.
In the first two cases it may be worth switching on extra gray levels in the RIP if you
are using a low resolution or a fine (high frequency) screen. In the last case you gain
no benefit by switching on extra grays.

6.8.4 Gray level controls

There are two screening options in the Edit Style dialog box shown in Figure 6.2, page
205, that affect the number of gray levels.
These options are applicable to any screen, especially HDS, to limit the number of
available gray levels. (For HPS only, the number of levels can also be increased to
more than the natural number of levels for the screen.)
Limit number of distinct gray levels
When you have selected the accompanying check box Generate extra gray levels,
described next, you can choose an entry from list to control the number of gray
levels that the RIP produces. There are several different cases.
With this list enabled:
• When using HPS, the RIP produces the exact number of gray levels set
here.
• When not using HPS, the RIP treats the value chosen here as an absolute
upper limit and uses the natural value of the screen or this limit, whichever
is lower.

224 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.9 Job settings and Navigator RIP settings

This list is disabled when Generate extra gray levels is not selected. With this list
disabled:
• When using HPS, the RIP produces the number of gray levels required to
attain the specified accuracy of screening, as set in the HPS Options dialog
box, shown in Figure 6.6, page 228.
• When not using HPS, the RIP produces the natural number of gray levels
for the screen. (For HDS, the natural number can be very large and using
HDS unlimited can have a performance penalty.)
Generate extra gray levels
There are two possible reasons for selecting this box:
• With all Navigator RIP screening options, it enables the use of the Limit
number of distinct gray levels to restrict the number of gray levels produced
on the output page.
• With HPS only, it enables the use of more screening levels than needed to
get the required accuracy of screen angle and frequency. Generating a large
number of screening levels can reduce undesired patterning, even if the
number of levels actually used is restricted by the value chosen for Limit
number of distinct gray levels. See Section 6.10.1 on page 227 for the control
of extra screening levels in HPS.

6.9 Job settings and Navigator RIP settings

The details of how you can choose settings for dot shape, frequency, and angle are
given in, respectively, Section 6.6 on page 215, Section 6.7 on page 219, and
Section 6.5 on page 213. These sections also describe how to override any conflicting
settings made in a job.
The following summary of what happens when the Navigator RIP processes a job may
be useful.
The RIP determines the screen or screens it will use for a job using the values in the
Edit Style dialog box, and the color of the pages being processed:
• Monochrome jobs use the gray settings.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 225

 Screening

• The color of pages in preseparated jobs is deduced by a variety of means, as

described in Section 6.12 on page 243.
Note: Some jobs which have preseparated spot color pages do not contain any
information about the name of the spot color they represent. In these circum-
stances, the RIP uses the screening angle that corresponds to the (Other
colors in job) entry.

• Colors of pages are determined from settings in the Edit Style dialog box.
When a job supplies any screens of its own (using the setscreen,
setcolorscreen, or sethalftone operators) then if the override check boxes in
the Edit Style dialog box are all cleared, the RIP uses the frequency, angle, and dot
shape of the supplied screen until the job provides another screen or cancels any
screens it has supplied.
However, if the Override frequency in job check box is selected in the Edit Style dialog
box the RIP continues to use the frequency given in the dialog box instead of the one
supplied by the job. Similarly, if Override dot shape in job is selected, the RIP ignores
the dot shape supplied by the job and uses the one given in the dialog box instead, and
if Override angles in job is selected, the RIP ignores any angles given by the job in
favor of those in the dialog box.
If all three boxes are selected, all screens given by the job are effectively ignored.
If you are using HPS, the frequency and angle values are also subject to slight adjust-
ment to achieve accurate screening. See Section 6.10.2 on page 228 for details of how
to limit any adjustment.
Note: HDS screens do not have a conventional screening frequency or angle and
ignore the frequency and angle settings. HCS uses a fixed set of angles, so it also
ignores the angle setting.

6.10 Harlequin Precision Screening

When placing color separations on top of one another, the angles and frequencies at
which those separations are produced should be calculated very accurately so as to
reduce moiré patterns. Historically, this required the use of specially selected screens
that minimize the patterning effect.
Harlequin Precision Screening (HPS) is a color screening technology that ensures
high-quality reproduction with any screening option in the RIP (defined using a spot

226 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.10 Harlequin Precision Screening

function). You can enable HPS for a separations style by selecting the Use Harlequin
Precision Screening check box in the Edit Style dialog box. Once enabled, HPS is a
property of the page setup which uses this separations style, and the RIP uses HPS for
all pages printed with that page setup.
HPS allows you to select any screen frequency and to use the usual CMYK screen
angles of 0°, 15°, 45°, and 75° (plus multiples of 90°). To reduce moiré patterning,
HPS uses an adaptive screening technique that can adjust each halftone dot so that it is
placed within one half pixel of its ideal location.
HPS also allows you to choose how rosettes are formed in the image, and to generate
extra gray levels, allowing the use of higher screen frequencies than the resolution
would normally allow.
The default HPS settings supplied with the RIP have been carefully chosen to provide
good output on most, if not all, output devices. We strongly recommend that you test
output using the default settings (in the HPS Options dialog box) before adjusting any-
thing at all. The information in Section 6.10.3, “Possible problems with output” on
page 231, is intended to help in adjusting values if you think that it is necessary.

6.10.1 Controlling extra grays in HPS

The ability to generate extra gray levels is a very powerful feature of HPS. It allows
you to use more gray levels in your job than are normally available with conventional
screening. This has particular benefits in eliminating stepping in vignettes and avoid-
ing posterizing.
“Gray level controls” on page 224 describes the use of the gray level controls in the
Edit Style dialog box, including the effect of switching on or off HPS.
There is one extra option within HPS.
The extra option, Limit screen levels, in the HPS Options dialog box allows you to sep-
arate pattern-reduction adjustments from extra gray generation—set the Limit screen
levels value to a high value and Limit number of distinct gray levels, in the Edit Style dia-
log box, to the number of gray levels that you actually require. If you see patterning on
individual films, try increasing the Limit screen levels value: if you believe that there is
a shortage of memory, then reduce the value.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 227

 Screening

6.10.2 Using the HPS controls

Figure 6.6 Harlequin Precision Screening Options dialog box

Section 6.9 on page 225 describes how the RIP arrives at a set of screening values for
a job.
When using HPS, for each screen in a job, the RIP calculates the best set of screen
angles and frequencies to use for the set requested. The process starts with the
requested frequency—the frequency set in the job or, when Override frequency in job is
selected, the value in the Edit Style dialog box. The Edit Style dialog box contains a
list of halftone frequencies: one for each device resolution. The requested frequency is
the one that corresponds to the resolution selected in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
Some requested frequencies may require a lot of memory or make it difficult to
achieve the desired angle accuracy, while a nearby frequency does not have these
problems. If there is a problem with the requested frequency, the RIP can select one of
these nearby frequencies as the deviated frequency.
The Maximum frequency deviation specifies the greatest deviation from the requested
frequency that is allowed. The RIP selects the individual frequencies for the Cyan,
Magenta, and Black screens such that they are within the specified Frequency accuracy
away from the deviated frequency.
The angle is snapped to the nearest 7.5° if you select Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees.
The angles of the selected screen set are then within the specified angle accuracy of
the requested angles.
The following subsections describe some individual options in more detail.

228 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.10 Harlequin Precision Screening

6.10.2.1 Zero degrees frequency adjustment

Once the RIP has calculated a screen set for the Cyan, Magenta, and Black plates (as
separations or composite channels within the RIP), it determines the frequency of the
Yellow plate using the value specified for Zero degrees frequency adjustment. The iden-
tity of the Yellow angle is determined either from the color halftone dictionary sup-
plied to the setscreen or sethalftone PostScript-language operator, or is taken as
the third entry in Optimize for angle set.
The default value of 7% means that the frequency of the Yellow plate is 107% (100%
+ 7%) of the deviated frequency used for Cyan, Magenta, and Black plates.
A number of printers have discovered that increasing the frequency of the Yellow
plate can reduce the residual moiré that is inevitable when using four process plates
with halftoning systems. Values typically used are 5% to 11% greater than the fre-
quency of the other plates. The effect is very similar if the frequency of the Yellow
plate is reduced rather than increased, and that this allows the more noticeable Cyan,
Magenta, and Black plates to be imaged at a higher frequency when the capability of
the plate-maker/paper/ink/press combination is the limiting factor on halftones.
Enter a negative number to reduce the frequency used for the Yellow plate.

6.10.2.2 Maximum frequency deviation

Increasing the value in the Maximum frequency deviation box gives the RIP more free-
dom in finding an optimal screen set and can reduce patterning or moiré, at the
expense of possibly giving final output at a screen frequency further from that origi-
nally requested. A value of between 5% and 10% is normally acceptable.
Increasing the Angle accuracy or Frequency accuracy settings (that is, increasing allow-
able variations from the deviated frequency and angle) also gives the RIP more free-
dom in selecting a screen, and may reduce patterning on individual films, but this may
also increase the likelihood of moiré effects between plates. If you are using HPS to
produce extra grays on mono or non-overlapping spot color work then you can safely
increase these numbers and may obtain slightly better output. If you are producing
process separated work then you should probably not change the default numbers.
If Abort job if accuracy not achieved is selected and it is not possible to determine a
screening set within the angle accuracy or frequency accuracy requested, then the RIP
cancels the job currently being output.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 229

 Screening

6.10.2.3 Enable HPS 2.0

Select the Enable HPS 2.0 box to use features added to HPS. These features can
improve the quality of output when using the Generate extra gray levels option. Flat
tints and vignettes are smoother, particularly in highlights and shadows, because the
mottling effects which can be caused by generating the extra gray levels are reduced.
(Even without HPS 2.0, these effects are unlikely to be significant until the ratio of
resolution to screen frequency is less than 12: for example, you might see mottling
with a resolution of 1270 dpi and a screen frequency of 150 lpi, where the ratio is
about 8.5.)

6.10.2.4 Generate clear centered rosettes

Figure 6.7 Clear-centered and spot-centered rosettes

Generate clear centered rosettes is one of the few controls which you might expect to
change in the HPS Options dialog box. When color separations are combined, the dots
form one of two rosette patterns as shown in Figure 6.7. Clear-centered rosettes are
less likely than spot-centered rosettes to show a significant color shift if separations
are printed slightly out of register, but the output produced is normally less saturated,
lighter, and has a more noticeable rosette structure. In general, output at high
frequencies, or where the output may be run on presses with poor registration, should
use clear-centered rosettes, while output at low screen frequencies or on well regis-
tered devices (including most color printers) should use spot-centered rosettes.
If you find that you are not getting consistent clear-centered or spot-centered rosettes
across the full width of a page: try varying the requested frequency slightly; or
increase Maximum frequency deviation, to allow the RIP to find a screen set with better
angle and frequency accuracies.

6.10.2.5 Optimize for angle set

It is possible to reduce the amount of memory required by HPS if you can give some
guidance to the software about which screen angle sets are to be used in PostScript-
language jobs, in the Optimize for angle set text box. The default set (15, 75, 0, 45) is

230 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.10 Harlequin Precision Screening

used for most offset litho work, while settings are also provided for other screening
systems.
To decide which entry you should use:
1. Convert all the screen angles your job uses to numbers in the range 0° through
90°. Do this by repeatedly adding 90° to any values less than 0° or subtracting
90° from any values of 90° or greater.
2. Compare the converted numbers with angles in the menu entries. There are
three possibilities:
• If you reach a set of values where all of the numbers are in a single entry in
the menu then use that entry.
• If the values do not match an entry exactly then select the closest match.
• If there is no close match then select the default (15, 75, 0, 45).

6.10.3 Possible problems with output

There are two main kinds of problem to avoid with HPS output:
• Patterning on individual films.
• Patterning caused by the interaction of two or more films from separated output
(often called moiré).
In addition there are practical considerations. You usually want your output to be pro-
duced as rapidly as possible, and you do not want to have to install excessively large
amounts of RAM in the computer running the RIP.
The following subsections describe how to address these problems.

6.10.3.1 Patterning on individual screens

This can be caused either by the hardware or the software. If you see stripes or bands
parallel to the output engine’s scan lines (across the film on a capstan device, along it
in a drum device), then try these cures:
• Rotate the page by 90 degrees.
• Select the check box Rotate screens according to page rotation in the Edit Style
dialog box. (This check box does not affect HDS.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 231

 Screening

• Output the page again.

If the bands rotate with the page, the problem can probably be corrected by adjusting
settings in the RIP; if they do not, your hardware may be at fault.
If you are seeing patterning on individual films there are two techniques that you can
try which may help to reduce the effect:
• Increase the number of screen levels generated. In the HPS Options dialog box,
set a high number for Limit screen levels. The default value is 65536, which is
the maximum value.
• Try slightly different screen frequencies—often a change of only a couple of
lines per inch can make a considerable difference to the patterning.

6.10.3.2 Moiré between two or more films

Many people make the mistake of placing four process separated films on top of each
other on a light table, and being horrified by the moiré displayed. Moiré is always vis-
ible if you view all four plates in this way. If you want a quick assessment of the moiré
on a final print job, view just the Cyan, Magenta, and Black films. Adding the Yellow
film as well can be useful in assessing variations in the marginal moiré added by the
Yellow plate, but should not be included in your standard viewing.
Eliminate two other sources of moiré before attempting to tune HPS:
• If you are using a dot shape which is not symmetrical when rotated in 90° steps
(that is, virtually all dot shapes apart from square and round) then all the screen
angles used for cyan, magenta and black plates may need to be 60° apart rather
than the traditional 30° apart. Yellow should then be at 30° from two of the
screens. Suggested angles are 15°, 75°, 0°, and 135° for cyan, magenta, yellow,
and black respectively. Whether you need to follow this suggestion or not
depends on the content of the image (because flat tints in certain colors show
moiré most clearly) and on how extreme the asymmetry of the dot shape is.
• Many older process separating applications (and newer ones using PPDs,
PDFs, and so on to optimize for older imagers) include individual screen fre-
quencies and angles for the four process colors which are designed to optimize
output on older PostScript language compatible RIPs that are not capable of

232 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.10 Harlequin Precision Screening

producing halftone screens at accurate angles and frequencies. Using these fre-
quencies and angles means that the output from the RIP with HPS is no better
than without HPS, and indeed may be far more prone to moiré.
The best route is to switch off such features in the sending application if possi-
ble, or to set up a PPD (or other configuration file) which uses the same screen
frequency for all separations, and a standard set of angles: for example, 0°, 15°,
45°, and 75°.
If modifying the input file is not possible then, in the HPS Options dialog box,
select Snap angles to nearest 7.5 degrees and, in the Edit Style dialog box, select
Override frequency in job. You cannot use this second method if you want several
different screen frequencies on a page: for example, for special effects.

6.10.4 HPS and pattern screens

Some applications use the PostScript-language halftoning mechanism to produce pat-
terns rather than halftones. However, devices which do not require screens would then
reproduce the pattern as a shade of gray. Some applications which do this produce
poor PostScript-language files, in such a way that they only produce the desired result
at resolutions which are multiples of 75 dpi, presumably because they were designed
for output at 300 dpi on a laser printer and not for high-resolution imagesetters.
To avoid these problems, the RIP detects such screens and replaces them either with a
special screen which does not suffer from resolution problems, or with an equivalent
PostScript-language pattern, depending on whether the output is halftone or continu-
ous tone.
HPS does not alter these pattern screens in any way—angles, frequencies, and dot
shapes are left unchanged and no extra gray technology is used with them.

6.10.5 Increasing HPS performance

The first time a RIP installation uses a particular HPS screen, the RIP must generate it.
This can take a few minutes. However, HPS screen sets are cached to disk, which
means that there is very little performance difference from using HPS if the RIP has a
large enough memory allocation (and apart from the first time that a particular screen
set is used, which is when the RIP builds the disk cache). There may be some perfor-
mance increase when using screen caches generated during previous jobs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 233

 Screening

The RIP caches screen sets with PostScript-defined spot functions as well as those
with recognized functions. These spot functions are not processed quite as rapidly as
the built-in functions the first time that they are used but when previously cached
screens are used there is no difference in performance between built-in screen func-
tions and spot functions supplied in PostScript.
High performance screening with HPS in the RIP requires a reasonably large amount
of RAM. As a guide, you should assume that extra memory in the range 8 through
12 MB RAM is required to use HPS effectively.
If messages are produced in the Navigator RIP window saying that insufficient mem-
ory is available and that performance is being affected then you should increase the
amount of RAM available to the RIP to obtain significant speed increases.
If you are not using extra grays then increasing the freedom of HPS to select from a
wider range of screen sets by increasing the Maximum frequency deviation, Angle accu-
racy, or Frequency accuracy settings reduces the memory requirement. If extra grays
are switched on, you can also reduce memory usage by using lower values for Limit
number of distinct gray levels and Limit screen levels.

Ensure that the Optimize for angle set value defined in the HPS Options dialog box is
correct for the angles that you are using. If the value is set incorrectly then processing
a job may require significantly more memory.
If you are imposing several separations onto one output film, the relative positions of
the plates which do not use 0 and 45 degree angles (usually Cyan and Magenta) can
make significant differences to memory requirements and rendering times. If at all
possible, ensure that these two plates do not occur side by side: that is, avoid the case
where a single fast scan line on the final film can pass through both a Cyan plate and a
Magenta plate. If all four CMYK separations are to be produced on a single film then
the best default configuration is a two by two square with Cyan and Magenta in diago-
nally opposite corners, because film rotation cannot then cause these plates to appear
on the same scan line.

234 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.11 Harlequin Screening Library

6.11 Harlequin Screening Library

Several other screen sets can be supplied for use in the Navigator RIP. They comprise
the Harlequin Screening Library (HSL).
The code to handle all of the screen sets is present in all shipped copies of the RIP, but
individual screen sets must be enabled using key numbers (passwords). Each pass-
word is tied to both a specific screening style and to the serial number of the RIP for
which the option is required. Please contact your supplier for details of pricing on each
screen set or bundle of sets (and other options enabled by passwords).
Where the RIP itself is secured with a hardware security dongle the security number
of the dongle is used as the Navigator RIP serial number. Please note: the number
printed on the dongle itself and marked as serial number is the dongle hardware serial
number and not the same as the Navigator RIP serial number.
While the RIP is starting up, it reports the serial number and its checksum (a check to
reveal errors in copying the digits of the serial number) in the Navigator RIP window.
This example report is for a fictitious serial number:
Serial number: 1234-56

6.11.1 Switching on HSL

You enter the passwords in a dialog box accessed from the Configure RIP dialog box.
Click Extras in the Configure RIP dialog box to display the Configure RIP Extras dia-
log box.
There is one entry in the list within the Configure RIP Extras dialog box for each of
the HSL screen sets. (There is a second entry for HDS, titled HDS-Light: this entry
provides a limited use of HDS, restricted to lower resolution output devices such as
proofing printers.)
There may also be entries which refer to options in other areas of the RIP: for exam-
ple, ColorPro for the Navigator RIP color management system. These entries are
described elsewhere in this manual: see Section 7.8 on page 254 for a summary of
other entries.
The word Yes after a name indicates that the screen set or option is enabled. To enable
a new set or option, select it in the list and click Add. In the Enable Feature dialog box
that appears, enter the password supplied to you for that set, then click on OK to return

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 235

 Screening

to the Configure RIP Extras dialog box and OK again to return to the Configure RIP
dialog box.
You can change a password already entered by selecting the appropriate entry in the
list on the Configure RIP Extras dialog box and clicking on Add.
Note: To disable a feature that you have already enabled with a valid password, enter
a password of 0 (zero).
The RIP may reject a password when you type it into the Enable Feature dialog box.
The main reasons for rejection are:
• The password is wrong, probably because of incorrect transmission or a typing
mistake.
• The password is for the wrong option. For example, if you enter an HDS pass-
word after selecting HCS then the password is not accepted.
The fact that the Enable Feature dialog box accepts a password does not necessarily
imply that the password is correct for that particular screen set on that particular copy
of the RIP. (Remember that the serial number of the Navigator RIP is set by the don-
gle.) If you get errors when using an HSL screen, please check that the entered pass-
word is correct.

6.11.2 Selecting an HSL screen set

Once enabled, each screen set adds one or more entries to the Dot shape drop-down list
in the Edit Style dialog box. Select the entry for the screen you want to use.
Note: You can select a screen set in the Edit Style dialog box so long as the RIP has
accepted a non-zero password entered in the Password dialog box. All attempts to use
the screen will fail if the password entered is invalid for the the Navigator RIP serial
number currently in use.

6.11.3 Harlequin Chain Screening (HCS)

Harlequin Chain Screening uses a long ratio elliptical dot. When used for process
color separations the angles used are 60° apart, rather than the more common 30°
apart used for most offset litho work. This gives an overall triangular pattern and pro-
duces a very fine rosette structure. The angles used are -45°, 45°, -15°, and -75° for
yellow, magenta, cyan, and black respectively.

236 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.11 Harlequin Screening Library

When used at high frequencies, this screening set is extremely good at holding detail
in continuous tone areas (for example, scanned images), but can suffer from worse
object moiré than, for example, Euclidean dots if the subject of the image contains
fine patterns.
HCS is also very good at creating smooth, flat looking tints in process color work even
at low screen rulings, although you must take care at the edges of such tints, where
patterns can occur unless the tints are bounded: for example, edged with a black rule.
For HCS screens, the RIP uses the screen frequency entered into the Edit Style dialog
box, but ignores the entered angle. Instead, the RIP selects an angle automatically
based on the color separation being processed, from the set (-45°, 45°, -15°, and -75°).
We recommend that you turn on Harlequin Precision Screening while using HCS—at
higher frequencies, also use the extra grays functionality of HPS.

6.11.4 Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS)

Harlequin Dispersed Screening is the Navigator RIP Frequency Modulation (FM)
screening technology. The main advantages of using HDS are that it produces no
moiré, it has better definition than conventional screening, and registration is less crit-
ical. HDS also has a visually pleasing screen structure and is generally more printable
than other FM screens. Finally, it should be noted that HDS is intended for use with a
wide range of printing processes.
Instead of using a fixed shaped dot structure, HDS uses irregular clusters of pixels to
form an irregular HDS dot. The distribution of these dots or clusters through the
screen is what gives HDS its characteristics.
Five varieties of HDS are supplied with HSL, called HDS Super Fine, HDS Fine,
HDS Medium, HDS Coarse, and HDS Super Coarse. (There are also closely related
HDS screens for use with output devices supporting the alternative process color sys-
tems discussed in Section 14.1.1 on page 469. For example, you may see Hex HDS
Super F as well as HDS Super F in the Dot shape menu of the Edit Style dialog
box.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 237

 Screening

Warning: Do not use Hex HDS Super F or other screens whose names start with
Hex when your output device is operating in a conventional (CMYK or RGB) output
space. Several output plugins remove the names of inappropriate dot shapes from the
Dot shape list to help prevent mistaken choices.

These varieties differ in the size and distribution of the HDS dots (clusters) used to
create tints. The selection of which to use should be based on the physical characteris-
tics of the imagesetter being used, together with details of the plate making, press, ink,
paper, and press environment.
In general, the higher the quality of the entire printing process the smaller the HDS dot
that can be used. The finer HDS screens are best used with high quality imagesetters
capable of holding single laser spots. The coarser HDS screens are best selected on
presses which cannot hold very fine detail, such as high speed web-offset presses. The
physical size of the HDS dot created with each of these options varies both with the
imagesetter laser spot size, and with the resolution at which it is driven. HDS Super
Coarse (HDS Super C) is designed to be suitable for use in newsprint applications on
imagesetters at mid-range resolutions, that is 1000 through 1600 dots per inch (dpi).
HDS Super Fine (HDS Super F) is designed for output devices where final copy is
produced directly: for example, laser or inkjet printers.
HDS Super Fine:

HDS Fine:

HDS Medium:

238 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.11 Harlequin Screening Library

HDS Coarse:

HDS Super Coarse:

Below is a table with the spot sizes in microns for the different HDS models and dif-
ferent output resolutions for 20% HDS screen.

Imagesetter/platesetter 1016 1200 1800 2400 3600

resolutions dpi

HDS Super Fine 1x1 pixel 25 21 14 11 7

HDS Fine 2x1 pixels 35 30 20 15 10

HDS Medium 2x2 pixels 50 42 28 21 14

HDS Coarse 2x3 pixels 61 51 34 26 17

HDS Super Coarse 4x4 pixels 100 84 56 42 28

Table 6.1 Spot sizes in microns of a 20% HDS screen

Both the frequency and the angle supplied in the Edit Style dialog box are ignored
when using HDS screens, except for calibration.
As with any high definition screening technology, accurate calibration is important for
good quality output using HDS, and it may be necessary to create several calibration
sets for use with different presses or different paper stocks on a given press. In most
circumstances however, a single calibration set is sufficient and you should therefore
specify a range of frequencies likely to cover any line frequency which might be set in
the screening dialog boxes or requested by a PostScript-language job. The HDS
screens are symmetric, that is, you may use a single calibration set for both positive
and negative output.
Though HDS screens do not have the same lines per inch (lpi) characteristic as con-
ventional screening the following rough comparisons may be useful. If we take the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 239

 Screening

case of an imagesetter working at 1524 dpi with a relatively small dot size (less than
20 µm), then HDS Coarse has a dot gain on film only slightly higher than a conven-
tional 150 lpi screen in the midtones, and holds up better than the conventional screen
in the highlights and the shadows. HDS Medium has a similar correspondence to a
200 lpi screen at 1524 dpi. Finally, HDS Fine has characteristics similar to a 300 lpi
screen, and needs similar careful handling to obtain good results. It should be noted
that the lpi correspondence changes more or less in proportion to changes in the imag-
esetter resolution. For example, a rough correspondence to a 100 lpi screen is given by
HDS Coarse at 1016 dpi, though if the final press has high dot gain this still has to be
taken into account in the calibration.
As can be seen from the above comparison with conventional screening, many people
using HDS screens may become aware of the issues required to print very fine detail
on film for the first time. The following hints and suggestions are useful when work-
ing with HDS screens, particularly HDS Fine, and also apply to conventional and
other screens at very high line frequencies. These hints are not a definitive guide, but
do provide a starting point for producing good HDS output.
Consider every stage of the process, including:
• While scanning, choose an appropriate unsharp masking setting. You may need
to use unsharp masking settings different from those used for conventionally
screened output.
• When producing film positives, try using different laser spot sizes. We have
found that the best results are produced if a relatively small laser spot size is
used in conjunction with exposures sufficient to give solids with densities in
the range 3.5 through 4.0. However, this may not be applicable to every image-
setter.
• When making plates and proofs, take great care to ensure that the film is clean
and dust free and make any other adjustments that help to ensure intimate con-
tact between the film and the proof or plate medium. For example, increase the
vacuum pump-down time from, say, 20 seconds to 60 seconds or more.
• When printing on a press with relatively high dot gain, consider compensating
for this gain. On such presses, particularly on web-offset, you may have to
make an adjustment for the higher dot gain in the highlights and midtones due
to the finer detail in the screen. Various schemes are possible and have been

240 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.11 Harlequin Screening Library

used for this; one approach is to calibrate the screen for the press directly, but
be aware that images are normally scanned with a modest press compensation
already in place and take this into account.
HDS screens have no angle as such, but are rotationally isotropic (they have the same
characteristics in every direction). Even though the screen angle is ignored, different
patterns are used for each process separation. This does not depend on the screen
angle originally selected, but uses the automatic color separation detection, described
in “Automatic detection of color separations” on page 243.
The screen caches used by HDS mean that HDS output is produced at virtually identi-
cal rates to that using other screening systems within the RIP. The caches are reason-
ably large, although not significantly greater than those used for many combinations
of screen frequency, resolution, and angle. Do not select very large values for Limit
screen levels in the HPS Options dialog box, unless you have very large amounts of
RAM available to your copy of the RIP.
Unlike HPS, HCS, or HMS, the screen caches used by HDS cannot be created by the
RIP if they are not present when a screen is selected. Each of the variants of HDS
requires cache files to be installed into the Screens subfolder of the SW folder. These
are saved in folders named in the pattern HDS-<set>-gen, where <set> is replaced
by particular values. The <set> part of the name is a for super fine, b for fine, c for
medium, d for coarse, or e for super coarse. Each folder has subfolders, named: A,
Ai, B, Bi, C, D, Default, E, and F. These folders allow for up to six independent out-
put colorants, including light and dark versions of two inks, and spot colors. For
example, with a conventional four-color device, the mapping is that Cyan uses A,
Magenta uses B, Yellow uses C, and Black uses D. Installer applications supplied by
Global Graphics for use with the RIP automatically install all appropriate cache files.
The RIP ignores the value set for Rotate screens according to page rotation (in the Edit
Style dialog box) when screening with HDS.
Compression of page buffers is less efficient with HDS than other screening tech-
niques. (It is a general rule of compression that increased randomness in data reduces
the amount by which it can be compressed.) You can expect compressed page buffers
to be larger when using HDS, and disk performance to become marginally more
important to total throughput. It is usually possible to maintain or improve throughput
with the same output quality, by exploiting the ability to process jobs at lower resolu-
tion.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 241

 Screening

HDS screens cannot be used if the horizontal and vertical output resolutions selected
are not equal.

6.11.5 Harlequin Micro Screening (HMS)

Harlequin Micro Screening uses a Respi screen structure to allow greater highlight
gradation even at high screen rulings. It does this by using half the nominal screen
between 0% and 5% dot area and between 95% and 100% and the nominal screen rul-
ing between 20% and 80% dot area. Between 5% and 20%, and between 80% and
95%, HMS goes through transition zones.
Two variants of HMS are included in HSL; one where the dot shapes in the 20% to
80% tints are very similar to the standard Euclidean dot shape, and one where they
closely resemble the standard Elliptical shape.
HMS Euclidean:

HMS Elliptical1:

If you have been limiting the screen frequencies that you use because you cannot be
certain of holding the small highlight and shadow dots with finer screens then HMS
should allow you to output at significantly higher frequencies. However, it does not
assist you if you need to limit your screen frequencies because of press registration
problems.
HMS may be used to extend the length of print runs in situations where this is nor-
mally limited by drop-out increasing as the print run progresses.
HMS acts on both the screen frequency and angle as defined in the Edit Style dialog
box in the RIP.
Careful calibration can improve output quality when using HMS. The Euclidean vari-
ant of HMS is symmetrical, but you should normally produce separate calibration sets
for positive and negative output of the Elliptical HMS form.

242 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 6.12 Automatic detection of color separations

6.11.6 Troubleshooting HSL

An undefinedresult error from setscreen, setcolorscreen, or sethalf-
tone is probably due to one of the following:

• An attempt has been made to use a screen set which has not been enabled, or
where the password entered for that screen set is incorrect for the current secu-
rity number. This can occur if an incorrect password has been entered acciden-
tally or if the dongle has been changed from that for which the password was
originally created.
Note: Selection of HSL screens in the Screening dialog box is enabled when
any nonzero number is entered in the Enable Feature dialog box for that screen
set—the ability to select a HSL screen does not necessarily imply that the
number entered is correct for use with the specific dongle connected.
• An attempt has been made to use an HDS screen when HDS has been correctly
enabled, but one or more of the appropriate HDS screen caches is not present.

6.12 Automatic detection of color separations

There are several procedures in process separated work where the RIP must know
which color is being interpreted:
• Using HCS and HDS correctly.
• Overriding screen angles.
• Recombining preseparated jobs.
• Warning of an attempt to separate a preseparated job.
Identifying the color in auto-separated jobs is simple, but all versions of the RIP sup-
porting HSL are also capable of detecting which color is being interpreted in presepa-
rated PostScript from a very wide variety of applications.
While the detection methods used have a very high success rate they are not guaran-
teed to function with all PostScript-language files generated by applications. See
Section 14.7.2 on page 489 for details about the Recombine preseparated jobs option.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 243

 Screening

6.13 Using Harlequin Harpoon PCI

Halftone screening is computationally intensive and can dramatically slow down the
rendering of a page. One solution to this bottleneck is off-loading halftone screening
calculations to specially-designed hardware. See Appendix D, “Harpoon PCI Screen-
ing Accelerator” for details.

244 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7

Configuring the RIP

Chapter 3 through Chapter 6 describe how you can use the Navigator RIP to configure
the appearance of any page of output sent to a printer or the screen.
This chapter shows how you can also configure the way in which the RIP works,
allowing you to get the best performance from the RIP working with your particular
computer, network, and output devices; together with system software and any other
applications running on the computer.
You have control over a variety of settings, including the following:
• The folders in which certain files are placed by the RIP.
• The page buffer mode that the RIP uses.
• The use of buffers in memory.
• Job timeouts.
• Memory allocation.
All of the options described here are available from the Configure RIP dialog box or
subsidiary dialog boxes.
You can also reset the RIP to its factory settings, as described in “Resetting the Navi-
gator RIP to default values” on page 258, or choose a different language to be used in
dialog boxes, menus, and messages, as described in “Choosing the user interface lan-
guage” on page 259.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 245

 Configuring the RIP

7.1 Configure RIP dialog box

The Configure RIP dialog box is displayed when you choose Configure RIP from the
Navigator RIP menu or type Ctrl+R. (If there is an Input Queue menu, you must stop
the input queues before you can choose Configure RIP: choose Stop Input Queue from
the Input Queue menu.)

Figure 7.1 Configure RIP dialog box

Section 7.2 through Section 7.7 on page 253 describe the use of items in this dialog
box.
Section 7.8 on page 254 describes the use of the dialog box displayed when you click
the Extras button.
The Options button leads to another subsidiary dialog box: described in part of
Section 7.3 on page 248; and in Section 7.9 on page 256 through Section 7.12 on
page 258.

7.2 How the Navigator RIP controls files

You can configure the RIP so that certain files are always kept in particular folders on
your machine. You can specify the following:
• Workspace folder.
• Page buffer folder.

246 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.2 How the Navigator RIP controls files

7.2.1 Workspace folder

This folder is used as general disk workspace. If there is not enough RAM available,
the RIP will create temporary files in this folder to use as workspace. This might occur
if you are processing jobs that contain very large images.
By default, the workspace folder is called WorkSpace, and is found in the SW folder.
You can specify another location for the workspace by clicking the Change button in
the Configure RIP dialog box and specifying a folder of your choice.
The amount of disk space required for workspace will vary a lot from job to job. It is
worth remembering that jobs containing large images scanned at high resolution will
often produce very large workspace files, amounting even to many megabytes. Simple
jobs, however, may require none at all.

7.2.2 Page buffer folder

When the RIP buffers pages to disk, they are placed in the page buffer folder. By
default, this is called PageBuffers, and is found in the SW folder. If you want to
choose somewhere else, click the Change button in the Configure RIP dialog box.
Note: From Eclipse Release SP1 the MediaSavingDir is located as a subfolder to
the PageBuffers folder. Do not select the MediaSavingDir as the location for
page buffers.
Pages are normally compressed when they are buffered to disk, so it is hard to esti-
mate how much space will be needed for the page buffer folder, because compression
ratios can vary.
When the RIP is in either of the single modes, any stored page buffer is deleted once
the page has been printed.
In one of the multiple modes, old pages can be kept if enough space is available.
These pages can be deleted automatically as required, by selecting the appropriate
Delete option in the Output Controller. (See Chapter 4, “Harlequin RIP Output Meth-
ods”.)
Note: The choice you make for the Delete option is remembered between RIP ses-
sions, by recording it in the page buffer folder. Thus, the choice is lost if you choose a
new page buffer folder, but is found again if you return to using the original folder.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 247

 Configuring the RIP

The page buffer folder should be held on a local disk, rather than on a server. In addi-
tion, if you are using an output device with a very high data rate, this disk must be fast
enough to keep up with the printer.

7.3 Control of page buffering modes

The options in the Configure RIP dialog box allow you to decide whether or not pages
will be buffered on disk, and if they are, whether they will be compressed automati-
cally.
Chapter 4, “Harlequin RIP Output Methods”, gives full details of what happens when
you use the various page buffering modes. The following text tells you how and why
to choose a particular mode.

7.3.1 How to choose the page buffering mode

You can choose which mode to run the RIP in by selecting one of the items in the Page
buffering drop-down list of the Configure RIP dialog box.

7.3.2 Using a printer that can stop / start

Some background information may help you understand this feature. Several output
devices supported by the RIP require a continuous high-speed flow of data when they
are imaging while others can stop and restart (stop / start) when there is a pause in
incoming data, with little or no effect on the produced image. In many of the printers
supported by the Navigator RIP, stopping has no bad effect and may pass unreported.
However, in many imagesetters, stopping can produce some visible difference in the
produced image so these imagesetters report to the RIP the fact that they have stopped
/ started.
Normally when outputting, if the printer reports a stop / start, the page will not be out-
put. However, when using Single, Multiple, or Multiple Parallel mode, the RIP will
always make page buffers on disk, and if your system is configured with a sufficiently
fast disk, the printer will never stop / start. If the disk may not be fast enough, then you
can set the Allow stop / start option in the Configure RIP Options dialog box to allow
the page to output.
When using Single (if required) mode, if the printer runs so fast that it catches up with
the data being supplied by the RIP, the RIP will create a page buffer containing the

248 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.3 Control of page buffering modes

data for the current page.The RIP will then reprint that page before carrying on with
the next page.
However, if your printer can stop / start, you have two options:
• Allow a page buffer to be created and output again. If the page buffer still
cannot be output fast enough to keep up with the printer, the job will be
aborted.
• Stop the printer until enough image has been processed, and then start the
printer again.
You can choose which of these should be done from the Configure RIP Options dialog
box, as shown in Figure 7.2. Display this dialog box by clicking on the Options button
on the main Configure RIP dialog box.

Figure 7.2 Configure RIP Options dialog box

• If you select the box labeled Allow stop / start, the second option will be used. If
the box is not selected, a page buffer will be created and the page output again.
By default, the box is not selected.
Even if your printer allows stop / starting, you may not necessarily want to use this
feature. Stopping and starting some printers will cause a degradation in the image.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 249

 Configuring the RIP

7.3.3 Compressing page buffers

The box labeled Compress page buffer in the Configure RIP dialog box controls
whether or not page buffers are compressed as they are created. By default, page buff-
ers will be compressed. The advantages of this are:
• It saves disk space—the compressed page buffers are smaller.
• It is likely to be fast—the computer running the RIP is likely to be able to pro-
duce image data faster than the disk can receive it. Writing smaller files to disk
for compressed buffers will save time.
• It reduces the possibility of banding in printers that require a very high data
rate. Compressed page buffers allow the RIP to send data to the printer more
quickly and prevent banding in the output.
The data rate of a printer is the speed at which it accepts data for printing. Many print-
ers require a data rate in the range 1 through 2 MB per second. On some platforms,
this is only possible with compressed page buffers.
For some combinations of processor speed, disk capacity, and disk speed, you may
wish to limit the use of compression. You can do this using the Minimum compression
ratio option in the Configure RIP Options dialog box, as described in Section 7.3.5.

There are very few cases where you will always want to use uncompressed page buff-
ers. If you do want this choice, clear the Compress page buffer box.

7.3.4 Band size for printing buffer

The Band size for printing buffer option in the Configure RIP Options dialog box also
has an effect on the performance of driving an output device. The value specifies the
size in kilobytes (KB) of the bands into which the RIP divides a page for rendering, in
the slow scan direction. Larger bands mean the page is divided into fewer pieces.
Changing the size will alter performance characteristics.
Large pages (either in area or bits-per-pixel) mean that many fewer scan lines can be
accommodated in each band and this can slow down the system. On the other hand,
too many scan lines in a band means that each band takes longer to process and could
lead to stalling the output device.
For each band in the page the RIP must examine all the display list items present in the
band, and render only those parts of each object that intersect the band. The larger the

250 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.4 Job timeout

band, the more scanlines that can be fitted into the band leading to an increase in per-
formance. However, in this case, memory requirements are generally higher which
leads to a decrease in performance if memory is limited. It is important to note that the
bandsize/performance trade-off is affected by resolution, page width, PDF transpar-
ency, in-rip trapping, anti-aliasing (for example .tiff output), and scaling, as well as the
number and layout of objects within the page. In addition, band size is fixed for each
RIP session even though different page setups may be more optimally served by dif-
ferent band sizes.
The value you should enter depends on the configuration of your machine. Typical
values are 128 KB for black and white output, and more for output in color, perhaps
256 KB. Adjust these values according to experience with your configuration.

7.3.5 Minimum compression ratio

This option in the Configure RIP Options dialog box has an effect only when you have
selected the check box Compress page buffer in the Configure RIP dialog box. It allows
you to limit the use of compression to cases where there is a significant saving of disk
space. For example: if the value you enter here is 60%, the RIP compresses only bands
in page buffers that compress to a size smaller than 60% of their uncompressed size.
The value you should enter depends on the details of your system and the relative
importance you attach to minimizing disk usage or processing time. Typically, useful
values are in the range 50% through 100%. Enter a value of 100% to have all bands
compressed. You may want to choose a much lower figure where there is a large
amount of fast-access storage and compression is slow in comparison to disk access.

7.4 Job timeout

The job timeout allows you to control when the RIP will stop trying to process a job.
This is useful for various reasons:
• It can protect against infinite loops in PostScript-language code. If there is an
infinite loop in a job, it will never finish processing. Using a timeout ensures
that, after a set period of time, the RIP will stop processing such jobs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 251

 Configuring the RIP

• By altering the timeouts available in the RIP, you can to some extent prevent
loss of productivity by timing out complex, but correct, jobs before they con-
sume too much machine time. (Subsequently, you can rerun such jobs under
operator control and supervision: for example, with more resources temporarily
devoted to the RIP.)

7.5 Threads and parallel processing

The Threads option in the Configure RIP dialog box is disabled in versions of the RIP
that can use only a single processor.
In a symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) version of the Navigator RIP running on a suit-
able hardware platform, you can use this control to set the number of parallel pro-
cesses used by the RIP. In all normal use, you should set this value equal to the
number of processors available in your system: this will produce the fastest rendering.
Other, smaller, values may be useful in testing or troubleshooting.

7.6 Network buffer size

This buffer lets the RIP read data from the input source before actually needing to pro-
cess it. Having this ability has two advantages:
• It increases throughput.
• The application that is sending the data to the RIP becomes free sooner.

7.6.1 Increasing throughput

With many jobs, there are large amounts of data to be read, often across slow net-
works, so it is desirable to use any available time reading in the data, rather than wait-
ing for the RIP.
For example, when printing the Seybold Musicians test job (approximately 32 MB of
PostScript-language code, in four separation pages of 8 MB), a network buffer of
8 MB is desirable, since this means that while one separation is being processed, the
next one can already have been read in, ready for processing when the previous one is
finished. Without a network buffer, when one page is finished, the RIP would have to
wait for 8 MB to be read slowly from the input before it could be processed.

252 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.7 Printer buffer size

7.6.2 Freeing the sending application

The network buffer also increases productivity in the workplace, by freeing the appli-
cations sending jobs sooner. You will be able to work with the application again as
soon as the job has been read into the network buffer, even though the RIP may only
have processed a small portion of it.
For example, when printing the Seybold Musicians test job, your sending application
can be freed in about three minutes if a 32 MB network buffer is used, even though the
job might take 10 minutes to output overall. On smaller jobs, such as the Seybold
Trout test (approximately 200 KB of PostScript-language code), it is possible to free
your application in about 30 seconds, even though the job will take up to five minutes
to output overall.
To change the size of the network buffer, enter the number of KB you require in the
text box labeled Network buffer in the Configure RIP dialog box. It is 64 KB by
default. If there is not enough memory for the requested network buffer, its size will
be reduced automatically.

7.7 Printer buffer size

The printer buffer is used to store processed raster data that is ready to be sent to the
printer.
When outputting, data is always placed in the printer buffer before being copied out to
the printer as required. In most cases, if the printer is not continuously fed data, one of
the following may happen:
• Banding (gaps) may appear in the output.
• Pages may be aborted (for example, in a laser printer).
• The printer may stop / start.
This is known as data underrun.
To avoid data underrun, the RIP must ensure that the printer buffer never becomes
empty. However at any given time, you cannot guarantee that the RIP is sending data
to the buffer—it may be processing the next page of data if you are running in Multi-
ple (Parallel) mode, or there may be other applications running that the RIP has to wait
for. If the printer buffer empties and you get data underrun, try making the printer
buffer larger.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 253

 Configuring the RIP

For example, assume you are sending output to a fast 900 KB/second printer, while
using another application at the same time, and that application does a screen update
that takes 3 seconds (during which time the RIP is locked out). In that time, the printer
could consume 3 × 900 = 2700 KB (2.7 MB) of data. To prevent data underrun, you
must ensure that you have a printer buffer at least this big.
In practice, a printer buffer in the range 4 MB through 12 MB is usually adequate.
This total includes any buffering memory on interface cards or in the output device,
but if there is such memory it needs separate installation or configuration. From the
memory that the RIP controls, it allocates a minimum of 1024 KB buffer space by
default.
To find the best setting for your system, try starting with a 4 MB (4096 KB) buffer,
and if you have problems with data underrun, increase the buffer size until the prob-
lem goes away. If this fails, you may need a faster disk or more memory. The ability to
roam large or multiple page buffers is related to the printer buffer size; 4 MB is a good
starting point for this use.
To change the size of the printer buffer, enter the number of kilobytes (KB) you
require in the text box labeled Printer buffer in the Configure RIP dialog box. If there
is not enough memory for the requested printer buffer, its size will be reduced auto-
matically.
The figure you enter is the minimum amount of memory that the RIP will use for buff-
ering output. Sometimes, especially in Single (if required) mode, the RIP will use a
much larger amount of memory.
Note: The amount of printer buffer memory needed varies according to job and device
resolution, output device speed, computer speed, disk speed, and so on. Experiment
with a larger buffer if necessary.

7.8 Extras
The Configure RIP Extras dialog box, available from the Configure RIP dialog box, is
used to switch on screening strategies and layered options by entering passwords.
Note: There are other places where you may need to enter a password. Some plugins
require you to enter a password elsewhere; read the documentation for the plugin care-
fully to find out where. Also, some language options for the user interface can require

254 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.8 Extras

you to enable the language before you can use it—see Section 7.14 on page 259 for
details.
See “Harlequin Screening Library” on page 235 for details of how to use the screening
options and how to obtain and enter passwords for all options requiring passwords to
be entered in the Configure RIP Extras dialog box.
The other entries in the list can include:
• ColorPro, to enable the color management options within the Navigator RIP.
Harlequin ColorPro is described in the separate Harlequin ColorPro User’s
Guide.
• TrapPro to enable the TrapPro trapping options within the RIP. See the sepa-
rate TrapPro User Manual for full details.
• HDLT, to enable Harlequin display list technology.

• PostScript and PDF, to enable PostScript-language and PDF input.

• Simple imposition. See Chapter 10, “Simple Imposition” for full details.
• TIFF/IT, to enable TIFF/IT-P1 input.
Note: There is an optional TIFF/IT-P1 output plugin. If this plugin is present, it
shows the entry: TIFF/IT-P1, TIFF/IT-P1. Be careful to select the correct
entry for input or output before entering a password.
• Media Saving to enable the Media saving facilities.

There may also be entries for plugins that require a password. These entries can be the
result of:
• Security dongles that require a password before allowing use of plugins.
• Plugins that require a password for each device type that they provide.
• Multiple device plugins that require a password but group several device types
so that they can be enabled with a single password.
You should receive appropriate instructions and passwords when receiving these plu-
gins and security dongles.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 255

 Configuring the RIP

7.9 Specifying prep files

Prep files are libraries of PostScript-language routines that can be downloaded into a
RIP and used whenever necessary. Many LaserWriter drivers require certain libraries
to be loaded before they can be used.
You can select the following options in the Configure RIP Options dialog box.

7.9.1 Automatic prep loading

This is a built-in mechanism that, if the option is selected, automatically loads the cor-
rect prep file whenever it is needed. This can save a lot of time for applications print-
ing over networks, especially when these applications require different prep files. For
example, different prep files are used by different LaserWriter drivers on different
machines by different applications.
Automatic prep loading is selected by default.

7.9.2 Startup prep

If this box is selected, the prep file selected in the drop-down list is pre-loaded when
you start up the RIP. Select the prep file that is used most often by the jobs sent to the
RIP.
You do not have to use this option if automatic prep loading is already switched on,
but it can be a useful option if a number of people on the network are using the same
LaserWriter driver. If the correct startup prep is already loaded, it can save a few (2–5)
seconds on each job.
You can use automatic prep loading at the same time as a startup prep.

7.10 Navigator RIP memory allocation

The options in the Configure RIP Options dialog box, shown in Figure 7.2, page 249,
allow you to specify the memory allocation for the RIP.
If the Memory for RIP option is not selected, the RIP is allocated all the available phys-
ical memory, less the amount specified in the Minimum memory left for system field.

256 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.10 Navigator RIP memory allocation

If you want to reduce the amount of memory allocated to the RIP, select the Memory
for RIP option and enter the value in the text box. The RIP is allocated this amount of
memory, less the amount specified in the Minimum memory left for system field.
The Minimum memory left for system field lets you reduce the allocation for the RIP so
that memory is left for the operating system and any other running applications. If this
value is too small, the operating system will start paging, which will degrade
performance.
Note: The following two options are not available for a symmetric multiprocessing
(SMP) version of the RIP.
If a particular job is so large that it cannot all be fitted into memory at once, the RIP
starts to paint partial page buffers to disk. To try and avoid this, you can allocate extra
temporary memory for the RIP, using the Memory reserve for RIP option. This option
allows the RIP to use additional physical and virtual memory while completing the
job.
Note: If you allocate a large amount of extra temporary memory, the operating system
may start paging. Paging would slow the system down more than painting partial page
buffers to disk. We recommend that you allocate less than 4 MB of extra temporary
memory.
There are some instances when the RIP cannot paint partial page buffers to disk: for
example, when recombining preseparated jobs or using TrapPro. The RIP cannot com-
plete the job if it does not have enough memory. In such instances, select the Allow use
of all available memory option. The RIP will use all the available physical and virtual
memory to try and complete the job. Using all the memory may severely degrade per-
formance until the job has finished.
From the total memory allocated to it at startup, the RIP allocates the printer and net-
work buffers. All memory not used for these buffers is used by the RIP for processing
jobs.
The final allocations used are reported in the Navigator RIP window when the RIP
starts up.
If there is insufficient memory to allocate the buffers requested, the RIP tries the fol-
lowing methods of automatic recovery, in the order shown:
• Reducing the network buffer to a minimum of 64 KB.
• Reducing the printer buffer to a minimum of 512 KB.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 257

 Configuring the RIP

If there is still not enough memory to give the RIP at least 4096 KB, the RIP will dis-
play a warning and quit.

7.11 Minimum free disk space

The Navigator RIP allows you to ensure that it leaves free a minimum amount of disk
space, which is good practice and allows for use by other applications. Specifying this
reserved disk space is important for use with the two RIP modes—Multiple and Mul-
tiple (Parallel)—that can produce multiple buffers, where it ensures that the disk is not
completely filled up with an unlimited number of page buffers.
The default value of the Disk space left for system option is 5 MB. You may want to
increase it to reserve disk space for other applications running on the same machine,
such as spooling programs. A reasonable value should be near the size of the largest
files regularly created or copied on the relevant disk. Try using 50 MB, if this size is
difficult to predict.

7.12 Disable sounds

Select this box in the Configure RIP Options dialog box to suppress the system beep
normally generated when the RIP encounters an error.

7.13 Resetting the Navigator RIP to default values

If you decide that you want to revert to the default values that the RIP is supplied with,
choose the Revert to Factory Settings option in the Start menu.
If you did not add the RIP commands to the Windows Start menu when you installed
the RIP, open a command (DOS) window in the folder holding the RIP application and
type this:
C:\PATH>HARLQN_LS.exe -RESET

Note: In the command line, change HARLQN_LS.exe to the exact name of the appli-
cation that you are using.
A dialog box appears, asking if you wish to return to the factory defaults.
• Click Yes if you wish to reset any part of the current configuration.

258 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.14 Choosing the user interface language

• Click No if you wish to keep all of the current configuration. (the RIP starts up
normally.)
If you click Yes, the RIP displays several dialog boxes that allow you to reset specific
parts of the configuration, one after the other. For each dialog box, click the Yes button
to reset all the configuration information described in that dialog box. Click No to
keep that part of your configuration.
The RIP allows you to reset most parts of the configuration in this manner, including
page setups, RIP configuration, media management information, and window posi-
tions.
After the last dialog box, the RIP starts up normally.

7.14 Choosing the user interface language

You are asked to make a choice of the language to be used in dialog boxes, menus, and
messages when you start up the RIP for the first time. Later, you can check the exact
language in use or change the language, for most combinations of languages.

7.14.1 Requirements and limitations

There is no problem in changing language if both languages are chosen from English
and most Western European languages—technically described, those languages that
use encodings of the ISO-Latin character set. There is also little risk in switching from
ISO-Latin to a language that uses a two-byte character encodings: for example, Japa-
nese, Traditional Chinese, and Simplified Chinese. There is a higher risk of problems
if you attempt to switch between two languages that use different two-byte character
encodings.
The operating system of your computer must support the language you wish to use.
You are also likely to require the RIP localization files and a password from your sup-
plier before you can change the language used by the RIP. If you have to install any
files, restart the operating system and the RIP before proceeding.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 259

 Configuring the RIP

7.14.2 Procedure
To check which languages are available or to switch to another available language,
choose the Navigator RIP > Language menu option. The Select User Interface Lan-
guage dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 7.3.

Figure 7.3 Select User Interface Language dialog box

The dialog box shows you which languages are available in a multi-column list. A lan-
guage is available for immediate use if the entries after its name or code (in the Lan-
guage column) are all Present or Yes.

The columns have these meanings

• The Messages and Resources columns show if parts of the RIP localization are
present.
• The Locale column shows if the operating system supports the language.
• The Enabled column shows if the RIP localization is enabled, when the entry is
Yes; or disabled, when the entry is No.

Click Cancel if you do not wish to make a change.

You can supply a password to enable a language if the only thing making that lan-
guage unavailable is a No entry in the Enabled column. Select the row for your chosen
language and click Enable. In the password entry dialog box, enter your password and
click OK. You should now see that the language is enabled. Check the password if the
language is not enabled. (If you still have problems, click Cancel to continue using
your previous user interface language while you obtain support from your supplier.)

260 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7.14 Choosing the user interface language

To use an enabled language, select your chosen language and click OK. The RIP dis-
plays a dialog box asking if you wish to confirm your choice and quit the RIP. Click
Yes if you are sure, and then click OK to dismiss the second confirmation dialog box.

When you restart the RIP, you should see that it is using your chosen user interface
language.
Note: You may still see a small number of options in lists or messages appearing in
English or another language. This is normal. For example, the Feature and Calibration
lists in the Edit Page setup dialog box display the names of files, which remain
unchanged as the user interface language changes. Similarly, the Harlequin window
displays messages if they are produced directly by PostScript-language jobs and, if
needed, some very rare and technical error messages.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 261

 Configuring the RIP

262 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8

Configuring Input

This chapter describes the different ways in which the Navigator RIPNavigator RIP
can accept its input, and how to configure the RIP to use each type of input. Chapter 5,
“Configuring Output Formats”, describes the different ways in which you can control
output from the RIP, using page setups.
There are several ways of providing input to the Navigator RIP:
• Using one or more managed inputs, as described in Section 8.1, “Input man-
agement”, and the following sections. This is the preferred method for routine
use because, in general, the managed inputs allow users on many machines to
submit jobs to the RIP.
• Using the Print File menu command, as described in Section 8.12 on page 302.
This command allows a user on the machine running the RIP to print all of the
job types possible on that installation of the RIP. You can use Print File while
managed inputs are active.
• Entering PostScript-language code interactively by typing at a prompt on the
machine, as described in Section 8.20 on page 333. You must disable other
inputs for the duration of your interactive sessions in order to do this.
When you use managed inputs or the Print File menu command, you can print several
types of job. The available types depend on the details of your installation of the RIP.
Some types have associated settings in page setups, may require enabling with pass-

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 263

 Configuring Input

words, or require other care in use. The possible types, with references to full descrip-
tions of their use, are:
• PostScript-language files (PS) and Encapsulated PostScript files (EPS), both
described in Section 8.13 on page 304.
• Portable Document Format (PDF) files, described in Section 8.14 on page 304.
• JPEG and JFIF files, described in Section 8.15 on page 323.
• TIFF/IT-P1 files, described in Section 8.17 on page 323.
• TIFF 6.0 files, described in Section 8.18 on page 328.
• Navigator RIP page buffer files, described in Section 8.19 on page 331.

8.1 Input management

In the same way that the RIP uses output plugins to provide output sources, it uses
input plugins to provide input sources.
Global Graphics and OEM programmers can create input plugins, each of which may
be used as one of the following:
• Input to the RIP, for example, as a source of jobs. (When installed, these plu-
gins are obvious parts of the RIP: the description of these plugins and their con-
figuration forms the bulk of this chapter.)
• A PostScript device on which you can open a file and read or write from a
PostScript-language job. (This is not seen by the end user.)
• A filter to manipulate data. (This is not seen by the end user.)
• A source of asynchronous actions. (Most of these actions are small, specialized
tasks and not directly related to output of a user job. For example, one such
action enables the RIP to provide a list of installed fonts while busy with a job
for output.)
There are a number of input plugins supplied with the RIP, each providing users with
the ability to submit jobs. Section 8.2 on page 266 describes the way in which you can
manage these plugins and the inputs they provide. The supplied inputs are:
• AppleTalk. This lets the RIP accept input from any AppleTalk network con-
nected to the machine running the RIP.

264 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.1 Input management

See Section 8.3 on page 270 for more details.

• NT Print. This publishes the RIP as a printer available to the Windows NT print
services.
See Section 8.4 on page 271 for more details.
• NT Pipe. This provides a named pipe allowing high speed communication with
an application such as an Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server.
See Section 8.5 on page 276 for more details.
• Spool Folder. This lets you specify multiple independent folders into which
users or applications can place jobs to be printed. The RIP checks for the pres-
ence of files in these folders and prints each one automatically.
See Section 8.6 on page 280 for more details.
• Socket plugin. This allows input to arrive over a network, which can contain
different types of computer, using a TCP/IP socket.
See Section 8.6 on page 280 for more details.
• Asynchronous socket plugin
This is similar to the socket plugin but is only suitable for a limited number of
jobs. Typically, these are small jobs performing control or monitoring functions,
rather than imaging.
See Section 8.6 on page 280 for more details.
• Asynchronous socket quit plugin
This is similar to the asynchronous socket plugin but has the single purpose of
causing the RIP to quit. It does not receive any jobs.
See Section 8.12 on page 302 for more details.
• Serial port, on PCs and platforms running the UNIX operating system. This
supports the Adobe Serial Lines Protocol, and lets you connect two machines
by their serial lines, so that input can be accepted by a RIP running on one of
them.
See Section 8.14 on page 304 for more details.
Each of these plugins can be thought of as analogous to a multiple device output plu-
gin, except that they provide inputs, rather than outputs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 265

 Configuring Input

8.2 Managing input plugins

You control input plugins using the Input Controller. Before creating new inputs or
changing existing ones, check that you have an appropriate page setup to associate
with each input. (While creating page setups, you can keep the Input Controller dis-
played, but not the subsidiary dialog boxes.)
Display the Input Controller dialog box by choosing the Navigator RIP > Input Control-
ler menu option, or clicking the tool bar button. Figure 8.1 shows the Input Controller
dialog box.

Figure 8.1 Input Controller window

The Input Controller is similar to the Device Manager, described in Section 5.11,
“Multiple device output plugins”. The main list shows the input sources currently
available. Each input source can be turned on or off individually using the buttons—
the state is displayed in the Status column.
Each row in the list represents one particular source, and contains:
• The Name for the input source. This is used to identify the source within the
RIP. It may also be used by the input plugin itself.
• The Type of input. This determines which input plugin the RIP uses.
• The Page Setup. This is the page setup used by all jobs arriving through this
source.
• The Enabled state. This should be On to make the source available when you
start the RIP or start inputs.
• The Status. This can be Stopped, Idle, or Busy.

266 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.2 Managing input plugins

An input is stopped either because all inputs are stopped, because you have dis-
abled this input in the Input Controller (using Off), or because of a problem
when trying to start that input. An idle input is ready to receive a job but none is
arriving. A busy input is actually receiving a job.
You can also choose to see the same information about items that are not controllable
from the Input Controller. The check box below the list gives you this ability:

Show protected channels

Select this box if you wish to see, but not control, the status
of protected channels. This box is grayed out if there are no
protected channels.
Protected channels are channels that have been created out-
side the Input Controller—possibly by executing PostScript-
language commands in configuration files that the RIP used
when starting up—and marked as being outside routine user
control. Typically, a protected channel is not an input source
for imaging jobs: instead, it performs one of the other func-
tions described in “Input management” on page 264.
Below the list of sources are several buttons that allow you to perform the various
actions described in sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.7.
When you have finished making changes in the Input Controller, you can keep it visi-
ble as a way of monitoring which inputs are submitting jobs or close it using the Navi-
gator RIP > Input Controller menu option or the tool bar button.

8.2.1 Turning on the input system

To start receiving jobs from the configured and enabled inputs, choose Start Inputs
from the Navigator RIP menu, or type Ctrl+I. When you do this, there is a delay of a
few seconds as the various defined input sources are initialized, and then the RIP starts
to accept jobs from those sources.
The status area of the tool bar shows the searching for input symbol (a torch or flash-
light shining on an arrow).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 267

 Configuring Input

A new menu appears in the menu bar, called Input Queue. This menu has these
options:
• Kill Current Job. This causes the job currently processing to be aborted. It may
take a few seconds.
• Stop Input Queue. This turns off the input system when the job currently pro-
cessing has finished.
• Abort Input Queue. This aborts the job currently processing and then turns off
the input system.

8.2.2 Adding a new input source to the list

You can create many different input sources for each input plugin. For example, you
could create 5 spool folder input sources and 10 AppleTalk input sources.
To add a new input source to the list:
1. Click the New button in the Input Controller. The RIP displays an Input Channel
Edit dialog box, similar to that shown in Figure 8.2, allowing you to fill in the
details for this source.

Figure 8.2 Input Channel Edit dialog box

2. Type a name for the plugin device in the Name text box.
The name is used to identify the source within the RIP. It may also be used by
the input plugin itself. If you create an AppleTalk input device, when you start
the inputs a printer of this name becomes available on the AppleTalk network.
3. Choose the plugin type from the Type drop-down list.
4. Choose a saved page setup from the Page Setup drop-down list: the RIP applies
this page setup to each job arriving at the source.
5. If the plugin is to be initially turned on, select the Enabled check box.

268 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.2 Managing input plugins

6. Click the Configure button to display an input plugin Configuration dialog box,
allowing you to specify details relevant to the plugin you have chosen.
The Configuration dialog box varies according to the type of plugin chosen. It is
used to give details about how the input is to be handled, and to set up any hard-
ware associated with the source. See Section 8.1 on page 264 for a list of input
types and page references to their configuration and use.
7. When you have specified all the details for the new source, click OK.

8.2.3 Copying an input plugin

When you have created an input plugin, you can copy it to create other inputs of a sim-
ilar type. This can save you some effort, depending on the complexity of the Configu-
ration dialog box.
To copy an existing input, select the entry in the Input Controller and click the Copy
button.
You must give the copied input a new name and you will probably need to alter some
details in the Configuration dialog box. For example, only one active input can use a
particular spool folder or network input at one time—but you can have two or more
inputs using the same source, provided that you enable only one at a time.

8.2.4 Editing the details for an input source

To edit the details for an existing input source, do one of the following:
• Select the entry in the Input Controller and click the Edit button.
• Double-click the entry in the Input Controller.
The RIP displays an Input Channel Edit dialog box, allowing you to edit the details for
the selected plugin. For full details of using this dialog box, see Section 8.2.2 on
page 268.

8.2.5 Configuring an input plugin

Configuring an input means giving details about how the input is to be handled, and
setting up any hardware or software associated with the source.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 269

 Configuring Input

To configure an existing input plugin, select it in the Input Controller and click Edit.
The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit dialog box. Click Configure to see the Con-
figuration dialog box for the selected input. See Section 8.1 on page 264 for a list of
input types and page references to their configuration and use.

8.2.6 Deleting an input source

To delete an input source from the RIP, select it in the Input Controller and click the
Delete button. (You can select multiple inputs and delete them in one action.)

8.2.7 Enabling and disabling input sources

To enable an input source, select it in the Input Controller and click the On button. To
disable a source, select it and click the Off button. Using these buttons has the same
effect as selecting or clearing the Enabled check box in the relevant Input Channel Edit
dialog box.
When the selected input source is enabled then the On button is disabled, and when it
is not enabled then the Off button is disabled.
You can select several input sources and then turn them on or off together.
When an input plugin is enabled, the RIP automatically publishes it when starting
input queues, meaning that the input plugin can be used to send jobs to the RIP.
To make enabled inputs active, choose Navigator RIP > Start Inputs or click the tool
bar button that has a picture of a green arrow and traffic light. (See Section 8.2.1,
“Turning on the input system”.)
To stop all enabled inputs, choose Navigator RIP > Start Inputs again or click the tool
bar button that has a picture of a red arrow and traffic light.

8.3 Using the AppleTalk input plugin

An AppleTalk input source publishes a name over the network. This name appears in
the Chooser on Macintosh computers connected to the network, making the RIP avail-
able just like a LaserWriter. Other, non-Macintosh, computers connected to the net-
work and able to use AppleTalk can also use the RIP as an AppleTalk printer. In
complex networks, there may be a need for extra actions before all computers can use
a new printer.

270 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.4 Using the NT Print input

8.3.1 Configuring an AppleTalk input source

To configure an existing AppleTalk input source, select the source in the Input
Controller and click Edit. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit dialog box. Click
the Configure button. The AppleTalk configuration dialog box appears, as shown in
Figure 8.3.

Figure 8.3 AppleTalk Configuration dialog box

Wait timeout This value sets the length of time, in minutes, that the input
source waits for data. If no data is sent for that length of time
and the RIP is waiting for data, the job is aborted.

Abort on error This control sets the behavior of the input plugin on detecting
an error. By default, this box is selected, which means that an
error causes an immediate abort. This is not the typical
behavior of a PostScript-language compatible interpreter but
it may save considerable time spent in transferring data which
is merely flushed (ignored) by the interpreter.
Clear this box if you encounter problems with network soft-
ware or wish to ensure full compatibility with other Post-
Script-language compatible interpreters.

8.4 Using the NT Print input

This input publishes the RIP as one or more printers available to the Windows NT
print services. Once fully installed and configured, each printer has a name visible to
Windows operating systems.
There are several stages to installation and configuration, which you must carry out in
this order:
• Installing the plugin.
• Configuring the RIP to make the input available.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 271

 Configuring Input

• Configuring Windows to associate a printer with the RIP input.

Section 8.4.1 through Section 8.4.3 describe these stages in detail.

8.4.1 Installing the plugin

The installation is a two stage process; you run the Navigator RIP Product installer to
unload the NT Print files, you then run the NT Print install wizard.
1. The NT Print plugin requires the Harlequin RIP to be installed on the target
machine. If the RIP is not installed then you may add it at the same time as you
add the NT Print plugin.
2. Insert the Harlequin RIP CD-ROM and access its contents. At the top level of
the CD run the Install.exe setup program.
3. In the Product Installer window specify location for the plugin files by selecting
the Navigator RIP folder.
4. From the Package menu choose Optional Plugins, and from the Products
menu choose NTPrint Plugin, X.Xrx.
5. Click Add to add the plugin to the list of products to install, and click Install to
begin copying the files from the CD.
When the plugin is installed the “Installation complete” message appears.
6. After installing the files, close the Product Installer window.
The Product installer places the NT Print plugin install wizard in the
Plugins\Ntprint folder, which is at the same level as the SW folder.
You should now use the NT Print install wizard which places the plugin file in
the Plugins\SW\Inputs folder and prepares Windows so that you can create
a printer using the plugin.
To use the install wizard:
1. Exit all running applications. Run the file Setup.exe, found in the
Plugins\Ntprint folder.

2. When the installation program asks you, choose the folder in which the Naviga-
tor RIP is installed. (To help you identify it, remember that this folder contains
both the Plugins and SW folders.)
3. Wait for the installation process to finish. Reboot the computer.

272 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.4 Using the NT Print input

Now that the plugin is installed, you can create a Navigator RIP input.

8.4.2 Configuring an NT Print input

To create and configure a new socket input:
1. Click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit
dialog box. Choose NT Input from the Type drop-down list. Give the input a
suitable name and select a page setup. Select the Enabled box.
2. Click the Configure button. The NT Print Configuration dialog box appears, as
shown in Figure 8.4.

Figure 8.4 NT Print Configuration dialog box

The dialog box contains controls to allow for the situation where RIP inputs
have started up before the Windows spooler system—this is possible on fast
machines. The default is to accept failure, in which case the printer will be
unavailable without some user intervention. You can make the RIP keep trying,
within a time limit, by using the controls.
Enable

Select this box if you want the RIP to retry making a connection to the Windows
spooler after initially failing.
Retry delay

Enter the time, after the initial failure, for which you wish the RIP to continue
retrying. A retry delay of 60 seconds is likely to be enough on all machines. Too
long a delay means delaying jobs on other inputs, so reduce this figure if you
have no problems.
Click OK to close the configuration window.
3. Click OK again to close the Input Channel Edit dialog box
4. Use Navigator RIP > Start Inputs to start inputs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 273

 Configuring Input

You now have a RIP channel that forms a port visible to the Windows printer configu-
ration software.

8.4.3 Creating a printer under Windows 2000/XP

You have two options. Either you can create a new printer to use the RIP channel, or
you can connect an existing printer to the RIP channel. The procedures are similar for
Windows XP and Windows 2000.

8.4.3.1 Windows 2000/XP

To create a printer for Windows 2000 and Windows XP:
1. Using the Navigator RIP Input Controller, create a new input channel of the
type NT INPUT. Use Start Inputs to start it.
2. In the Settings > Printers window, select Add Printer.
3. In the Add Printer Wizard click on Next.
4. Select Local printer, and ensure the Automatically detect and install my Plug and
Play printer check box is unchecked, then click on Next.

5. Select Create a new port, and select ScriptWorks from the drop down selection
box. Click on Next.
6. A list box is then displayed showing the names of all unconnected ScriptWorks
Channels. Select one of these and OK.
7. Configure the printer. To do this choose a manufacturer and printer model from
the lists or click Have Disk if you have a special driver for the printer you wish to
emulate with the RIP. If you do not have a special driver, choose one for a Post-
Script-compatible printer that supports the features you require.
8. Name the printer, and click Next. Choose whether or not to share the printer,
giving it a shared name if you do share it, and click Next.
9. Choose to print a test page and click Finish. Windows copies some configuration
files and prints the test page. You should see the RIP become busy on the
NT Input in the Input Controller.
To use the printer, see Section 8.4.4.

274 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.4 Using the NT Print input

If you later want to reassign the printer to another port, do this:

1. Choose the menu option Start > Settings > Printers.
2. In the Printers window, select the printer, right-click and choose Properties.
3. In the Properties window, click the Ports tab. Choose a new port by selecting its
box in the list of ports. Click OK to confirm the changes.

8.4.4 Using the printer from Windows 2000/XP

The new printer is now connected to the RIP. Any printer output sent to the new
printer will be routed to the RIP.
The Windows spooler will remember the names of the printers between reboots of the
computer running the Navigator RIP. If an attempt is made to send a file to a printer
attached to a RIP channel that is not currently running, a warning is displayed and the
user is given the chance to retry the job. If you start the RIP input channel before the
user retries the job, the job will restart successfully.

8.4.5 Printing from a DOS command prompt

You can send a single PostScript-language or PDF job direct to the RIP from a DOS
command prompt, provided that the RIP is the default printer.
Note: While this is a simple method of testing NT Print, we do not recommend this
method for routine use. There can be problems, for example, if you attempt to copy
multiple files or files of an inappropriate type. For PostScript-language files, at least,
there are free, shareware, and commercial utility programs that handle multiple files
and provide other useful features such as printing only selected pages.
1. Make the printer the default printer for your computer, using the appropriate
method.
For Windows XP, choose the menu option Start > Printers and Faxes. In the Print-
ers window, select the required printer icon then right-click to display the menu
and choose Set As Default.
2. From a DOS command window (on the computer running the RIP), type:
copy file.ps \\.\SCRIPTWORKS

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 275

 Configuring Input

This command spools the file file.ps into the Windows printer system, from where
the job goes to the RIP input channel specified by the default printer.

8.4.6 Troubleshooting NT Print

Jobs may fail to reach the RIP. Check that the relevant RIP input is running and has the
same name as used by the Windows printer system.
If a job reaches the RIP, it is likely to process successfully but you may see a message
similar to this, with <name> replaced by the name of the NT Print input.
%%[Error: interrupt; OffendingCommand: n; File: %ip:<name>% ]%%
%%[Flushing: rest of job (to end of file) will be ignored ]%%
Job Not Completed: <name>

This can happen if you choose a driver for a printer that supports multiple page
description languages. For example, jobs sent to HP LaserJet printers that support
both PCL and PostScript languages can include problematic control statements at the
start and end of the job. The simplest cure is to pick a driver that produces only Post-
Script-language code when printing to the RIP printers.
Prior to release of the NTPrint plugin v2.0r3, jobs received on an NT print input were
named by the input channel, and not the job. A page feature was provided to overcome
this. From the release of the NTPrint plugin v2.0r3 (shipped with Navigator RIP,
Eclipse Release), the page feature is incorporated within the NT input plugin and thus
will use the name within the job.
The new version of the plugin will work with Eclipse Release and later RIPs.

8.5 Using the NT Pipe input

A number of third party applications, most notably Open Prepress Interface (OPI)
servers, are able to communicate with PostScript-language compatible RIPs running
under Microsoft Windows NT using named pipes. A named pipe is an interprocess
communication method that allows two Windows NT applications to exchange large
amounts of data very efficiently.
Note: In a typical OPI workflow, high resolution images are stored on the OPI server
machine, are included into print jobs, and are transferred over the network to output
devices. This operation frees workstations from moving large image files, but large
files must still travel from the OPI server to the RIP.

276 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.5 Using the NT Pipe input

The NT Pipe input plugin for the RIP allows OPI servers or other applications to sup-
ply data to the RIP via named pipes.
There are two possible cases:
• The RIP and a suitable application can share a single multiprocessor machine,
and use a named pipe to communicate. This allows the other application to
deliver jobs to the RIP at much faster speeds than it can deliver jobs to a net-
worked printer (provided by the Navigator RIP).
• With a single processor machine or an application that cannot share a multipro-
cessor machine, the RIP and the other application must run on separate
Windows NT systems connected through a network. Even in this case, using
named pipes can deliver much better performance than printing over an Apple-
Talk network.

8.5.1 Installing the plugin

To use the RIP named pipe support, you need a plugin file in the SW\Inputs folder.
The file name is different for different kinds of processor:
• For Intel 486 and Pentium processors, and compatible processors, the plugin
file is called ntpipe.i32.
Quit the RIP if it is running. If the plugin has been supplied with an installation pro-
gram, use that and follow the instructions. If you have no installation program, drag
the appropriate plugin file into the SW\Inputs folder.

8.5.2 Creating an NT Pipe input

When you have an installed plugin file, start the RIP and follow this procedure:
1. Click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit
dialog box. Choose NT Pipe from the Type drop-down list.
2. Give the input a suitable name and select a page setup. Select the Enabled box.
Note: The name you choose forms the last part of a longer network name for the
pipe. We suggest that you choose a name that uses letters and numerals only (a -
z and 0 - 9) and that is a convenient length: do not include punctuation, space
characters, or the wildcard characters ( ? and * ).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 277

 Configuring Input

3. For most applications, you can now click OK to close the Input Channel Edit
dialog box.
You can now read Section 8.5.4 on page 279 to see how to connect an application to
this pipe. If you have difficulty, or know that you need to change the default configu-
ration, read Section 8.5.3.

8.5.3 Configuring the named pipe

The Configuration dialog box allows you change another part of the name for the pipe
and to allow more than one connection to the same named pipe.
When configuring a front-end or server application to send data to the RIP using
named pipes you must enter the full name of the pipe. The format for the name is:
\\<machine>\pipe\<pipe prefix>\<name>

To get an actual name, replace <machine> with the name of the computer running the
RIP, replace <pipe prefix> with the name entered in the Named Pipe Plugin dialog box,
and replace <name> with the name you entered in the Input Channel Edit dialog box.
If the RIP is running on a Windows NT system named BRICK, and the channel has
been defined in the RIP with the name Fred, the pipe name would be:
\\BRICK\pipe\ScriptWorks\Channel\Fred

Figure 8.5 Named Pipe Plugin dialog box

Pipe Prefix If you wish to use a different scheme for pipe names you can
change the prefix by clicking on the Configure button in the
Input Channel Edit dialog box. The RIP displays the Named
Pipe Plugin dialog box.

278 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.5 Using the NT Pipe input

For example, entering RIP in the Pipe Prefix field would

make the full pipe name:
\\BRICK\pipe\RIP\Fred

Pipe instances Windows NT allows a named pipe to have a number of

instances. This means that, for each pipe of a given name,
Windows NT will allow more than one client (application) to
open the pipe at any one time. The RIP plugin can then ser-
vice the clients in sequence, one at a time.
Some clients, for example Color Central from Imation Pub-
lishing Software (formerly Luminous Technology), always
expect to be able to connect to a named pipe. For this reason
you should normally create at least two pipe instances. This
allows the client software to reconnect to the pipe, in order to
send the next job, while the RIP finishes processing the previ-
ous job.
If you wish to change the number of pipe instances from the
default value of two you can do so in the Named Pipe Plugin
configuration dialog box, as shown in Figure 8.5 above.

8.5.4 Connecting an application to the Navigator RIP

Several applications include support for named pipe output. This is a general discus-
sion: refer to the manual for your application for details.
Once the RIP has been configured to accept named pipe input, you must configure the
other application to use a named pipe for communication with the RIP.
Typically, you do this:
1. Add a new printer to which the application can send data.
2. Select named pipe as the method of communicating with the printer.
3. Identify the particular named pipe to use, giving a name that matches one you
have created in the RIP. The general form of the name is:

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 279

 Configuring Input

\\<machine>\pipe\<pipe prefix>\<name>

For example, when the machine is called BRICK, the pipe prefix is the default
ScriptWorks\Channel, and the name (as entered in the Input Channel Edit
dialog box) is Fred, then the full pipe name is:
\\BRICK\pipe\ScriptWorks\Channel\Fred

A period ( . ) can serve as a shortcut for the name of your local machine. If the
supplying application and the RIP are on the same computer, the pipe name
could be:
\\.\pipe\ScriptWorks\Channel\Fred

4. Give whatever other information the application requires, and complete the pro-
cedure that makes the printer available for use with the application.
If you have multiple copies of the RIP, or have published multiple NT Pipe input
channels from a single installation of the RIP, you can repeat the same sequence for
each channel.

8.6 Using the Spool Folder input folder

A spool folder input source regularly scans a specified disk folder (directory), and pro-
cesses any PostScript-language files (and other suitable files) that are placed there.
Normally these files are deleted after successful processing. The spool folder can be
on a network file server, or the local machine. Users create files from their applica-
tions. These applications can create the files directly in the spool folder, or can create
them elsewhere (for example, on the local system) for later transfer into the spool
folder.
The RIP can process some or all of the following file types using a spool folder: Post-
Script-language (PS), Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Portable Document Format
(PDF), TIFF 6.0, single TIFF/IT-P1 subfiles or TIFF/IT-P1 file groups if supplied in
order, JPEG and JFIF files. With some preparation you can also process page buffers
from a similar version of the Navigator RIP. The available options depend on your
installation and configuration of the RIP.
Note: You cannot use a spool folder for printing FP TIFF/IT-P1 files without special
care, because FP files reference subfiles and the RIP must image the data in these files
in a set order. If, in a spool folder any of the CT, HC, LW, or FP files may arrive first,
then the result may be partial images. The spool folder can accept TIFF/IT-P1 files if

280 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.6 Using the Spool Folder input folder

the order of arrival and file naming can be controlled so that all subfiles arrive before
the FP file and you select the TIFF/IT-P1 option described on page 285. If the order of
arrival or naming is unsuitable or unpredictable, using Print File from the Navigator
RIP menu is the simplest reliable method of ensuring that the RIP images the intended
file or combination of files.
The RIP ignores types of files that it cannot print, and any files that you exclude inten-
tionally by configuring the spool folder input.
You can exclude files based on their names. You may want to exclude files that resem-
ble real jobs, but that actually contain accounting or housekeeping information for the
software that delivers files into the spool folder. You may also want to exclude, or at
least delay, real jobs with particular origins or qualities. All this is possible so long as
the file names have a recognizable prefix.
You specify which folder the RIP uses in the input plugin Configure dialog box, avail-
able from the Input Controller. By default, this folder is called Spool and exists in the
SW folder. If needed, you can create several spooled inputs, each with its own folder,
page setup, and exclusion list.
When you specify a folder accessed over a network, make sure that the folder auto-
matically becomes available to the computer running the RIP when that computer is
restarted.
Because files are normally deleted as soon as they are printed, it is important to ensure
that the RIP has permission to delete files in the spool folder, particularly if the spool
folder is on a network file server. See Appendix A, Troubleshooting, for more details.
The files in the spool folders are processed in the order in which they arrive. However,
if there are jobs already in a folder when the RIP is started, or if a very large number of
files have been queued, the RIP determines the order of those jobs by the date stamps
on the files.

8.6.1 Configuring a Spool Folder input source

To create and configure a new Spool folder source:
1. Click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit
dialog box.
2. Choose SpoolFolder from the Type drop-down list. Give the input a suitable
name and select a page setup. Select the Enabled box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 281

 Configuring Input

3. Click the Configure button. The Spool Folder Configuration dialog box appears.
Make the settings you wish, and click OK. Click OK again to close the Input Channel
Edit dialog box. The spool folder input becomes active, now or when you next start
inputs. When the spool folder becomes active, the RIP reports the number of exclu-
sions, that is the number of prefixes that it will ignore. See the description of the File-
names prefix list option on page 284 for details.

Figure 8.6 Spool Folder Configuration dialog box

This dialog box contains the following control items:

Spool Folder The current spool folder is shown in the text field alongside
this button. This location is where the RIP detects the arrival
of files and considers them as possible jobs, by looking at the
type of file and any file names excluded in the Filenames pre-
fix list.
Note: Choose a folder that is dedicated to receiving jobs. In
particular, avoid using folders where other files are arriving
or changing. (For example, the SW folder is a bad choice,
because the log file changes with every job.)

282 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.6 Using the Spool Folder input folder

Click the Spool Folder button to change this folder using the
standard file browsing dialog box. Alternatively, you can type
a full path name in the text field but be aware that any typing
errors can cause an error or the creation of a new folder.

Create spool folders if they do not exist

Select this box if you want the RIP to create the named spool
folders if they do not already exist.
The RIP creates the folders when the input channel becomes
available for use. This time can be immediately after you
click OK in the Input Channel Edit dialog box for an enabled
channel, but you may need to choose Navigator RIP > Start
Inputs or enable the input channel before it becomes fully
available.

Warn if spool folders do not exist

Select this box if you want the RIP to issue a warning if a
folder named as a spool, error, or completion folder does not
exist.

Error Folder If a file fails to print, the RIP moves it to the error folder
specified unless the Delete on error box is selected. If a file
prints successfully, the RIP moves it to the Complete folder
specified unless the Delete on completion box is selected.

Delete on error Select this box if you want the RIP to delete files that the
Spool folder fails to print. Leave this box clear if you want
failed files to be moved to the Error Folder. Note that a file is
treated as an error if you abort it while it is being processed.
Move/Delete All Files
With this option selected the spool plugin will either move to
the error folder, or delete any file which it does not recognize
(such as badly formed PDF documents). The files are moved
or deleted depending on the state of the Delete on Error check
box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 283

 Configuring Input

Warning: If you decide to use this option and you inadvert-

ently choose to point the spool folder at a directory contain-
ing important files (such as C:\windows... or your SW
folder), you will remove all files therein, resulting in either a
non-functional computer or non-functional applications. The
plugin deletes or moves all the files it cannot handle.
Move/Delete Valid Files
This option replicates the previous (pre Eclipse Release SP2),
behavior of the spool folder plugin. In this case, if a file is
encountered which the spool plugin does not recognize it will
leave the file in the spool folder and ignore it. Valid files
which cause an error will be treated according to the setting
of the Delete on Error check box.

Complete Folder If a file successfully prints, the RIP moves it to the location
specified in the text field alongside this button unless the
Delete on completion box is checked. Click the Complete Folder
button to change this location using the standard file brows-
ing dialog box.

Delete on completion
Select this box if you want the RIP to delete files that the
Spool folder succeeds in printing. Otherwise the RIP moves
these files to the Complete Folder.

Filenames prefix list

This text field specifies files to ignore when they arrive in the
spool folder, if you have also selected the Exclude prefix list
box. The specification is based on the first part or prefix of
the file names.
Prefixes are case sensitive.
For example, if you type in the prefix ab, the RIP ignores all
the arriving files whose names begin with ab. Examples of
files that the Navigator RIP would ignore for this prefix are
abacus.pdf, abandon.ps, and ab123. (The RIP would
not ignore ABALONE.PS, 123ab.pdf, or _absence.) Ignor-

284 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.6 Using the Spool Folder input folder

ing means that the RIP does not process the files and allows
the files to remain in the spool folder until removed by a user
or other software.
Note: If you remove or disable a prefix while the spool folder
is still active, the RIP processes any files previously excluded
by that prefix but still present in the spool folder.
You can enter several prefixes. Separate multiple prefixes by
commas without surrounding spaces. (If you add spaces after
a comma, the RIP treats the spaces as part of the following
string.) Each prefix can include alphanumeric characters, the
underscore character, the period character, and spaces.
For example, this is a valid list of three prefixes:
aaab_c,BAC,4.4

Exclude prefix list

Select this box to make the prefix list active. Leave this box
empty to disable the prefix list without deleting the list of
prefixes.

Scan spool folder every <n> seconds

The value in the text box specifies how often the RIP checks
the Spool folder for new files to be printed.

Time to wait for file to stabilize

The value in the text box specifies the number of seconds that
the Spool folder waits for the size of an arriving file to remain
the same before assuming that it has been fully written and is
therefore ready to be printed.

Treat TIFF/IT files as a single output group

Select this box if you want to process TIFF/IT-P1 files as a
group, but only if you can predict that both the file names and
the order of arrival follow these conditions.
All related files must have the same file name stem. For
example, this is a valid group of files: myfile.ct,
myfile.lw, myfile.hw, and myfile.fp.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 285

 Configuring Input

All subfiles must be in the spool folder before the FP file

arrives and is ready to print.
After processing a TIFF/IT-P1 group, the RIP moves or
deletes all the related files together, with the action depending
on success or failure and the settings of other controls in this
dialog box.
If you leave this box unselected, the RIP processes the indi-
vidual files as they become available.
Note: When producing TIFF/IT-P1 files as output using the
optional TIFF/IT-P1 output plugin, the RIP satisfies the rules
for having the related files treated as a group.

Suppress startup warnings

If you have files present in the Spool Folder and then start the
RIP, you will be prompted with a warning that files already
exist in this folder which you must acknowledge before the
RIP will start. If you would prefer to suppress these startup
warning messages and continue to start the RIP, select this
option. All files present in the folder will be processed.

8.7 Using the Socket input plugin

A socket is a hardware-independent method of communicating across a network. The
RIP Socket plugin supports TCP/IP on Ethernet for job transfer between any combina-
tion of machines running the UNIX, Windows NT, Windows 2000 and Windows
Server 2003 operating systems. From socket version 2.1r1 the plugin is supported on
Mac OS X.
The RIP Socket plugin also supports a smaller set of features on Power Macintosh
computers (but not 680x0 based Macintosh computers). This smaller set of features is
supported between any combination of Power Macintosh computers and machines
running the UNIX or appropriate Microsoft Windows operating systems.
The benefits of using network sockets are:
• Transfer of jobs between different types of machines occurs at network
speeds—typically much higher than those achieved with serial links.

286 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.7 Using the Socket input plugin

• One server machine (the one running the Navigator RIP) can receive input
from as many sending machines as can connect to the network. (The RIP must
finish one job before starting another, including jobs from other types of input
plugin.)
• All sending machines are configured in the same way.
• Given an existing network, there is no requirement for extra hardware or shared
file systems.
• A program or user on the sending machine can be informed of the job status as
the job progresses.
There are some potential, minor, difficulties with socket input:
• It requires a small amount of central network management, or user access to
configuration files, on the sending and receiving machines. This management
or user access is required only when setting up the links, not for routine use.
• In general, the socket input plugin accepts only PostScript-language and PDF
input, sent with a basic TCP/IP stream protocol. This protocol is simple to gen-
erate but prohibits the direct use of any extra protocol such as that used by the
UNIX lp program. (The Xinet PapConnect protocol is an option if there is no
Macintosh computer involved.)
Note: Prior to the release of the Socket plugin v2.1r3, jobs received on an input Socket
were named by the input channel, and not the job. A page feature was provided to
overcome this. From the release of the Socket plugin v2.1r3 the page feature is added
to the plugin and thus will use the name within the job.
Note: Most machines running sockets can support several independent types of com-
munication and there is usually ongoing communication for processes including mail,
printing, and file transfer. The different types of communications are kept separate by
assigning each to a different port, usually identified by number. Port numbers below
1024 are listed in a services database and have registered uses and protocols that
enable computers at local and remote sites to communicate according to published
standards. Some numbers above 1024 also have agreed uses, but most are available
for use in a way specific to a single site, as allocated by the local network manager or
system administrator.
Prior to release of the Socket plugin v2.1r3, jobs received on a Socket input were
named by the input channel, and not the job. A page feature was provided to overcome

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 287

 Configuring Input

this. From the release of the Socket plugin v2.1r3 (shipped with Navigator RIP,
Eclipse Release), the page feature is incorporated within the Socket plugin and thus
will use the name within the job.

8.7.1 Requirements
All machines need to support TCP/IP over Ethernet and to be linked by a network.
This is the only requirement for machines running the UNIX, Mac OS X,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 operating systems.
Classic Macintosh computers need the following:
• Open Transport, an operating system extension that comes as standard on
Power Macintosh computers with software support for PCI expansion buses.
Open Transport is compatible with operating system versions from System 7.1
onwards.
• The computer must be a Power Macintosh, that is, it must not be based on the
680x0 processor family.

8.7.2 Configuration preliminaries

Before attempting to configure a socket you must decide what kind of connection you
wish to make and how to implement it. This subsection describes your options and
what you need to know before configuring the RIP socket input.
In the simplest case, applications on one or more machines send information to the
machine running the RIP and receive no messages about the progress of the jobs.
It is a simple extension to make the standard output from the PostScript-language
interpreter—progress and other messages as displayed in the RIP Monitor Navigator
RIP window—available to the application sending the job.

8.7.2.1 Server machine

To configure the machine running the RIP, you must know:
• The port on which the socket plugin is to listen for input.

288 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.7 Using the Socket input plugin

Optionally, you may need to know:

• A second port, if you wish to return the standard output to the sending applica-
tion and that application requires a separate port.
• Any protocol in use by the sending application. The options supported by the
Navigator RIP are basic TCP/IP socket stream or Xinet PapConnect.
In general, you can ask your network administrator to allocate a port (or ports) and
give you the number(s) or name(s) to enter in the RIP. Using a name rather than a
number allows the flexibility of changing only the services database if it becomes nec-
essary to start using another port.
If you have no network administrator, you may need to look at the services database
yourself in order to find ports that are available for use. In the UNIX operating system,
the services database is the file:
/etc/services

Under Windows XP and Windows 2000, the position of the services database can vary
between different installations of the operating system. The administrator can choose
where to install the operating system (with the chosen location recorded in the envi-
ronment variable %Systemroot%) and the services database is stored in a fixed rela-
tionship to this location. For example, if the operating system is installed in \winnt
then the services database is the file:
\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\services

On Macintosh computers, there is no services database. (This means that you must
choose ports using TCP by number on a Macintosh, but you may be able to inspect the
services database on a computer of another type if you are operating on a mixed net-
work.)
Warning: Where used, the services database is an important part of a networked oper-
ating system. Make a copy of the services database file before editing it in any way.

8.7.2.2 Sending machines

To configure the machines sending jobs to the RIP, you must know:
• The network address (IP address or hostname) of the machine running the Nav-
igator RIP.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 289

 Configuring Input

• The port on which the machine running the RIP is listening for input.
Optionally, you may need to know:
• A second port, used to return the standard output to the sending application.
(The RIP can return this information on the server port: a second port is only
needed if the sending application requires a separate port.)
Your network manager should be able to supply these details.
All other settings are dependent on the software used to send the jobs, and must be
compatible with those you have made in the Socket Configuration dialog box. For
example, you may need to configure the sending software to receive the PostScript-
language status messages.
We recommend that you configure each sending application to close its sending socket
connection at the end of each job, and pause before reopening it to send another job.
The reasons are:
• You can configure the RIP to receive input on more than one socket input—for
example, to allow the use of different page setups. (Each socket must use a dif-
ferent address.) Closing the connection allows the RIP to check for pending
jobs on other input channels.
• Certain jobs may require that the server socket is closed before the RIP can
start rendering. If the socket is not closed, rendering starts when the next job
starts to arrive, which could result in a significant delay.

8.7.3 Configuring a Socket input plugin

To configure a new socket input, click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays
the Input Channel Edit dialog box. Choose a name and page setup as normal, then

290 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.7 Using the Socket input plugin

choose SocketInput from the Type pop-up menu drop-down list. Click the Configure
button. The Socket Configuration dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 8.7.

Figure 8.7 Socket Configuration dialog box

You must make settings for the server (input) socket. The other (output and protocol)
settings are optional but interrelated: you may need to make more than one choice to
have a valid combination of settings.

8.7.3.1 Server socket details

On some the RIP platforms, the Socket type control allows you to choose from TCP by
number, TCP by name, and Local. The only option available on all platforms is TCP
by number.

The TCP by number and TCP by name options both offer full network access. The
options are equivalent in that both identify a numbered port. The only difference is
that if you give a name, the name is used to look up the number in the services data-
base, a file which links numbers with names.
A Local socket works only with the UNIX operating system and only on the host
machine: that is, where the sending application and the Navigator RIP both operate on
the same machine. It is provided only for compatibility with older systems.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 291

 Configuring Input

Server Socket type

Choose TCP by number or TCP by name for use across a
network (including from the host machine), and enter the cor-
responding port name or number in the Address box.
Under the UNIX operating system, you can also choose
Local but do so only where absolutely required by the send-
ing application and enter a socket file name in the Address
box.

Address There are up to three possible entries in this box, depending

on the choice made for Socket type, which itself may be lim-
ited by the platforms on which the RIP and the sending appli-
cations operate.
When Socket Type is TCP by number, enter the number of
the port.
The socket plugin listens on the chosen port.
When Socket Type is TCP by name, enter the name of the
service.
The socket plugin gets the port number by looking up the
name in the services database (/etc/services or an equiv-
alent file), and listens on the chosen port.
When Socket Type is Local, the socket communication is
made by using a socket-style file on the file-system. Enter the
file name in the Address field.

8.7.3.2 Bi-directional communications and protocol

These check boxes allow you to specify if and how the Navigator RIP should return
information to the application sending a job.

Bi-directional comms
Select this box when you wish the RIP to pass responses back
to the sending application. The RIP passes these responses:
on the server socket when Use Separate Output Socket is not

292 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.7 Using the Socket input plugin

selected; or on the output socket when Use Separate Output

Socket is selected (in which case, you must also configure the
Output Socket Details).

Use Separate Output Socket

Select this box to use a separate output socket for responses
from the RIP to the sending application. You must use a sepa-
rate output socket if the sending application(s) cannot accept
responses on the channel used to send jobs.
This box is irrelevant if Bi-directional comms is not selected.
Note: When this option is selected and a port with the same
address is used, a Duplicate Socket Address:
already in use error message will appear and the input
will not start.

Use Xinet protocol

Do not select this option unless you know that all the sending
machines are using the Xinet PapConnect protocol. In partic-
ular, Classic Macintosh computers cannot use PapConnect.
Also, we recommend that you use this option only for down-
loading fonts; for general use, leaving this box unselected
gives faster transfer rates.

8.7.3.3 Output socket details

These details are only relevant when you have selected the Use Separate Output Socket
box and the Bi-directional comms box.
Choose these values in the same way as for the server socket, described in “Server
socket details” on page 291. You must choose a different Address from the one chosen
for the Server socket. It is convenient but not essential to use the same socket type to
make it obvious whether or not the addresses are different. For example, choose num-
bered addresses that differ by 1.
Note: The sending application can continue to listen on the RIP output socket after it
has closed its sending socket. (“Sending machines” on page 289 explained why it is
advisable to close the sending socket—the one connected to the RIP Server socket.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 293

 Configuring Input

8.8 Using the Asynchronous Socket plugin

The asynchronous socket input is not for use as a source of routine jobs. It is a special
case of the socket plugin, designed to run jobs immediately—regardless of what the
RIP is already doing. This input provides a way of controlling and monitoring the RIP
from without using menus and dialog boxes.
These jobs are restricted in what they can do if jobs from other inputs are to have the
intended result. To prevent unintended interaction with a running jobs, each job sub-
mitted to the asynchronous socket input should start by performing a save and end
with a restore. Also, the job should not use any painting operators or otherwise alter
the graphics state.
Permissible tasks—those that do not interfere with other jobs at the interpretation
stage—include querying the availability of fonts and manipulating page buffers in the
throughput system.
The one exception where interference with another job is allowed, and necessary, is
that it is possible to kill the currently running job.

8.8.1 Creating an asynchronous socket input

It is possible to create an asynchronous socket input in the Input Controller, and subse-
quently to edit or delete it.
Note: The expected way of creating an asynchronous socket input is by including
PostScript-language statements in the files that the RIP executes when starting up. An
asynchronous socket input created this way is likely to be a protected channel, option-
ally viewable in the Input Controller but not editable.
To create and configure an asynchronous socket input:
1. Click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit
dialog box.
2. Choose SocketInputAsync from the Type drop-down list. Give the input a
suitable name and select a page setup. Select the Enabled box.
3. Click the Configure button. The Socket Configuration dialog box appears. Make
the settings you wish, and click OK. (See Appendix 8, “Configuring a Socket
input plugin” for details.)

294 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.9 Using the Asynchronous Socket Quit plugin

4. Click OK again to close the Input Channel Edit dialog box. The asynchronous
socket input becomes active, as you click OK or when you next start inputs.
All other aspects of its use and configuration are as described in Section 8.7 on
page 286.

8.8.2 Sample job

This example shows how a short PostScript-language job can kill the current job.
% This code kills the currently running job.
//errordict /interrupt get exec

8.9 Using the Asynchronous Socket Quit plugin

The SocketInputQuit type is a special case of the asynchronous socket input, with
the single purpose of causing the RIP to quit. Connecting to a socket of this type
makes the RIP quit without the need to send a PostScript-language job containing the
appropriate commands.
To create an input of this type, follow the procedure for the asynchronous socket,
described in Section 8.8.1 on page 294, but choose SocketInputQuit in the Type
drop-down list.
You can select any page setup for use with this input. There is no need to specify a
return channel.

8.10 Using the Serial input plugin

The Serial Line input plugin handles PostScript-language jobs passed to it over a
serial line (RS232 or V24 standards). The benefits of offering serial line input are:
• The Navigator RIP can become an immediate replacement for a PostScript-
compatible printer that was used exclusively over a serial line.
• Remote computers can submit jobs to the RIP through a serial line without
being part of the same network as the computer running the RIP.
The use of a RIP input using a spool folder or network protocol is preferable in almost
all cases. The advantages of these methods are greater speed and robustness than using
a serial line.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 295

 Configuring Input

8.10.1 Overview
This is a brief introduction to creating and using a serial input to the Navigator RIP.
There is more detail in later sections.
The first stage of using a serial input to the Navigator RIP is to find available serial
ports on the remote computer and on the computer running the RIP and to establish a
reliable serial link between them. This requires a null modem cable with suitable con-
nectors for the ports: Section 8.10.2, “Establishing a serial link” specifies the cable
more fully and suggests how you or your supplier may need to test the link.
Next you must configure the RIP input. To configure a Serial input, choose the source
in the Input Controller and click the Configure button. The Serial Comms Configura-
tion dialog box appears, containing several controls, described in Section 8.10.3,
“Configuring a Serial input plugin”.
Set the controls to the desired values and click OK, then enable the input in the Input
Controller dialog box and again click OK. When you select Start Inputs from the Navi-
gator RIP menu (or immediately if inputs are already started), a message appears in the
Navigator RIP window of the general form:
Publishing Serial Input printer <serial_name>

Finally, the remote computer must send a job. When the input is receiving data from
the remote computer, an alert box appears on the screen of the computer running the
RIP to show that the plugin is reading data. (There is no progress box because the plu-
gin cannot find out the total size of the job until it has read all of it.)

8.10.2 Establishing a serial link

Note: This section is necessarily technical.
The null modem cable must connect the lines for send data, receive data, and signal
ground (earth). Depending on the handshaking method, the cable may also need to
connect control lines.
If you wish to use hardware handshaking, the cable must also have the RTS and CTS
control lines connected. Software handshaking does not require these control lines
because it uses the XON and XOFF characters, sent over the data lines. For both
forms of handshaking, this is a minimum requirement: the program on the remote
computer may require other control line connections or links between pins, even if
you are using software handshaking. (If the remote computer and program require

296 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.10 Using the Serial input plugin

extra control signals, it may help to know that the RIP controls the DTR line and
ignores the DSR line.)
For testing, you have two options:
• Use a communications or terminal emulation program on both computers.
• Use a communications or terminal emulation program on the remote computer
and the RIP on the local computer. (You must configure a Navigator RIP serial
input first.) Send a carriage return character to the RIP to make the RIP react as
if it is receiving a job: if the link is good, the RIP loads a page setup and dis-
plays a message in the Navigator RIP window. (Like most PostScript-language
compatible interpreters, the RIP does not by default echo characters to the
remote computer.)
There are many commercially available communications programs but the Terminal
program supplied with Microsoft Windows, and the tip program supplied with the
UNIX operating system are adequate.
You can start testing by typing short messages (PostScript-language jobs if you are
sending to the RIP input plugin). Do not consider the link fully tested until it can trans-
fer files of about 10 KB without any corruption. Find the highest speed at which the
link works reliably.

8.10.3 Configuring a Serial input plugin

To create and configure a new serial source:
1. Click New in the Input Controller. The RIP displays the Input Channel Edit
dialog box.
2. Choose Serial Input from the Type drop-down list. Give the input a suitable
name and select a page setup. Select the Enabled box.
3. Click the Configure button. The Serial Comms Configuration dialog box
appears, as shown in Figure 8.8. Make the settings you wish, and click OK.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 297

 Configuring Input

4. Click OK again to close the Input Channel Edit dialog box. The serial input
becomes active, now or when you next start inputs.

Figure 8.8 Serial Comms Configuration dialog box

Most controls in the Serial Comms Configuration dialog box set shared communica-
tions parameters, which must match those in use by the sending computer and applica-
tion. Alter these communications settings only if you understand their meaning and
you can ensure that the remote computer is reconfigured to use the same settings.
The remaining items also affect communication but are specific to the computer run-
ning the Navigator RIP and are fully described here.

Device Name Set this to be the serial port on the computer running the RIP
to which the remote computer is connected.
The entries in the list include COM1 and COM2.

Baud rate A shared communication setting—set it to match the setting

on the remote computer.

Parity A shared communication setting—set it to match the setting

on the remote computer.

Character Bits A shared communication setting—set it to match the setting

on the remote computer.

298 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.10 Using the Serial input plugin

Stop bits A shared communication setting—set it to match the setting

on the remote computer.

Mode There are three possible choices: ASCII, Adobe binary,

and Binary. Choose Binary unless you know that the send-
ing application requires a different mode.
See Section 8.10.4 on page 300 for more details on the
different modes.

Output local This setting controls the destination of error messages and
status information about jobs. Select Output Local to have the
normal RIP behavior where these messages display only in
the Navigator RIP window: the normal behavior of the RIP
for other inputs.

Output remote This setting controls the destination of error messages and
status information about jobs. Select Output Remote to send
information down the serial line to the remote computer.

Job Output This setting controls the destination of error messages and
status information about jobs.
Select Remote to send information down the serial line to the
remote computer.
Select Local to have the normal RIP behavior where these
messages display only in the Navigator RIP window: the nor-
mal behavior of the RIP for other inputs.

Handshake This is a shared communications setting which limits the pos-

sibility of the remote computer sending data too fast for the
plugin to handle correctly. The setting on the computer run-
ning the RIP must match the one in use on the sending com-
puter. (Software handshake uses the XON/XOFF characters
and Hardware handshake uses the CTS/RTS control pins.)
Select only one handshake method.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 299

 Configuring Input

Link Timeout This setting has an effect only when the plugin is using binary
mode. The value is the time in seconds that the input plugin
waits without receiving new data before considering that the
job has finished. The RIP accepts values in the range 1
through 1000.
Set the value to be larger than any pauses you expect in the
data from one job, but small enough to have the RIP recog-
nize the end of job in a reasonable time. The remote applica-
tion must wait for this time between sending the end of one
job and starting to send the next job, so an overlong value
reduces throughput.
In particular, you may want to set a large value (100 seconds
or more) if you are testing a link by typing PostScript-lan-
guage statements through a terminal emulator program: in
this case, the value must be larger than any pause in your typ-
ing.

8.10.4 ASCII and binary modes

The input plugin can treat data arriving from the serial line in one of several ways.
You choose which way the plugin uses by selecting one of the following modes:
• Binary.
• ASCII.
• Adobe binary.
We recommend that you select Binary, unless there is a strong need to use one of the
other modes.
ASCII and Adobe binary are very similar modes, where the input plugin treats some
characters specially. The application sending the data must send one of these special
characters to signal the end of the job and can send other characters to control and
monitor the job in progress. The end of this section lists the special characters (for
example: ^C).

300 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.10 Using the Serial input plugin

In detail, the modes are:

Binary The RIP passes all data to the core RIP and detects the end of
job by observing that no data has arrived within a timeout
period. (The remote application must use at least the same
timeout period between sending jobs.)

ASCII All data is passed to the core RIP for processing, except for
special characters. The special characters are ^C, ^D, and ^T.
ASCII mode resembles Adobe binary mode with the excep-
tion of not supporting ^A.

Adobe binary
All data is passed to the core RIP with the exception of spe-
cial (control) characters defined by the Adobe binary commu-
nications protocol (BCP).
The special characters are all control characters: characters which you can send from
within a terminal emulator program by holding down the Control key while typing a
normal character key. For example, you can type Control-T (shown as ^T) by holding
down the Control key while typing the letter T.
The characters most likely to be useful in testing are those supported by ASCII mode.

Character Meaning
^A Treat the following character so that it passes to the core RIP as a con-
trol character which would otherwise have been stopped and taken as a
control.
^A is not supported in ASCII mode.
^C Generate an interrupt. This terminates the job immediately, with an
error.
^D Signal a normal end of job.
^T Request a job status. The job status is returned down the serial line as a
message enclosed in square brackets. For example, this might be one
such message:
%%[job: Test-job; status: Waiting]%%

Table 8.1 Special characters in ASCII and Adobe-binary modes

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 301

 Configuring Input

8.11 Using more than one method

The RIP can use any combination of the above input types and listen on all active
inputs. When several inputs want to send data, only one job can reach the RIP at a
time but the other inputs may be able to receive and buffer data for later rendering.
To accept input from several sources, create and enable the sources you want in the
Input Controller. The RIP automatically monitors all enabled sources as soon as the
input system is started with the Start Inputs menu option.

8.12 Using the Print File command

When you select Print File from the Navigator RIP menu, the dialog box shown in
Figure 8.9 appears.

Figure 8.9 Print File dialog box

Choose an appropriate page setup for printing the files, from the Page Setup drop-down
list.
Note: If you do not choose a page setup, the RIP uses the one that you chose last time
you printed a file. If you have not printed a file in this RIP session, the first page setup
in the drop-down list is used. To change the order of this listing, see “Reordering page
setups” on page 114.
The Print File dialog box shows all PostScript-language files in the current folder. (To
show files of a different type, or all files, use the Files of type drop-down list.)

302 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.12 Using the Print File command

If you want to choose a file that is not in the folder shown, use the dialog box to move
to the correct folder.
Use the Look in drop-down list to use other folders or drives.
Note: To select all files in the list, click anywhere in the central list of files and type
Ctrl+A.
While any file is being processed, an additional Print File menu appears on the menu
bar of the main RIP window.

Alt
You can abort the current job by choosing Kill Current Job from this menu, or by typ-
ing Alt+• (a period character).
When Kill Current Job is selected, the current job is stopped but subsequent jobs will
be processed.
By selecting Stop Printing File, the current file will complete but any jobs queued after
the current job will not print.
Selecting Abort Printing File will stop the current job and also stop all subsequently
queued jobs from ripping.

8.12.1 Printing several files

To print out several files at once, just select more than one file from the Print File dia-
log box before clicking Print. The following keys make this possible:

Shift
You can select a contiguous block of files by selecting the first file in the block, then
selecting the last file in the block while holding down the Shift key.

Ctrl
You can select several non-contiguous file names by holding down the Control key
while making your selection.
Note: The list of files to print can include files other than PostScript-language, PDF
files, TIFF 6.0, and TIFF/IT-P1. The RIP ignores types of files that it cannot print.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 303

 Configuring Input

8.13 Printing PostScript-language files

The RIP can print PostScript-language files and Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files
using the Print File command or managed inputs. You can also enter PostScript-lan-
guage code interactively using the Navigator RIP > Executive command.
You can submit PostScript-language jobs to the RIP using any of the managed input
methods: AppleTalk, NT Print, NT Pipe, Spool Folder, sockets, and serial input.
The Page Setup Options dialog box provides several options that tailor the way the
RIP processes jobs. Some options provide compatibility with jobs using PostScript
LanguageLevel 2 or LanguageLevel 1, or produced by specific applications. Other
options deal with more general fault conditions or are convenience features. For
example, some PostScript-language file formats, such as EPS, do not always include a
showpage operator at the end of jobs. One of these options adds showpage to the end
of a job, if necessary. See Section 5.3 on page 115 for details.
When ColorPro is enabled, the RIP can detect and utilize an ICC profile embedded in
an Encapsulated PostScript file. See the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details.

8.14 Printing PDF files

The RIP can print Portable Document Format (PDF) files that conform to the PDF 1.5
specification or earlier, or PDF/X versions listed below. The PDF Options dialog box
allows you to set up strict or flexible workflows using these versions of PDF jobs.
Note: RIP versions 5.3 and 5.5 included support for PDF/X-1:1999, this has been
dropped in the Eclipse Release of the Navigator RIP, and replaced with support for
PDF/X-1a:2001 and PDF/X-3:2002. for more information see Section 8.14.1.4 on
page 307.
™
The Navigator RIP Genesis Release supports the following PDF/X versions:
• PDF/X-1a:2001
• PDF/X-1a:2003
• PDF/X-3:2002
• PDF/X3:2003
These are the only versions supported; any previous support for earlier versions has
been dropped.

304 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

The “PDF Options” from the page set up manager allows the user to select from a
range of PDF/X verification settings, see Section 8.14.8.2 on page 317
The aim is to reproduce with high quality all the features of PDF files that can be ren-
dered on paper or film. You can also preview pages printed from PDF files, but the
RIP does not provide a fully interactive hypertext viewer or editor: there are no search,
cross-reference, or annotation facilities.
Note: PDF/X is a standard defining a subset of PDF, designed for trouble-free use
where the creator sends the PDF file to an external printer or other prepress consumer.
For example, a PDF/X-1 file can use OPI references to external file types only if a file
stream of that external file is included in the PDF/X-1 file. Another example is that a
PDF/X-1 file cannot use some color spaces (for example, DeviceN) that are allowed in
PDF version 1.3. See below for more information.
Note: A PDF/X-3 file containing an OutputIntents dictionary will be color man-
aged using the ICC profile indicated by the OutputIntents dictionary as long as the
job uses a device independent color space and the Override color management in job
option is not selected. Fore more information see Section 8.14.1.1 on page 306.

8.14.1 PDF/X standards

With the growth in the use of PDF for transferring graphic arts content files between
sites and between companies it is clear that the flexibility of the PDF format does not
allow robust and predictable exchanges of prepress data.
To overcome this problem a family of standards has been developed to define restric-
tions on the content and use of PDF files to make PDF output more predictable.These
standards are collectively called PDF/X, each with a suffix to differentiate the specifi-
cations defined for different sets of market needs.
The PDF/X standards defines the elements that must be included in a PDF, and those
that must not.
PDF/X-1a:2001 is designed to provide the most robust and, to some extent, least flex-
ible delivery of PDF content data. It requires that the color of all objects be expressed
in CMYK or spot colors, prepared for the intended printing conditions. Elements in
RGB or Lab color spaces or tagged with ICC profiles are prohibited. It also requires
that all fonts used in the job be embedded in the supplied PDF file.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 305

 Configuring Input

PDF/X-3:2002 allows slightly more flexibility in that color managed workflows are
also supported—elements in Lab, and with attached ICC source profiles may also be
used.
The specifications also set out how a PDF/X file should be processed by the receiver
of the file. If different approaches to overprinting, for instance, are taken at different
sites then it will not be possible to predict the exact appearance of the final printed
piece from a pre-transmission proof.
This section describes how a Navigator RIP should be configured in order to produce
PDF/X-1a and PDF/X-3 compliant output.

8.14.1.1 PDF/X Color management

PDF/X files all include data describing the characterized printing conditions for which
the job was prepared. That data is collectively described as the output intent. It
includes an identifier that may refer to a characterization held in a registry maintained
by the ICC (International Color Consortium). In many cases the output intent will also
include an embedded profile to support accurate color proofing, both on screen and on
hard copy.
The ColorPro™ option can be used to perform in-RIP color management with the
Navigator RIP. It can be used for many purposes, including color proofing, or for
adjusting plates to enable a press to better match a characterized printing condition
such as SWOP. For more information see the ColorPro™ documentation.

8.14.1.2 Trapping
The TrapPro™ options add in-RIP trapping functionality to the Navigator RIP. If these
have been enabled, trapping parameters may be defined in the user interface and auto-
matically applied to all jobs submitted to the RIP. If a PDF or PDF/X file is labeled as
having already been trapped (by setting the Trapped flag to True), the in-RIP trapping
will automatically be disabled while processing that file to prevent traps being applied
twice.
For more information see the TrapPro™ documentation.

306 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

8.14.1.3 Workflow notes

When processing PDF/X files it is important that your whole prepress workflow pro-
vides a result that complies with the standard, including placement of partial-page
submissions on a page and so on. You should also test all routes by which an incoming
file may pass through your complete workflow. Tools such as the Kensington Suite
and the Global Graphics PDF/X Overprint test strip can assist in this testing. see the
Global Graphics web site for more information.

8.14.1.4 PDF/X-1:1999 and PDF/X-1:2001 compatibility

Versions 5.3 and 5.5 of the Navigator RIP included explicit support for the older
ANSI/CGATS PDF/X-1:1999 standard rather than the current ISO versions. That
explicit support has been removed for the Eclipse Release. No explicit support for the
PDF/X-1:2001 conformance level (note the absence of the “a” after the “X-1”) has
ever been included in the RIP.
For more information see Section 8.14.2 on page 307.

8.14.2 Printing PDF version 1.4

There are a few applications that can save files in version 1.4 of the Portable Docu-
® ®
ment Format (PDF), these include Jaws PDF Creator, Illustrator 9 and 10 , Acrobat 5 ,
™
InDesign 2.0 and Photoshop 7.0.
One of the major features of this new revision is the ability to mark objects as being
partially transparent, so that other objects in the background are visible through them.
This feature aids the creation of many special effects, including drop shadows, ghost-
ing back of image areas behind text blocks and soft edges to silhouetted pictures.

8.14.3 Printing PDF version 1.5

™
The Navigator RIP Genesis Release will print PDF v1.5 files. Some of the features
included are:
• ICC profile handling.
• Support for JPEG 2000 and ability to decompress JPEG 2000 images
• 16 bit images.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 307

 Configuring Input

• Annotation types.
New line end styles for Line annotations, fine positioning of Square and Circle
annotations, new annotation types – Polygon & Polyline, Caret annotations.
• Cross reference tables.
• Layers.
Used for versioning, as “layers” in, for example, a packaging workflow. Each
group of optional content may be flagged with separate settings to display on-
screen in a PDF reader and to print. The provision of layers within PDF 1.5
allows the support for different languages within a single file.

8.14.4 Working with transparency

In the Eclipse Release of the Navigator RIP, the “InstallInFlight” procedure has been
withdrawn and replaced with “InstallTransparencyCheck” and a “BackDropRender
Selector”.
A number of switches are available and the following messages will appear depending
on the switch settings:

8.14.4.1 PDF Check Warning

With PDF Check Warning enabled the following message appears at the start of every
PDF job using transparency:
%%[ WARNING - THIS JOB USES PDF 1.4 TRANSPARENCY ]%%

This message indicates that the PDF 1.4 transparency checker procset has identified
an element marked as transparency in the job. The procset then switches the RIP from
“Normal” mode into “Backdrop Rendering” mode.
Normal mode means the RIP functions normally, and you should not notice any sig-
nificant changes in behavior in terms of performance, memory usage and so on.
In Backdrop Rendering mode there are significant changes. Interpretation time will be
broadly similar as in normal mode however rendering time will be increased. This is
because the RIP does the compositing in the render phase and this process is computa-
tionally intensive. The compositing phase currently requires memory to be allocated
and so vmerrors may occur. In terms of results, the objects are composited at full
device resolution, there is no downsampling like that produced by pre-flatteners.

308 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

Areas of the page which have only opaque objects are optimized to render faster and
thus performance depends on how much of the page is covered by objects which are
transparent.

8.14.4.2 PDF Check Abort

With the PDF Check Abort switch enabled all jobs using transparency will be aborted
and the following message is displayed:
%%[ WARNING - THIS JOB USES PDF 1.4 TRANSPARENCY - ABORTING JOB ]%%

8.14.4.3 PDF Page Alert

With the PDF Page Alert switch enabled the following alert appears when interpreting
every page that uses transparency:
%%[ THIS PAGE USES PDF 1.4 TRANSPARENCY ]%%

Using the page-by-page check allows the RIP to switch between Normal and Back-
drop Rendering mode on a page by page basis. This improves performance because
backdrop rendering a page containing no transparency is much slower than normal
rendering.
Note: When a PDF file references another PDF file via transparency the second PDF
is now checked while determining if the page containing the reference has any trans-
parent object on it.
Also, not all applications that provide a user interface to define “transparency” do so
using PDF 1.4 structures. Macromedia FreeHand has support for transparency, but it is
®
done in a different way. Also Acrobat Distiller cannot make transparent objects.
For more information see the Navigator RIP Extensions manual.

8.14.5 AcroForms
A PDF file can contain information which is additional to the standard PDF format.
When viewed using an interactive application such as Adobe Acrobat, this additional
information provides interactive features making the page more like a form. These
files are called AcroForms.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 309

 Configuring Input

With features such as text input fields, multiple choice option lists and clickable but-
tons, a PDF file that features an AcroForm is used to provide comprehensive elec-
tronic form filling functionality.
You interact with the form via the usual mouse and keyboard actions. The AcroForm
can be programmed to respond to events (such as clicking on a button) to provide var-
ious levels of automation.

8.14.5.1 Print Ready PDF AcroForm files

An AcroForm is generally created for interactive use via an interactive program like
Adobe Acrobat. However, you may want to print these files. The Navigator RIP is, of
course, not interactive and is only concerned with rendering the contents of the PDF
file for printed output. This creates a number of issues about exactly which of the
essentially interactive features (such as, buttons and lists) should be printed and how
they should appear.
When the form is completed (that is, all the required text input fields are filled in)
using Adobe Acrobat, the PDF file is re-saved by Acrobat to save the entered informa-
tion. When this is done, Acrobat creates additional content in the PDF file called
Appearance Streams which render the filled-in text input fields. It also marks the PDF
file’s AcroForm as being “complete” (by setting the NeedAppearances key in the
AcroForm dictionary to false).
We refer to a file that has been completed in this way as being print-ready.
Prior to being made print ready, a PDF AcroForm may be incomplete to various
degrees. For example, the form could be blank in the sense that none of the fields con-
tain any user-entered information. Alternatively, a PDF AcroForm file could have
been partially completed by a database program (for example) which can provide val-
ues (content) for some or all of the text input fields but still not yet completing the file.
This completeness refers to two things:
• The fields’ appearance streams may not be present in the PDF file, even though
the fields may have been given values (that is, the actual text to display in the
input fields).
• The AcroForm will be marked as incomplete by virtue of the
NeedAppearances key in the AcroForm dictionary being set to true.

310 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

When the Navigator RIP is given the job of printing a PDF AcroForm, it has to be sen-
sitive to whether or not the form has been completed and is print-ready.
The Navigator RIP uses the following rule:
• If the NeedAppearances key in the AcroForm dictionary (in the PDF file) is
false (or is absent), the AcroForm will be printed such that all fields (and
only those fields) with appearance streams given will be displayed. Otherwise,
if NeedAppearances is true, the Navigator RIP will reconstruct appearance
streams for all the fields it finds.
What this means for the Navigator RIP is that, unless the PDF file has been made
complete and print-ready, the final appearance of the various fields of the AcroForm
could be displayed slightly differently than they might appear in the viewing applica-
tion (for example, Acrobat).

8.14.5.2 PDF AcroForms and the Navigator RIP

When a PDF AcroForm has been completed and saved and is therefore print-ready,
the Navigator RIP will print all AcroForm field types (text fields, choice list boxes,
buttons, and signature fields). However, this is conditional upon the manner in which
the fields have been defined in the AcroForm. For example, some button fields may
have been flagged (by Acrobat) as “not to be printed”. In this case the Navigator RIP
will not print such items.
If the PDF AcroForm has not been saved as print-ready, the Navigator RIP still sup-
ports the rendering of text input fields (both single-line and multi-line).To do this, the
RIP constructs (or reconstructs) the fields’ appearance streams according to the field
values and other information contained within the AcroForm. It should be noted how-
ever that there is a degree of licence with respect to how a viewing application may
format the items (such as text and buttons), and so results between different viewing
applications may differ.
If the AcroForm is not print-ready, the Navigator RIP also attempts to support other
field types (such as buttons and choice lists) but their final appearance may be differ-
ent to the intended result (by a greater or lesser extent). It is therefore highly recom-
mended that all AcroForm files to be submitted to the Navigator RIP are saved as
print-ready first.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 311

 Configuring Input

8.14.5.3 Implementation of PDF 1.4 Annotations

Support for PDF Annotations, as defined in the PDF 1.4 specification, is implemented
in the Navigator RIP. Annotations are defined in section 8.4 of the specification, how-
ever, they also refer to AcroForm fields (which merge with annotation “widgets”).
AcroForms are defined in section 8.6 of the specification entitled “Interactive Forms”.
Support for AcroForms has already been implemented for PDF 1.3.
Most PDF Annotation types are supported as long as they meet the following condi-
tions:
• their “Normal” appearance streams are present and correct in the PDF file and,
• they have their “Print” flag set.
Excluded annotations are:
• Link and Movie annotations, because they do not present a normal appearance
stream in the standard way
• Popup annotations, because they only apply to interactive applications (that is,
popping up a window)
• TrapNet (also known as, trap network) annotations.
Note: From Eclipse Release SP3 the RIP ignores (in non-strict mode only), PDF doc-
uments with “FreeText” type annotations which contain invalid PDF content.

8.14.6 Enfocus preflight checking of PDF files

From the Eclipse Release SP3 a mechanism is provided to upload and install certified
PDF profiles to the RIP allowing certification checks to be performed on incoming
PDF documents. Profiles must be added to the RIP by using the PDF Profile Manager.
Using this method, the PDF Profile manager can perform various consistency checks.
On import of a profile the PDF profile manager will:
• check whether the file to be imported is a valid PDF profile.
• not allow two file names with the same PDF Profile name to co-exist.*
• alert if a file is overwritten.
• alert if a file overwritten and the new file refers to a different profile.

312 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

On deletion of a profile the PDF profile manager will:

• not allow the deletion of a PDF profile that is referred to by a Page Setup.
*Through the PDF Profile manager files are imported or deleted. A valid file, exports
a PDF Profile name which is not necessarily the name of the file.
A page setup can refer to a number of profiles. And the same profiles can be used in
different page setups.

8.14.6.1 Importing PDF profiles

To import a PDF profile:
1. Select Output >PDF Profile Manager.... This displays the following dialog:

Figure 8.10 PDF Profile Manager Dialog

2. Click Add and navigate to the location of your profile and select it.
3. Click Done.
To remove a PDF profile:
1. Select Output >PDF Profile Manager....
2. Highlight the profiles to be removed. Only those profiles not currently being
used by page setups can be removed.
3. Click Remove followed by Done.
For more information see Section 8.14.8.6 on page 320.
For more information on PDF profiles, see http://www.certified-
pdf.net/home.php.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 313

 Configuring Input

8.14.7 Related documentation

The following documents may help you understand AcroForms:
• Graphic technology—Prepress digital data exchange—Use of PDF for com-
posite data—Part 1: Complete exchange (PDF/X-1), American National Stan-
dard CGATS.12/1-1999. This document is available from NPES; see
http://www.npes.org/ for purchasing details.

• Portable Document Format Reference Manual, Version 1.4. Adobe Inc.

• Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide, Global Graphics Software.

8.14.8 PDF Options dialog box

Figure 8.11 shows the dialog box that appears when you click PDF Options in the Edit
Page Setup dialog box. (This view shows some settings that are not at their default
values.)

314 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

If you need to print PDF files with different options, for example with different pass-
words, you can create a number of PDF page setup configurations.

Figure 8.11 PDF Options dialog box

The options are in sections for page selection, PDF type acceptance, passwords and
Enfocus certified status check for preflight checking of PDF files.

8.14.8.1 Page selection

Print all pages

Leave this check box selected to print all the pages in the PDF document. If you
wish to print only a subset of the pages from a PDF job, deselect this check box
and enter the desired pages in the Pages field.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 315

 Configuring Input

Reselect this check box when you have finished printing the subset of pages.
This enables the printing of all pages from other PDF jobs. (You do not need to
delete the entry in the Pages field.)
Page(s)

Enter numbers for the page or pages that you wish to print. You can enter indi-
vidual page numbers or ranges, separating each number or range with a comma
( , ) character.
To enter a page range, enter the numbers of the first and last pages in the range,
using a hyphen to separate them: for example, 7-16. If you wish to print all
pages from a particular page to the end of the job, enter a range starting with
that particular page and ending with a number that you know to be higher than
the last page in the PDF job: for example, 47-10000.
You can combine individual page numbers and ranges: for example, 1,2,7-
16,23,24.

When printing a PDF job, the RIP displays a message for each page that is not
printed because of being unlisted in this field. This is a typical message:
%%[ Warning: Skipping page 1 - not in requested page range ]%%

Page size bounding box

PDF version 1.3 offers several options for defining a rectangular area that is the
area of interest for a PDF page. A PDF file may set values for one or more of
these areas, to be used as appropriate to the different ways that the PDF file can
be used: viewing, office printing, imposition, commercial printing, and so on.
The RIP looks for the values of the option chosen in this list and makes a page
buffer of the size set by that option. Only MediaBox must be present in a file,
but the other areas inherit default values from MediaBox.
The options in this list are fully defined in the Portable Document Format Ref-
erence Manual, Version 1.3. The default is MediaBox.

MediaBox The size of the media, which may be larger than the page
imaged upon it.

316 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

BleedBox The size of the page whose edges must be reached by bleed
objects, though the trimmed size of the page may be smaller.
There may be printer’s marks and parts of the bleed objects
outside this area.

TrimBox The size of the page as intended for delivery to the reader,
after trimming any printer’s marks and excess bleed areas.

ArtBox The size of the rectangle to be used when placing a PDF

graphic. (Typically, this is the bounding box of the graphics
plus a possible allowance for captions or blank margins.)

CropBox Rectangle specifying the default clipping region for the page
when displayed or printed. Acrobat Exchange sets this when
cropping a page.

8.14.8.2 PDF Types

By default all PDF files will be accepted by the RIP, whether they conform to the
PDF/X standards or not.
The RIP will recognize PDF/X-1a and PDF/X-3 files, apply the necessary additional
checks to validate that they comply with the full details of the standard, and automati-
cally change any configuration settings (such as overprinting) that do not match the
requirements for rendering them correctly.
Accept type(s)

This list allows you to define how strictly the PDF file must conform to various
standards and specifications for PDF jobs. You can use the On error list to
define what the RIP should do if the job does not meet the requested
specification.
The options in this list are as follows:

Auto-detect types
This is the default option. The RIP makes the best possible
attempt to print the file according to the type labeling within
the job. PDF/X files will be recognized automatically. If the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 317

 Configuring Input

job claims to be PDF/X-1 but does not meet that standard, the
RIP treats that as an error but may still be able to print the
file.

Any PDF <= 1.5 as basic PDF

All PDF and PDF/X files will be accepted, with no special
treatment of PDF/X files. With this setting the RIP will print
any job with a recognized PDF version; that is, version 1.5 or
less, including non-compliant jobs labeled as PDF/X-1, but
not actually complying with the standard. This is the most
relaxed setting. By using this option you are explicitly telling
the RIP not to override any overprint settings for a PDF/X
file.

Any PDF/X-1a
Only PDF/X-1a:2001 and PDF/X-1a:2003 files will be
accepted. See below for the action taken when other files are
received.

Any PDF/X-3 or X-1a

Accept any supported PDF/X variant, that is; PDF/X-
1a:2001, PDF/X-1a:2003, PDF/X-3:2002, and PDF/X-
3:2003.
On error

The options in this list define the action you wish to occur if there is an error: for
example, if the PDF file is an unrecognized type or if it fails to meet the condi-
tion set in the Accept type(s) list. The actions are as follows:

Report errors and continue

The errors reported are for the file type as explicitly set in the
Accept type(s) field or as detected when the setting is Auto-
detect types. There may be problems with the printed
results if the job is newer than version 1.5 or badly
constructed.
Any PDF/X validation errors will be reported in the RIP’s
system log, but the file will still be processed and output.

318 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

Abort job
Report errors and reject (abort) the job. If a file being pro-
cessed does not conform to the file type selected, the job will
be aborted, and no output will be produced.
Where a condition in the PDF file is encountered which does not conform to the
appropriate PDF/X specification, a warning message is displayed.
Unless you have selected the Reject if invalid PDF type option, processing of
the PDF file continues as normal.

8.14.8.3 Proofing and validation

The RIP may be used as a combined PDF/X validation and proofing tool by selecting
one of the PDF/X entries in the Accept type(s) menu, and Reject if invalid PDF type in
the On error menu.

8.14.8.4 Non-conforming rendering

To force the RIP to apply your own configuration (for example, overprint settings), to
a PDF/X file; select Any PDF <= 1.4 as basic PDF in the Accept type(s) menu.
This option may also be used to print a file that claims to be PDF/X compliant, but
that does not correctly conform to the standard.

8.14.8.5 Password
Use password to print protected documents

Select this option when you wish to print a document that has been protected by
a password, and enter that password in the text field. Enter one password only.
For maximum security, remove the password after use. This removal is optional
if your other PDF jobs do not have password protection.
Note: The PDF specification allows for files to have Owner and User (reader)
passwords. The RIP checks the password that you enter against both of these
passwords, and allows printing if either password produces a match.
Passwords can be any length but only the first 32 characters are significant. If
you have any way to influence the choice of password used in jobs supplied to
you, suggest that it uses only ASCII characters: the letters A-z and A-Z, the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 319

 Configuring Input

numerals 0-9, and punctuation marks such as []{} and ;. For example, there
may be problems in entering the password if the password uses characters that
are not in the English alphabet. Avoid multiple white space characters, accented
characters, and characters that require a double-byte representation.
Note: The Honor ‘PDF Color Management’ check box has been removed. The
option is now called Override color management in job and is part of the Input
Document Controls within the Color Setup Manager. See Section 14.8 on
page 493 for more details.
To make fullest use of jobs containing device-independent color definitions,
enable a TrapPro option in the Configure RIP Extras dialog box.

8.14.8.6 Enfocus certified status check

The purpose of the Enfocus certified status check is to determine if incoming PDF
documents contain an Enfocus certificate having previously passed (or failed), a pre-
flight check using the same profile, prior to reaching the RIP. If a PDF document
passes the check, the RIP monitor reports:
StatusCheck: document '<path/name>' certified

If a document fails the check, the RIP monitor reports:

StatusCheck: document '<path/name>' not certified

This check allows you to ensure the validity of the incoming jobs and as such be sure
the files are passed successfully along the workflow.
The following options are provided:
Do status check
With this option selected each incoming PDF is compared to the PDF profiles
listed in the PDF Profiles to compare with window. When a file passes the test it
will continue processing. When a file fails the test a message is displayed in the
message window and written to the log file. The file will then continue process-
ing unless the Abort if status check fails option is checked.
Note: When Do status check is selected you must have at least one profile listed
before you can close the PDF options dialog.

320 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.14 Printing PDF files

Abort if status check fails

PDF jobs that fail the test are still processed unless the Abort if status check fails
option is selected, in which case they are aborted.
PDF Profiles to compare with
Use the Add and Remove buttons to add or delete PDF profiles which have pre-
viously been imported to the RIP. For more information on importing PDF pro-
files see Section 8.14.6 on page 312.
A page setup can refer to one or more profiles. And the same profiles can be
used in different page setups.

8.14.9 Usage
The simplest way to use PDF files is using the Navigator RIP > Print File command. To
see a listing of PDF files in the current folder, use the PDF Files or All Files
option in the Files of type drop-down list of the Print File dialog box. Select the page
setup that sets the correct PDF options from the Page Setup drop-down list.
You can also supply PDF files to the RIP using spool folder inputs and all forms of
network protocols: AppleTalk, sockets, and so on. See the summary of managed
inputs in Section 8.1 on page 264. If necessary, set the PDF options in the page setup
corresponding to your chosen managed input.

8.14.10 Limitations and special treatment

The RIP can always print PDF files that are designed to be printed. There are some
minor differences compared to the way in which the RIP handles PostScript-language
files. Also, the emphasis on printed output and limited interactivity means that the
support of some optional content in PDF files is missing or modified, compared to the
support in a dedicated PDF viewer.
These features are:

Embedded fonts and font substitution

The Navigator RIP supports the use of fonts embedded in
PDF files as well as fonts already available to the RIP for use

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 321

 Configuring Input

with PostScript-language jobs. The embedded fonts can

include TrueType (Type 42) fonts, CID (character identifier)
composite fonts, and Compact Font Format (CFF) fonts.
When fonts requested by a PDF job are missing, the RIP
obeys the setting of the Abort the job if any fonts are missing
check box in the Page Setup Options dialog box.) See
Section 5.23.8 on page 191 for more information.

Security settings
The creator of a PDF file can limit access to a PDF file, by
requiring a password of the reader or forbidding changing,
copying, or printing of the content. The only function rele-
vant to the Navigator RIP is the ability to forbid printing. In
general, the RIP does not print files where the creator has for-
bidden printing.

Document Information
The Navigator RIP window displays the PDF version number
and general information about the document, as supplied by
the author or creating application.

Most PDF Annotation types are supported but only if:

their “Normal” Appearance streams are present and correct in
the PDF file; and they have their “Print” flag set.

Excluded annotations are:

Link and Movie annotations, because they do not present a
normal appearance stream in the standard way.
Popup annotations because they only apply to interactive
applications (that is, popping up a window)
TrapNet (also known as, trap network) annotations.

Extensions The RIP ignores all extended content (for example, multime-
dia content and private data) that is labeled as such according
to the PDF specification.

322 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.15 Printing JPEG and JFIF files

8.15 Printing JPEG and JFIF files

The RIP can print JPEG and JFIF files using the Navigator RIP > Print File command,
or from a spool folder.
The simplest way to print JPEG and JFIF files is using the Navigator RIP > Print File
command.
To see a listing of JPEG and JFIF files in the current folder, use the JPEG Files or
All Files option in the Files of type drop-down list of the Print File dialog box.

You can also supply JPEG and JFIF files to the Navigator RIP using spool folder
inputs. See Section 8.6, “Using the Spool Folder input folder” for details.
When ColorPro is enabled, the RIP can detect and utilize an ICC profile embedded in
a JPEG file. See the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details.

8.15.1 Limitations
A JPEG file in Progressive format (a format option in Adobe Photoshop) cannot be
printed by the Navigator RIP. Progressive format is often used for web downloads.

8.16 Printing GIF files

The Navigator RIP can print GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) files using the Navi-
gator RIP > Print File command, or from a spool folder.

The easiest way to print GIF files is using the Navigator RIP > Print File command.
To see a listing of GIF files in the current folder, use the GIF Files or All Files
option in the Files of type drop-down list of the Print File dialog box.

8.17 Printing TIFF/IT files

The Navigator RIP supports the imaging of TIFF/IT Profile 1 files, generally referred
to as TIFF/IT-P1 files, a common method of transferring images for use in advertis-
ing.
This section summarizes the history of the file format and its uses before describing
how to enable and use imaging of these files in the RIP. The description of use starts
with Section 8.17.2 on page 326. See also “Printing TIFF 6.0 files” on page 328.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 323

 Configuring Input

8.17.1 General
The Tag Image File Format (TIFF) is a well-established and popular file format for
raster images. There have been a number of published standards for the format of
TIFF files, each successive standard generally being more complex than the last. This
growing complexity has reflected the format increasing in flexibility and providing for
private extensions to the format. The result has been that TIFF now represents a fam-
ily of file formats and there are many programs that implement only the more popular
parts of these formats.
The RIP supports the imaging of TIFF/IT Profile 1 files, generally referred to as
TIFF/IT-P1 files, a common method of transferring images for use in advertising. The
International Standards Organization (ISO) Draft International Standard 12639
describes the TIFF/IT and TIFF/IT-P1 formats. Relevant earlier standards are ANSI
IT8.8 and the Aldus TIFF 6.0 standard (now maintained by Adobe).
The TIFF/IT-P1 format is being promoted by a body called Digital Distribution of
Advertising for Publications. It provides a clean interface for the proprietary color
electronic prepress systems (CEPS) formats such as the Scitex CT/LW format.
TIFF files can contain many different types of data but, in general, a single
TIFF/IT-P1 file contains only one kind of data from a total of six possibilities, each
known by a two-letter abbreviation as listed in Table 8.2.
The exception is the FP file, which includes layout information and the details of some
combination of files, each containing CT, HC, or LW data—it is convenient to call
these other files subfiles of the FP file. The data may appear in any order within the FP
file but applications must image it in a set order.
There must be at least one subfile in an FP file, but no more than one of each type. For
example, an FP file cannot contain more than one CT file and it is typical for FP jobs
to contain only a CT subfile and an LW subfile.
The full list of data types with their typical uses is:

Table 8.2 TIFF/IT data type codes and usage

Data type Usage

FP Final Page (layout for CT, HC, and LW)

CT Contone, typically low resolution

324 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.17 Printing TIFF/IT files

Table 8.2 TIFF/IT data type codes and usage

Data type Usage

LW Line Work

HC High resolution Contone

BL Binary Line work (not an FP subfile)

BP Binary Picture (not an FP subfile)

MP Monochrome Picture (not an FP subfile)

Some of these data types are partly compatible with the corresponding definitions in
the TIFF 6.0 standard.
The largest difference with TIFF 6.0 is that TIFF/IT has only one image per file. The
FP file format can have up to four Image File Directories (IFDs), but only one
image—the preview image for the FP layout.
The major restrictions on TIFF/IT-P1 compared to TIFF/IT are that TIFF/IT-P1:
• Uses CYMK only (when appropriate).
• Is pixel interleaved (when appropriate).
• Has a single choice of image orientation.
• Has a single choice of dot range.
The Navigator RIP images an FP file by rendering the referenced CT, HC, and LW
subfiles, in that strict order. Order is significant because the HC and LW subfile types
can include transparent regions able to reveal images rendered from previous subfiles.
When the RIP renders subfiles as part of an FP job, it uses extra information in the FP
file to determine the overall size of the page, and position each subfile (which can be
smaller) within that page.
The RIP can also image a single CT, HC, or LW file independently of an FP file. For
each of these files, the RIP locates the image origin at the PostScript-language ori-
gin—relative to coordinates (0,0) at the bottom left of the page. For example, this pro-
vides a limited proofing capability but be careful to avoid printing a partial image
when the subfiles are available before the FP file.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 325

 Configuring Input

When ColorPro is enabled, the RIP can detect and utilize an ICC profile embedded in
a TIFF file. See the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details.

8.17.2 Installation and requirements

You must enable the RIP to print TIFF/IT files, by entering a password or key number
issued to you by your supplier. Note that TIFF 6.0 input is always enabled.
1. Display the Configure RIP dialog box and click Extras.
2. In the Configure RIP Extras dialog box, select the item TIFF/IT in the list.
3. Click the Add button. In the Enable Feature dialog box that appears, enter the
key number issued to you for use with TIFF/IT, and then click OK to return to
the Configure RIP Extras dialog box, and OK again to return to the Configure
RIP dialog box.
If you attempt to print TIFF/IT-P1 files when the TIFF/IT option is not enabled, then
depending on the input method chosen, the TIFF 6.0 input option may attempt to pro-
cess the parts of the file that it recognizes as TIFF. This is unlikely to produce the
desired result.
TIFF/IT files can result in very large page buffers and, potentially, cause painting to
multiple partial page buffers. We recommend that you allocate 128 MB of memory to
the RIP if possible, with an absolute minimum allocation of 64 MB RAM.
It is not possible to run a simple spool folder where any of the CT, HC, LW, or FP files
may arrive first: the result may be partial images. The spool folder can accept
TIFF/IT-P1 files but only if the order of arrival and file naming can be controlled. See
page 285 for details of configuring the spool folder for a specially controlled source of
TIFF/IT-P1 files. If the order of arrival or naming is unsuitable or unpredictable, using
Print File from the Navigator RIP menu is the simplest reliable method of ensuring that
the RIP images the intended file or combination of files.

326 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.17 Printing TIFF/IT files

8.17.3 Usage
To print a TIFF/IT file, first choose a page setup with a large enough imaging area and
an appropriate resolution for the high resolution data types.
Next, choose the option Print File from the Navigator RIP menu. Figure 8.9, page 302,
shows the dialog box that appears. Display the contents of the folder holding the file
that you want to print.
Choose the file that you want to print. Typically, this is an FP file if you are imaging a
finished page but you can specify a subfile: for example, to proof it alone. There is no
enforced file name convention but the two letters of the data type usually appear in the
name.
For the example of a CT file with name file, you may see any of:
file.ct
file.ict
file.CT
file.ICT

To make sure that you see all files, choose All Files (*.*) in the Files of type
drop-down list.
Select the file you want to print, and click Print.
If you are printing an FP file, the RIP displays a progress dial while reading each of
the files referenced by the FP file and the Navigator RIP window shows text similar to
the following example:
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\Tiffit\66.fp" as a
TIFF/IT-P1 FP (Final Page) standalone file
Starting Job On 24 April 1998 08:51:42
Using Color Setup "(None)"
Using default device calibration
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\Tiffit\66.ct" as a
TIFF/IT-P1 CT (low-resolution contone) subfile of an FP job
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\Tiffit\66.lw" as a
TIFF/IT-P1 LW (linework) subfile of an FP job
Interpretation time: 40 seconds
. . .

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 327

 Configuring Input

If you are printing a subfile (data types CT, HC, or LW), you see less text after click-
ing Print:
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\Tiffit\66.ct" as a
TIFF/IT-P1 CT (low-resolution contone) standalone file
Starting Job On 24 April 1998 08:51:42
Using Color Setup "(None)"
Using default device calibration
Interpretation time: 37 seconds
. . .

If you attempt to print TIFF/IT-P1 files when the TIFF/IT option is not enabled, then
depending on the input method chosen, the TIFF 6.0 input option may attempt to pro-
cess the parts of the file that it recognizes as TIFF. This is unlikely to produce the
desired result. See also “Printing TIFF 6.0 files” on page 328. In the following exam-
ple a TIFF/IT-P1 file is processed as a TIFF 6.0 file.
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\Tiffit\test.tif" as a
TIFF 6.0 baseline (with extensions) standalone file
Starting Job On 24 April 1998 08:51:42
Using Color Setup "(None)"
Using default device calibration
% tiffdev: TIFF6: compression is None
% tiffdev: bits per sample = 1
% tiffdev: samples per pixel (planes) = 1 (bilevel or grayscale)
Interpretation time: 0 seconds
. . .

However, if the TIFF 6.0 input option does not recognize any part of the file as TIFF,
you will see the message:
open: the TIFF 6.0 or TIFF/IT file
is either corrupt, unsupported, of an unrecognised
type or the appropriate file type is not enabled
in Configure RIP / Extras

The RIP displays the same message if you attempt to image TIFF/IT data types that it
does not support or to image files that do not conform to the TIFF/IT-P1 profile.

8.18 Printing TIFF 6.0 files

The RIP accepts TIFF 6.0 baseline files, with the exceptions and extensions listed
under Section 8.18.2 on page 330.

328 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.18 Printing TIFF 6.0 files

This support extends to all TIFF files produced by the Navigator RIP TIFF output plu-
gin, with the exception of files produced with these settings:
• In the Navigator RIP version 5.0 through 5.5r0b, where Style in the Edit Page
Setup dialog box has been set to RGB Composite (Band) or CMYK Compos-
ite (Band).

• In the Navigator RIP version 4.5 and earlier, where TIFF format in the TIFF
Configuration dialog box has been set to PlanarConf=2/multiple
strips.

Note: From v 5.5r1 the Navigator RIP can handle RGB Composite (Band) or CMYK
Composite (Band) Style but only with the tiffexec operator. tiffdev still does
not support these styles.
Note: The Eclipse Release and later RIPs support Palette color (Index color) TIFF
files.

8.18.1 Procedures
TIFF 6.0 input is always enabled, but operates only with Spool Folder input and the
Print File command. (It is also possible to use TIFF 6.0 input from PostScript-lan-
guage instructions.)
Copy the TIFF file to the correct folder for Spool Folder input, or select it in the dialog
box shown when you choose Print File. If you use Print File, type the file name or
make sure that the RIP is displaying all files in the list of files. TIFF files often have
the file name extension .TIF but this is not required.
This extract from the text displayed in the Navigator RIP window shows the messages
produced when successfully processing a TIFF 6.0 file.
Setup loaded: "tiff"
Ripping file %H%/Suites/PEOPLE/68.tif as TIFF.
% tiffdev: reading "H:\Suites\PEOPLE\68.tif" as a
TIFF 6.0 baseline (with extensions) standalone file
Starting Job On Thursday, January 29, 1998 08:48:48
Using Color Setup "(None)"
Using default device calibration
% tiffdev: TIFF6: compression is None
% tiffdev: bits per sample = 8
% tiffdev: samples per pixel (planes) = 4 (CMYK)
Interpretation time: 32 seconds
. . .

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 329

 Configuring Input

The remaining text (not shown here) is related to rendering and output, not to the
input.

8.18.2 Limitations and extensions

The Navigator RIP accepts TIFF 6.0 baseline files, with the following differences.
Not supported:
• LAB color.
• Multiple IFDs (images) per file (the RIP images only the first).
• PhotometricInterpretation = 4 (transparency mask).
• PlanarConfiguration = 2 (tiffdev). This option is offered by the Navigator
RIP TIFF output plugin, as composite RGB or CMYK output with band-inter-
leaving in the Navigator RIP version 5.0 and later.
Note: From Navigator RIP version 5.5r1 the tiffexec operator supports Plan-
arConfiguration = 2.
Note: From Navigator RIP Eclipse Release SP4, 16-bit images are supported.
Ignored:
• GrayResponseCurve.
• GrayResponseUnit.
Restrictions:
• 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16 bits per plane.
Additionally, the RIP supports the following full TIFF 6.0 extensions to TIFF 6.0
baseline:
• CCITT T.4 compression (group 3 2-D) (1 bit per pixel or bpp).
• CCITT T.6 compression (group 4) (1 bpp).
• LZW compression, including Differencing Predictor.
• CMYK (including DotRange != 0, 255).
• JPEG compression.

330 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.19 Printing page buffer files

Note: If you are attempting to RIP images which you have prepared using Photoshop
and saved using ZIP or JPEG compression, the RIP may generate a rangecheck
error.
This occurs because ZIP compression is not a recognized TIFF compression format,
and as such is not documented in the TIFF 6.0 specification. The JPEG compression
that Photoshop uses is a new version of JPEG data in TIFF files which is also not part
of the TIFF 6.0 specification.

8.19 Printing page buffer files

The RIP can print page buffer files produced by another similar installation of the RIP.
This is a convenient way of setting up a simple workflow able to transfer pages from
one RIP installation to another.
One example of how this ability can be useful is where you have several RIPs with a
single, fast, final output device, and perhaps various slower proofing printers. It is
easy for a single RIP working alone to keep a slow proofing printer supplied with jobs.
On the other hand, it may require many of the Navigator RIPs interpreting jobs and
producing page buffers to keep your fast output device busy. One solution is have the
interpreting RIPs all pass their final output page buffers to a single machine running a
RIP, whose only function is to accept page buffers and pass them to the fast output
device as quickly as possible.
Note: The separate FlatOut User Guide describes this situation and other, more com-
plex, possibilities in greater detail.
The method described here is designed for the rerouting of complete and valid page
buffers, using Print File or spool folder inputs.

8.19.1 Requirements and preparation

There are some requirements on the installations involved and you must prepare the
receiving and supplying Navigator RIP installations before use.
The requirements are:
• The RIP installation printing (receiving) the page buffers must have the same
installed version of the same output plugin as used to produce the page buffers.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 331

 Configuring Input

• This sending and receiving RIP installations must be running in Multiple or

Multiple (Parallel) modes.

• The sending RIP installations must be version 4.5 or later.

• All the RIP installations must be running on the same platform: for example,
Windows XP on an Intel-compatible processor.
• It must be acceptable to have the original page buffers destroyed after output.
The preparation of the receiving RIP installation is to enable use of the PGB hot
folder page feature and create a page setup. Optionally, you can use the page setup
with a spool folder input.
1. Enable the page feature, by copying the PGB hot folder file from the
SW/Page Features/Examples folder to the SW/Page Features folder.

2. Create an appropriate page setup and choose the PGB hot folder entry in the
Enable Feature drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

3. Optionally, if you wish to use a spool folder as input, create a new spool folder
input and, in the Input Channel Edit dialog box, choose the page setup that you
created in step 2. Configure and name the spool folder, as described in
Section 8.6.1 on page 281, then make sure that it is enabled and that the inputs
are started.
The preparation of the supplying RIP installation is simpler. Create page setups that
use the output device plugin with resolution and other settings that match those you
have chosen in the receiving installation. You do not need to select the PGB hot
folder page feature.

8.19.2 Printing procedure

Depending on how you prepared the system, there are two possible methods. You can
use both methods together.
• Supply page buffer files to a spool folder if you have set up one as part of the
preparation described in Section 8.19.1 on page 331.
• Choose Navigator RIP > Print File, navigate to the relevant folder, select the
wanted files and click Print. (Page buffer files have the extension .PGB so be
sure that you are displaying all files in the folder.)

332 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 8.20 Entering PostScript-language code by hand

Warning: For both methods, the receiving RIP effectively deletes the supplied page
buffer file, at the same time as it creates a new page buffer in its own PageBuffer
folder and makes it visible in the Output Controller / Monitor. Even if you use a spool
folder input and leave Delete on completion unselected, the completed files copied into
the Complete Folder are no longer valid page buffers.
When printing a page buffer file, the RIP displays a message in the main Navigator
RIP window, similar to this example, where text in italic varies according to the file
and plugin:
Introducing new pagebuffer: %C%/my_folder/00000003.PGB
Pagebuffer created for device: my_device
Page name: 2. fontlist (K)
Total time: 1 seconds
Job Completed: 00000003.PGB

The receiving installation of the RIP does not check whether each page buffer was cre-
ated for an output plugin that the receiving installation has installed. Any page buffers
created by a plugin that is not installed either fail to appear in the Output Control-
ler/Monitor, or trigger the error:
could not access a resource for a plugin device driver

8.20 Entering PostScript-language code by hand

If you would like to type code directly into the RIP and see the results interpreted, you
can use the Executive, which allows you to type PostScript-language code, and have it
interpreted immediately by the RIP.
If the input system is running, you must stop it using the Navigator RIP > Start Inputs
menu option. When you choose Navigator RIP > Executive, the RIP asks you to select a
page setup for use with the Executive.
Note: If you do not choose a page setup, the RIP uses the one that you chose last time
you used the Executive. If you have not used the Executive in this RIP session, the
first page setup in the drop-down list is used. To change the order of this listing, see
“Reordering page setups” on page 114.
The RIP then displays a window where you can enter PostScript-language code by
typing or cutting and pasting. Any PostScript-language code that generates output
when executed produces page buffers exactly like other jobs processed using the same
page setup. It is wise to hold these page buffers for inspection in the Output

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 333

 Configuring Input

Controller, where you can view or manipulate the page buffers, before sending any
suitable pages for output. The Output Controller is available in either of the multiple
page buffer modes.
Note: If you intend to keep page buffers produced from the Executive for any signifi-
cant time, set a job name that helps you identify the page buffers.
To generate an interrupt, choose Interrupt from the Executive menu.
To quit the Executive window, type quit or Ctrl+W at the prompt, or choose Stop
Executive from the Executive menu.

Whenever you quit the Executive, the Navigator RIP window displays the following,
harmless message:
Job Not Completed: jobname

Remember to restart inputs if you stopped them before using the Executive.

334 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9

Media Management

This chapter describes how the RIP provides ways of monitoring and managing the
use of media in a range of output devices. It also describes how you can configure
these ways to suit your operation.

9.1 Why manage your media?

In a typical printing environment, you might have access to a number of different
imagesetters, each of which takes one of several feed cassettes, or drum recorders,
each of which holds a roll of continuous media. You may use several feed cassettes on
one imagesetter, or share one between several imagesetters. You may even do both.
Figure 9.1 on page 336 shows a possible printing environment. This environment can
produce several operational needs.
Suppose that you want to produce output from the RIP on a particular output device,
using one of the cassettes available to you. Which cassette should you use? You do not
want to use one that is low on media, in case it runs out before the job is printed.
At the same time, you want to make the most economical use of media. If a cassette
contains just the right amount of the correct media for a job, it makes sense to use it
instead of another one, so that media is not wasted.
The output (take-up) cassette is also worth monitoring. You may want to process all of
a job together and need to know how much more media the output cassette can accept.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 335

 Media Management

Equally, if the output goes to an online processor, you may need to know that there is
enough film output for the processor to handle satisfactorily.
In addition, there may be times when you want to cut the media in a particular cas-
sette, or feed extra media. If you are working at your computer, and the output device
is not located nearby, doing this by hand might be inconvenient.

Online processor Take-up bin

Multiple feed Imagesetters Take-up cassette

cassettes for film
and paper

Figure 9.1 Using multiple output devices and cassettes

9.1.1 Overview of the Navigator RIP capabilities

The Navigator RIP media management can meet all these needs, subject to operating
with suitable output devices and getting a minimal amount of information from the
operator. These requirements are explained in later parts of this section.
The RIP can manage up to sixteen feed cassettes at once, using as many suitable out-
put devices as are connected.
For each cassette (or roll-fed device) it can: monitor the media remaining, display the
amount of media for the particular cassette in use, and issue automatic warnings when
this amount is low.

336 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.1 Why manage your media?

The RIP can also instruct the output device to perform cut and feed operations, both
automatically (at pre-specified intervals and events) and interactively, on request
(when you choose menu options). The physical device itself must support software
control of these functions.
You can still perform manual operations while using the RIP media management. The
purpose of media management is to reduce the need for routine manual operation and
record keeping.
A media saving feature is also available. For more information see Section 5.14 on
page 156.

9.1.2 Suitable devices

You will gain some benefit from using media management with most types of output
device. Media management performs most efficiently when the following assump-
tions are satisfied:
• The physical output devices are roll fed from cassettes. The RIP media man-
agement is not suited to, or necessary for, sheet-fed devices.
• When you change a feed cassette, you also mount an empty output cassette—
by changing or emptying the full one.
• There is only one feed cassette mounted at a time. This is the usual case.
There is at least one imagesetter which can have several input cassettes mounted
at one time.
• Each physical device is represented by one Navigator RIP output device. This
is the usual case.
The possibility of having multiple output devices arises because there are some
physical devices which can provide multiple types of output. One example pro-
vides a dual technology (dye sublimation and thermal transfer) engine in one
unit. These technologies have different characteristics and require separate strat-
egies regarding calibration and color separation—providing each technology
with its own output device type is a likely solution.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 337

 Media Management

9.1.3 What you need to do

Media management reduces and simplifies your routine work but you need to perform
a small amount of setting up for each cassette or media source before starting to use
media management. This setting up includes:
• Specifying when automatic cuts or feeds and warnings should occur.
You do this in the Media Manager dialog box.
• Naming cassettes and specifying their initial contents.
You do this in the Cassette Manager dialog box.
After this setting up, all you have to do is tell the RIP when you change something that
affects its records of media use:
• Which cassette is in use.
You do this in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, using the Cassette menu.
• How much media you have put in a cassette when you refill it, and when you
perform a manual operation that affects the amount of media.
You do this in the Cassette Manager dialog box.
Note: Any management system that monitors the amount of media remaining relies
upon knowing the amount that was available when the system was set up, since there
is usually no automatic means of detecting this. It is therefore essential that you
inform the RIP how much media is available to each cassette whenever it changes (for
instance, when you refill one).
You must also ensure that the cassette being used to process a job is the same one the
RIP thinks is being used. You can check this by seeing which cassette is chosen in the
selected page setup.

9.2 Advancing and cutting media interactively

You can use the interactive options described in this section immediately, without per-
forming any preparation.
This can be useful when you are starting to use a new system. Once you have estab-
lished the effects of the options and decided which of these you want to use regularly,
you can set up automatic procedures to reduce your need for the interactive options:
see “Advancing and cutting media automatically” on page 340. The interactive

338 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.2 Advancing and cutting media interactively

options (and any manual controls on the output device) remain useful for unusual jobs
or special tests.

9.2.1 Device menu

Each interactive option is a Navigator RIP menu command which affects the selected
device and the cassette mounted in that device.
The commands are in a menu in the main Navigator RIP window which appears
between the Edit menu and the Color menu. The menu changes its name to indicate the
currently selected output device.
Note: For simplicity, this manual refers to this menu as the Device menu. The com-
mands available in this menu can vary to suit the currently selected output device.
The first option in the Device menu is Select Device. Choose this option to see the Select
Output Device dialog box, where you can see a list of available output devices. Select
a device and click Select.
The possible names in the Select Output Device dialog box—and thus of the Device
menu—are exactly the same as the ones you can choose from the Output device list in
the Edit Page Setup dialog box. For example, the name might be UltreP or ExxtraSet-
ter if the RIP is driving only one imagesetter, or only one of each type of imagesetter.
If you are driving two imagesetters of the same type, there might be names such as
Ultre_1 and Ultre_2: you can choose a name for each device when you set it up in the
Device Manager.

9.2.2 Using the Device menu

For most output devices, the Device menu contains commands to advance (feed) the
media and to cut it.
On some output device types, there may be extra commands or some of the default
commands may be grayed out. (Any output device that you choose from the Device
Manager can have its own version of the Device menu: in technical terms, the menu is
specified in the relevant output plugin at the time of software manufacture.)
For example, if a device takes a long time to load film, there could be a pre-load com-
mand allowing you to load film during the processing of a page to avoid delay once
the page is ready to image.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 339

 Media Management

• To advance the media in the current device, choose one of the Advance menu
options, when available.
There are usually three options to advance the media, allowing you to feed 1, 3,
or 6 inches of media through the imagesetter. (The relevant output plugin can be
written to offer any number of similar options, specifying other lengths or
units.)
• To cut the media in the current device, choose one of the Cut menu options.
There are commands to cut with or without feeding media.
If you choose Cut media with feed, or type Ctrl+K, the RIP will feed a predeter-
mined length of media through the imagesetter, and then cut. You can specify
the amount of media to feed through, in the Media Manager. See “Automatic
use” on page 340, for details of how to set this length.
If you choose Cut media no feed, or type Ctrl+L, the RIP will cut the film without
feeding any extra media.
Note: Some output devices, for instance the PelBox, always perform a feed
before a cut. The RIP cannot override this feed, but it can keep a record of how
much media is fed. If you use such a device, read its manual to find out this feed
length, and enter the value in the box labeled Built in cut length in the Media
Manager dialog box. See “Hardware feeds” on page 352.

9.3 Advancing and cutting media automatically

The automatic options described in this section reduce the number of times you need
to use the RIP menu commands or front panel buttons on the physical output device.
You must do some setting up to make sure that the automatic options do what you
want.
The manual options remain useful for use with unusual jobs or special tests: see
“Advancing and cutting media interactively” on page 338.

9.3.1 Automatic use

The RIP can advance the media in a cassette or drum recorder automatically. With
many imagesetters, the RIP can also cut media, although this depends on the particular
device you are using.

340 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.3 Advancing and cutting media automatically

Figure 9.1 shows two possible schemes for advancing and cutting media automati-
cally. The RIP supports these schemes and many others.

Flow of exposed media

P2 P1 P3 P2 P1 P4 P3 P2 P1

Job 3 Job 2 Job 1

Advance and cut only between jobs

P2 P1 P3 P2 P1 P4 P3 P2 P1

Advance every page and cut between every 4 pages

Figure 9.2 Some options for handling output media automatically

Using the Media Manager, you can make the RIP perform media cuts and feeds auto-
matically, choosing when and how much media to feed through and when to cut.
You can also disable or re-enable all media management facilities as often as you
wish. (Navigator RIP output plugins designed for sheet-fed devices disable media
management on those devices automatically.) You will probably want to disable media
management when you share feed cassettes between different devices—this will pre-
vent the RIP issuing meaningless warnings about low media levels.
Display the Media Manager dialog box by choosing Media Manager from the Output
menu.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 341

 Media Management

Figure 9.3 shows the RIP Media Manager dialog box. This dialog box allows you to
configure and control media.

Figure 9.3 Media Manager dialog box

The RIP displays the name of the current device at the top of the dialog box, in the
Device drop-down list. All selections that you make in this dialog box apply to the dis-
played device (and to all cassettes that you use on this device). These selections are
not confirmed until you click OK.
You can select another device using the Device list, then set up different options for
managing media in the new device.
Click OK to confirm your media management choices for the device(s) that you have
edited. Click Cancel to abandon all changes made to media management (on any
device) in the current use of the Media Manager.

9.3.2 Enabling and disabling media management

In the Media Manager dialog box, there is a check box labeled Disable media manage-
ment.

• Select this box to turn off the automatic media management facilities for the
output device. If you turn off media management, there will be no current cas-
sette selected in the Cassette Manager (See “Setting up the monitoring system”
on page 346).

342 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.3 Advancing and cutting media automatically

• Leave the box clear to enable media management.

Note: After enabling or re-enabling media management, you must verify the contents
of each cassette used on that output device. For details, see “Setting up the monitoring
system” on page 346.

9.3.3 Cutting media

With media management enabled, you can choose when the RIP will make automatic
cuts.
Note: Any cut operation disables output, unless the output device is using an online
processor (developer). Typically, you will need to fit a new take-up cassette before re-
enabling the RIP outputs: the RIP displays a message to remind you of this.
You can choose from three different policies, available on the left of the Media Man-
ager, in the section labeled Cut. The three choices are:
• Cut the media after each job.
• Cut the media after a certain number of pages.
• Cut the media when (or slightly before) a certain length of it has been exposed.
To use any of these options, select the check box labeled appropriately and, if there is
a text box alongside the label, type a suitable value in that box.
If you choose a combination of conditions for a cut, the RIP will cut whenever any one
of those conditions becomes true, and will then reset all counts of length or pages.
To cut the media:

After every job printed

select the check box labeled after job. The RIP will automati-
cally cut the media after every job output on the current
device.

After a number of pages

select the check box labeled after pages and enter the num-
ber—which must be a whole number—in the adjacent text
box. The RIP will automatically cut the media after that num-
ber of pages has been printed.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 343

 Media Management

At a certain length
select the before length check box and specify a length in the
box. This length is the maximum that will be exposed. For
example, you might choose a length that is convenient to pro-
cess.
You can select the units you wish to use for length from the
Select units drop-down list in the bottom left of the Media
Manager. The options available are feet, inches, meters, and
centimeters.
Note: The RIP never cuts the media while part of the way through printing a page.
Where a cut at the exact length would fall within a page, the RIP performs the cut
before outputting the page. This occurs even if, for example, you specify a length of
12 inches and a page is 18 inches long.

9.3.4 Feeding media

The options on the right of the Media Manager let you specify when the RIP will feed
media automatically. There are three feed policies under Paper feed:
• Feed the media around each page.
• Feed the media between jobs.
• Feed the media before every cut.
See below for a fuller description of these policies and some of the possible reasons
for wanting extra media feeds in each of the specified situations. (The remaining
entries in this section of the dialog box describe characteristics of the output device.)
To use any of these options, type the feed length that you want in the text box along-
side the appropriate label. Type 0 (zero) into the text box if you do not want an auto-
matic feed.
You can choose which units to use for the lengths from the Select units drop-down list
above the OK button—the available units are feet, inches, meters, centimeters, picas,
and points.

344 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.3 Advancing and cutting media automatically

Some reasons, and the details, for each feed policy are as follows:

Around each page

Feed through some media around every page that is pro-
duced, perhaps so that you can perform cuts by hand more
easily. Half of this amount will be fed before the page and
half after it.

Between jobs Feed through some media after every job that has been pro-
cessed, perhaps to make it easier to see where one job ends
and the next starts.
Note: This feed after a job will not occur if there is a cut after
the last page of the job, caused by either of the cut after pages
or cut after job settings.

Before cut Feed through some media before making any cut, perhaps to
stop film near a cut being exposed to external light.
The RIP feeds the amount of media you specify here before
performing any of the automatic cuts described on page 343,
or a cut that you have requested by choosing Cut media with
feed from the Device menu. See also “Hardware feeds” on
page 352.

9.3.5 Interaction with other Navigator RIP options

The description just given of automatic cutting and feeding is accurate but there is also
a degree of interaction with the RIP options to use media as economically as possible.
These options either reorient pages or pack them together so that, for example, more
than one page is imaged side by side in the length of media that would otherwise be
used by one page.
The results are that the page length can vary or that the RIP treats several pages as one
unit (and that this unit is treated as a page by the media management software). This
may be unexpected but it should not cause any problems.
The relevant options occur in the Optimization and Enable Feature drop-down lists of
the Edit Page Setup dialog box. See “Advanced Media Saving” on page 156 and “Fea-
tures” on page 184 for a fuller description of these options.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 345

 Media Management

9.4 Monitoring media

When you start monitoring media, you must tell the RIP how much media is in each
cassette. Thereafter, the RIP maintains a record of how much media remains, and will
warn you when any cassette is running low.

9.4.1 Setting up the monitoring system

The RIP monitors the feed cassette providing the media, rather than the output device
used. This is because any one output device may take several different feed cassettes.
For instance, you may have an imagesetter that can produce output on either film or
paper, and you may keep two cassettes—one loaded with film and one loaded with
paper.
Note: If you have an output device that uses a roll feed, you can monitor its use of
media by treating it as a device with a permanently mounted cassette.
Before processing any jobs, you need to tell the RIP about the cassettes you are using
and give details of the media currently in each cassette. You do this from the Cassette
Manager dialog box. Click the Cassette Manager button in the Edit Page Setup dialog
box or choose Output > Cassette Manager to open the Cassette Manager dialog box, as
shown in Figure 9.4.

9.4.2 Cassette Manager and Edit Cassette dialog box

The main window of the Cassette Manager lists each available cassette, so that you
can see and compare the information relating to different cassettes.
A new installation of the Navigator RIP lists one cassette in the Cassette Manager.
You can add more cassettes at any time, and subsequently edit their information or
delete their entries using the Edit, New, Copy, and Delete buttons.

346 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.4 Monitoring media

There is a related Edit Cassette dialog box in which you can alter the information for a
particular cassette.

Figure 9.4 Cassette Manager dialog box

The information in the Cassette Manager also appears in the Edit Cassette dialog box:
each category is listed below.
There are two buttons which appear in the Cassette Manager only. Use these buttons
to tell the RIP when you have performed a manual operation. (On some output
devices, a manual operation may be the only option or it may be quicker than an oper-
ation driven by the RIP.)

Manual Cut Done

Click this button when you have cut the media in the current
device.

Manual Feed Done

Click this button when you have performed a manual feed of
media in the current device.
Before using one of these buttons, you must set up the amount of media used in the
corresponding manual operation. These quantities are labeled Manual feed length and
Manual cut length in the Media Manager. See “Hardware feeds” on page 352.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 347

 Media Management

To set up or change the details for a cassette, select the relevant cassette in the Cassette
Manager window and click the Edit button. Figure 9.5 shows the Edit Cassette dialog
box that appears, containing the details for the selected cassette.

Figure 9.5 Edit Cassette dialog box

The RIP displays the following values in both the Edit Cassette dialog box and the
Cassette Manager. You can only change these values from within the Edit Cassette
dialog box.
The RIP displays the information about a cassette in columns in the Cassette Manager
and in corresponding text boxes in the Edit Cassette dialog box.

Cassette name An identifying name. This name will be displayed on the Cas-
sette drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. The
name is purely for your own convenience—you can change it
to any name you like. Choose a name that allows you to iden-
tify the cassette and that suits your situation and your proce-
dures. You might find it helpful to attach a label with this
name (and the type of media) to the actual cassette.
For example, if you use two cassettes only on an Ultre image-
setter and only for specific types of media then you might
name these cassettes: UltreFilm1 and UltrePaper2. An alter-
native solution in the same situation might be Ultre1 and
Ultre2, with a separate record of the type of media. If you use
the same cassette to hold paper and use it for proofs on differ-
ent output devices then you might call it PaperProof.

348 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.4 Monitoring media

Note: The symbol > in front of the cassette name indicates

the cassette in use on the current or most recently used output
device.

Media type The type of media held in the selected cassette. It lets you tell
quickly whether, for instance, the cassette holds paper or
film. The field Cassette Name is purely for your own conve-
nience—you can change it to anything you like.
The entry No Media means that no one has yet specified a
type of media for the cassette.

Media width The width of the media in the selected cassette or drum
recorder. The RIP uses this value when calculating in which
orientation to print a page if you are using the Media Sav-
ing option in the Optimization menu. (See “Printing effects”
on page 169.)
You must set this value to the actual width of media that can
be printed on (the imageable width) because some output
devices cannot image right up to the edge of the media. If you
enter the total width of the media and the output device has a
smaller imageable width then some large pages are likely to
extend into the non-imageable area and those output pages
will be clipped or visually corrupted when the RIP attempts
Imageable to output them. The illustration to the left shows an example
width
of clipping where a page (the rectangle) is wider than the
imageable width (arrowed): only the area shown shaded is
imaged successfully.

Remaining length
The amount of media left inside the cassette. The RIP updates
this value whenever it advances or prints media. (The RIP
also tests the updated value against your choice of threshold
values so that it can warn you when the media is running
low.)
You must type in the length that you have loaded whenever
you refill a cassette with media.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 349

 Media Management

Number A unique number that the RIP uses to keep track of the cas-
sette. You can edit this number only when creating an entry
for a new cassette—the RIP suggests an unused number, but
you can use any other unused number.

Units The units used in the measurement fields in this dialog box.
Use this drop-down list to choose any convenient unit. The
RIP converts any figures already displayed to the units you
choose.)
Note: The unit of measurement that you choose here is also used to display media
usage in the Media Monitor window: see “Monitoring media” on page 346).

9.4.2.1 Closing the dialog boxes

You must close the Cassette Manager before you can use any tool bar buttons or menu
options in the Navigator RIP.
Click OK to confirm all the changes you have made in this use of the Edit Cassette
dialog box. This confirmation is provisional: you must also click OK in the Cassette
Manager to finally save your changes. The OK button saves the changes you have
made and closes the Cassette Manager. If you opened the Cassette Manager from the
Edit Page Setup dialog box, you can also save the changes by clicking the Select but-
ton. In addition to saving the changes, the Select button displays the selected cassette
in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. Click Cancel to discard all changes.
Note: If you open the Cassette Manager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, changes
that you make in the Cassette Manager are independent of the Edit Page Setup dialog
box. For example, if you create a cassette, and close the Edit Cassette and Cassette
Manager dialog boxes with OK or Select, the new style will remain even if you cancel
the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

9.4.3 Using media management

When using media management, you must select both the feed cassette to be used and
the output device, in the Edit Page Setup dialog box (as described in “Cassette man-
agement” on page 187). When printing a job, the RIP uses the cassette selected in the
saved page setup associated with the input source providing the job.

350 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.4 Monitoring media

When you perform a manual operation on the output device, use the Manual Cut Done
or Manual Feed Done buttons in the Cassette Manager dialog box.
When you refill a cassette, you must use the Edit Cassette dialog box to inform the
RIP how much media is now in the cassette.

9.4.4 Using media management with multiple setups

Sometimes you will need to process a job on a device that had previously used one
cassette and now must use another. This is quite likely to happen when using a number
of different page setups.
When a change of cassette is required, the RIP will warn you that the correct cassette
is not in the current device, and will halt printing until you have loaded it. This ensures
that you will never waste time or media by printing jobs on the wrong cassette.
If you are running the RIP in a Multiple mode, the warning will appear in the progress
box of the Output Controller. If you are running in a Single mode, it will appear in a
separate progress box on the screen.
Note: The RIP cannot tell which cassette is loaded on the output device, so it will
issue a warning even if you have changed to the correct cassette after the previous job
was produced.
Always inform the RIP when you physically change cassettes, by selecting a page
setup that uses the new cassette.

9.4.5 Low media warnings

The RIP can warn you when the amount of media in the current feed cassette is low
and before the media actually runs out. You can specify thresholds for up to three
warnings using the Media Manager.
In the section labeled Length warnings, type values into the First, Second, and Final text
boxes. The RIP sorts the three values so that the length for the first warning is greater
than for the second, which itself is made greater than the final threshold. All three
warnings appear in the Output Controller: they are Media low, Media very low, and
MEDIA VERY LOW.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 351

 Media Management

Choose the units used for these lengths from the Select units drop-down list immedi-
ately below the Length warnings text boxes—the options available are feet, inches,
meters, or centimeters.
Note: Once you have refilled a cassette, you must update its details in the Cassette
Manager if you want media management to continue to work correctly.

9.4.6 Hardware feeds

Some imagesetters automatically feed the media a certain amount before printing any
page or before performing a cut; and they also may have front panel buttons that trig-
ger these or similar actions. The RIP cannot override these hardware feeds but it can
record them and calculate their effects on the amount of media left in any input cas-
sette.
If you have an imagesetter that issues hardware feeds, and you use media manage-
ment, you must tell the RIP how much media is fed through when a hardware feed is
performed, so that it can take this into account.
This involves two stages: set up and routine use.
Perform the set up by selecting the output device in the Device drop-down list in the
Media Manager. The relevant options are on the right of the Media Manager:

Built in feed length

Type into this text box the amount of media that the output
device feeds when it receives a software feed request.
The Media Manager will add this amount to its record of the
amount of media consumed for every job processed, and
deduct it from the details of the relevant cassette. This is used
in addition to the around each page feed value.

Built in cut length

Type into this text box the amount of media that the output
device feeds before a cut triggered by software.
Whenever a cut is issued, the RIP will subtract this amount
from its record of the remaining length of media for the cur-
rent cassette. This is used in addition to the before cut feed
value.

352 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.4 Monitoring media

Manual feed length

Type into this text box the amount of media that the output
device feeds when a front panel button triggers a media feed.
The RIP adds this amount to its record of the amount of
media consumed, and deducts it from the details of the rele-
vant feed cassette.

Manual cut length

Type into this text box the amount of media that the current
output device feeds before a cut triggered by a front panel
button.
Whenever you inform the RIP that you have performed a cut,
the RIP subtracts this amount from its record of the remain-
ing length of media in the current cassette.
For these options, you can choose units from the Select units drop-down list at the bot-
tom of the dialog box. The units available are feet, inches, meters, centimeters, picas,
or points.
Note: The feed lengths for built-in and manual operation may be the same. If they are
the same, enter the same value in the two fields.
In routine use, there are two cases:
• The RIP takes account of the values you set up when calculating the effects of
any automatic operations and ones that you request from the Device menu. You
do not need to do anything extra.
• If you perform a manual operation by using controls on the output device, you
must inform the RIP. Display the Cassette Manager and click the button Manual
Cut Done or Manual Feed Done whenever you perform the corresponding
manual operation. See Figure 9.4, page 347, and the following description of
the buttons.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 353

 Media Management

9.4.7 Online developers or processors

If you are using an online developer with a particular output device, you must inform
the RIP so that it can handle that device correctly.
There is an obvious benefit to using an online developer because media that emerges
from the output device is fed directly to the developer, which produces the image
automatically. However, online developers need to be fed a certain amount of media
before they can develop any images—for example, a particular online developer may
require a minimum of two feet of media. If the RIP or an operator performs a cut
before the required amount of media has been exposed, then any images on the
exposed media will not be developed automatically, and there may be a media jam in
the developer. It is easy to avoid this problem.
To set up the RIP to drive an output device with an online developer, first make that
device current and display the Media Manager. Make these two settings:

Using online developer

Select this box to show that you are using an online devel-
oper.

Minimum length before cut

Enter in this text box the minimum length of media that the
online developer requires for processing.
You can choose the units for this length from the Select units
drop-down list immediately below. The units available are
feet, inches, meters, centimeters, picas, and points.
In routine use, you do not need to do anything extra. The RIP will make an automatic
cut only if there is sufficient exposed media to enable the online developer to work
effectively. If you need to force a cut, select Cut with feed from the Device menu. This
command feeds enough media to pad the output to the Minimum length before cut
value, and then performs a cut.
When using an online developer, the RIP does not issue warnings to change take-up
cassettes, and does not disable output after a cut.

354 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 9.4 Monitoring media

9.4.8 Monitoring your media

When you are using media management, the RIP can display information about media
usage on your computer screen and keep the information up to date as jobs are output.
Choose Media Monitor from the Output menu to display the information.
The information appears in the Media Monitor, shown in Figure 9.6. By default, when
in Multiple (Parallel) mode, the RIP displays both the Output Controller and the
Media Monitor.

Figure 9.6 Media Monitor window

The media information is presented in the following fields:

Name The name of the feed cassette.

A series of asterisks ( *** ) in this field shows that the current
output device has media management disabled.

Type The type of media in the feed cassette.

A series of asterisks ( *** ) in this field has the same meaning
as in the Name field. The entry No Film, No Media, or a
blank entry, means that no one has defined the type of media,
not that the cassette is empty.

Pages The number of pages exposed since the last cut was per-
formed.

Length The amount of media left in the current feed cassette.

This length is shown in the unit of measurement that you can
choose in the Units field in this dialog box.

Exposed The amount of media that has been exposed since a cut was
last performed. This is also the amount in the take-up cas-
sette.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 355

 Media Management

Units The units of measurement for figures in the Length and

Exposed fields. Choose any convenient unit from those listed.

356 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10

Simple Imposition

This chapter describes Simple Imposition the in-RIP imposition option provided with
the Navigator RIP 7.0 Release onwards.

10.1 What is Simple imposition?

Navigator RIP Simple imposition provides facilities to impose incoming pages using
some of the most common imposition layout schemes used for smaller format presses.
This is achieved by the selection of various options within an Imposition setup dialog.
You are able to create and save as many imposition configurations as you wish. In
addition to this, once an imposition configuration is created, you can apply that con-
figuration to any page setup by selecting it from a menu in the Edit page setup dialog.
When you have created an imposition setup you can use that setup as the basis for fur-
ther imposition setups.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 357

 Simple Imposition

10.2 Input file formats

The Navigator RIP can accept various file formats. Table 10.1 shows which input file
formats are compatible with, and can be used with, which imposition schemes:

Input file format Imposition schemes

PDF, TIFF, JPEG, EPS All schemes

PostScript Language files One-Up, single-sided

N-Up, single-sided

Table 10.1 File format compatibility

Note: Simple imposition is not compatible with jobs submitted through JDF.
Of all the schemes, only One-up, single-sided and N-up, single-sided may
be used when processing PostScript language files. PDF files may be submitted to any
scheme, and single page formats such as TIFF, EPS and JPEG may be submitted to
any scheme, but only really make sense for use with One-up, single-sided and
Step and repeat, single-sided schemes, because all others are intended to be
applied to multiple pages.

10.3 How to activate Simple imposition

To make use of the standard Simple imposition setups you do not need a password.
However, if you would like to create new and copy and edit existing setups, you must
enter a valid password in the Configure RIP > Extras dialog. For more information on
how to activate a password protected option see Section 7.8 on page 254.

10.4 The Imposition Manager

The Imposition Manager allows you to select, create, edit, copy and delete
imposition schemes. To display the Imposition Manager, click the Imposi-

358 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.4 The Imposition Manager

tion Manager icon from the toolbar or the Page setup dialog, or select Output >
Imposition Manager.

Figure 10.1 The Imposition Manager dialog box

Note: The Imposition Manager dialog contains listings when it first appears. The set-
ups within brackets are those supplied as standard. These setups derived from Page
features used in pre v7.0 Release RIPs, and have names that reflect their intended use.
These options cannot be copied and changed or new setups created unless you have
activated Simple Imposition with a password. Imposition schemes are selected from
the Page setup dialog.
Please note that the imposition setups provided as standard cannot be edited. You may
however, use the Copy option to create a duplicate setup which you can then change to
suit your requirements.
The following options are available from the Imposition Manager dialog box:

Units Before creating any imposition setups you should choose

your preferred units. All imposition setups use the same
units, and any existing imposition setups will convert any
values to the currently selected units.

Edit Select an existing imposition setup and click Edit to change

the imposition settings. When you have finished editing the
setup, click OK to save your changes. Please note that the
supplied imposition schemes cannot be edited, they can how-
ever be copied to a new name and then edited.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 359

 Simple Imposition

New Click New to create a new imposition setup. In the Imposition

setup dialog choose your imposition options and then click
Save as. Enter a unique name for your setup followed by
selecting Save.

Copy This option allows you to copy an existing setup or use an

existing setup as the base for a new setup. Select an existing
imposition setup and click Copy. In the Imposition Setup dia-
log make any changes to the setup and then click Save as.
Enter a new name followed by clicking Save.

Delete Select an existing setup and click Delete to remove it from the
Imposition Manager. If a Page setup is using an imposition
setup that is selected for deletion, it will not be removed, and
a message will appear stating this. To remove an imposition
setup the setup must not be used by any Page setup.

Select If you have accessed the Imposition Manager from the Edit
Page setup dialog you can highlight one of the existing Impo-
sition setups, and click Select. This will apply the selected
imposition to the current page setup configuration.

10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

This section describes how to use Simple imposition. Before choosing your imposi-
tion scheme you should consider:
• The binding method. The common options are:
• Perfect binding as used for most books. The pages are collated then cut and
glued together with a spine.
• Saddle-Stitching as used for newspapers and magazines. The pages are sta-
pled together along the center-fold. (The front page is printed next to the
back page.)
• Cut and stack. The printed pages are trimmed to the correct size, collated
and then bound.
• The size of the printing surface (raster).

360 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

• Whether the reverse side of the surface can be printed. and how the page is
turned on he printing device.
• How the job is folded or cut.
The New/Edit Imposition setup dialog is used to configure the imposition setups. You
can access this dialog through the Imposition Manager.

Figure 10.2 Simple imposition setup dialog

Note: The imposition setup graphic shown above is configured to show most options
as active.
The following sections describe the various options within the imposition setup dia-
log.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 361

 Simple Imposition

10.5.1 Scheme
Choosing the correct scheme is important as its selection determines which of the
other options in the imposition setup dialog are available. The following imposition
schemes are available:

Scheme Name Description

One-up, single-sided Single-sided, one page per surface.

One-up, two-sided Two-sided, one page per surface.

N-up, single-sided Each surface of this single-sided layout contains a grid of

pages, all at the same orientation. This can be used for laser
printer N-up printing, and for media saving. The number of
pages in the grid can be set manually, or can be calculated
automatically for best fit.
In conventional print, it can also be used for two-sided printing
using either Work & Turn or Work & Tumble (depending on
plate orientation in the press) for two-up surfaces that will be
cut to produce single-surface, unbound jobs.

N-up, two-sided Each surface of this double-sided layout contains a grid of

pages. It is intended mainly for laser printing, and for the
media saving of unbound jobs in conventional printing.
Note that neither of the N-up schemes provide support for gen-
eralized conventional imposition; they all take pages in reader
order from the supplied content file, rather than taking pages
out-of order as is required for perfect binding, etc.

Step and repeat, single-sided Single-sided, multiple copies of the same page are imposed in
a grid.

Step and repeat, two-sided Two-sided, multiple copies of the same page are imposed in a
grid. This differs from the single-sided variant principally in
allowing different surface margins, slug lines, and so on, or the
front and back of the surface.

Saddle-stitched, left bound Two-up Saddle-stitched production. Surfaces are gathered after
printing, then folded and trimmed to produce booklets. This
variant is for booklets bound on the left, the most common
form for Latin text.
For an example see Section 10.6.1 on page 374.

Saddle-stitched, right bound Saddle-stitch variant bound on the right, for use with right-to-
left scripts such as Arabic and Hebrew. This scheme is also
appropriate for use with Japanese text (even though that is not
written right to left).

Table 10.2 Simple imposition schemes

362 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

Scheme Name Description

Saddle-stitched, top bound A Saddle-stitch variant bound at the top, and designed for use in
items such as calendars, which are hung so you can see two
pages at a time.
For an example see Section 10.6.4 on page 377.

Saddle-stitched, top bound B Top-bound saddle-stitched variant that will be hung (if a calen-
dar) by the binding edge, and where page 2 is on the reverse of
page 1.
For an example see Section 10.6.5 on page 378

Saddle-stitched, top bound C Top-bound saddle-stitched variant that will be hung (if a calen-
dar) by the binding edge, and where page 2 is on the front of
the second surface.
For an example see Section 10.6.6 on page 379.

Saddle-stitched x2, left bound As Saddle-stitched, left bound, but with two copies of the same
job placed side by side.

Saddle-stitched x2, right bound As Saddle-stitched, right bound, but with two copies of the
same job placed side by side.

Saddle-stitched x2, top bound A As Saddle-stitched, top bound A, but with two copies of the
same job placed side by side.

Saddle-stitched x2, top bound B As Saddle-stitched, top bound B, but with two copies of the
same job placed side by side.

Saddle-stitched x2, top bound C As Saddle-stitched, top bound C, but with two copies of the
same job placed side by side.

Cut and stack, single-sided Single-sided, multi-up imposition for jobs that will be bound
with wire, comb binders and so on, and therefore will be
trimmed to single pages. Once printed and stacked, each set of
surfaces will be cut, and stacked on top of the other to give a
full set of pages in order.

Cut and stack, two-sided As Cut and stack, single-sided, but for two-sided work.
For an example see Section 10.6.2 on page 375.

Table 10.2 Simple imposition schemes

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 363

 Simple Imposition

10.5.2 Surface
The Surface options define the size of the raster to be created, that is, the maximum
size, outside of which nothing will be printed. The following options are available:

Size The size options are:

From media: (the default option) where the size of the out-
put is taken from the size of the media loaded. This of course
depends on the device and type of media. See the Table 10.3
below for more details.
From job: where the size of the output is taken from the size
of the incoming job (plus any margins).
Custom: where the size of the output is defined in the Width
and Height fields.
Note: All imposition schemes are constructed on the assump-
tion that the image width > height. If the image height >
width, the whole layout is rotated.

Device Width Height

Capstan (including When there is a media selection Height is taken from the job. For
roll-fed proofers) on the Page Setup Layout dialog, N-Up and Step & Repeat with
the width is taken from that, oth- automatic page counts, only one
erwise it is taken from the cassette row will ever be produced.
width.

Drum As Sheet (below) As Sheet (below)

Partial drum Width is taken from the job. For The height is taken from the cas-
N-Up and Step & Repeat with sette width.
automatic page counts, only one
column will ever be produced.

Sheet When there is a media selection When there is a media selection

on the Page Layout dialog, the on the Page Layout dialog, the
width is taken from that, other- height is taken from that, other-
wise it is taken from the default wise it is taken from the default
Page size option on the Page Page size option on the Page
Layout dialog. Layout dialog.

Table 10.3 Width and height definition when using From Media option

364 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

Device Width Height

Unlimited devices Width is taken from the default Height is taken from the default
including TIFF Page size option on the Page Page size option on the Page
Layout dialog. Layout dialog.

Table 10.3 Width and height definition when using From Media option

Flip on This option is only available with two-sided imposition

schemes, and allows the surface to be flipped on either its
Long edge or Short edge.
When used for conventional printing, select the option that
matches how the paper lifts are turned for the second side to
be printed, or how each sheet is turned automatically in a per-
fecting press. When used for driving a digital printer, select
the option that matches the duplex capability of the printer
for the paper size to be used.
The selection of Long edge is where the first surface is printed,
and the media is then flipped from top to bottom. The top and
bottom are switched, and the right and left edges remain in the
same position for both surfaces.

The selection of Short edge is where the first surface is

printed, and the media is then turned from side to side. The right
and left edges are switched, and the top and bottom remain in
the same position for both surfaces.

10.5.2.1 Work & Turn, Work & Tumble, and Per-

fecting
Work & Turn, Work & Tumble, and Perfecting are common imposition schemes.
A Work & Turn imposition scheme uses a single plate to print on both sides of the
paper. When the first side of the sheet is printed, the paper is then flipped over from
side-to-side and fed through the press again. The top and bottom remains in the same
position for both sides, that is the top of the first side remains as the is the top for the
second side

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 365

 Simple Imposition

A Work & Tumble imposition scheme again uses a single plate to print on both sides
of the paper. When the first side of the sheet is printed, the paper is “tumbled”, that is,
the top of the first side becomes the bottom of the second side. The left and right edges
of the sheet remain in the same position for both sides.
Perfecting is when you can print on both sides of the sheet in one pass through the
machine.
These imposition schemes can be achieved using Simple imposition. It does however
depend on which edge of the sheet is fed into your printer.
If your press is fed with the short edge first and you have Long edge configured as
the Flip on setting, you are in effect, using a Work & Turn scheme.
If your press is fed with the short edge first and you have Short edge configured as
the Flip on setting, you are in effect, using a Work & Tumble scheme. This method can
be utilized for a Perfecting press configuration.
If your press is fed with the long edge first and you have Short edge configured as
the Flip on setting, you are in effect, using a Work & Turn scheme.
If your press is fed with the long edge first and you have Long edge configured as
the Flip on setting, you are in effect, using a Work & Tumble layout. This method can
be utilized for a Perfecting press configuration.

10.5.3 Pages
These options define the settings that affect individual pages within a layout. The fol-
lowing options are available:

Layout of pages N-up, Step and repeat, and Cut and stack page schemes can
use an Automatic or Custom layout of pages. When Auto-
matic is selected the number of pages on a surface is calcu-
lated automatically.
You can specify the number of pages on each surface using
the Custom option. You define the number of page columns
by entering a value in the Across field. You define the number
of page rows by entering a value in the Up field.

366 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

To define the order in which pages fill the layout use the Page
fill order option, see Section 10.5.5 on page 369 for more
information.

Rotate The rotate options define whether pages within a layout can
be rotated. The Best Fit option will rotate pages as needed
so that they fit the layout.
This option defines how individual pages are rotated within
the page grid. The whole grid (and its accompanying annota-
tions) can be rotated using the Rotate options from the Page
Setup dialog.

Bleed The value in this field is added to the overall page size.
The value entered here will not affect page positioning in any
way, but if there is any graphical content on the page that
extends off the page, this much of it will be printed.
If the bleed value extends more than halfway across a gutter,
the content is trimmed at the gutter centre.

If pages don’t fit If the group of pages do not fit within the surface size, you
have the following options:
Abort job, Trim at top and right, Trim all
sides, and Scale to fit.

Page padding If the number of pages in the job do not fit exactly on to the
specified surfaces. The option are:
Abort job if pages don’t fill surfaces which
will cause a warning to be issued and no output will be pro-
duced.
Add blank pages after last page and Add blank
pages before last page which will add blank pages as
specified.
Add blank pages before cover which will add blank
pages before the next to last page (that is, before the back
cover of a two-sided job).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 367

 Simple Imposition

The affect of the Split before end option, available for

two-sided Cut and stack schemes, depends on the number of
blank pages. If one blank page, the result will be the same as
Add blank pages before the last page. If two
blank pages the result will be the same as Add blank
pages after the last page. If three blank pages, one
blank page will be added before the last page, and two after
it.
The Split before cover option is only available for
two-sided Cut and stack schemes. This will be the same as
Add blank pages before the last page, but will
insert pages before the last-but-one page as necessary.
These options lead to a booklet containing an even number of
pages, with the last page of the content files on the outside of
the back cover, and then a number of blank sheets behind the
booklet after cutting and stacking.

10.5.4 Gutter
The gutter is the space between pages on a layout. The options in this section define
the size of the gutter. The following options are available:

Vertical gutter/Horizontal gutter

The value in these option define the optimum horizontal and
vertical gutter. If there is sufficient space within the layout
these values are used. If there is not enough space, the gutter
is size reduced as necessary, but to a value not less than the
value specified in the Minimum field.
Note: The vertical gutter runs vertically, from top to bottom.

Creep Creep occurs on saddle-stitched bindings where the inside

pages extend beyond the image area of the outside pages.
This option compensates for this effect, and specifies the
amount to be removed from the gutter (often called shin-
gling).

Creep Style The following Creep Styles are available:

368 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

Push out: means that the inner-most surface uses the set
gutter value, and every outside surface has a larger gutter
increased by the Creep value.
Pull in: means that the outside surface has the set gutter
value, and each inside surface has a gutter size decreasing by
the Creep value, until the minimum gutter size is reached, at
which point the gutter will stay at the minimum size for all
remaining surfaces.
Center line: means that the middle surface in the stack
has the set gutter value, those inside it will have smaller gut-
ters and those outside it will have larger gutters.

10.5.5 Front and back options

These options define the way in which the layouts are filled with pages, and allow the
specification of various page furniture items such as annotations, registration marks
and crop marks. For two sided schemes you have the option to define the front pages,
and then, by leaving the Use front options for back option selected, you can use those
same values for the back pages. Alternatively, you can de-select the Use front options
for back option and define the back pages separately.

If you wish, you may change the current units used by imposition. Changing this
option will convert all existing values in this and any other imposition setups.
On selection of either Front options or Back options the following dialog will appear:
Note: The left, right, top and bottom are all relative to the design orientation of the
imposition scheme, which assume that the image width is greater that the image

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 369

 Simple Imposition

height. If this is not the case, or if the surface has been rotated using the Page setup
Rotate option, the orientation is likely to be affected.

Figure 10.3 Front and Back imposition options

Page fill order The page fill order options define how pages will fill the lay-
out, and are all described such that the first half of the name
describes the “fast scan” axis and direction, and the second
half describes the “slow scan” axis and direction. Please note
that the example graphic shows how a 2 x 2 layout would be
numbered.

10.5.5.1 Spacing for marks and registration

The top, bottom, left and right options define the size of the borders into which control
strips and/or slug lines will be placed. The margins must therefore be large enough to

370 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

accommodate the selected items. Do not confuse the Spacing for marks with the mar-
gins specified in the Page Layout dialog which may be used to position the raster pro-
duced by the RIP on the printing plate or output media.

Center page grid horizontally/Center page grid vertically

The horizontal and vertical centering options centers the page
grid after the top, bottom, left and right borders are allocated.
It does not center the page grid on the raster.

10.5.5.2 Marks
These options allow you to define which marks you want placed onto your imposition
layout.

Crop Marks You can make a selection from the various crop marks pro-
vided. Crop marks are drawn around every page on the lay-
out.
None: no crop marks are used.
Small: small trim marks are placed on the layout.
Full: large trim marks, separation names, step wedges and
color bars are placed on the layout.
PDF page boxes: trim marks are placed to show the loca-
tions of all PDF pages boxes. For file formats other than PDF
this option is the same as Small.

Registration Marks
Select the required option to place registration marks on the
selected surface:
None: no registration marks are placed on the layout.
Desired: registration marks are placed on the layout if
space is available. If space is not available a warning is gen-
erated.
Required: registration marks are placed on the layout. If
space for those marks is not available the job is aborted.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 371

 Simple Imposition

Fold and/or cut marks

Select this option to place fold or cut marks in all the appro-
priate gutters on the layout.

Page border Select this option to draw a page border around every page on
the selected surface.

10.5.5.3 Annotations
The Annotations section of the imposition dialog allows you to add slug line text,
color bars and proofing strips. You can, using this option, add just about anything
extra you wish to your imposition layout.
You can if you wish use your own custom annotation files. This is done by using the
Install Annotation page feature which, when activated via the Page setup dia-
log, allows you to print an EPS file (EPS only), to install that file as a new annotation.
To install your own custom annotation:
1. Create a page setup (not using Simple Imposition) and select the Install
Annotation page feature. For more information on using page features see
Section 5.21 on page 184.
2. Print the Annotation (EPS) file using this page setup. A message will appear
indicating that the annotation is being installed.
3. Go back to the page setup using Simple Imposition. You can now select and use
the custom Annotation in your Simple Imposition setup. See below for informa-
tion on how to add an annotation to the imposition layout.
When used as an annotation the EPS file will be repeated along the length of the
selected raster edge as many times as it will fit.
Note: If the custom annotation does not fit, there will be no error message.
To add an annotation to the imposition layout:
1. Click New.
Note: An annotation will appear in the list. Do not attempt to delete this. Go
straight to step 2.
2. Select your required annotation file from the Edit selected row drop-down list.
For example, select PlateText to add slug line information.

372 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.5 Configuring Simple imposition

3. Select where on the layout you want to add the annotation by choosing either,
Top, Bottom, Left or Right from the Edit selected row drop-down list.

4. Click New to add further annotations. You can add as many annotation files as
you wish, but you must ensure your layout has enough room to accommodate
them.
The annotations are printed in the order in which they appear in the list, and you can
change that order by dragging and dropping them. If two annotations are placed on the
same edge of the layout, the first one will be on the edge of the layout, and the second
will be moved inwards by the size of the first. Similarly, if an annotation has already
been drawn on the left of the layout, a second annotation on the bottom edge will leave
room at one end for the first annotation.
You can edit the any annotation in the list by selecting it and then choosing the
required options from the Edit selected row drop-down menus.
You can remove any annotation file from the list by selecting and clicking the Delete
button.
When you have completed the front and back options select OK to save them. Select-
ing Cancel will abort any change you have made. Similarly, when you have completed
all your imposition configuration options select OK to save your changes.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 373

 Simple Imposition

10.6 Example impositions

This section provides same example impositions showing how the pages for each sur-
face are laid out along with the final results.

10.6.1 Saddle-stitched, left bound—16 page booklet

The plates for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion:
Front surface

16 1 14 3 12 5 10 7

15 2 13 4 11 6 9 8

Back surface

Figure 10.4 Saddle-stitched, left bound layout

Note: This imposition uses Flip on configured to Long edge.

The resulting saddle-stitched booklet will look like this:

9
11 7
13
15 5
3
1
Red numbers denote unsighted pages

Figure 10.5 Saddle-stitched, left bound result

374 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.6 Example impositions

10.6.2 Cut and stack, two-sided—12 page, A4, ring bound

The plates for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion:

Front
Surface 1 7 3 9 5 11

Back 2 8 4 10 6 12
Surface

Figure 10.6 Cut and stack, two-sided layout

Note: This example shows a 12-page job and uses Flip on configured to Long edge.
The resulting sheets before cutting and the stack after cutting are shown below:

Sheets before cutting Pages after stacking

2 1 8 7 2 1

4 3
4 3 10 9
6 5
6 5 12 11
8 7
10 9
Blue numbers denote the reverse side
12 11

Figure 10.7 Cut and stack, two-sided sheets and stack

The final pages are suitable for hole punching and then ring or wire binding.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 375

 Simple Imposition

10.6.3 Saddle-stitched, x2 left bound—8 page A5 on B4

The plates for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion.

8
8

7
1

2
2
6
6

5
3

4
4
Front surface Back surface

Figure 10.8 Saddle-stitched, x2 left bound layout

Note: This imposition uses Flip on configured to Short edge.

The two resulting saddle-stitched booklets will look like this:

5 5
7 7
3 3
1 1

Red numbers denote unsighted pages

Figure 10.9 Saddle-stitched, x2 left bound result

376 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.6 Example impositions

10.6.4 Saddle-stitched, Top bound A, 8 page booklet

The pages for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion:

Front
1

6
8
surface

Back
2

5
surface

Figure 10.10 Saddle-stitched, Top bound A layout

Note: This imposition uses Flip on configured to Long edge. Also, page 8 is a special
case.
The resulting saddle-stitched booklet will look like this:

7
1 2
4

5
5 7
3

Red numbers denote unsighted pages

Figure 10.11 Saddle-stitched, Top bound A result

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 377

 Simple Imposition

10.6.5 Saddle-stitched, Top bound B, 8 page booklet

The pages for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion:

6
1

3
8
Front
surface

5
2

4
Back
surface

Figure 10.12 Saddle-stitched, Top bound B layout

Note: This imposition uses Flip on configured to Long edge.

The resulting saddle-stitched booklet will look like this:

7
1 4 2

5
5 7
3

Red numbers denote unsighted pages

Figure 10.13 Saddle-stitched, Top bound B result

378 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 10.6 Example impositions

10.6.6 Saddle-stitched, Top bound C, 12 page calendar

The pages for this imposition will be laid out in the following fashion:

12
7

6
11
8

5
10
9

Front surface Back surface

Figure 10.14 Saddle-stitched, Top bound C layout

Note: This imposition uses Flip on configured to Short edge.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 379

 Simple Imposition

The resulting saddle-stitched calendar will look like this:

12
11

10
6
1

5 6
2

4
3

Figure 10.15 Saddle-stitched, Top bound C result

380 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11

JDF-Enabled RIP

This chapter provides information for the JDF Enabler supplied with the Navigator
RIPNavigator RIP. If you intend to make use of this feature you should consult the
®
JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide which provides full and
detailed information.
Information is provided in this chapter of the facilities open to a user, whereas the JDF
®
Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide provides Administrator and
System configuration information.
From the Genesis Release of the RIP the JDF Enabler is supplied as standard, and can
be installed from its own, separately provided CD. You do however, require a permit
which can be obtained from your supplier.

11.1 System description

The JDF Enabler is an application that understands the JDF data format and its associ-
ated transmission protocols. It can analyze incoming JDF jobs, and determine which
parts of those jobs can be executed. The JDF Enabler then converts relevant portions
of the JDF data into formats that can be directly understood by other Global Graphics
products, such as the Navigator RIP. The JDF Enabler makes extensive use of SOAR
(Scalable Open Architecture RIP) technology to drive those products, instructing them
to execute the work required by each JDF job ticket, and monitoring their progress.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 381

 JDF-Enabled RIP

The JDF Enabler is built from a combination of SOAR components, but it runs as a
single additional process called JDFServices. This release of the JDF Enabler
installs as an add-on for the Navigator RIP, and works in partnership with it to form a
fully JDF-compliant RIP device.
JDF support to the Navigator RIP allows the RIP to be used as a component of a larger
workflow based on open systems principles and using products from multiple ven-
dors.
The JDF Enabler is aimed at providing JDF support for commercial print environ-
ments using conventional printing presses and digital proofing devices.
This version provides:
• JDF support as an extra add-on for the Navigator RIP. It is separately protected
by a permit file which can be obtained from your supplier.
• Basic JDF support for the Navigator RIP to enable the quick deployment of
workflow solutions using JDF.
• The foundation for later, extensible JDF support, enabling JDF processes to be
added to those already supported and also to provide JDF technology to core
technology customers.

11.1.1 The web UI and the JDF Enabler

The web UI is a way of monitoring and controlling the JDF Enabler. There is no
requirement for the web UI windows to be open for job processing to occur. There-
fore, when your JDF Enabler services are running, you may close the web UI. Job pro-
cessing will continue as normal. When you decide to re-display the web UI, you are
able to view any messages that may have been generated in the Alarm/Event logs. See
®
the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide for more information.

11.1.2 Input to the JDF Enabler

The JDF Enabler is fully compliant with the JDF standard, and can therefore converse
directly with JDF Controllers supplied by other vendors. As required by the specifica-
tion, the JDF Enabler can receive JDF jobs in two ways; via a hot folder, into which
JDF files are delivered, or via a JMF SubmitQueueEntry command. Because the
route through which a JDF job arrives makes very little difference to how it is pro-
cessed, these two methods of input are combined to form a JDF Input Channel. The

382 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.2 Installation of the JDF Enabler

JDF Enabler supports multiple channels, allowing jobs coming from different sources
to be processed in different ways.
The hot folder for each Input Channel is nominated by the user when the channel is
created. This hot folder name is then provided to the third-party Controller. Addition-
ally, the JDF Enabler will automatically generate an http URL, which is also pro-
vided to the Controller if jobs are to be delivered via JMF command.

11.2 Installation of the JDF Enabler

For the Navigator RIP JDF Enabler to work you must have a valid permit. For infor-
mation about how to get a permit file contact your supplier.
Before installing the JDF Enabler you should quit any other open applications.
1. When the Navigator RIP is fully installed, start the RIP in the normal way.
2. Create a new page setup using any device other than the Preview device. Pref-
erably use the output device that you intend to use.
3. Stop the RIP and make sure it is shutdown.
4. Locate the JDF installer on the CD.
Note: The JDF Enabler is supplied on a different and separate CD from the CD
which contains the Navigator RIP.
On Windows run install.exe.
When you have started the installation it is recommended that you do not make
any other selections, switch tasks, or use any other applications.
5. Select a location for the installation of the JDF Enabler services. The default
location is within the Program Files folder.
6. During the install procedure you are prompted to locate the Navigator RIP
executable.
Use the displayed dialog to locate the Navigator RIP executable you wish to
associate with the JDF Enabler.
On Windows an example location for the Navigator RIP executable is:

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 383

 JDF-Enabled RIP

<installation dir>/HarlequinRIP/HARLQN_LS.exe

This dialog also allows you to choose whether the Navigator RIP Classic User
Interface (UI) is displayed when you start the JDF Enabler Services. If the UI is
displayed you are able to make changes to the RIP configuration. If you would
prefer the UI not to be displayed, uncheck the Show Classic UI option.
7. When you select a valid RIP executable, a message appears displaying the path.
8. Click OK to remove the message.
9. A JDF Enabler settings dialog will appear. If you do not want your browser to
automatically start-up when you start the JDF Enabler, de-select the Start Moni-
tor in Web Browser at Start-up option.

10. Enter the Port number for your web browser followed by clicking OK to remove
the dialog.
11. A message stating that a configuration file has been written will appear. Click
OK to remove the message.

12. When the installation is complete another message appears. Click OK again to
remove the “complete” message.
The JDF Enabler is installed.
Note: If the installation appears to have stalled, you should check that it is not waiting
for a response, such as selecting the Navigator RIP executable. This may happen if
you use your machine for other purposes while the installer is running.
Note: If you are re-installing the JDF Enabler in the same location as a previous instal-
lation, you will see the following message:
Modifications complete. Note that existing state may be invalid.
Consider resetting to factory defaults

This occurs because the networking_choice.txt file is being overwritten when

the installer runs the SOAR Control application.
When the message appears, either click the OK button or wait a few seconds and the
message will disappear.

384 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.3 Starting the JDF Enabler

11.2.1 Uninstalling the JDF Enabler

The removal of the JDF Enabler application from your machine is not an automatic
process; you must manually delete any installed files and Start Menu shortcuts, and so
on.

11.3 Starting the JDF Enabler

This section describes how to start and stop the JDF Enabler and the web UI.
It is important to note that when you start and stop the JDF services, the Navigator
RIP, which you associated with the JDF Enabler, is also started and stopped. There-
fore, please ensure the Navigator RIP is not running when starting the JDF Enabler.
If the Harlequin License Server service is stopped, it will be automatically started
when the JDF Enabler is started. For more information, see the Navigator RIP Instal-
lation Guide for your platform or the Harlequin License Server documentation.
Depending on your choice during installation, you may or may not be able to interact
with the Navigator RIP user interface.
If the Navigator RIP Classic UI is not displayed, and you wish to alter RIP configura-
tions, you must stop the JDF services and then start and use the Navigator RIP in the
normal way.
1. Start the JDF Enabler:
Select Start > Programs > Global Graphics > JDF Enabler for the Navigator RIP >
Start JDF Enabler.

If you have decided not to display the Navigator RIP Classic UI you may pro-
ceed to the next step when a RIP icon appears (without a red cross).
If you have decided to display the Navigator RIP Classic UI, it will appear in
the normal way. You can click OK to remove the About window. Alternatively,
it will disappear after a few seconds.
A ***JDF Enabler Activated*** message will appear in the RIP monitor.
2. If you decided to automatically start the browser when starting up the JDF
Enabler, the browser configured as the default in the operating system will start-
up.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 385

 JDF-Enabled RIP

3. If no logins or passwords have been configured, the default login screen

appears. You can select your required login by clicking the appropriate button.
When you login as admin you are able to create and delete channels:

Figure 11.1 Default login icons

Note: These instructions are for using the default logins and passwords. You
should change the logins and passwords to suit your working environment. This
is done by creating a realm.properties file as described in the JDF Enabler
®
for the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide.
4. If user logins and passwords have been created, you should select your user
login icon. A display similar to the following will appear:

Figure 11.2 User login

5. Enter your login and password followed by clicking the green arrow icon. If you
key-in a wrong password a “try again” message will appear. Clicking the log out
icon will return you to the initial login screen.
At this point the JDF Enabler graphical user interface will appear.
Note: If you are experiencing shutdown immediately after start-up, you should look in
the logger.log file for an explanation. The log messages will provide information
®
to help diagnose the problem. See the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and

386 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.3 Starting the JDF Enabler

System Guide for more information. Errors in any Configuration file will cause the
system to shutdown.
Note: When the JDF Enabler is installed you are provided with an option to select
whether the RIP GUI is on or off. That is, whether or not the Navigator RIP displays
windows and dialogs. If you would like to change this setting after install time, you
can either use the SOAR control ripExec option, or edit the harlequinrip.txt
®
file. For more information see JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System
Guide).
Note: If at any point you are unsure whether the browser is showing the correct infor-
mation, use the browser’s Refresh option or press F5. If a refresh does not rectify the
problem, open a new browser window.
If you decided during the install procedure not to display your browser window, or if it
is closed while the JDF Enabler is still running, you can re-display the JDF Enabler
web UI by opening a new browser window and using the following URLs:
http://localhost:8080/soar/index.html

or:
http://<YOURHOSTNAME>:8080/soar/index.html

where 8080 is a typical port number used for your browser. This number could be
something else, for example: 80, 8008 or 8080.
Note: For the URLs to work any pop-up blocker options should be disabled. See
below for more details.
The port number and context are configured in the WebGUIpart config file (called by
default jdfenabler.txt). This file can be changed by directly editing the config
file or by using the SOAR control jdfweb command.
The HTTP context for the web server defaults to /soar. but you can use just / if you
wish.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 387

 JDF-Enabled RIP

11.3.1 Stopping the JDF Enabler

To stop the JDF Enabler services:
Select Start > Programs > Global Graphics > JDF Enabler for the Navigator RIP >
Services > Stop Services. Alternatively, you can right-click on the Harlequin logo
in the System Tray and select Quit.
After a few moments the following message appears:
Shutdown request successful on localhost

You can click OK to remove the message. Alternatively, leave it for a few seconds and
the message will disappear.
When you stop the JDF Enabler, the web UI status window will continue to refresh.
Once the RIP is shutdown the web UI will display the message:
The page cannot be displayed

If you decide to restart the JDF Enabler, once the Navigator RIP icon appears in the
system tray (without a red cross), you can simply refresh the web UI and the login
prompt will re-appear.

11.3.2 Pop-up blocking programs

If any of the popular pop-up advert blocking programs are activated, including the
default option on WinXP SP2, or most firewalls in their default configuration, they
will view the JDF Enabler as unwanted material, and kill it off.
Pop-up blocking utilities are designed to prevent web applications from popping up
new browser windows.The JDF web UI contains a small number of pop-ups, includ-
ing the directory browser and job details pages. These pages may be adversely
affected by pop-up killer utilities. Most pop-up killer software can be configured to
allow pop-ups from certain sites/applications.
It is recommended that pop-up blocking software be disabled on the browser or it
should be configured to allow pop-ups from the JDF Enabler.
For more information on pop-up blocking on WinXP SP2, please consult Harlequin
technote HQN 063.
Some browsers, such as Internet Explorer, have a toolbar Enable Pop-Up Blocker option
which should not be selected

388 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.4 JDF Enabler configuration

11.4 JDF Enabler configuration

The configuration of the JDF Enabler is a task that can only be performed by a user
with Administrator privileges. For more information see the JDF Enabler for the Har-
®
lequin RIP User and System Guide.

11.5 Using the JDF-Enabled RIP

When the JDF-Enabled RIP is installed and configured, and you are ready to start
using it to process JDF files, you should first familiarize yourself with the most useful
views and controls.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 389

 JDF-Enabled RIP

11.5.1 The Monitor screen

The Monitor screen is the most useful view of the system and provides important job
and process information. If the Monitor screen is not displayed select the Monitor tab:

Figure 11.3 Monitor Screen

This section describes all the various components of the Monitor screen:

11.5.1.1 Status (JDF Enabler workflow)

The Status section at the top right-hand side of the Monitor
screen displays the current status of the JDF Enabler workflow.
The Red and Green buttons start and stop the JDF Enabler workflow.

390 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.5 Using the JDF-Enabled RIP

Available When the JDF Enabler workflow is available, incoming jobs

will be XML-parsed and assigned and then subsequently sub-
mitted to the RIP.

Stopped When the JDF Enabler workflow is stopped, new jobs will be
XML-parsed and assigned, but not submitted to the RIP.
They will build up in the input queue.

Refreshing... When this is displayed the web UI screen is refreshing.

NO-RIP This is displayed when a RIP is not available.

Ripping This is displayed when the RIP is processing a file.

11.5.1.2 RIP monitor

The Red/Green light on the monitor page indicates whether
the RIP process is responding to the JDF Enabler workflow. When the light is red, the
JDF Enabler workflow status is always NO-RIP.
The blue animation indicates whether the RIP is currently processing a file.
For more information on RIP progress you can select the information icon sit-
uated to the right of the RIP monitor. This will display the RIP Progress
Details dialog:

Figure 11.4 RIP Progress Details dialog

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 391

 JDF-Enabled RIP

You can control what appears in the Activity and Progress sections of this screen in
two ways; by changing the RIP progress configuration, which appears when you click
the Go to Configure button; or by using the SOAR control joblogger -progress
®
commands. See the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide for
more information.

11.5.1.3 Refresh
The Refresh button will refresh the web UI display and update all fields with
the latest information from the server.
If your web UI appears incorrect or is not displaying the information you would
expect to see, use the Refresh option. If this does not rectify the problem, try opening a
new browser window.

11.5.1.4 Log out

The Log out option allows you to log out of the web UI. It presents you with
the initial login screen allowing you to log back into the web UI as a different
user or at a different user level.

392 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.5 Using the JDF-Enabled RIP

11.5.1.5 The Input and output queues

The Input queue is where JDF files waiting for processing by the RIP are placed. Each
file will be XML-parsed and assigned and prepared ready for further processing The
Output queue is where completed files are placed.

Figure 11.5 JDF Enabler Input and output queues

In the example shown in Figure 11.5, there are several “Completed” jobs in the Output
queue. The Input queue has two jobs that are marked as “Assigned” while the other
four jobs require further resources or files, to be downloaded over HTTP. Each of
these four jobs have two outstanding files, with the last job in the queue showing that
12K of 35K has been downloaded.
Note: See below for a description of “Completed” and “Assigned”.
Jobs that require files to be downloaded are addressed each in turn using a “round-
robin” method. In general, this means that the JDF Enabler will distribute the down-
loading work as fairly as possible when dealing with several jobs that require it, and
will prevent the more demanding jobs from holding up the smaller ones.
An example of this type of distribution follows. The first job in the queue has a single
file to be downloaded. The second job then has a single file to be downloaded fol-
lowed by the third and fourth jobs. After this, the second file of the first job will be
downloaded followed by the second file of the second job, and so on. This method is

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 393

 JDF-Enabled RIP

used because it allows throughput to be maintained even when you have a long queue
of jobs waiting for a single file, and one of those jobs requires twenty files to be down-
loaded. In this case, each job will download a single file before starting at the top of
the queue again. In this way, all the jobs in the queue are not held up by the one job
waiting for many resources.
For each JDF file, the input and output tables present similar information. Some status
values can only appear in the upper table (Unparsed, Parsed, and Assigned), while
the remainder can only appear in the lower table. When a job moves to the lower table,
it means that the JDF Enabler and RIP will do no further work on it.

Status The full set of status levels of a JDF job are:

Unparsed—The job has just arrived, and its XML has not
yet been read.
Parsed—The job has been successfully parsed, and is in the
process of being dispatched to devices.
Assigned—The job has been assigned to one or more avail-
able devices, and is waiting for them to complete their work.
Badly Formed—The job was not successfully parsed. Its
XML data is not valid JDF.
Already Complete—The job was successfully parsed but
no attempt is made to perform any work on the job, because
all work appears to be complete. A job will only have this sta-
tus if all the JDF Nodes in the job have an assignment failure
and all the JDF Nodes are completed. The job will go to the
failed jobs archive.
Unassignable—The job was successfully parsed but no
attempt is made to perform any work on the job, even though
some work appears to be needed. This is probably because
the JDF Enabler was not the right type of device to do the
outstanding work. The job will go to the failed jobs archive.
Failed—An attempt has been made to process one or more
nodes in the job, but not all of them succeeded.
Completed—One or more nodes have been processed, and
all of them were successfully completed.

394 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.5 Using the JDF-Enabled RIP

Channel This is the name of the input channel that was used to get the
JDF file into the system.

Job[Part] ID This field displays the JobID and JobPartID names used in
the JDF. The same name appears in the Job[Part] ID field
when the job is processing.

Job/File Name This field displays the DescriptiveName used in the JDF.
The same name appears in the RIP Job/File Name window
when the file is ripping.

Time Stamp This displays the date and time the file was processed.

* This column allows you to select an individual file. Either for

more information or deletion.

11.5.1.6 Viewing, sorting and managing the queues

A number of options are provided to view, sort and manage the input and output
queues. You can choose to display the queues using various filters

Input Sort By and Output Sort By

By selecting one of the various menu options
you are able to sort the Input or Output queues by either:
Date, Channel, Name, Status or ID.
If you would like to view the currently downloading job,
even when there are lots of other jobs in the input job list, you
should sort the input job list by Status. The downloading
job will then always appear at the top or the bottom of the list
(depending on the currently selected sort direction—see
below).

Sort queue last/first

Select the triangle to reverse the sort direction. For
example, if you are sorting the queue by Date, selecting the
triangle would place the most recent file first or last in the
queue.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 395

 JDF-Enabled RIP

Delete selected job

To delete an individual job, select it by clicking the *
field, followed by the clicking Delete selected job
icon.

Delete all jobs

Select this option to delete all the jobs in the queue,
including those jobs not displayed due to filtering.

Information
Select this option to display more information about
the selected job. The information appears in the Job
Details screen and includes all the information displayed in
the Monitor screen, plus all the RIP monitor log information
associated with the selected job. To update the RIP monitor
log, click the Job’s RIP Monitor Log button. The First, Prev,
Next and Last options are available. See the JDF Enabler for
®
the Harlequin RIP User and System Guide for more
information.

Show (Output queue only)

You can select one of the various
menu options to filter the Output queue.

11.5.2 The Logs screen

A number of system messages are generated by the JDF Enabler and the Navigator
RIP. All these can be viewed from the web UI. Select the Logs tab to display the Logs
screen so that all the messages can be viewed. Logs are divided into Alarm/Event mes-
sages and RIP Monitor messages.
For more information on how to configure the logging options, including management
®
of the size of message logs, see the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and Sys-
tem Guide.
The same display options are provided for both Event/Alarm logging messages and
RIP Monitor messages:

396 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 11.5 Using the JDF-Enabled RIP

Prev Select this option to view the previous screen of log mes-
sages.

First Select this option to view the first screen of log messages.

Next Select this option to view the next screen of log messages.

Last Select this option to view the last screen of log messages.

Filter (Alarm/Event only)

Filters are provided only for the
Alarm/Event Log. Choose the option in the menu that dis-
plays the message types you would like to view.
There are files logger.log and backup.log files, which
are duplicates of the most recently added Alarm/Event log
entries.
®
For more information see the JDF Enabler for the Harlequin RIP User and System
Guide.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 397

 JDF-Enabled RIP

398 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12

Fonts

Whenever the RIP processes a job that uses fonts, they must be available in memory.
Fonts are loaded into the RIP from the disk automatically whenever they are required.
However, the fonts must have been installed first, or they must be embedded in the job
that uses them. Installation is a once-only process where the RIP configures the font
for its use and puts it in the appropriate place. This chapter discusses how fonts are
installed and then used by the Navigator RIP.
The RIP provides a suite of facilities that let you manage fonts easily and efficiently.
This suite includes commands that will:
• Install fonts in the RIP.
• Tell you which fonts are currently installed.
• Produce a proof of any font currently installed.
• Remove fonts from the RIP.
The Navigator RIPNavigator RIP also provides facilities for font substitution and font
emulation. For more information see:
• “Font substitution” on page 411.
• “Font Emulation” on page 413.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 399

 Fonts

12.1 Supplied fonts

The Navigator RIP comes with the 35 standard fonts found in most versions of the
Apple LaserWriter and many other PostScript printers. The RIP font folder also
includes several special-purpose fonts:
• The Harlequin font is used only for the Harlequin RIP logo.
• The HP-Times-Roman and HP-Courier fonts are used for PCL emulation. PCL
is the Printer Control Language used in Hewlett-Packard laser printers.
• The NotDefFont font is used by composite fonts.
• The Stick font is used for HPGL emulation. HPGL is a plotter language used
by some Hewlett-Packard laser printers. The Navigator RIP supports HPGL2
with this font.
The RIP supplies the 35 standard fonts and the special-purpose fonts installed in the
fonts folder in the SW folder.

12.2 Types of font

There are several different types of fonts that can be installed and used with the RIP.
See Section 12.4 on page 402 for details about installing fonts.
• Type 1 fonts—these are the most commonly used fonts. Type 1 fonts can con-
tain hints that can subtly change the shape of the characters. Hinted fonts can
improve the appearance of text rendered at low resolution or at small sizes on
higher resolution devices: for example, hints can affect 11 point text at resolu-
tions up to 2000 dpi.
Note: The font downloaders supplied with many Type 1 fonts actually install
Type 1 fonts as Type 4 fonts.
• Type 3 fonts.
• Type 0 (composite) fonts—these are special fonts designed to support large
character sets such as Japanese or Chinese. Type 0 fonts can use any base font
format (Types 1, 3, 4, 32, 42) and CID fonts. Type 0 fonts can support multi-
byte character encodings. Older Type 0 fonts had multiple sub-fonts and as
such used a lot of memory however, the new CID-keying method is much more
memory efficient.

400 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.2 Types of font

• Character identifier (CID) composite fonts, together with associated character

map (CMap) files are used to produce CID-keyed fonts, which exist only in the
memory of the Navigator RIP (or other RIPs).
There is not easy method of determining whether a TrueType font should be
installed as a CID font or not. If installed as a CID font, the order of characters
in the font is not easily predicted. Improvements to this are expected in future
releases.
• Single-byte PC format TrueType fonts or OpenType fonts with TrueType
outlines.
• The RIP also supports installation of native TrueType, Type 42, raw CFF
(Compact Format) and OpenType/CFF fonts. Multiple-font CFF or Open-
Type/CFF fonts will be installed as FontSet resources, but these will not appear
in the Proof or Delete Fonts menus, or in the font List.
Note: The font resources created when installing CID fonts are CID-keyed fonts and
are created automatically by the RIP. These font resources are created when CID fonts
or CMaps are installed using the Install Fonts option in the Fonts menu, and are deleted
when CID fonts are removed using the Delete Fonts option from Fonts menu. Font
resources may also be created or deleted on startup, if the available CID fonts or
CMaps have changed since the last bootup.
Installing a CID font over AppleTalk with a font installer will not automatically create
font resources; the RIP must be quit and restarted to do this.
The created font resources may be deleted using the Delete Fonts option on the Fonts
menu, and will not be re-created by the RIP.
Note: The RIP supports the use of a variety of other fonts, for example, when they are
embedded in PostScript-language or PDF jobs. The embedded fonts can include Com-
pact Font Format, Type 42, and Type 32 fonts.
Note: The font data cache is not configurable, but takes 0.5 MB for all fonts. So, for
CID, native TrueType, CFF, and OpenType/CFF fonts, 1 MB extra RAM should be
sufficient.

12.2.1 Font resource directories

The Font resource directories can be changed. The default locations are:
• Font resources are installed in SW/fonts.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 401

 Fonts

• FontSet resources are installed in SW/FontSet.

• CID fonts are installed in SW/CIDFont.
• CMap files, which are placed in the SW/CMap folder.
Throughout this section these are the directories referred to when font resources are
mentioned.

12.3 The DLD1 format

The Navigator RIP will convert Type 1 fonts (and Type 1 fonts contained within com-
posite fonts) into its own DLD1 font format.
The DLD1 format stores font data far more efficiently than do standard storage for-
mats. Access to font data, and operations upon fonts, are made much faster, while the
amount of PostScript-language virtual memory consumed by the font is reduced dra-
matically.
The benefits of using the DLD1 format include: a DLD1 format font occupies less
disk space; and this format can require under 10% of the memory space of other for-
mats. This table shows some typical figures for the disk and memory requirements of
a font in DLD1 format, and for the corresponding font in Type 1 and Type 4 formats.

Table 12.1 Disk and memory requirements for font types

Font type Disk space (KB) Memory (KB)

DLD1 45 4

Type 1 100 50

Type 4 50 30

Note: It is difficult to give corresponding estimates for Type 3 fonts because they are
inherently so flexible, but they are not particularly efficient.

12.4 Installing fonts in the Navigator RIP

If a job requires a particular font, the font must already be installed in the RIP before
the job is processed, unless the job itself contains the font definition. If the font is not

402 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.4 Installing fonts in the Navigator RIP

found, the RIP will instead print the text in a selected substitute base font (see “Font
substitution” on page 411), or issue an error message, depending on the setting for
Abort the job if any fonts are missing in the Page Setup Options dialog box. See
Section 5.23.8 on page 191 for details.
Depending on the font type, you can install a font into the RIP in one of two ways: by
using the Install Fonts command or by downloading the font to the RIP.
All fonts may be embedded, and all fonts may appear in the fonts and CIDFont
resource directories. Most font formats can be installed using the Install Fonts com-
mand, including, Types 1, 3, TrueType, Type 42, CID Types 0, 1, 2, 4 (same as Type
32), CFF, OpenType and CMap resources.
The Install Fonts command and downloading fonts to the RIP are described in the next
two sections.
See “Removing fonts” on page 409 for details about deleting the fonts you have
installed.

12.4.1 Install Fonts command

When you choose Install Fonts from the Fonts menu, the RIP displays the Install Fonts
dialog box shown in Figure 12.1.

Figure 12.1 Install Fonts dialog box

To install a single font, do the following:

1. Select a font in the list box.
2. Click Install.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 403

 Fonts

Note: PC format files with a *.pfa, *.pfb (Type 1), *.otf (OpenType), *.ttf (TrueType)
extension are visible in the upper list box. If your fonts are not in this format, select All
Files from the Files of type drop-down list.

Use the Look in drop-down list to use other directories or drives.

You can also select several fonts and install them together.

Shift
To select a block of several files, select the first file in the block, and then hold down
the Shift key and select the last file in the block.

Ctrl
To select several unconnected files, hold down the Control key while making your
selection.
A successfully installed font produces the message:
Installed font ’font_name’ in TrueType format

Note: The format type will be reported in this way for single-font packages only (not
FontSets). The type reported will be TrueType, Type 42, Type 1, DLD1, Type 2, Type
3 and so on.
The Install Fonts command will install into the RIP Type 1, Type 3 and single-byte PC
format TrueType fonts or OpenType fonts with TT outlines.
1
OpenType/CFF is supported. Single-font OTTO packages will install as a single font
or CIDFont as appropriate. Multiple-font packages will install as FontSet resources.
If you try to install a file that does not contain a font, or that contains a font of another
type, the RIP displays a message in the RIP Monitor. This will not harm the RIP or the
file in any way—the RIP just refuses to install it.
Using the installer, TrueType fonts only install as non-CID fonts. They therefore have
to be manually moved to the CIDFont resources directory to make them appear as
CID fonts.

1.
OpenType fonts containing CFF data use the tag “OTTO”

404 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.4 Installing fonts in the Navigator RIP

If a font is of Type 1, it will be converted into DLD1 format before being added. This
can then be loaded into the RIP whenever necessary.
Installation is performed on a copy of the font, so your original font file remains
intact.

12.4.2 Downloading fonts to the RIP

This section describes how to download fonts to the RIP.
• Multiple Master fonts
Multiple Master fonts may be downloaded over AppleTalk from a Macintosh
using the downloader supplied with them.
• Composite fonts
Composite fonts vary greatly, and so the procedure for installation is likely to
be different for each one: there is no industry standard for this at present.
Almost all composite fonts now come with their own AppleTalk installers;
however, there is still a small number that are shipped as a collection of self-
installing PostScript-language files. Contact your font supplier for more
detailed information about using particular composite fonts with the RIP.
• TrueType fonts
No downloader is needed for TrueType fonts. Using a downloader makes them
less efficient if converted to Type 42 format. TrueType fonts should be installed
using the Install Fonts command.
• CID fonts
If your CID font is supplied with a downloader, install the font and any relevant
CMap file over AppleTalk using the supplied downloader. If no downloader is
supplied, use the Install Fonts command. At present, however, CID fonts have
to be manually moved to the CIDFont resources directory to make them appear
as CID fonts.
All installed fonts are placed in the fonts resources directory, except for CID fonts
and CMap files, which are placed in the CIDFont and CMap resources directories
respectively.
Leaf fonts and composite fonts are sub fonts of Type 0 fonts and are installed else-
where.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 405

 Fonts

12.5 Pre-loading fonts

The Navigator RIP always pre-loads the 35 standard fonts, since one or more are
likely to be used by most jobs. If you frequently use a particular set of other fonts, you
can ask the RIP to load them automatically upon start-up.
The RIP will take slightly longer to start-up, but once loaded, the fonts will be in
memory when jobs require them. This saves time when processing jobs, since the RIP
does not have to stop interpreting to wait for a font to be loaded. The time savings can
be considerable—if a job requires a composite font, the RIP could be waiting for a few
seconds to load it. By having it pre-loaded, you will save this time with every job that
uses it.
Note: You can use this method to pre-load composite fonts, so long as they have been
installed according to the instructions in “Downloading fonts to the RIP” on page 405.
To pre-load a font, add a new line to the Navigator RIP initialization file, HqnOEM, and
restart the RIP. This initialization file is in the Sys folder in the SW folder.
You must add one line of PostScript-language code for every font you want to load.
For example, the following lines load ZapfChancery-MediumItalic and ZapfDingbats
into the RIP:
/ZapfChancery-MediumItalic HQNloadfont
/ZapfDingbats HQNloadfont

The RIP may take slightly longer to start up, but any jobs using these fonts will run
considerably faster. Pre-loading a composite font takes longer than pre-loading other
types of font, but saves more time for each job using it.

12.6 Producing a list of installed fonts

Sometimes you will need to know whether a particular font is currently installed in the
RIP. You can produce a list of all the currently installed fonts by choosing Fonts > List
Fonts.

Note: The List Fonts option does not show FontSet resources.
This list will appear in two places:
• The Navigator RIP window—this lets you see immediately whether or not
fonts are installed.

406 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.7 Proofing fonts

• The file LOGFILE in the SW folder—this provides a more permanent record of

which fonts were installed at a particular time.
The date and time accompanies every list.

12.7 Proofing fonts

Sometimes you may want to produce a formatted listing of all the characters in a par-
ticular font—known as a proof. This would normally entail writing a special Post-
Script-language job to produce the listing, but the RIP allows you to produce a proof
of any installed font automatically.
Note: The RIP can proof CID fonts only in long format. Also, the RIP will not use a
substitute font in short format. If you do not choose long format, the RIP reports:
CID fonts cannot be proofed - try Proof fonts in long format.

Palatino-Italic
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR
1234567890-=!@#$%^&*()_

Figure 12.2 An example of font proofing

You can proof fonts, either on a printer or on your screen, by choosing Proof Fonts
from the Fonts menu. The RIP produces the proof using your choice of page setup and
fits as many fonts as possible on a page. Figure 12.2 shows an example of a short-for-
mat proof for one font.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 407

 Fonts

When you choose Proof Fonts, the RIP displays a dialog box that lists all of the fonts
currently installed, as shown in Figure 12.3.

Figure 12.3 Proof Highlighted Fonts dialog box

First, choose an appropriate page setup for proofing the fonts, from the Page Setup
drop-down list.
Note: If you forget to choose a page setup, the RIP uses the one that you chose last
time you proofed fonts. If you have not proofed fonts in this RIP session, the first page
setup in the listing is used. To change the order of this listing, see “Reordering page
setups” on page 114.
Select the fonts you want to proof, and click Proof. You can select as many fonts as
you like.

Shift
To select a block of several fonts, select the first font in the block, and then hold down
the Shift key and select the last font in the block.

Ctrl
To select several unconnected fonts, hold down the Control key while making your
selection.
The RIP constructs a PostScript-language job and then runs it, as if you had used
Print File to print an existing file. If other jobs are pending, the proof takes its place in
the queue.

408 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.8 Removing fonts

By default, proofs only show a sample of the full character set in a font. If you want a
proof of the complete set of characters, select the Proof fonts in long format check box.
Note: CID fonts can be proofed, but only in long format. FontSet resources cannot yet
be proofed.

12.8 Removing fonts

You can remove most font types using the Delete Fonts command. The two exceptions
to this are composite and CID fonts.
• Composite fonts
We recommend that you remove a composite (Type 0) font using the font
downloader supplied with it. This will ensure that the leaf fonts are removed. In
many cases this is also the only way to recover a font license if the license
restricts you to a fixed number of installs.
• CID fonts
CID fonts which you have installed using the Fonts menu Install Fonts option
should be deleted using the Fonts menu Delete Fonts option.
Note: If there is a CID font and, for example, a Type 1 font with the same name,
the name is listed twice. If you delete such a font, the RIP deletes the Type 1
font first; and then the CID font, if you choose to delete again.
When you choose the Delete Fonts command from the Fonts menu, the RIP displays a
dialog box, as shown in Figure 12.4, where you can select the fonts to remove. As
with the Install Fonts and Proof Fonts dialog boxes, you can select as many fonts as
you want.
When you click Delete, the RIP removes the fonts you have selected immediately.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 409

 Fonts

Warning: If you remove a font, and then need to process a job that uses it, you will
first have to reinstall it. There is no confirmation dialog box. Before clicking Delete be
sure that you have the original file from which you can reinstall the font.

Figure 12.4 Delete Fonts dialog box

12.9 Composite fonts (Type 0)

The RIP provides full support for composite fonts. Because of their size, composite
fonts are treated specially. You cannot install all of them using the Install Fonts option,
for example, and there are certain considerations you must make if they are to be used
efficiently. See Section 12.4.2 on page 405 for information about installing composite
fonts.
Composite fonts are usually very large, and can consume much computer time and
memory. Whenever a character is encountered in a job, a RIP must find its definition
in the composite font, and then convert it into a bitmap, before it is printed or pre-
viewed. If a RIP does this for every character in the job, it will be very slow.
The RIP minimizes the number of character conversions it has to do by storing the
results of conversions in a RAM cache store. This means that the first time a character
is seen, it is converted it into a bitmap and stored in the cache. When that character is
seen next, the RIP does not need to convert it again because it can find the result
immediately in the cache store. Significant savings in processing time can be made
using this method, especially when dealing with frequently used characters.
The RIP is able to cache more character data when more memory is available to it. We
recommend you allow extra memory in the range 16 MB through 32 MB. You will
need more memory still if you wish to cache several composite fonts. Try experiment-

410 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.10 Font substitution

ing with memory allocation, as requirements will depend on the fonts and types of job
you have.
If you are going to use a composite font regularly, you should pre-load it into the RIP.
See “Pre-loading fonts” on page 406. Pre-loading makes the RIP slower to start up,
but saves a great deal of time when processing jobs that use those fonts.

12.10 Font substitution

Generally, it is preferable to use the exact font that was used in the design of the docu-
ment. However, there are times when this is not possible; a font may be corrupt; or the
original font may not have been sent with the original file. In such cases the only solu-
tion is to substitute with a font that is very similar in design to the original specified
font. The customer may ask you to do this to get the job done on time.
If substitution were not available, the RIP would do one of two things: error and refuse
to produce the job or substitute a default font, depending on the setting of the Abort job
if any fonts are missing option, see Section 5.23.8 on page 191. Either result may be
unacceptable.
One solution is to open up all the pages in the original application program and search
and replace every occurrence of the problem font. This is not ideal as it is time con-
suming; you may not have the original application and if you miss one or two occur-
rences where the font was used, the processing time would be wasted.
Having the RIP do the substitution for you “on the fly” is the best solution because all
occurrences of a font are guaranteed to be substituted.
In the RIP, the file SW/Config/FontSubstitution is automatically run as the RIP
boots. You can configure the following information in that file:
• Default font to use.
• Default CID font to use.
• Font substitution table.
• CID Font substitution table.
In all cases the FontSubstitution file has many comments and is intended to be
self-documenting.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 411

 Fonts

From the Eclipse Release SP1 a new font substitution mechanism has been added
which is similar (and in addition), to the existing font substitution mechanism (defined
by entries in the SW/Config/FontSubstitution file).
Whereas the existing substitution mechanism is unconditional, the new mechanism
only attempts a substitution if the initially given font name cannot be found. However,
if a conditional substitution is made, a message is displayed on the monitor indicating
the substitution:
Warning: font <-name-> not found, using <-name-> instead

For example:
Warning: font Arial not found, using ArialMT instead.

You can silence this message by uncommenting the line in SW/Config/FontSub-

stitution which specifies the /SilentCondFontSub key.

For more information see the Conditional Font Substitution section in the SW/Con-
fig/FontSubstitution text file.

12.11 The HqnFontSetStubs start up files

The Sys/ExtraStart/10HqnFontSetStubs and Sys/ExtraSt-
art/20HqnCIDFontStubs files are run by the RIP at startup and perform the fol-
lowing functions:

Sys/ExtraStart/10HqnFontSetStubs
Generates stub fonts for FontSet resources. The stub fonts
will be installed on the %fontset% pseudo-device.

Sys/ExtraStart/20HqnCIDFontStub
Generates the CID-keyed resources for newly-installed, and
previously undetected CID fonts and CMaps.
Either of these files may be removed if the functionality is not required. The numeric
prefix to their names is to force a particular running order; FontSet stubs should be
created before CID font stubs, because FontSet stub files may be CID fonts. The files
in Sys/ExtraStart are run in alpha/numeric order.

412 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.12 Font Backup

12.12 Font Backup

The font backup utility allows you to easily transfer fonts from your existing RIP to a
newly installed RIP.
To use font backup, select a default page setup and RIP the file:
SW\Utilities\BackupFonts.ps

This creates a file which effectively contains backups of font files, (and some other
files) from the SW folder.
A message appears in the monitor window informing you of the name of the Post-
Script language file created.
When you have installed your new RIP, you should run this PostScript language file to
install those font files on your new RIP.

12.13 Font Emulation

When fonts request by the job are unavailable to the RIP, some work flows benefit sig-
nificantly from being able to produce acceptable, readable copy using another font.
This is particularly true with rapid turnaround work flows typical of digital printing.
To achieve this, emulated fonts are used to produce suitable facsimile text based on
the characteristics of the font that is being emulated in terms of style, spacing, height
and width. In this way, a suitable readable font with similar characteristics of the target
font is used in the place of a missing font.
Font Emulation is often acceptable when digital printing, and can be preferable to the
file not being produced at all.
™
Font Emulation is available from the Navigator RIP Genesis Release and has the fol-
lowing characteristics:
• The ability to recognize the missing font by name
• A database of style, spacing, height and width for each font name
• The database currently contains over 1600 specified fonts
• Font Emulation only supports the standard Latin characters

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 413

 Fonts

12.13.1 Using Font Emulation

Font Emulation is enabled by checking the Enable font emulation option in the Page
Setup Options dialog.
Once enabled, Font Emulation currently catches references to over 1600 fonts. The
type of font that can be emulated is not important because fonts are matched by name.
If the font name is in the database the font can be emulated. See Section 12.13.3 on
page 416 for information on how to modify the font database.
Note: CID Fonts are not emulated.
If a request for a font returns an error, or anything other than the requested font, Font
Emulation first looks up the font name in the FontEmulation dictionary, and then, if
necessary, may go on to look up the font in the supplied database on disk.
If Font Emulation fails to emulate a font (for whatever reason), the RIP will behave as
if Font Emulation had not been switched on. That is, if the RIP is configured to abort
jobs when a font is missing, the job will abort; if the RIP is configured to substitute
Courier for the missing font, Courier will be used.
There are two situations when fonts are emulated these are: when the font requested is
not found or when a font error occurs. The following sections describe the two scenar-
ios:

12.13.1.1 Font not found

Font Emulation will be used for PostScript language and PDF files if:
1. The required font is not embedded in the job and
2. The required font is not installed in the RIP and

414 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.13 Font Emulation

3. The required font is not handled explicitly by font substitution.

Font Emulation will only regard font substitution as successful if the font name
returned by any substitution is exactly the same name as the requested font.
Therefore, in most cases Font Emulation will override font substitution. If how-
ever Font Emulation fails, the font previously selected for substitution will be
used.
Currently there is not automatic way of excluding fonts selected for substitution
from being emulated. If you want to use font substitution instead of the emu-
lated font, that font will have to be explicitly disabled in the /SW/Con-
fig/FontEmulation file.

4. Font Emulation is enabled and

5. The required font is not disabled in /SW/Config/FontEmulation file and
6. The required font is defined or aliased in /SW/Config/FontEmulation or
defined in the Font Emulation database.

12.13.1.2 Font error

Font Emulation will be used for PostScript language and PDF files if:
1. A font error is encountered attempting to use a font embedded in a job or
installed in the RIP (this includes the error produced when selecting Abort the
job if any fonts are missing in the Page Setup Options window) and

2. Font Emulation is enabled and

3. The required font is not disabled in /SW/Config/FontEmulation file and
4. The required font is defined or aliased in /SW/Config/FontEmulation or
defined in the Font Emulation database.
Note: PDF files usually include a PDF FontDescriptor for each font required by
the PDF file, even for fonts which are not embedded. If Font Emulation is employed
for a PDF file, the FontDescriptor in that PDF file will be used in place of the
emulation data in the RIP. Also, the FontDescriptor can be used even if the font is
not defined in the Font Emulation database or /SW/Config/FontEmulation file.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 415

 Fonts

12.13.2 Messages
When a missing font is successfully emulated the following message appears:
%%[ Warning: Font <...> emulated. ]%%

Note: <...> is the name of the missing font.

If Font Emulation's attempt to get the required font returned an error, and the font is
unable to be emulated, the following error is generated:
%%[ Error: Font <...> not found. (Emulation unknown) ]%%

However, if the font returned is not what was asked for (for example, Courier), and the
font cannot be emulated, the following warning is output but the RIP will continue to
use whatever font was returned:
%%[ Warning: Font <...> not found. (Emulation unknown) ]%%

That is, if a font is missing and it cannot be emulated, an error is only generated with
emulation switched on if there would have been an error with it switched off.
If the missing font cannot be found in FontEmulation or the database, the following
message appears:
%%[ Error: Font <...> not found. (Emulation not known)]%%

If emulation is switched off for a particular font, the following message appears:
%%[ Error: Font <...> not found. (Emulation disabled)]%%

If there is an error in the Font Emulation dictionary the following message appears:
%%[ Error: FontEmulation syntax /<...> invalid value. ]%%

In the unlikely event of an internal emulation font being replaced by a normal font, the
following message appears:
%%[ Error: Font <...> not found. (FontEmulation installation}]%%

12.13.3 Modifying the Font Emulation database

You are able to add to or modify the Font Emulation database using the file SW/Con-
fig/FontEmulation:

• Aliasing of a font in the database so an identical font with a different name can
be emulated.

416 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 12.13 Font Emulation

• Switching Font Emulation off for a specified font. This is useful if a corporate
logo is using a font in the database.
• Override a font definition in the database.
• Add a new font definition to the database.

Note for OEM: For more information see the Harlequin Technical Note
“Hqn065—Using and modifying Font Emulation”.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 417

 Fonts

418 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13

Calibration

This chapter discusses calibration of output devices. Calibration involves the mea-
surement of test images produced on an output device and the use of those measure-
ments to produce stable images with good tonal values: here, good means consistent
and usually linearized (in some measurement system). Some devices have a published
specification that you can use in place of measured data: this is true of many printing
presses. In demanding applications, you may use several different calibrations on the
same device, according to the settings on the device or within the RIP.
The way calibration is applied has been changed for Navigator RIP version 5.5r1. For
more information see “Editing calibration sets” on page 435.
This chapter describes how you can produce suitable test images (called targets or test
strips), measure their characteristics, then enter or edit calibration data, while Chapter
5, “Configuring Output Formats”, describes how you can choose different calibra-
tions when producing output.

13.1 Why calibration is needed

Regardless of the accuracy of an output device, the media and other consumable items
can vary and have an effect on the output. For example, an imagesetter may produce
an accurate and stable exposure of the media on which it is imaging but the reaction of
that media varies from paper to film, and from one media manufacturer to another.
Also, laser dots are never square (as in an idealized raster), usually overlap, often can-

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 419

 Calibration

not resolve a single pixel, and cannot always be turned off between adjacent pixels.
Similarly, in direct output devices, overlap of toner dots in laser printers or ink spread-
ing in inkjet devices often produces a deviation of some kind between required gray
levels and those actually output.
Whatever the physical reason, the result is variability or non-linearity and some
adjustment is almost always necessary to compensate for these physical artifacts. This
is called calibration.
Note: In almost all output devices, a solid (100%) black area prints as a 100% black
area, and white always prints as white. Any failure to achieve this degree of faithful
reproduction usually indicates a problem or maladjustment in the output device, which
you must cure before attempting calibration.
Consider the irregular solid line in Figure 13.1. It shows an example of the kind of
response typically seen from red-sensitive paper on a Helium/Neon-based imagesetter.
The diagonal dotted line represents the theoretical line that would be shown for a per-
fect material. The arrowed lines show how if you request a 50% tint you will actually
see something like a 65% tint on paper, when measured with a densitometer.
When setting flat tint areas for monochrome print work, variation in gray level is often
immaterial because the relatively small tonal variations encountered will not be visi-
ble to an untrained eye. But as soon as scanned images are introduced into mono-
chrome work, it becomes apparent that highlight and shadow detail is lacking and,
typically, that the image is darker than expected. The higher the halftone frequency
used, the more the shadow areas will fill in and highlights will lighten—and the more
necessary calibration becomes.
Color process work brings the problem into flat tint work as well, because variations
of only a few percent from the requested value in just one of the color plates can throw
the final apparent color well away from that intended.
Note: Calibration is important in color work, but it is not a complete answer. Calibra-
tion is sufficient only where the originally requested colors are prepared with the final
output device in mind; calibration can adjust the individual color values but not the
hues of those colors. A color management system is required to make adjustments
which change hues, as for example in digital proofing.
The RIP allows calibration sets to be built for particular configurations. By choosing
appropriate calibration sets, you can make the RIP correct for variations caused by dif-

420 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.2 Calibration and linearization

ferent output devices, line frequencies, exposure values, dot shapes, and negative /
positive setting.

100
Gray level measured from paper ( % )

80

60

40

20

20 40 60 80 100

Gray level requested ( % )

Figure 13.1 Response of red-sensitive paper on a Helium/Neon-based imagesetter

13.2 Calibration and linearization

Linearization is a special case of calibration, commonly used when producing output
on an imagesetter.
Linearization is the process of adjusting values on output so that the result is propor-
tional to the values requested, in some suitable measuring system. On film, this is usu-
ally a matter of ensuring that the gray levels produced are the ones you request in
halftone dot area coverage. For example, if you ask for a 42% tint in your page make-
up application then, after linearization, the output device produces that 42% tint cor-
rectly.
Note: Calibration can only provide the desired output to the accuracy with which you
can measure gray levels, and with which the output device can produce them. See
“Assessing attainable accuracy” on page 440 for details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 421

 Calibration

13.2.1 Non-linear devices

It is an established industry practice to accept non-linearity in the transfer from film to
printing press. Frequently, whoever performs the scanning or layout design uses their
judgement to introduce a compensatory adjustment in the scanner settings or choice of
tints, basing the compensation on the kind of printing press to be used.
Calibration is still a valuable process in this scheme but the purpose is to produce a
known and repeatable non-linear transfer.
It is possible to create a single calibration set that compensates for the combined char-
acteristics of an imagesetter and a printing press, but this scheme is inflexible and
clumsy where several imagesetters and presses may be used in various combinations.
Also, you cannot account for absolute density variations.
A more flexible approach, and one provided by the RIP, is the ability to produce and
use a calibration curve for each color of a printing press, applied separately from film
linearization. This improves the accuracy and ease of compensating for the dot gain
of, for example, Harlequin Dispersed Screening (HDS). HDS screens gain more on
press than conventional screens. Calibrating the press for use with an HDS screen
replaces a laborious and approximate compensation previously possible only by
changing the film linearity settings or scanning with HDS in mind. Note that although
an imagesetter is not a multi-color device, you can create a separate calibration curve
for each color, to take account of the different screen angles.
See “Press calibration” on page 442 for details of press calibration.

13.3 Calibration in the Navigator RIP

The calibration facilities allow several ways of working:
• You can measure calibrated or uncalibrated targets.
This means that you can print a calibration target with the previous calibration
applied and enter only the values that are in error—possibly saving time and
materials. Alternatively, you can start again with an uncalibrated target as if no
calibration exists. See “Establishing a workflow” on page 435 for a discussion
of the advantages and advisable controls.

422 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.3 Calibration in the Navigator RIP

• You can create a separate calibration curve for each channel of multicolor
devices, for example color ink jet printers and printing presses. If the output
device or printing press supports additional colorants, you can create separate
calibration curves for spot colors.
Although an imagesetter is not a multi-color device, you can create a separate
calibration curve for each color, to take account of the different screen angles.
• If you are preparing a job for a printing press, you can create separate calibra-
tion curves for output to film and output to a printing press. If you are not using
Harlequin ColorPro, you can retarget a job from its intended printing press to
another printing press, using a separate calibration set to remove the compensa-
tion for the gain of the intended press. See “Press calibration” on page 442 for a
discussion of the background issues.
• Tone Curves allow you to make another set of color adjustments, in addition to
the device calibration and the press calibration. See “Tone curves” on page 441
for details.
• You can use different measuring systems, as appropriate for the kind of output
device and measuring instruments.
Additionally, these features are arranged so that is easy to add and use the advanced
facilities provided by the ColorPro options. The extra facilities and changes of proce-
dure associated with ColorPro are described in the separate Harlequin ColorPro
User’s Guide.

13.3.1 Accessing calibration functions

The Navigator RIP Output menu contains the Print Calibration and Calibration Man-
ager commands. The Calibration Manager is also available from an icon button along-
side the Calibration drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
Use the Print Calibration command to display the Print Calibration dialog box. From
here, you can print test strips (targets) which enable you to measure the characteristics
of your output devices.
Use the Calibration Manager command to display the Calibration Manager dialog box.
This allows you to create and edit calibration sets using measurements from test strips
or published figures, and to enable or disable the use of particular calibration sets. The

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 423

 Calibration

consequence is that you can adjust for day-to-day or printer-to-printer variations in ink
density and similar variations in the exposure of imagesetters and platesetters.

13.3.2 Calibration sets

A calibration set is a piece-wise linear curve that maps requested tint levels to actual
tint levels and has some associated information including the intended output resolu-
tion, exposure, dot shape, range of screen frequency, and negative / positive settings
that the calibration set has been prepared for. Whenever you select one or more cali-
bration sets in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, the RIP uses those calibration sets to
output jobs.

13.4 Example procedure

The following procedure outlines basic cases in which you can create and apply a cal-
ibration set for a simple monochrome or color device driven directly by the RIP. The
same principles apply to more complex cases involving color devices and printing
presses.

13.4.1 Devices and requirements

Although an imagesetter is not a multi-color device, you can create a separate calibra-
tion curve for each color, to take account of the different screen angles.
To create calibration sets, you need a reliable and accurate densitometer that is reflec-
tive for paper and transmissive for film. The densitometer that you select should ide-
ally display dot coverage in percentage terms, rather than simple density readings,
since calculating coverage by hand is time-consuming and prone to errors.

13.4.1.1 Devices requiring exposure settings

The procedure for a device such as an imagesetter needing a correct exposure setting
is:
1. Where appropriate, establish the correct exposure for the device.
2. Print and measure a calibration target.

424 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.4 Example procedure

3. Use an Edit dialog box to enter the data and label it with the information
describing its use. You may also want to inspect the resulting curve and smooth
or edit the data values. This is where you name the calibration set.
4. Apply the calibration set you have created and check that it provides good out-
put.
Section 13.4.2 on page 426 through Section 13.4.5 on page 434 describe these steps in
more detail.

13.4.1.2 Devices without exposure settings

The procedure is simpler for a device that does not have an exposure control, such as a
color inkjet printer supplied with reference calibration sets.
Note: It is very unlikely that you will achieve good results if you try to use an inkjet
printer without a reference calibration set (or other control of ink delivery). The typi-
cal response of an inkjet printer in its raw state is to produce very dark images and
deliver so much ink that there are severe problems with drying time or ink running
across the printed page.
Supplied reference calibration sets or calibration profiles define an ideal or ‘reference
printer’. Using a reference calibration set greatly improves output, but the response of
your printer (the ‘user printer’) may differ from the reference printer because of small
but inevitable variations between printers. You may be satisfied with the reference cal-
ibration. To obtain the best output you can calibrate the user printer so that it responds
in the same way as the reference printer; this produces your own calibration set that
you can use in your page setup, and edit or update as required.
When you create a page setup the Calibration entry must match the combination of
device, media, and resolution being used. This is true for both supplied calibration
profiles and your own calibration sets.
Note: You can tell apart supplied calibration profiles and calibration sets that you have
created because most supplied calibration profiles appear in the Edit Page Setup dia-
log box with parentheses ( ) around the name shown in the Calibration list. See the
documentation for the relevant output plugin if you are in any doubt about identifying
the entries in the Calibration list.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 425

 Calibration

The page setup you use to print a target can use either kind of Calibration entry:
• To create your own calibration set for a device for the first time your page
setup must use a supplied calibration profile for the device.
• To edit your own calibration set your page setup must use that calibration set.
Once you have identified or created an appropriate page setup, follow the steps below
to print a target using this page setup:
1. Use the menu option Output > Print Calibration and choose your page setup in
the From Page Setup(s) list.
2. Choose the type of target that you wish to print from the Print For menu. Pro-
cess Colors only is often suitable. See Section 13.10 on page 447 for
details of all these options.
3. Prepare your printer—for example by loading the correct paper and click Print
uncalibrated target. (Enable output in the Output Controller if necessary to get a
printed target.)
Note: You must print the target on the paper for which the calibration profile or
set was created in order to obtain an accurate calibration set.
4. Wait for this target to dry thoroughly before attempting to measure it. Even
when a target appears dry, It can take ten minutes or more for some combination
of inks and media to stabilize completely so that the colors are no longer chang-
ing and the target is unaffected by handling.
You can then follow the rest of this overall example procedure from Section 13.4.3 on
page 430.

13.4.2 Choosing the correct exposure

For devices such as imagesetters where calibration is performed with respect to dot
area coverage, the first step is to ensure that your output device is set up with the cor-
rect exposure. Attempting to calibrate an imagesetter with badly adjusted exposure
settings will waste a lot of time and film, and may lead to undesirable effects at plate-
making time, such as variable dot gain. Run a series of test pages at varying exposures
to determine the setting required to give a solid black and a clear white.
You are likely to need to select a different exposure for each combination of media
and resolution. Halftone frequency and dot shape will not affect required exposures

426 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.4 Example procedure

significantly. However, the media and the chemistry of the developer used can make a
big difference: stable developer chemistry is very important for accurate calibration.

13.4.2.1 Printing exposure tests

Choose an appropriate page setup. This should set the correct output device, output
resolution, and negative / positive settings, dot shape, and screening details if appro-
priate. The dot shape and screening details are set in the separations style of the page
setup. The exposure is unimportant at this stage: you will override it to make the test
print. Section 13.4.3 on page 430 describes how to create a calibration set for this page
setup.
Note: If you are using a drum device with variable film feed, you will usually want to
rotate the page or select film saving when printing test strips. See “Advanced Media
Saving” on page 156 for details.
Choose Output > Print Calibration. The RIP displays the Print Calibration dialog box,
shown in Figure 13.2.

Figure 13.2 Print Calibration dialog box

Select an appropriate page setup in the From Page Setups list.

Note: If you forget to choose a page setup, the RIP uses the one that you chose last
time you used the Print Calibration command. If you have not used the Print Calibra-
tion command in this RIP session, the first page setup in the list is used. To change the
order of this listing, see “Reordering page setups” on page 114.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 427

 Calibration

Note: Some settings in the chosen page setup are ignored or altered—notably those in
a ColorPro color management option that would change the color of a graphic object.
Each button creates a slightly different target (test strip) or series of targets. To create
the appropriate series of targets for the example procedure, you need to set up some
values and then click Print exposure sweep.
Note: If your output device does not support software exposure control, run the tests
manually instead, according to your output device manufacturer’s instructions. Typi-
cally: set the exposure manually, click Print uncalibrated target, and repeat for each
exposure value.
Print exposure sweep uses the values in the associated From, To, and Step text boxes to
print test strips at each of several exposures in the range.

13.4.2.2 Messages
From version 5.5 calibration is installed differently however, the end result is the same
as previous versions with the exception of a few extra messages.
Calibration and color management is setup as normal when running a calibration tar-
get. This is different to previous behavior where it was not setup. At the start of the
target procset, everything that has to be turned off is turned off.
The target procset now gets information about its environment from PostScript data in
setcalibration and various color management operators. Therefore, calibration
and color management must be setup normally for this information to be present.
A manifestion of this is that when running calibration targets the normal messages for
calibration and color management are displayed, followed by a number of extra
‘switched off’ messages, for example:

428 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.4 Example procedure

Setup loaded: "Default Page Setup"

Starting Job On Tuesday, April 24, 2001 10:27:13 AM
Using Color Setup "testing"
Using calibration for device "Glossy Photo Hvy 720"
Color management switched off for calibration job
Tone curve calibration switched off for calibration job
Intended press calibration switched off for calibration job
Actual press calibration switched off for calibration job
Device calibration switched off for calibration job
Running Uncalibrated Target for Default CMYK + spot colors
target:

Only the relevant messages appear, that is, if color management is not enabled, its
‘switched off’ message will not appear.

13.4.2.3 Acceptable exposure values

The ranges of values that you can enter into the From, To, and Step text boxes are
dependent on the output device. On several types of device, the values do not form a
continuous range. Read the manual for your output device carefully before entering
any values.
The Navigator RIP makes exposure tests over a range of exposure values by starting at
the first exposure value that you want to produce, and then at regular steps up to and
including a last exposure value. For example, if you want to print test pages at expo-
sure settings of 120, 125, 130, and 135, then type 120, 135, and 5 into the boxes. Typ-
ically, each test page is just over 2 inches long.
Care: If you are using an output device where increasing exposure values do not nec-
essarily mean increasing laser intensity smoothly at the film surface, take care in
selecting the settings for this dialog box. If necessary, print out two sweeps—for
example, 225 through 230 and 100 through 120.

13.4.2.4 Checking the target

Each of the test pages should look like that in Figure 13.3 unless you choose a com-
posite ‘Separations, Screening & Color’ Style in which case you will output a vertical
exposure test page with all colors on a single page. In addition, if you choose CMYK
halftone output you will produce four individual test pages, one for each separation.
(Test pages designed for use with densitometers that move the media automatically

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 429

 Calibration

may look slightly different, often having one strip of patches for each color, and it is
possible to have custom targets supplied with each output device driver.)

Figure 13.3 Uncalibrated exposure sweep test page

If you have a densitometer, select the correct exposure by reading the density values
of the two squares labeled D Max/Min on each of the test pages from your exposure
sweep. (Measure both squares to check for a uniform exposure across the page.) Opti-
mum density varies from material to material, but generally a densitometer reading of
between 3.5 and 4.0 is acceptable for film, and between 1.8 and 2.0 for paper. (The
densitometer should of course be switched to give density readings rather than dot
percentage readings.)
If you do not have a densitometer, you can still use this page to select an approximate
exposure setting: study the fine detail in the bottom left of the page, and select the
exposure that gives clear, fine white detail in black areas and vice versa. As an addi-
tional guide, you should be able to tell the difference between the 0% and 2% tint pan-
els, and between the 98% and 100% panels. (These figures are for film or bromide:
inkjet output can be black from the 80% patch upwards.)
Keep the strip that you decide has the right exposure: you can measure values from it
to create the calibration set. If you think a value falling between those used in your
exposure sweep might be better, print a new target at that exposure. For example, set
Exposure in the Edit Page Setup dialog box and then use Print uncalibrated target. You
can only set the Exposure in the Edit Page Setup dialog box if your output device sup-
ports software exposure control, otherwise the option is grayed out.

13.4.3 Creating a calibration set

You can create a calibration set after you have measured data from a target or obtained
it elsewhere: for example, from a manufacturer’s specification for the device.

430 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.4 Example procedure

Choose Navigator RIP > Page Setup Manager. The RIP displays the Page Setup Man-
ager. Select the page setup for which you printed the exposure test (or single calibra-
tion target) and click Edit. In the Edit Page Setup dialog box, set the Exposure to the
chosen value. If your output device does not support software exposure control, the
Exposure option is grayed out and you may have to set the exposure manually.

Click the Calibration Manager button to open the Calibration Manager, shown in
Figure 13.4. This button is next to the Calibration and Tone Curves drop-down lists.
Calibration sets are grouped by device and by color space. When you open the Cali-
bration Manager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, the RIP displays the calibration
sets for the current device and current color space, if any have been created. The
choice of separations style determines the color space. When you first open the Cali-
bration Manager after installing the RIP, the list box is empty.
If you open the Calibration Manager using the Output > Calibration Manager com-
mand, select the appropriate device from the Device drop-down list and, if necessary,
select a color space from the Color Space drop-down list.

Figure 13.4 Calibration Manager dialog box

The column headings are various properties of a calibration set. The first column in
the list is the name of the calibration set and the last column is the edited or unedited
status of the calibration. Each of the remaining columns in the list corresponds to the
name of one of the warning criteria in the Edit Calibration dialog box. See “Calibra-
tion Manager dialog box” on page 450 for full details.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 431

 Calibration

Click New to create a new calibration set for the first time. The RIP displays an appro-
priate version of the Edit Calibration dialog box.
Subsequently, you will probably edit the set, as described in “Editing calibration sets”
on page 435.

13.4.4 Entering the data

When you edit a calibration set, the RIP displays the dialog box shown in Figure 13.5.

Figure 13.5 Edit Calibration dialog box

For version 5.5r1 the way calibration works has been changed. All calibration sets cre-
ated before v5.5r1 will work in the same way they always have. However, if you
decide to edit a calibration set created before v5.5r1 with a v5.5r1 RIP (or later) or cre-
ate a new calibration set, the values will be automatically adjusted to account for the
application of the default curve to the calibration. The default curve is a linearization
profile of the output device. Previously, the default curve was only taken into account
when the calibration set was first created and not after editing. From v5.5r1, the
default calibration curve is always taken into account.

432 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.4 Example procedure

If you leave the Edit calibration dialog by selecting Cancel the new values will not be
saved and the calibration will work as before. If however, you decide to save the new
values the calibration will work using the default curve and will produce more accu-
rate results.
When you click New to create a new calibration set, you enter the Edit Calibration dia-
log box for an uncalibrated target with all Warning criteria boxes empty. The warning
criteria list the resolution, dot shape, screen frequency, and so on that this calibration
set is intended to work with.
At least, you must:
• Name the new calibration set.
• Show what kind of values you are measuring.
• Provide data values.
You should also use the Warning criteria boxes to show which settings the calibration
set is intended to work with.
“Edit Calibration dialog box” on page 455 describes how to use all the items in this
dialog box, but this short procedure mentions the essential items:
1. Type a name into the Name text box.
2. Choose the type of measurement you are making from the Measurements as pop-
up menu drop-down list.
3. Measure the dot coverage percentages from densitometer readings taken from
the target that you chose in the procedure “Choosing the correct exposure” on
page 426 and enter these values into the labeled boxes for calibration data. (The
Import button allows you to import data values taken from a file, which can be
generated by a separate program, Genlin. See Appendix C, “Using Genlin” on
page 539 for use of the program and see page 463 for details of how to read the
file.)
Note: Each value you enter must be consistently greater than the preceding
value (or less than it if you are using a negative film or meter).
The Smooth button allows you to smooth the ends of the graph (and by doing so,
the values of the calibration set) in small steps. If a set of values are out of range
or non-monotonic a warning will appear when you try to exit from the dialog.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 433

 Calibration

4. In the Warning Criteria panel, enter the settings used to create the target: resolu-
tion, dot shape, screen frequency, exposure, and say whether it applies to both
negative and positive settings.
Note: If you create a calibration set from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, you
need only select the Warning criteria check boxes. The RIP takes the default set-
tings from the page setup you are editing.
Click OK to save the calibration set.
You can create a new calibration set, or save all the changes you have made to date by
clicking OK in the Calibration Manager.
You can create or edit a calibration set in the Calibration Manager, even if you do not
want to use it in the current page setup. Once you have saved the new calibration set
by clicking OK in the Calibration Manager, it will remain even if you Cancel the Edit
Page Setup dialog box. If you opened the Calibration Manager from the Edit Page
Setup dialog box, you can also save the changes by clicking Select. In addition to sav-
ing the changes, using the Select button displays the selected calibration set in the Cal-
ibration control in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

If you click Cancel in the Calibration Manager, you discard all changes to calibration
sets that you have made since you opened the Calibration Manager.
When you edit a calibration set for color data, the procedure is very similar, except
that you must enter data for each color channel. Note that although an imagesetter is
not a multi-color device, you can create a separate calibration curve for each color, to
take account of the different screen angles.

13.4.5 Applying the calibration

You must select a calibration set from the Calibration drop-down list in the Edit Page
Setup dialog box in order to use it. Subsequently, you can save the page setup and
recall both the page setup and its corresponding calibration set as required.
Select your new calibration set in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, and click OK to save
your changes and close the dialog box. Click OK in the Page Setup Manager.
Return to the Print Calibration dialog box, choose the page setup in which you have
chosen the new calibration set, and click Print calibrated target. You should see
improved tonal rendering in the calibrated target.

434 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.5 Editing calibration sets

Measure the tint values on this calibrated target. If the values are wrong in any
patches, reread these tint patches on the original exposure sweep target, and edit the
values in the calibration set again.

13.5 Editing calibration sets

The procedure described in Section 13.4 is adequate for creating new calibration sets.
This section describes how you can choose a strategy to keep calibration up to date,
choose which calibration sets to use, and edit existing calibration sets.
There are three more general sections: Section 13.6 on page 439, discusses establish-
ing and maintaining calibration; Section 13.7 on page 441 describes tone curves cali-
bration; and Section 13.8 on page 442 describes press calibration.
For details of the individual dialog boxes, see “Print Calibration dialog box” on page
447, “Calibration Manager dialog box” on page 450, and “Edit Calibration dialog
box” on page 455.
They way that calibration is applied is different for v5.5r1. If you decide to edit a cali-
bration set created before v5.5r1 with a v5.5r1 RIP (or later) you may notice some
small differences. For more information see “Entering the data” on page 432.

13.5.1 Establishing a workflow

There are three possible workflows for maintaining calibration:
• Historical record.
• Recalibrate every time.
• Adjust for drifts in calibration.
It is usually best to use the same method for any one device. It is possible to change
from one to the other, but you may see values in the Edit Calibration dialog box
which, though correct predictions, are not values you recognize because they have
been calculated by the RIP.

Historical Sometimes it is desirable to keep a historical record of cali-

bration sets. In this case, an uncalibrated strip or target is
printed on each occasion when calibration is carried out, and

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 435

 Calibration

a new calibration set created (with the New button). The new
calibration set must be selected explicitly in the Edit Page
Setup dialog box each time.

Recalibration This is the conventional method. Here an uncalibrated strip is

printed each time calibration is required. On the first occa-
sion, a set is created with New. On subsequent recalibrations,
Edit from uncalibrated target is selected and the values in the
dialog box changed to reflect the new readings from the strip.
Then a calibrated strip is printed and the linearity of the result
is checked, and if the linearity is unsatisfactory another
uncalibrated strip is printed to correct the flaws. (The new
calibration values are in the existing set, so there is no need to
select a new calibration set in the Edit Page Setup dialog
box.)

Adjustment Here a calibrated strip is printed on each occasion (except the

first when an uncalibrated strip is printed to enter the values
with New). Edit from calibrated target is selected. This should
then show the perfect values. If the device has changed, these
values will be a little in error and the new values can be
entered. A second calibrated strip can be printed to check the
result. (Again, the new calibration values are in the existing
set, so there is no need to select a new calibration set in the
Edit Page Setup dialog box.)
Note: When working in density rather than percent dot, it is
not immediately obvious what the correct values should be;
Edit from calibrated target provides this information.

However, whatever method is adopted, the most important rule is to match the edit
command to the type of target. To be explicit:
• When entering measurements using uncalibrated test strips, always do so with
Edit from uncalibrated target (or New).

• When using calibrated test strips, always do so with Edit from calibrated target.
Calibration will be completely wrong if you do not follow this rule.

436 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.5 Editing calibration sets

13.5.2 Variations on the Edit Calibration dialog box

When you edit a calibration set, the RIP displays the dialog box shown in Figure 13.5,
page 432. This dialog box lists the resolution, dot shape, screen frequency, and so on
that this calibration set is intended to work with. You can change these settings as nec-
essary. See “Edit Calibration dialog box” on page 455 for details of all controls.
There are variations on this dialog box for calibrated and uncalibrated targets and for
tone curves, printing presses, and other devices. These variations include the nature of
the values you enter to define the curve and the color channels you can select.
The title of the dialog box changes to show the kind of target and the device. The gen-
eral form of the title is:
Edit <calibrated/uncalibrated> target for <Device name>

<calibrated/uncalibrated>
depends on which edit button you clicked in the Calibration
Manager.

<Device name>
is the selection in the Device drop-down list in the Calibration
Manager.
When you edit the calibration set for a printing press, the differences are:
• The presence of a Press drop-down list in the Warning Criteria panel. In this
case the default calibration set is determined by the selected profile.
• The types of measurements available in the Measurements as drop-down list.
When you edit the calibration for tone curves, the differences are:
• The options in the Warning Criteria panel are unavailable (except for the Use
for Pos & Neg option for monochrome devices).

• The Force solid colors option is unavailable.

13.5.3 Choosing and labeling calibration sets

It is important to choose a calibration set that is appropriate for the job you are pro-
cessing. If you set the warning criteria for a calibration set, the RIP warns you if the
settings in the page setup or job conflict with these criteria. By setting a page setup

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 437

 Calibration

option, you can tell the RIP to abort any job that fails the criteria. See Section 13.12.3
on page 457 for details.
Name the calibration set carefully, so that you can identify all the parameters associ-
ated with it. For example, it may not be sufficient to name the calibration set with the
chosen resolution, since the dot shape and line frequency could also affect the calibra-
tion.
Most settings have obvious single values. Screen frequencies and positive / negative
settings need some discussion.
Screen frequencies are given as a range to indicate the range of frequencies for which
the set is valid. It is a good idea to start by working out which frequencies you expect
to use—for example, 85, 100, 112, 120, 133, 150, 175 lpi, and so on. You can then cre-
ate ranges centered on each of these values—for example, 75 to 93 lpi, 93 to 106 lpi,
and so on. You do not have to create calibration sets for the full range of frequencies—
you may find, for instance, that the lower frequencies do not need calibration, either
because the output device is fairly accurate at these values, or because the work you
do at those frequencies does not demand accurate output. Also, it may be that the same
calibration set will apply to a wide range of frequencies—for example, 100–300 lpi.
You must inform the RIP about the various combinations of positive and negative out-
put and measuring devices.
The Measurements as drop-down list allows you to tell the RIP which densitometer
mode you used when performing your density readings. Some densitometers read in
positive dot, others in negative dot (that is, a clear area may read 0 (zero) or 100).
For a monochrome device, you can specify what kind of output you are measuring
using the Negative media check box.
The Use for Pos & Neg check box allows you to record whether the RIP can use this cal-
ibration set for both positive and negative output, or only one. The default setting of
this box (selected) is usually the best to use, but for very accurate calibrations, apply
this setting only to Euclidean dot shapes. (See Chapter 6, “Screening” for a descrip-
tion of Euclidean screening.) When this check box is not selected, the RIP uses the
calibration set only for positive or negative, as set in Negative media.

438 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.6 Consistency of calibration

13.5.4 Saving calibration sets

Click the OK button to save the calibration set. You can then edit a different calibra-
tion set, create a new calibration set, or save all the changes you have made by click-
ing the OK button in the Calibration Manager. If you opened the Calibration Manager
from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, you can also save the changes by clicking the
Select button. In addition to saving the changes, the Select button displays the selected
calibration set in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
If you click the Cancel button in the Calibration Manager, you lose all the changes to
calibration sets that you have made since you opened the Calibration Manager.

13.6 Consistency of calibration

Once you have produced a number of calibration sets for a device, you must be sure
that they continue to be accurate to an acceptable degree, and that you use them appro-
priately. This section describes what to do and check in routine use.

13.6.1 Checking calibration

Once you have produced a calibrated output successfully, you need only check that the
calibration remains stable. Do this at suitable time intervals, which may vary from
twice a day to once a month—depending on your requirement for accuracy and what
you learn about the stability of your systems.
Even if you check calibration sets only occasionally, always check them when your
imaging or processing environment changes—for example, when you load film, ink,
or ribbon from a new production batch, or change your processor speed or tempera-
ture. In many cases, it may also be advisable to check exposure settings.
To check the calibration, click Print calibrated target in the Print Calibration dialog box
and measure the density of the tint panels.
If the value for any tint panel drifts outside your acceptable range, you can use data
from the calibrated target to correct the calibration set. You need record only the val-
ues that are in error. Display the Calibration Manager dialog box, select the calibration
set, and then click Edit calibrated target. In the Edit Calibration dialog box, enter the
newly measured value or values. (Alternatively, you can click Print uncalibrated target
in the Print Calibration dialog box, read all the densitometer values from that target,
and then use Edit uncalibrated target to edit the calibration set appropriately.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 439

 Calibration

13.6.2 Assessing attainable accuracy

It is relatively easy, using these procedures, to maintain the accuracy of calibration
data on an imagesetter using film. This accuracy can be within 2% of a perfect result.
The accuracy obtainable with bromide paper is far lower, and it is not feasible to
maintain densities closer than about 5%. (One reason for having a less accurate
requirement for bromide paper is that two densitometers are likely to show much
larger differences when measuring the same piece of paper, than when measuring the
same piece of film.)
When assessing your required level of accuracy, take into account the accuracy of the
imaging engine itself: an imagesetter rated as having a variation of less than 2%
across the film cannot be expected to be able to produce work calibrated more closely
than this.
Some reasons for inaccurate imaging are:
• A coarse screen may not be able to reproduce an exact percentage value or may
provide varying readings depending on where in a patch a density reading is
taken.
• Values intermediate between patch values are interpolated. This process is
never perfectly accurate.
• Some imaging technologies produce variations in tones depending on where in
the page the tones are located, and some produce output that depends on the
tones in neighboring areas of the page.
Other, variable, factors that can significantly affect calibration results include the fol-
lowing:
• The temperature (especially the consistency of the temperature) at which the
imagesetter and the film processor are maintained.
• The length of time and the temperature at which film, paper, or ribbons are
stored.
• Whether the processor is used for other materials (for example, duplication
film) as well as imagesetter film.
• The time between photographic processing and measurement. Many films have
a colorant that fades rapidly after processing.

440 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.7 Tone curves

• The time and storage conditions between printing and measurement. The
output from inkjet and dye-sublimation printers can alter significantly over a
period of weeks, or even hours if subjected to bright sunlight.
Reasonable calibration can normally be achieved easily, but for very high quality cali-
bration a considerable amount of care in setting up and controlling the imagesetting
environment is required.

13.7 Tone curves

Tone curves allow you to make another set of tone or color adjustments, in addition to
the device calibration and the press calibration. In a properly controlled workflow you
should have little need to use tone curves but you may find that they offer a quick and
effective way of working around short-term difficulties such as lack of calibration
facilities or badly formed jobs that you cannot easily correct in the job.
For example, you may have to process a particular set of images where the correct cal-
ibration does not produce an acceptable printed result. There are two common cases.
You may be able to produce a tone curve using exact data, perhaps coming from a
known setting in scanning or later processing. Alternatively, you may wish to empha-
size a color or tonal range in response to artistic direction, such as a request to boost
the mid-tone magenta component by 10%.
In all cases, the tone curve is an exact record of what you have done, kept separate
from the device and press calibrations.

13.7.1 Creating and using tone curves

To create tone curves, select the Tone Curves device in the Calibration Manager.
Create the calibration set for the tone curves in the usual way, entering data values for
the patches and possibly using Smooth.
You apply tone curve calibration sets using the Tone Curves drop-down list in the Edit
Page Setup dialog box.
For the Navigator RIP version 5.1 revision 1 and later, tone curves behave in the
opposite sense to device and actual press calibration curves. This normally means that
you enter higher values where you wish to see more output.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 441

 Calibration

For example, assuming a positive-reading system where 0% is no output and 100% is

full density or coverage, enter values higher than the nominal values of the patches to
produce more output for a given input.
Note: In the Navigator RIP version 5.1 revision 0 and earlier, tone curves behaved in
the same sense as device and actual press calibration curves; in these earlier versions,
for the example just given, you had to enter lower values where you wished to see
more output.

13.8 Press calibration

Press calibration allows the RIP to make press adjustments to the density of the ink on
paper on a printing press independently from the intermediate medium (usually film)
used to prepare printing plates.
Press calibration can also be set up to work in absolute density measurements instead
of halftone dot area coverage, which means the actual color can be predicted rather
than just its relationship to the maximum and minimum densities, as on film.
Press calibration provides these facilities:
• The press can be put into the same state as some reference state.
Though this can often be achieved by adjusting press controls, the RIP provides
a finer degree of tuning than just the maximum density or midtone controls
common on the press.
• The press can be accurately tuned for Harlequin ColorPro.
• An adjustment can be made for a different press from the one for which the job
was originally prepared.
This might be needed because it really is a different machine, or because the
dot-gain characteristics have changed over time: for example, as the blankets
have worn.
• An independent adjustment can be made to compensate for changes to the job
after scanning and so on, which affect the gain on press, such as substitution of
HDS screens.
• The gain of the press can be expressed in relative terms.

442 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.8 Press calibration

This form is common in manufacturers’ documentation: for example 20% at

70%, rather than the more common measure on film as 70% reads 90% (which
is equivalent).
• Readings can be estimated from a small number of data points supplied by the
manufacturer.

13.8.1 How does press calibration work?

Conventionally, a color job is prepared by combining scanned pictures with applica-
tion-generated text and graphics. In this process there are two assumptions made:
• The film to which the resulting raster will be first directed is linearized, that is
if the job requests a 25% gray value, a densitometer would read 25% on that
area of the film.
• The press will gain further—a lot further usually—and the scanner operator
takes this into account when preparing a scan. This means the scanner operator
must know or guess the gain of the target press. It also means that the colors in
application-generated graphics are similarly produced by guesswork, experi-
ence, or by reference to samples printed on a similar press (previous work, or
more likely chosen from swatches in an appropriate PANTONE Color System
or from a system with a similar intent).
The consequence is that if the gain of the press is not as expected, then the job will not
print correctly. This might be because:
• It is not the press originally intended.
• The dot gain has changed (or was never known).
• The dot gain was assumed for some particular rendering process, which has
changed.
For example, you may be using a HDS screen which gains more on press than
conventional screens. The film can be linearized as normal, and a further adjust-
ment made to account for the difference between the HDS screens and the con-
ventional screens. By separating the two adjustments, it is now possible to
linearize to film again without having to repeat the whole process.
Whichever of these reasons holds, the job has the gain of the press already accounted
for. This means that the overall effect of calibration in the output path is to first apply

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 443

 Calibration

any primary calibration to remove compensation for the gain of the intended press,
and then to compensate for the gain of the actual press.
Note that the intended press calibration is not available when ColorPro is enabled.
Instead, ColorPro provides several options for processing color data ahead of the
transfer to press: these options include emulating the output of one press on another
type of press. For details, see the separate Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide.
For this reason, the process is split in two:
1. You give the gain (expressed as a calibration set) of the intended press, which
may be one of:
• A standard press
Some standard presses are built in to the Navigator RIP.
• A variation on a standard press
A typical variation is, for example, an extra 5% gain at 50% over SWOP
Type 1 printing but with essentially the same shape of gain curve. You can
create such calibration sets in the RIP by extrapolation from the standard
curves provided with the RIP.
• A real press
This press might be one of a group of similar presses, another of which
may be used to print the job. Alternatively, this same press may actually
print the job, but can no longer print with the same gain as assumed when
making the scans.
2. You give the gain of the actual press. The calibration here is expressing the
adjustment needed to put the press back into its reference state (what the press
looked like when first calibrated), which is not usually a linear state, but the
characteristic dot-gain curve of a printing press.
The RIP can then do the calculations which account for the difference. This separation
allows the actual press behavior to be accounted for without needing to remember
what differences to apply manually.

444 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.8 Press calibration

13.8.2 Alternative uses of press calibration

It is also possible to work in two alternative ways, which are uncommon at present,
but which we expect to become more common in the future:
• Scan to linear
Here the scanned images and application graphics are produced assuming the
measured response of the press, rather than the film, will be linear. The RIP
provides a special (None) calibration set which can be used as the intended
press for use in this situation.
• Press is linear
Here the press is indeed set up to produce a linear response, but the job is not
expecting this. In this situation, the (None) calibration set would be chosen for
the actual press, or more likely some calibration set, derived from (None), that
will bring the press back to its required linear state. This is similar to printing to
a full-color desktop printer.
Of course, it is possible to work with both of these ways simultaneously.
Note: Earlier versions of the Navigator RIP used (Linear) not (None), as
explained in Section 13.8.4 on page 446.
A special case of linear scans is device-independent color data—images where the
colors are expressed in CIE L*a*b* for example, or held on Photo CDs in YCC for-
mat. Here, Harlequin ColorPro is required to accurately reproduce the intended color,
and in this case only the actual press calibration set is used. This is also the case if
CMYK colors are converted to device-independent colors first by ColorPro—in that
case the gain incorporated in the job is accounted for during the conversion by Color-
Pro.
Lastly, note that press calibration is not a substitute for ColorPro. Calibration can
compensate for changes in response of the individual process colors, but it cannot
account for variations in colors of inks and dyes. Therefore if the actual and intended
presses are significantly different processes (a proofing device and a press for exam-
ple, or two entirely different kinds of press), the colors cannot be accurately repro-
duced using only calibration.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 445

 Calibration

13.8.3 Direct to press

There are two ways of calibrating for working direct to press.
• You can assume a linear imagesetter and calibrate for the actual press as nor-
mal. In this case, set the device calibration to linear: (None).
• You can assume a linear actual press and calibrate for the device as normal. In
this case, set the actual press calibration to linear: (None).

13.8.4 Version history: Linear and None

In versions of the Navigator RIP up to and including version 5.1 revision 0, the list of
options for Intended Press and Actual Press included the (Linear) entry. In all usage,
selecting the (Linear) entry had the same effect as choosing (None).
The Navigator RIP version 5.1 revision 1 and later do not have a (Linear) setting
The default options for Intended Press and Actual Press are (None).
Note: If you use the Migrate utility to transfer settings from a Navigator RIP installa-
tion of version 5.1 revision 0 or earlier to a RIP installation of version 5.1 revision 1
or later, any use of (Linear) is mapped to (None).

13.9 Using a combination of calibration sets

If you are printing to a direct output device, the page setup can include a calibration
for the output device and a tone curve calibration. The RIP applies any calibration sets
specified in the page setup in this order:
1. The Tone Curves calibration.
2. The device Calibration.
If you are preparing a job for a printing press, the page setup can include an imageset-
ter calibration, a tone curve calibration, and calibrations for the intended and actual
presses. The RIP applies any calibration sets specified in the page setup in this order:
1. The Intended Press calibration (to remove compensation for the gain of the
intended press).
2. The Tone Curves calibration.
3. The Actual Press calibration (to compensate for the gain of the actual press).

446 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.10 Print Calibration dialog box

4. The device Calibration (the calibration for the imagesetter).

The Intended Press calibration is not available when ColorPro is enabled. Instead, Col-
orPro provides several options for processing color data ahead of the transfer to press:
these options include emulating the output of one press on another type of press. For
details, see the separate Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide. The calibration set speci-
fied in Actual Press is always used.
From version 5.5r1 the default curve, which is a device correction curve, is applied
before any other calibration.

13.10 Print Calibration dialog box

Choose Output > Print Calibration to display the Print Calibration dialog box, as shown
in Figure 13.2, page 427.
You can select which page setup to apply while printing a test strip or exposure sweep
by choosing an entry from the list in this dialog box. If you select several entries then,
when you click the button to print the appropriate target, the RIP prints one test strip
or exposure sweep for each page setup you have selected.
Note: Some settings in the page setup are ignored or altered—notably those in a Col-
orPro option that would change the color of a graphic object.
There may be different, distinct targets for each output device or type of device.
If the output format supports additional colorants (spot colors), you can choose to
print the calibration for Process Colors only, Spot Colors only, Process &
Spot Colors, or for Monochrome only by selecting from the Print for drop-down
list. The output format is determined by the separations style of the page setup.
The Monochrome only option supports calibration of a monochrome device such as
an imagesetter. Choose this option to print a single calibration strip for a page setup
that normally generates separations. (This ability removes any need to produce a page
setup used only for calibration.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 447

 Calibration

13.10.1 Buttons
Clicking a button prints at least one calibration target, and more if you have selected
several page setups using the From Page Setups list, as described in Section 13.10.2.
The options are:

Print uncalibrated target

Prints a target without using a calibration set—even if the
selected page setup has one or more calibration sets associ-
ated with it.

Print calibrated target

Prints a target using the calibration set or sets associated with
the selected page setup. If the output device has not changed
since the calibration set was created then the nominal density
values and the measured ones should be the same.

Print uncalibrated press target

Prints a target for a printing press without using a calibration
set. You must select a page setup that produces separated out-
put.

Print calibrated press target

Prints a target using the calibration set or sets associated with
the selected page setup. You must select a page setup that
uses an Actual Press calibration set and that produces sepa-
rated output. See “Press calibration” on page 442 for more
details.

Print exposure sweep

Uses the values in the associated From, To, and Step text
boxes to print test strips at each of several exposures in the
range. This button prints an exposure sweep for each selected
page setup, so be careful you do not produce more targets
than you intend. This prints an exposure sweep without using
a calibration set—even if the selected page setup has one or
more calibration sets associated with it.

448 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.10 Print Calibration dialog box

13.10.2 Other controls

These controls affect the contents and number of calibration targets produced by the
buttons described in Section 13.10.1.

Print for Choose the set of colors you wish to have printed on print test
strips. You may see just one option, usually Process Col-
ors only, in this list if your output device and the selected
page setup do not support spot colors.
If the output format supports additional colorants, you can
also choose to print the calibration for Spot Colors only,
Process & Spot Colors, or for Monochrome only. The
output format is determined by the separations style of the
page setup.

From Page Setups

Select one or more page setups from this list, if desired.

From / To / Step
Print exposure sweep uses the values in these text boxes as,
respectively, the first, last, and increment values of exposure
when producing an exposure sweep. Take care to enter values
so that the complete sweep corresponds to valid exposure val-
ues for your output device.
For example, values of 100, 120, and 5 produce a sweep
with exposures of 100, 105, 110, 115, and 120.
To recap, the From box is the first exposure setting, the To
box is the last exposure setting and the Step box is the size of
the step. With values of, From 100, To 150 and Step 5. You
will get 11 exposures from 100 to 150 in steps of 5.
Change the Step 5 to Step 10 and you will get 6 exposures
from 100 to 150 in steps of 10.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 449

 Calibration

13.11 Calibration Manager dialog box

Click the Calibration Manager button in the Edit Page Setup dialog box or choose Out-
put > Calibration Manager to display the Calibration Manager dialog box, as shown in
Figure 13.4, page 431.
This dialog box helps you create new calibration sets and manage your existing cali-
bration sets. You can edit sets to keep them accurate by entering data from new targets
or to adapt a copy of an existing calibration set: for example, to make it apply to a
related group of settings. Finally, you can delete any entry in the list by selecting it and
clicking Delete.
Calibration sets are grouped by device and by color space. When you select a device
from the Device drop-down list, the dialog box shows a list of calibration sets for that
device and the currently selected color space. If necessary, select the appropriate color
space from the Color Space drop-down list.
The list of color spaces contains all the color spaces in which a separations style is
defined for the device. For example, if the device has separations styles defined in the
Monochrome and CMYK color spaces, then you can create calibration sets in the
Monochrome or CMYK color space.
Most entries in the Device list are direct output devices—imagesetters, platesetters,
proofing printers (and some preview options and file formats)—but there are also spe-
cial entries for Printing Press and Tone Curves.
The ways in which you create and use calibration sets for these types of entry vary.
Direct output devices
The way to create the calibration set is to print and measure a calibration target,
as described in this chapter.
To use a calibration set, in the Edit Page Setup dialog box, you can choose any
calibration set that was defined for the current device and current color space, in
the Calibration drop-down list. The choice of separations style determines the
color space. Although an imagesetter is not a multi-color device, the calibration
set for an imagesetter contains a calibration curve for each color specified in the
separations style, to take account of the different screen angles used for these
colors.

450 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.11 Calibration Manager dialog box

Note: A special example is the CIP3 output plugin. Its behavior with respect to
calibration is like that of a printing press, because its purpose to provide ink-key
data for use with printing presses.
Printing Press

You can use this special device to calibrate the transfer from film to press. In
general, you do not create calibration sets for a press—though this would be
possible, but expensive, once you had created a calibrated output path to film or
plate. A more common way of working is to adjust the press to conform to one
of the standard references such as SWOP (CGATS TR001) or a BVD-FOGRA
standard and to use the corresponding calibration profile as supplied with the
RIP.
You apply a calibration set for the press that you are using by choosing its name
in the Actual Press drop-down list in the Edit Page Setup dialog box. You can
also adjust a job prepared for a different press; do this by choosing a supplied
profile or measured calibration for that different press in the Intended Press drop-
down list, and making the normal choice for the press that you are using in
Actual Press.

Tone Curves

This special device allows you to make another set of color adjustments in addi-
tion to the device calibration and press calibration. Typically, you might create a
tone curve calibration by estimating the required change at one or two tonal
values and then extrapolating and smoothing to obtain the other data values.
You apply a tone curve calibration set using the Tone Curves drop-down list in
the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
For the special devices, Tone Curves and Printing Press, the Color Space listing
contains all the color spaces for which a profile exists.
To edit an existing calibration set, select it in the list and then click either Edit from
uncalibrated target or Edit from calibrated target, as appropriate.

13.11.1 List headings and entries

The column headings are the various properties of a calibration set. The first column
in the list is the name of the calibration set and the last column is the edited or

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 451

 Calibration

unedited status of the calibration. Each of the remaining columns in the list corre-
sponds to one of the warning criteria in the Edit Calibration dialog box.
The values in the columns for warning criteria show the intended values for use of
each calibration set, as set in the Edit Calibration dialog box. The RIP will warn you if
you select the calibration set for a page setup with conflicting values. You should cre-
ate a calibration set for each combination of media and settings for resolution, dot
shape, range of screen frequencies, exposure, and negative/positive that you expect to
use with each kind of device. Use narrow ranges if you want high accuracy.
In the columns for warning criteria, you may see the following entries:

(Any) Shows that any value is allowed, so the RIP will not warn if
you select the calibration set. This corresponds to clearing the
check box for the warning criterion in the Edit Calibration
dialog box.

(n/a) (not applicable)

Shows that the type of entry is not relevant to the device. For
example: Exp (exposure) is (n/a) if the device does not sup-
port exposure control.
The individual columns are as follows, with the names used in the Edit Calibration
dialog box following in parentheses.

Name The name of the calibration set.

Resolution The resolution setting.

Dot shape The halftone screen dot shape or spot function.

Freq (Screen freq)

The halftone screen frequency.

Exp (Exposure) The exposure setting, if software controllable by the RIP. For
example, this option is not available for the None or Preview
devices.

452 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.11 Calibration Manager dialog box

+ / - (Use for Pos & Neg)

This tells you whether the calibration set can be used for both
positive and negative output, as set by the state of the check
box labeled Use for Pos and Neg in the Edit Calibration dialog
box.
The possible entries are:
Y if you can use the calibration set for both
N if the calibration is for only one of positive or nega-
tive

Profile (ColorPro only) or Press

Entries in the Profile column are n/a except when ColorPro is
enabled, when each entry shows which profile to associate
with the calibration set. When Printing Press is selected
in the Device drop-down list, this column is labeled Press, but
the behavior is the same. The default calibration set is deter-
mined by the selected profile.
Note: A profile is used in ColorPro options to define the
color performance of a combination of output device, media,
and colorants.
If you create calibration sets in the RIP without ColorPro and
subsequently enable ColorPro, the RIP associates the Lin-
ear profile with the existing calibration sets.

Status The Status column tells you about the source and whether the
current data for the given calibration set came from an uncal-
ibrated target or a calibrated target.
The possible entries are:
C for data from a calibrated strip
U for data from an uncalibrated strip
E if you have edited the data since entering the
Calibration Manager
D if you have viewed the default curve without
editing it

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 453

 Calibration

See “Establishing a workflow” on page 435 for a discussion

of why you might use different types of target.
E is an important entry in the Status column because it shows that you have uncommit-
ted changes for that calibration set, which affects the valid commands and the values
you see in the Edit Calibration dialog box.
If you select a calibration set with status E, you can only further edit the values in the
same way, so only the edit button that you have already used on that set is enabled. If
you edit the set, you see the entries you made in the previous edit.
When you click OK or Select in the Calibration Manager, the RIP commits the changes
in all edited calibration sets. Once committed, the status reverts to C or U, both edit
commands are enabled, and you see the perfect curve when you next view the calibra-
tion curve using Edit from calibrated target. (Perfect, in this context means linear only
in some measurement systems.)
Once you have committed changes, the RIP can show you either the calibrated or the
uncalibrated curve, for any future updating of the calibration.
Note: The same calibration set can have status U or C depending on the last target (and
the corresponding edit command) used to update it.

13.11.2 Buttons
Most buttons operate on multiple calibration sets. Only the two edit buttons require
just one selected calibration set.

Edit from uncalibrated target

Click this button to enter the Edit Calibration dialog box for
an uncalibrated target produced on an output device or print-
ing press.

Edit from calibrated target

Click this button to enter the Edit Calibration dialog box for a
calibrated target produced on an output device or printing
press.

454 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

New Click this button to create a new calibration set. You enter the
Edit Calibration dialog box for an uncalibrated target with all
Warning criteria boxes empty. At least, you must name the
new calibration set and provide data values.

Copy Click this button to copy a calibration set. The RIP creates a
new name for the copy by adding characters (for example,
~[1] or ~[2]) after the original name. If the name is longer
than about 13 characters then you can see the added charac-
ters only in the Name field of the Edit Calibration dialog box,
where you can also edit the name to be more meaningful.

Delete Click this button to delete the selected calibration set or sets.
The RIP generates a warning if the selected calibration set is
used in a page setup.
Note: You cannot delete a calibration set if you open the Cal-
ibration Manager from within the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

OK Confirms the changes you have made and exits the dialog
box.

Select This button is available if you opened the Calibration Man-

ager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box and if a calibration
set is selected.
The Select button confirms the changes you have made and
closes this dialog box. In addition, using the Select button dis-
plays the selected calibration set in the Edit Page Setup dia-
log box.

Cancel Closes the Calibration Manager, canceling all changes made

since you displayed this dialog box.

13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

Figure 13.5, page 432, shows the Edit Calibration dialog box.
There are various ways of entering this dialog box, and corresponding variations in its
contents.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 455

 Calibration

13.12.1 Entry methods and variations

There are three ways to enter the Edit Calibration dialog box, corresponding to buttons
in the Calibration Manager:
• New

• Edit from uncalibrated target

• Edit from calibrated target

These ways of entry allow you to follow most working practices. The choice is yours.
When you use the New or Edit from uncalibrated target buttons, the RIP creates a cali-
bration curve directly from the uncalibrated data values you enter.
When you use the Edit from calibrated target button, the RIP creates a calibration curve
more indirectly. In some circumstances and with some devices, this indirect approach
can lead to values that never settle to an error too small to measure; you may find that
the residual errors are acceptable or you may prefer to use Edit from uncalibrated tar-
get.

One way of regarding the process for Edit from calibrated target is to say that the RIP
uses the data values you enter from a calibrated target to detect imperfections in the
existing calibration and adjusts the calibration to remove them. Typically, these imper-
fections and the corresponding adjustments are small (compared to those for uncali-
brated targets) and may provide a better calibration curve than working from
uncalibrated targets. Another advantage of working from a calibrated target is that it
may allow the use of one fewer target—saving both time and media.
The RIP is supplied with default calibration curves for some output devices, each
curve representing the linearized state of a typical device of the same kind. If you are
using ColorPro, the default calibration set is determined by the profile. Without Color-
Pro, the RIP uses the Linear profile.
There are two special devices, shown in the Calibration Manager as Tone Curves
and Printing Press. When you edit a calibration set for one of these devices, the
Edit Calibration dialog box offers slightly different options (as described in
Section 13.5.2 on page 437).

456 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

13.12.2 Checks in the Edit Calibration dialog box

There are various checks on the validity of the calibration curves as you change set-
tings or enter data, and more as you exit the dialog box. The RIP displays an appropri-
ate warning message if any of the checks suggest a problem.

13.12.3 Warning Criteria panel

It is important to choose a calibration set that is appropriate for the job you are pro-
cessing. If you set the warning criteria for a calibration set, the RIP warns you if the
settings in the page setup conflict with these criteria. In addition, when processing the
job, the RIP warns you if the settings in the job conflict with those in the calibration
set. By setting the Abort job if calibration is on, and the selected cal set does not match job
option in the Page Setup Options dialog box, you can tell the RIP to abort any job that
fails the criteria. See Section 5.23.7 on page 191 for details. Otherwise the RIP dis-
plays the warning messages in the Navigator RIP window.
Most of the controls in this panel are paired: a check box and a setting control. To
make the calibration set apply to a particular value or limited range of values for the
setting, select the corresponding box and then enter the value or values. If you do not
select the box, the setting is not tested and the Calibration Manager shows (Any) in
the column for that setting.
Note: If you create a calibration set from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, the RIP
takes the default settings for the Warning criteria from the page setup you are editing.
The warning criteria are:

Profile (not illustrated)

This warning criterion is available only with ColorPro and
appears only if your output device has more than one profile
available. There is no check box associated with Profile: if
present, the profile is always used as a criterion. The choice
of profile determines the default calibration set.

Press (not illustrated)

This drop-down list appears in the Edit Calibration dialog
box only if you are editing the calibration for a printing press.
There is no check box associated with Press: if present, the

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 457

 Calibration

press profile is always used as a criterion. The choice of press

profile determines the default calibration set. If ColorPro is
not enabled, the RIP uses the Linear profile.

Resolution The resolution setting.

Dot shape The halftone screen dot shape or spot function.

Screen freq The halftone screen frequency. You can enter the lower and
upper limits of a range of frequencies and choose the units in
the accompanying drop-down list.

Exposure The exposure setting, if software controllable by the RIP.

Use for Pos & Neg

Select this box to show that the calibration set is suitable for
both positive and negative output. (This can apply only to
monochrome devices.)
Also select the Negative media box if you are measuring from
negative output, and use the Measurements as drop-down list
to show whether you are measuring with a positive or nega-
tive reading densitometer.

13.12.4 Other controls

Name The name of the calibration set. If you alter the name shown
here you are renaming the set, not creating a new set.
This box is empty if you enter this dialog box by clicking the
New button in the Calibration Manager. You must enter a
name before leaving this dialog box.

Channel This drop-down list contains the names of the channels

defined in the calibration set. Depending on the device, there
may be one or several channels. A monochrome device has a
single channel, while a color device has several channels
labeled with the names of the colors. For example: Cyan,
Magenta, and Yellow are possible channels for a 3-color

458 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

device. If the output device can support additional colorants,

you can add a channel for a spot color. The channel (Other
colors in job) allows you to specify a calibration curve
for any spot colors that do not have a separate calibration
curve. Note that although an imagesetter is not a multi-color
device, you can create a separate calibration curve for each
color, to take account of the different screen angles specified
in the separations style.
You must specify a separate calibration curve for each pro-
cess color channel to produce a valid calibration set. The RIP
reminds you to view the data for each channel to assess if it
needs editing, as described in “Exiting the Edit Calibration
dialog box” on page 464. Note that you can also Copy the
data from one channel to another channel.
The RIP does not allow you to change to another channel if
the calibration curve for the current channel is unreasonable.
One example of an unreasonable curve is a non-monotonic
one that rises but then falls before rising again. In such a case,
the RIP warns you and prompts you to correct the curve
before you can change to another channel.

Add To add a channel for a spot color, click the Add button. In the
Add Channel dialog box, select the name of the spot color
from the drop-down list and click the OK button. The list of
spot colors contains all the spot colors named in the separa-
tions styles for the selected device and color space.
Note that in the special case of the Tone Curves and
Printing Press devices, the list includes all the spot col-
ors named in separations styles for any device in the selected
color space. This is because tone curve and press calibration
can be used with any page setup.

Copy If the data for one channel is similar to another channel, you
can copy the data and then edit it, rather than having to enter
it again. For example, to copy the data from the Cyan channel
to the Magenta channel, first select the Magenta Channel and

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 459

 Calibration

click the Copy button. Then, in the Copy Channel Data dialog
box, select the Cyan channel from the drop-down list and
click the OK button.
For some devices, for example with an imagesetter, you
might feel that the calibration of the black channel is also
adequate for the color channels. In this case, use the Copy
command to copy the black channel data to the other chan-
nels.

Delete You can delete any spot color channel from the Channel drop-
down list by selecting the spot color channel and clicking the
Delete button. If you have not defined any spot color chan-
nels, the Delete button is not available.

Measurements as
Use this drop-down list to declare what kind of measure-
ments you are entering in the data boxes. The entries avail-
able in this can vary with the type of output device. Two
examples are Status T, a standard measure of absolute den-
sity, and % Dot, the area coverage of halftone output.
Note that if you choose to edit a different Profile which uses
an alternative measurement system, a Measurement sys-
tem ...not found warning is displayed and the correct
system for the newly chosen profile is automatically selected
in this menu.

Max density (not illustrated)

This control allows for conversion between percent dot and
density. It appears only for the Printing Press device and
for ColorPro profiles that require it to appear.

13.12.5 Values
You can enter values in any form offered to you in the drop-down list labeled Measure-
ments as. Examples are:

• Percent dot (0 through 100%)

460 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

• Dot Gain (relative values expressed in ± values from a perfect transfer curve)
• Status-T Density
• Visual or ISO Visual (which is the same as the Visual channel of Status-T)
• L* (from CIE L*A*B*)

13.12.6 Test strips and data boxes for patches

Each output device can have its own pattern of test strip and there can be varying
numbers of patches on test strips for different devices. If the target uses fewer patches
than the maximum (36) then the remaining data boxes appear empty and unlabeled.
You can exit this dialog box only when all labeled boxes have entries. You can provide
entries by typing, by using Extrapolate, or by using Import and a file of data values.

13.12.7 Controls
Negative media Select the Negative media check box to show that you are
measuring data from negative output media. Leave it clear
when you are using positive media.

Force solid colors

This check box is available only when you are using halftone
devices. When you select this box, any color in a job that uses
the maximum density of any channel is represented by the
maximum amount of that colorant available on the output
device: this guarantees a solid color that is the maximum
deliverable by the output device, rather than a lower density
color (achieved by screening) that calibration has established
as 100%.
The default setting of this option is selected and should be
left for work on most presses—this will ensure that colors
defined as solid in the incoming PostScript file will be
imaged as solid. For Gravure work this option should be
unchecked.
This option does not apply to calibration test strips, only jobs.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 461

 Calibration

For example, this is a desirable setting where you wish to

avoid screening black text, but using it means you do not
have an exact colorimetric match for the color when using
ColorPro. See also the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide.

Smooth This button smooths the values near the ends of a curve: typi-
cally, to approximate a smooth curve where the limited reso-
lution of a measuring device may have truncated similar
values to be the same.

Extrapolate This button is enabled when you are calibrating for a printing
press or when the output device supports extrapolation. There
also needs to be at least one empty data value.
You can use Clear to empty all data values, enter a limited
number of values, and then press Extrapolate to have the RIP
calculate the remaining values. A typical source of values is a
manufacturer’s data sheet, for example, giving press gain in
the form: a gain of 15% at 50%.
In rare cases, extrapolation may not be able to produce a rea-
sonable curve: the RIP displays an error message to tell you if
this has happened. (One example of an unreasonable curve is
a non-monotonic one that rises but then falls before rising
again.)

Clear Click this button to clear all the boxes. This is intended as a
preliminary to entering data in a small number of boxes and
using the Extrapolate button to calculate values for the other
boxes.

Reset Reset deletes all entered data for the calibration set and dis-
plays the default curves for the device (and profile, if Color-
Pro is enabled). For a multi-channel device, it resets all
channels; not just the channel whose curve is displayed.

462 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

Import To import the data from a file rather than typing numbers into
the boxes, click the Import button. The RIP displays the
Import Measurements dialog box, shown in Figure 13.6.

Figure 13.6 Import Measurements dialog box

Note: The data in the file is provided in the correct format by

a separate utility program, Genlin, which supports the use of
various automated densitometers. See Appendix C, “Using
Genlin” on page 539 for details.
The import file contains measured data for some or all of the
channels in the calibration set. For each calibration channel,
you can choose to import the measured data for that channel,
to import data that was measured for a different channel, or to
leave the current data for the calibration channel unchanged.
By default, the RIP uses the measured data for a channel,
where available. If there is no measured data for a channel,
the RIP defaults to the (No Change) option.
The Calibration Channel column contains the names of all the
process and spot color channels defined in the calibration set,
including the (Other colors in job) channel, if appro-
priate. When you select the Channel drop-down list in the
Edit Calibration dialog box, you see the same list of defined
channels. (You can define a spot color channel using the Add
button in the Edit Calibration dialog box: see page 459 for
details.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 463

 Calibration

The drop-down list under the Measured Channel column con-

tains the names of all the measured channels in the import
file, together with the (No Change) option.
To change the setting for a particular calibration channel,
select the corresponding row and then select the name of a
measured channel or (No Change) from the available list.
For example, select the Yellow row and then select Cyan
from the drop-down list to import the data measured for the
Cyan channel to the Yellow calibration channel. A more real-
istic example might be to select an available measured chan-
nel, perhaps Default, for a Black or Gray calibration
channel when the measurement file does not identify the data
in the way expected by the RIP.
Note: The RIP may detect a mismatch between the expected
device, profile or measurement system and display a warning
dialog box. This protects you from importing incorrect data.

13.12.8 Exiting the Edit Calibration dialog box

You must specify a separate and valid calibration curve for each process color channel
to produce a calibration set, unless you want to accept the default curve. The RIP car-
ries out checks on the data before it saves the calibration set.
If you exit the Edit Calibration dialog box without editing any calibration data, the
RIP closes the dialog box and saves the calibration set with a status of D. This shows
that you have viewed the default curve without editing it.
If you have edited the data for one of the process color channels, but not all of them,
the RIP warns you and asks for confirmation that you want to exit without editing the
other channels.
In this context, “editing the data” for a channel means at least viewing the data to
assess if it needs editing. The RIP keeps a record of which process color channels you
have edited and queries you if you have not edited all of them.

464 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 13.12 Edit Calibration dialog box

For example, if you edit only the Cyan channel of a 4-color device, the RIP will query
you about the Magenta, Yellow, and Black channels. The following message is typi-
cal:
You haven’t viewed the following channels: Magenta, Yellow,
Black. Finish editing anyway?

The RIP does not allow you to save an unreasonable curve. One example of an unrea-
sonable curve is a non-monotonic one that rises but then falls before rising again. If
you try to save an unreasonable curve, the RIP warns you and prompts you to correct
the curve before you can save it.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 465

 Calibration

466 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14

Color Separation

This chapter describes some basic concepts of color reproduction and the related parts
of the Navigator RIP.
The concept of color separation is no longer restricted to producing separated output.
When processing any job, the RIP creates a separation for each process colorant and
also, where appropriate, for spot colorants. The output format determines whether the
separations are printed together as a composite, or separated. By configuring these
separations you can control the printing of individual colorants in the job. Although
there is only one separation in the monochrome color space, the RIP provides the
same options for configuring that separation.
Separations information is saved together with screening information in a separations
style, which can be used in several page setups. A separations style is defined for a
specific device, color space, and output format. Selecting a separations style in the
Edit Page Setup dialog box determines the color space of the page setup.
These are the related parts of the Navigator RIP:
• The Separations Manager and Edit Style dialog box. See Section 14.5 on
page 480 for details of the choices you make for all separations. (See Chapter
6, “Screening” for details of the screening options for halftone separations.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 467

 Color Separation

• The Color Setup dialog box. See Section 14.8 on page 493. This dialog box
contains the controls for black generation and undercolor removal, trapping,
and overprinting.
• Use of the Output Controller to view superimposed color separations. See
Section 14.11 on page 509. The Output Controller is available in either of the
multiple modes.
This chapter describes how you can define separations styles, while Chapter 5, “Con-
figuring Output Formats”, describes how you can choose different separations styles
when producing output.

14.1 Introduction
To produce a color image, many reproduction systems take advantage of the fact that
there are small sets of colors that, when mixed in the correct proportions, can produce
any of a very wide range of other colors. For example, combinations of red, green, and
blue inks (commonly known as RGB), or cyan, magenta, and yellow inks (CMY), can
between them produce thousands of different hues.
Color printing more commonly uses CMY colors, with the addition of a black ink to
account for imperfections in the printing process. This manual uses the term CMYK
for the system of color representation using these four inks (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow,
and blacK). These inks are the commonly used process colors. There are several other
terms in common use, some terms using B for Black or referring to the order of print-
ing each ink by reordering the letters: YMCK, YMCB, and KCMY are typical.
Black ink is used for several practical, economic, and quality reasons:
• Black appears very often: for example, in text.
• Black ink is cheaper than colored inks.
• Mixing CMY inks produces an impure black, probably tinged with brown, and
can result in objectionable colored fringes on small objects such as characters
in body text. Additionally, one application of black ink replaces three applica-
tions of colored inks so drying time can be reduced.
• Black can be used to extend the range of colors and tints available from mixing
CMY inks.

468 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.1 Introduction

There are ways to improve reproduction quality or economy beyond the levels possi-
ble with CMYK process inks. There are two general approaches: to vary the number
of process inks (HiFi or N-color printing), or to add spot colors. Each approach has its
own advantages.

14.1.1 Alternative process color systems

N-color printing uses a different number of process colors: fewer for economy in sim-
ple jobs such as forms printing or more for high quality. For high-quality printing, or
HiFi color, at least two distinct types of color schemes are growing in popularity: for
convenience in this discussion we shall call them distinct colorant and photo-ink.
Distinct colorant printing uses a combination of different process colors. For example,
in the PANTONE Hexachrome Color Selector system there are six inks: cyan,
magenta, yellow, black, orange, and green. (Other schemes of six or seven distinct col-
ors are possible but this system is well known.) These colors are chosen as a set to pro-
vide a wider gamut than provided by colorants in the established CMY or CMYK
schemes so, for example, the cyan in a six-color system is unlikely to be the same as
the cyan in a typical CMYK system. To avoid confusion a different naming scheme is
needed. There is not a single fixed set of names: HexC or HexCyan are equally valid
names for the cyan ink and may be used by graphics applications creating jobs.
Photo-ink technologies use a different approach. There are different densities (light
and dark versions) of one or more colorants. A capable system is then able to use the
light ink in highlight areas and the dark ink where more colorant is required. A typical
set of colors is light cyan, dark cyan, light magenta, dark magenta, yellow, and black.
As in distinct colorant systems, these are not the same inks as used in the CMYK sys-
tem and it is important to distinguish between the two systems. Various naming
schemes are possible: a possible example is PhotoCyan Light, PhotoCyan, PhotoMa-
genta Light, PhotoMagenta, PhotoYellow, and PhotoBlack.
The Navigator RIP provides facilities for screening and calibrating both of these color
systems, but the actual availability for use of a distinct colorant or photo-ink color
space depends upon there being an installed output plugin using the new software
facilities. Also, some configuration of the files in which the RIP stores colorant data-
bases may be needed before first use. For example, the Navigator RIP allows for jobs
to use any of the different color naming schemes discussed for distinct colorant and
photo-ink systems and to link these to the internal naming scheme used by the RIP.
Each new naming scheme requires some configuration.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 469

 Color Separation

14.1.2 Spot colors

Spot colors are used in a job when a particular color is used very heavily or must have
a better quality than is available by mixing the process colors. Typical uses of spot
color include colored text, company logos, and colors that are outside the range avail-
able from mixing process colors. Spot colors may also be used to define effects other
than coloring: for example, to place varnishes and glues.

14.1.2.1 The PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM

The Navigator RIP is able to make use of the latest PANTONE MATCHING
SYSTEM. Previously, Pantone colors were identified as CV (coated) and CVU
(uncoated). For example PANTONE 533 CV and PANTONE 533 CVU.
With the new system, colors are identified as M (matte), C (coated) and U (uncoated).
For example, PANTONE 533 M, PANTONE 533 C, and PANTONE 533 U.
Both the new and previous set of names will produce correctly on the output device.
All the Pantone Databases can be found in SW\NamedColor.
To use the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM the color names must match exactly the
names used in the job. For information on how to include color separations see
Section 14.7.1, “Producing separations”.
The Pantone Process database has been released in the Navigator RIP v5.5r3
As previously stated, all the Pantone Databases are in SW\NamedColor. The new
PantoneProcess Database is found in the SW\NamedColor\Examples folder.

To make this database work, it must be referenced in one of the files in SW\Named-
ColorOrder. You do this by editing Intercept, Recombine and Roam.

PantoneProcess should be put before PantoneU if all Pantone colors should be

produced by their CMYK equivalents.
Putting it at the end (that is, after PantoneMatte) will mean only the new PC Pan-
tone colors will be found. (that is, PantoneU and PantoneV colors will still be con-
verted to XYZ).

470 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.2 What color separations are

14.1.3 Types of color jobs

There are two common types of color jobs:
• All the color information is in one job. This is a full-color job, also known as a
color composite.
• The color information has been separated into a page for each color ink. This is
a preseparated job. These pages may be parts of one job or separate jobs.
Composite jobs offer the greatest flexibility in handling jobs and targeting them to dif-
ferent output devices, but many workflows are built around preseparated jobs. The
RIP can recombine many preseparated jobs, provided that the separations are supplied
as one job. (Section 14.4.1 on page 478 and Section 14.4.2 describe the details of
using composite and preseparated jobs with the RIP.)

14.1.4 Navigator RIP

This chapter describes how you can produce output from documents for use in CMYK
color printing. You can also produce output for other color systems, such as RGB and
N-color, and output for jobs that include spot colors. The Navigator RIP accepts either
full-color jobs or preseparated jobs as input, and outputs them correctly.
The Navigator RIP also provides some extensions to the PostScript-language specifi-
cation: for example, the ability to recognize spot colors in documents defined using
the PostScript Level 1 language.

14.1.5 Harlequin ColorPro

Harlequin ColorPro extends the color handling capabilities of the RIP. For example,
you can use ColorPro to intercept CMYK color definitions and convert them to
device-independent color using input profiles. The extra facilities and changes of pro-
cedure associated with ColorPro are described in the separate manual Harlequin Col-
orPro User’s Guide.

14.2 What color separations are

Color printing using this color-mixing method is done using color separations. These
are sets of single-color images that yield a full-color image when combined appropri-
ately. Figure 14.1 shows how four single-color images can be combined to produce an

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 471

 Color Separation

image in different colors. In this grayscale figure, different shades of gray represent
the various colors.
Separations produced in four process colors

Cyan Magenta Yellow Black

The Magazine
a weekly review

Overlay process yields full color images

The Magazine
a weekly review

Figure 14.1 How separations can form a color image

The image in the figure shows the cover page of a fictional magazine. It is mostly
black, but has a small color illustration on the right that consists of some land (in
green), over which there is a road (in pure black), and in the sky (not colored) the sun
(in pure yellow) is shining.
Color images are not produced from separations by mixing inks before application to
the page. Instead, the illusion of a full-color image is produced by seeing different pro-
portions of the four inks laid together on the page. Each separation adds one color
component to the image—cyan, magenta, yellow, and black in turn—and, when they
are overlaid correctly, they form a full-color image.
A color separation is, strictly speaking, a monochrome (that is, one color) image. It is
called a color separation because it is the result of separating one color from the oth-

472 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.2 What color separations are

ers in the color system. For example, the yellow separation in CMYK is a version of
the image that shows only the yellow part of it, separated from the cyan, magenta, and
black. (You can control how colors will be separated from the others in an image.)
Seen in isolation, a single separation may not look much like the full-color image of
which it will form a part but it is usually possible to identify some features of the final
image. In Figure 14.1, the yellow separation shows the sun, which is pure yellow. It
also shows a small amount of yellow in the ground part of the image, which will com-
bine with the cyan separation to form the grass color. However, it does not contribute
to the road or the text, and so it is empty in those places.

14.2.1 Knockouts and overprinting

Suppose we have a very simple image that is a pure magenta background with a pure
yellow square in the middle. The separations produced will be those in Figure 14.4.

Separations for a yellow square on a magenta background

Cyan Magenta Yellow Black

Figure 14.2 Color separations for a simple image, with knockouts

Since the yellow and magenta inks can portray yellow and magenta quite adequately
on their own, the cyan and black separations are empty.
The yellow separation shows a square in the middle and nothing else. The square sig-
nifies the presence of yellow in the image at that point. The magenta separation shows
a white square on a magenta background. So, magenta will be printed in every part of
the image except for that square.
Because magenta will not be printed in the white square, only yellow will appear there
when the separations are put together. This is important, since if magenta was printed

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 473

 Color Separation

there too, it would mix with the yellow, and produce a square that was not pure yellow,
but red. Equally, no other inks will overlap the magenta background, because no sepa-
rations other than the magenta one contribute any color to that region.
An area of a separation that is made empty so that it does not interfere with a graphic
object represented by a color or colors in other separations is called a knockout. This is
because the colored area has been knocked out of the separation.
One problem with using knockouts is that if the separations are not overlaid accurately
enough, there may be a white gap at the edge, as shown in Figure 14.3. This effect is
the product of misregistering the separations, that is, misaligning them when they are
combined. Nevertheless, in cases where printing one ink on top of another would pro-
duce the wrong color, producing separations with knockouts is essential. Generally,
graphic and page design applications produce knockouts automatically.
Inaccuracies caused by misregistered knockouts can be overcome by using special
printing effect such as trapping. The RIP provides some support for trapping. See
“Trapping features” on page 508.

Figure 14.3 Misregistered separations with white gaps

Suppose we have another simple image that is a pure magenta background with a
black square in the middle. Figure 14.4 shows the separations that can be produced.

474 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.3 Producing color images from separations

Separations for a black square on a magenta background

Cyan Magenta Yellow Black

Figure 14.4 Color separations for a simple image, with black overprinting

In this case, we do not need to make a knockout on the magenta separation, because
the black ink should be strong enough to overcome the influence of the magenta ink
beneath it. So we may choose not to let the black separation cause a knockout in the
magenta separation. This effect is called overprinting, and is the opposite of a knock-
out. Overprinting eliminates the risk of finding gaps in the final output, but cannot be
used unless the overprinted ink is strong enough to overcome the effects of the ink or
inks beneath it. When overprinting is not possible, trapping remains a possibility.

14.3 Producing color images from separations

In the RIP, depending on the output format, you can print separations together as a
composite page, colored separations, or each separation as a monochrome page.
If you print a set of monochrome separations for use in the printing process, these sep-
arations can be put together to form a color image. The separations are carefully
placed one on top of the other until all the color details can be seen. How is this
achieved?
Typically, color pictures do not consist only of areas drawn in full-intensity primary
colors. Most of the picture is usually be in various shades and tints. Most printing
presses require screened halftones, so these varying intensities are achieved by using
halftone dots. Each separation, therefore, is usually composed of a pattern of halftone
dots. (See Chapter 6, “Screening”, for details of halftoning.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 475

 Color Separation

In halftoning strategies, continuous tone gray or colored images are imitated by com-
bining dots of different sizes and colors. They are combined in such a way that, to the
human eye, they mix, and the observer sees the intended color image.
To ensure that the colors combine correctly, the positions of the dots on each separa-
tion are calculated carefully. The grids, or halftone screens, for each separation are
aligned at different angles, to avoid moiré patterns.
Once each separation has been produced, the final image can be constructed by print-
ing the separations directly on top of each other. The intermediate stages are progres-
sive proofs. In the CMYK model, this is usually done by printing yellow first, then
magenta, cyan, and finally black. Figure 14.5 and the following figures show the
stages involved when printing color in this way for the example image in Figure 14.1,
page 472.

Blank paper Yellow separation Yellow

Figure 14.5 Yellow separation

Figure 14.5 shows how yellow ink for the yellow separation is printed on blank paper.
You can also preview separation printing on screen in the RIP. See “Roaming separa-
tions” on page 510.
Next, the magenta ink for the magenta separation would be printed on the paper, but
since the separation is empty for this image, nothing is printed.

476 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.3 Producing color images from separations

Yellow Magenta separation Yellow + Magenta

Figure 14.6 Yellow and (empty) Magenta separations

Next, the cyan ink for the cyan separation is printed. To the eye, the pattern of cyan
and yellow dots in the area of land will appear green as simulated in Figure 14.7.

Yellow + Magenta Cyan separation Yellow + Magenta + Cyan

Figure 14.7 Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan separations

Finally, the black ink for the black (K) separation is printed. All of the separations
have been combined, producing a full-color image as simulated in Figure 14.8.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 477

 Color Separation

The Magazine The Magazine

a weekly review a weekly review

Yellow + Magenta + Cyan Black (K) separation Full CMYK image

Figure 14.8 Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, and Black separations

14.4 How color separations are produced

Each job may specify color images in one or more different color spaces, for example:
CMYK, RGB (red, green, and blue), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), or an N-color
space. No matter how a job is specified, the RIP separates that job into one output for-
mat, to suit the output device. Again, in this discussion we will concentrate on CMYK
separations as an example.

14.4.1 Color PostScript-language jobs

Composite color jobs are not described as a series of separations. Instead, each object
on the page is described just once, in full color.
Importantly, the PostScript-language method of describing color is device
independent. That is, no matter what color space is used to describe an image, it can be
rendered on any properly color-calibrated output device that your RIP supports. The
same color job can thus be used to produce, for example, full-color output on an RGB
color printer, or a set of monochrome separations ready to be used in the printing pro-
cess. Some devices, typically desktop printers and proofing systems, can accept con-
tinuous tone input.
Note: If you have ColorPro available, you can apply it to CMYK separations as well
as to color composite CMYK jobs. The separations must be suitable for use with the
Recombine preseparated jobs option described on page 490.

The RIP can take full-color jobs as input, and interpret them once to produce separa-
tion information for each color in the space. In CMYK, this creates four monochrome

478 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.4 How color separations are produced

output pages, each corresponding to a different color separation. When the full-color
image is to be produced, the colored parts of a separation show where inks should be
applied, and the white parts where not. Alternatively, the RIP can print the separations
together as a composite.

14.4.2 Preseparated jobs

Having the RIP produce separations from composite color jobs is not the only means
of producing separations. The job could be separated into one or more PostScript-lan-
guage documents before it reaches the RIP. This might be done by the application pro-
gram in which the job was composed, or by a special separator program that took the
output of the composition program and produced PostScript-language separations
from it.
However, these methods are not optimal. If you preseparate the job, you commit your-
self to printing the job on a device that can recombine the separations it produced: the
documents become device dependent. A process that commits a job to a particular
device is not desirable, because you may need to output your job on a number of dif-
ferent devices. The RIP can recombine certain classes of preseparated jobs: see the
description of the Recombine preseparated jobs option on page 490 for details.
There some circumstances where you must use recombination with preseparated jobs
in order to use features of the RIP, and some of these circumstances apply even when
you wish to produce separations. These features are:
• Output to a composite proofing (or final output) device.
• Color management, using ColorPro.
• Trapping, with the in-built options in the RIP.
• Output to progressive separations.
• Output of separations in a different order.
All these features require the RIP to have access to the complete color of all objects on
a page. To ensure that this is possible for preseparated jobs, select Recombine presepa-
rated jobs. Alternatively, where other settings in the page setup prohibit recombina-
tion, select Reject preseparated jobs.
Note: Both colored separations and progressive separations require the output color
space to match that of the separations. For example, it is not possible to produce col-

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 479

 Color Separation

ored separations or progressive separations from a job preseparated to CMYK if the

output device uses the PhotoInk color space.
The RIPs separation facilities allow you to preserve device independence in your jobs
right up until you wish to interpret it for output on a particular device. However, you
can present device-dependent, preseparated jobs to the RIP if you wish, and it will
process and output them correctly.

14.5 Creating and managing separations

Separations information is saved together with screening information in a separations
style, which can be used in several page setups. A separations style is defined for a
specific device, color space, and output format. Selecting a separations style in the
Edit Page Setup dialog box determines the color space of the page setup.
Separations styles are created and managed in the Separations Manager.

14.6 Separations Manager dialog box

The Separations Manager appears when you click the Separations Manager button in
the Edit Page Setup dialog box, or choose the Color > Separations Manager command.

Figure 14.9 Separations Manager dialog box

The Separations Manager displays a list of all existing separations styles for the cur-
rent device, showing the name of each separations style, the corresponding color
space, and the output format.
To display the list of separations styles for a different device, select a device name
from the Device drop-down list. When you use a device for the first time, the RIP gen-

480 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.6 Separations Manager dialog box

erates a set of separations styles for that device. Some devices can support simple
styles only. Others, like TIFF, can produce many different styles, so the names of the
styles are chosen to avoid ambiguity.
You can edit these separations styles to suit your installation or create new ones.

14.6.1 Controls and actions

The controls below the list allow you to create separations styles, and to edit, copy, or
delete existing separations styles.

Edit Select a separations style and click this button to edit it in the
Edit Style dialog box. A shortcut is to double-click a separa-
tions style.
Note: To rename a separations style, copy it and save the
copy with the desired name, before deleting the original.

New Click this button to create a new separations style. The New
Style dialog box appears, as described in Section 14.6.2.
Once you have set the color space and output format, you
cannot change them for the named separations style.

Copy Select a separations style and click this button to edit a copy.
The New Style dialog box appears, as described in
Section 14.6.2.

Delete Select one or more separations styles and click this button to
delete them together. You cannot delete a separations style if
it is used in a page setup.
You cannot delete the only separations style in a list.

Select This button is available if you opened the Separations Man-

ager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box and a separations
style is selected.
The Select button confirms the changes you have made and
exits the dialog box. In addition, the Select button displays the
selected separations style in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 481

 Color Separation

You can also select separations styles and reorder them by dragging them to new posi-
tions in the list. The order in the Separations Manager is the order of appearance in
menus where you choose a separations style.

14.6.2 New Style dialog box

The New Style dialog box appears when you click the New or Copy button in the Sep-
arations Manager.
Note: If you clicked Copy to display this dialog box, you can change only the style
name: this ensures that the new style is a true copy of the original. Once you have
named the copy and clicked Create, you can modify individual settings in the Edit
Style dialog box.

Figure 14.10 New Style dialog box

Style name Type in a name for the separations style. The style name must
be unique and can be up to 30 characters long.

Color space Select the color space from the drop-down list. You can select
any color space known by the RIP, not just the color space of
the target device. Monochrome, RGB, and CMYK are always
available. If you have installed an N-color device, you can
also use its color space, even if you are not printing to that N-
color device. This choice determines the process colorants
specified in the separations style. The output format specifies
how the colorants will be printed on the output device.

482 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.6 Separations Manager dialog box

Output format Once you have selected the color space, select an output for-
mat from the drop-down list. This specifies how to generate
the output on the target device. The available options depend
on the selected output device and the setting for Color space.
For example, with a typical CMYK device operating in its
own color space, you can generate output as monochrome
separations, as colored separations (either single or progres-
sive proofs), or as a composite. For an RGB output device,
you can convert CMYK or N-color separations to RGB out-
put, and so on. When an arrow appears in the output format
name, it indicates that the color space does not match that of
the output device.
Note: Once you have set the color space and output format, you cannot change them
for the named separations style.
Click the Create button to open the Edit Style dialog box, described in Section 14.7 on
page 484. Click Cancel to discard your changes immediately.

14.6.3 Selecting several separations styles

You can select multiple separations styles when you want to delete or reorder them.
Use the following keys:

Shift
To select a block of separations styles that appear together in the list, select the first
style in the block, then, while holding down the Shift key, select the last style in the
block.

Ctrl
To select several separations styles, regardless of whether they form a continuous
range, hold down the Control key while selecting the styles you wish to delete.

14.6.4 Closing the Separations Manager

You must close the Separations Manager before you can use any tool bar buttons or
menu options in the RIP.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 483

 Color Separation

Click OK to confirm all the changes you have make in the Separations Manager and
Edit Style dialog boxes. The OK button saves the changes you have made and closes
the Separations Manager. If you opened the Separations Manager from the Edit Page
Setup dialog box, you can also save the changes by clicking the Select button. In addi-
tion to saving the changes, the Select button displays the selected style in the Edit Page
Setup dialog box. Click Cancel to discard all changes.
Note: If you open the Separations Manager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box,
changes that you make in the Separations Manager are independent of the Edit Page
Setup dialog box. For example, if you create a separations style, and close the Edit
Style dialog box with OK, and the Separations Manager with OK or Select, the new
style will remain even if you click Cancel in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

14.7 Edit Style dialog box

The Edit Style dialog box appears when you create or edit a separations style in the
Separations Manager. It contains the options related to separations and, where appro-
priate, to screening. There are two forms of the dialog box:
• If the output format of the separations style supports screening controlled by
the RIP, the Edit Style dialog box contains options that allow you to set up
defaults and override the screening parameters requested in a job. See Chapter
6, “Screening” for a description of these screening options: try starting with
Figure 6.2, page 205.
• Otherwise, a more compact dialog box displays only the options for separa-
tions, as shown in Figure 14.11. This form of the dialog box suits contone
output and also output to devices and processes that do their own screening.
The remainder of this section describes the separations options appearing in both
forms of the dialog box.
Note: There are also controls for black generation for CMYK output and overprinting
in the Color Setup dialog box, accessed from the Color Setup Manager or the Separa-
tions, Screening, and Color section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box. (See
Section 14.8 on page 493.) Also, trapping options are available from the Separations,
Screening, and Color section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box. (See Section 14.10 on
page 508).

484 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.7 Edit Style dialog box

Figure 14.11 Edit Style dialog box

This dialog box contains a list showing the separations that the RIP can produce.
There are initially separations for the process colors in the selected color space. In
Figure 14.11 there are separations for the four process colors in the CMYK color
space.
If the chosen output format supports additional colorants, you can control the printing
of spot color separations using the (Other colors in job) entry, or you can add
a separation for a specific spot color.
The order in the list defines the order of production of separations on output. If the
output device can generate separations in a different order, you can move a selected
color up and down the list by selecting it and dragging to the new position.
You can rename or delete spot color separations. You cannot delete the standard pro-
cess color separations from the list, nor can you change their names. You may, how-
ever, ask the RIP not to produce a certain separation.
For particular jobs, you may want to vary the settings in the interests of efficiency or
to ensure compatibility with PostScript-language code that uses Level 1 operators. For
example, the default settings produce separations for all process colors, so you may
want to turn off some process colors if a job is mainly defined in spot colors. Also for
example, if you need to reprint just a single separation (and it is not saved in the
Output Controller), you can turn off all the other separations.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 485

 Color Separation

The Print option in the Edit Style dialog box determines which separations are pro-
duced. The RIP produces all those separations marked as Yes and the non-blank sepa-
rations marked as Not Blank.
Note: If you are printing a preseparated job, and you wish to not produce some separa-
tions, select Recombine preseparated jobs, even if you then wish the RIP to produce
output separations. The RIP produces all separations of a preseparated job except
when recombining.
If you are producing screened separations, you can control the screening of process
and spot colors by using the screening options in the Edit Style dialog box. See Chap-
ter 6, “Screening” for a description of these options.
Note: The separations shown in this dialog box always take effect for jobs that do not
specify their own separations. If the job attempts to specify separations, you must
select the Override separations in job check box if you want to produce the separations
shown here.

14.7.1 Producing separations

The boxes below the list of separations allow you to control the printing of process
color separations and change the ink type. If the chosen output format supports addi-
tional colorants, you can also control the printing of spot color separations. Any spot
color not explicitly listed is controlled by the (Other colors in job) settings.
With the default settings, if a job calls for spot colors not named in the list of separa-
tions, the RIP converts those spot colors to the appropriate combination of process
colors.
To change the settings for an existing colorant, select the colorant from the list and
edit the values in the boxes below.
Note: If the output format of the separations style supports screening, you can also
change the screen angle of the process color or spot color separation. See
Section 6.5.1, “Changing angles for separations” for details.

Separation The name of the separation. To rename a spot color separa-

tion, type the new name into the text box. You cannot rename
process color separations.

486 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.7 Edit Style dialog box

Warning: The name you enter for the spot color must match
the one used in the job in every respect: upper and lower case,
use of embedded space characters and any trailing CV or CU
suffixes. For example: a typical Pantone specification is
PANTONE 386 CV but applications may report this in differ-
ent ways.

Print If this option is set to Yes, a page will be produced for the
separation, even if the separation is blank. If this option is set
to No, the page will be omitted, although any effects it might
have on the others are still calculated. You might use this fea-
ture to suppress process color separation for a job using spot
colors only. If the option is set to Not Blank, the RIP will
produce a page for that separation as long as the separation is
not blank.
For example, to produce only the process colors and convert
all colors defined as spot colors in the job to process colors,
set each process color to Yes and set (Other colors in
job) to No. These are the default settings.
To produce a separation for every spot color requested in the
job and for each of the process colors, set each process color
to Yes and set (Other colors in job) to Yes. Then any
calls for unlisted spot colors in a particular job mean that the
RIP produces the required separations automatically for that
job.
If you want to produce a separation for a specific spot color
and to convert all other spot colors which may be included in
the job to process colors, set the specific spot color to Yes
and set (Other colors in job) to No.
Of these ways, the one you choose is likely to be dictated by
the characteristics of your output device and process, such as
the number of inks available in one pass.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 487

 Color Separation

Angle This box appears only if you are editing a halftone (screened)
style. Enter the screen angle you want to use for this separa-
tion. See Section 6.5 on page 213 for more details of screen
angles.
Note: This box defines a default value, used if the job does
not set its own screen angles. If you wish to use angles
entered here even when the job requests other values, select
the check box Override angles in job, also in this dialog box.
Note: If you have one of the optional TrapPro features enabled, you can create sets of
trapping rules and apply them within the RIP. From the Eclipse Release of the Naviga-
tor RIP, the ink set options have been removed from the Edit Separations dialog and
placed within their own Ink Set Manager. TrapPro and the Ink Set Manager options
are fully described in the separate TrapPro User Manual.

New Use this button to add a separation for a spot color to the list.
A new row appears in the list of separations. Type the name
of the spot color into the first text box below the list, to
replace the text New Color. If required edit the settings for
Print.
Warning: The name you enter for the spot color must match
the one used in the job in every respect: upper and lower case,
use of embedded space characters and any trailing CV or CU
suffixes. For example: a typical Pantone specification is
PANTONE 386 CV but applications may report this in differ-
ent ways.

Delete Use this button to delete the selected spot color separation.
The separation disappears from the list. You cannot delete
process color separations.

488 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.7 Edit Style dialog box

14.7.2 Other options

There are some other controls in the Edit Style dialog box, not linked so closely to
individual separations.

Override separations in job

The separations shown in the Edit Style dialog box always
take effect for jobs that do not specify their own separations.
If the job attempts to specify separations, you must select the
Override separations in job check box if you want to produce
the separations shown here.

Use Level 1 spot colors

Spot color is not a standard part of the PostScript Level 1
specification. It is a widely used convention that was defined
later. If you wish to separate composite jobs using this spot
color convention, select this box.
Warning: We strongly advise you not to select this box when
defining a separation style to which you will supply presepa-
rated jobs. The box is only enabled if you using a CMYK
separation style and not recombining, but you might use a
style with these settings and submit preseparated jobs in
order to override screen angles or other settings. (You cannot
select this box when you are using a monochrome separation
style or you have selected the Recombine preseparated jobs
box.)
When you select this box, the RIP converts conventional rep-
resentations of spot colors in PostScript Level 1 language
documents to the current PostScript Language compatibility
level. By default, the RIP converts the spot colors to
LanguageLevel 3. To convert the spot colors to
LanguageLevel 2 style, change the PostScript Language com-
patibility level in the Page Setup Options dialog box.
This check box has an effect only when producing spot col-
ors.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 489

 Color Separation

Override angles in job

This box appears only if you are editing a halftone (screened)
style. Select this box if you want to ignore any screen angles
set in the job. See Section 6.5 on page 213 for more details.
This option is automatically selected when Recombine presep-
arated jobs is checked.

Reject preseparated jobs

If you select the Reject preseparated jobs check box, the RIP
will not process preseparated jobs. If this check box is
selected, then the Recombine preseparated jobs check box is
disabled.

Recombine preseparated jobs

The Recombine preseparated jobs check box allows you to
recombine certain classes of preseparated jobs. Recombining
may be useful or necessary in a variety of cases: for example,
when proofing on a full-color device or retargeting from one
kind of final output device to another kind. See
Section 14.7.3 for details of the suitable jobs.
From Eclipse Release SP3, this option will activate Recom-
bine 2.
Note: When using this option, the RIP cannot paint partial
page buffers; expect jobs with pages requiring large amounts
of memory to fail if you have not allocated enough physical
memory.

14.7.3 Recombination
The Navigator RIP Eclipse Release provides a single method of recombination known
as “Recombine 2”. Recombine 1 is replaced completely with Recombine 2 which uses
both object and raster methods where appropriate.
Recombine version 2 provides the following main benefits:
• Improved accuracy of object placement.
• Improved accuracy of the recombined color.

490 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.7 Edit Style dialog box

• Considerable performance improvements for complex jobs.

• Improved accuracy of color management—color management happens after
overprints and recombination has occurred.
The additional functionality may result in a performance overhead proportionate to
the area covered by those objects present in separations which are not being output
and instead converted to process.
Recombine 2 is active as the default. There are some limitations on the jobs that the
RIP can recombine. There are also some classes of jobs where you should make addi-
tional settings.
The limitations listed below apply to Recombine 2:
• The job must consist of process separations, suitable spot colors, where suit-
able is defined in this section, or both. (It is also possible to submit most com-
posite jobs to a page setup using recombination, but see the comments in
Section 14.7.4. This ability minimizes the number of page setups that you must
create and maintain but has no intentional effect on the composite jobs.)
• The names of suitable spot colors must be unambiguous. If the job supplies a
CMYK equivalent for a spot color and the name is recognized by the RIP, that
is sufficient for use with recombine.
• When the job does not contain a process equivalent for a spot color, recombine
can still be used if the RIP can find a correct equivalent name in a RIP named
color database. The RIP searches several files in the SW/NamedColor folder
for an equivalent. These files define several commonly used names, including:
other process colors, such as Red, Green, and Blue; spot colors produced by
some common job-creating applications; and the CV and CVU names defined in
PANTONE Colors.
Note: Some common names—for example, Pink or Mauve—can have slightly
varying definitions in different jobs, because either the creating application or
the designer has used a conflicting definition. One solution is to add a CMYK
equivalent in the job where such a name occurs.
In short, CMYK equivalents for spot colors must exist either in the job or in a
RIP named database.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 491

 Color Separation

• The job must contain all the required separations in one file or AppleTalk con-
nection. It is not possible to recombine jobs where each separation is in its own
file.
• Where the job contains more than one set of separations, separations from each
set (or page) must appear contiguously—for example each page (or set) should
appear in the order, KCMYDE (where D and E represent spot colors). That is,
KCMYDE for the first page, KCMYDE for the second page and so on. The
pages must not appear ordered by colorant. For example: the order
KKK…CCC…MMM…YYY… DDD… EEE… is not allowed. Where there is
only one set (or page) of separations in the job, the order of separations in the
job is unimportant: for example, CMYKDE and KCMYED are both accept-
able.
The additional settings for recombined jobs are:
• The Override angles in job option is automatically selected when Recombine Pre-
separated jobs is selected. It is highly recommended you leave it selected. In the
Edit Style dialog box set the angle you require for each separation. See
Section 6.5 on page 213 for details.
• It is highly recommended that the Override dot shape in job option is selected.
• It is highly recommended that the Override frequency in job option is selected.
• You can also override other screening features if you wish.
Note: Recombine 2 cannot be selected in a page setup which makes use of the
HqnImpose2 procset. Therefore, Recombine 2 cannot be used with any page setup
using Simple imposition. This includes use of the page features: Fill Film, 2 up, 2
across, and several example page features. (The RIP detects when this combination
is attempted and displays a warning.)

14.7.4 Recombination and composite jobs

Recombination is a powerful capability of the RIP. In many cases, it is possible to sub-
mit both composite and preseparated jobs to a page setup that has Recombine presepa-
rated jobs selected. However, there are cases where the nature of the job or other
settings made within the RIP mean that it is necessary to create separate page setups
for composite and preseparated jobs.

492 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

14.7.5 Recombine 2 issues

This section contains points to note when using Recombine v.2. It uses much of the
same code as is used for PDF 1.4 Transparency and therefore has similar issues:
• Color management of DeviceRGB colors with equal color values, that is
R=G=B, are color managed using the CMYK input profile and not the RGB
input profile for all object types except images and shaded fills.
• When recombining preseparated files the Overprint process colors options have
no effect, even if selected.This means that the OverprintProcess, Over-
printWhite, OverprintGray and OverprintBlack user parameters are
not applied to recombined objects. Instead, the overprint effect is equivalent to
the result of outputting the separations of the job on a press. That is, the separa-
tions are individually processed (without recombine) and the results are over-
printed—much the same as using ROAM for all separations for a given page
together.
• When recombining composite files (that is, composite files that have been input
to a recombine setup), the settings of the Overprint process colors options in the
GUI are obeyed.
• If composite jobs are put through a recombined setup using Recombine v2 and
color management, the color management is implemented after any composit-
ing for transparency and after any overprints have been resolved.

14.7.6 Closing the Edit Style dialog box

You must close the Edit Style dialog box to save your changes. You must also close
the Separations Manager before you can use any other part of the RIP.
Click OK to confirm all the changes you have made in this use of the Edit Style dialog
box, including any deletions. This confirmation is provisional: you must also click OK
or Select in the Separations Manager to finally save your changes. Click Cancel to dis-
card your changes immediately.

14.8 Color Setup

In the Navigator RIP, Eclipse Release, the Color Setup options have been changed.
The Color Options button is removed from the Page Setup dialog box and is replaced

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 493

 Color Separation

by a Color Setup Manager and Color Setup dialog box. The trapping controls appear
in the Trapping section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
This method allows each color setup to be saved and used with any number of page
setups. The location of these controls in an independent dialog box allows for UCR
and trapping when producing composite color pages (for example when driving a
color device directly), as well as in separated output. It also allows for the controls to
be made unavailable when inappropriate.
If you wish to create a setup with Color management including, ICC profiles, custom
rendering intents or perform press emulation on a proofer, you should use the Harle-
quin ColorPro option. This option is activated by a password and you should contact
your dealer for more information.
If you do have Harlequin ColorPro activated in your Navigator RIP and you wish to
create a setup with color management, you should consult the Harlequin ColorPro
User Guide.

14.8.1 Define color setups (no color management)

Follow these steps to create a customized color setup. Note that a color setup corre-
sponds to a particular device and color space.
1. Choose Color > Color Setup Manager. The Color Setup Manager dialog appears.

Figure 14.1 Color Setup Manager dialog box

494 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

2. In the Color Setup Manager dialog box, select the device for which you want to
create a color setup. If you are creating CMYK Separations (halftone), you
should select Printing Press in this option.
3. If necessary, select the color space for which you want to create this color setup.
Note that when you create a page setup, the separations style you choose deter-
mines the color space of the page setup.
4. At this point you have the option to select either, New ‘No Color Management’
setup, or New ‘ColorPro’ setup (which is only available by use of a password). If
you can select New ‘ColorPro’ setup, you should consult the Harlequin ColorPro
User Guide for more details.

Figure 14.2 New Color Setup dialog box

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 495

 Color Separation

The following tables describe the options available in this dialog.

Table 14.1 Input Document Controls in the New Color Setup dialog box

Fields Description

Override color Select this check box to override any color management
management in job supplied in the job and use the options set in this dialog
box.
If you do not check this box, the Navigator RIP searches
the job for a color space array, embedded ICC profile, or
a color space resource. If there is such an element, the
Navigator RIP uses it to transform the relevant object on
the page and then treats the object as defined in device-
independent color. See Appendix B, “Jobs Containing
Color Management Data” for details.
Note: A PDF/X-3 file containing an OutputIntents
dictionary will be color managed using the ICC profile
indicated by the OutputIntents dictionary, as long as
the job uses a device independent color space and the
Override color management in job option is not selected

496 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

Table 14.1 Input Document Controls in the New Color Setup dialog box (Continued)

Fields Description

Override overprint There is a new PostScript operator called

mode in job setoverprintmode which is the PostScript equivalent
of the PDF gstate OPM flag.
If an object is set to overprint and OPM or
setoverprintmode is on, the Navigator RIP drops any
colorants which have a zero value. This is called
“implicit overprinting”.
This is what the Override overprint mode in job option
controls.
If the Override overprint mode in job option is checked, the
Overprint process colors option (described below) is
always honored and any overprintmode and OPM
parameter in the job is ignored. If it is not checked, any
overprintmode and OPM parameter in the job will be
used and the Overprint process colors setting will be used
as the default value.
Overprint process If this option is selected and overprinting is switched on
colors for an object, the RIP overprints any process color
component defined as 0 in the CMYK color space, or as
1 in the RGB color space. That is, the component is
treated as transparent.
When this option is not selected, a process color compo-
nent produces a knockout on the separation. However, if
overprinting is switched on for an object, the RIP over-
prints colorants that are explicitly set to overprint using
the Harlequin extension to setcmykcolor.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 497

 Color Separation

Table 14.1 Input Document Controls in the New Color Setup dialog box (Continued)

Fields Description

Drop white objects When Overprint process colors is selected, Drop white
objects determines how the RIP handles white objects:
objects defined as 0 0 0 0 setcmykcolor,
1 setgray, or 1 1 1 setrgbcolor.

If this option is selected and overprinting is switched on

for that object, the white object simply disappears from
the separations.
If this option is not selected, the white object knocks out
underlying objects, even when overprinting is
switched on.
By default, this option is not selected.
Overprint grays Select this object to enable the Cyan, Magenta, and
Yellow colorants to be overprinted rather than knocked
out when a color is specified as gray (with the PostScript
language setgray operator or spot color converted to a
gray level) and the job requests overprinting. This
behavior is not defined by the PostScript language, and
though it is unusual for a job to rely on it, sometimes a
job will assume this, especially when the gray tint arises
from a named Black spot color which is converted to
process.

498 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

Table 14.1 Input Document Controls in the New Color Setup dialog box (Continued)

Fields Description

Overprint gray Overprint behavior changed from Navigator RIP version

images 4.1 to 5.x and beyond. While the old behavior is deemed
incorrect, there is a desire to selectively use the old
behavior because of the un-predictability of some graphic
applications and to provide for end-users the ability to
handle legacy work.
The user parameter is called OverprintGrayImages,
with a default of true which when set overprints gray
images. If it is set to false, gray images will knock out
of CMY backgrounds.
Overprint 100% When this option is selected, the RIP overprints 100%
black black rather then generating knockouts in the other sepa-
rations. The black channel or separation is generated as
normal but, depending upon the characteristics of the
other inks, may need to be applied last in the combination
process so that it overprints all colors necessary. If this
option is selected, overprinting occurs regardless of
whether overprinting is switched on for that graphics
object. How the overprinting of the other separations is
done depends on the Image only black option.
There is no performance penalty incurred by using this
feature—in fact, it may be slightly faster to overprint,
given that knockouts do not have to be calculated.
This feature only applies to black objects, not to indi-
vidual pixels of a continuous tone image that happen to
be 100% black.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 499

 Color Separation

Table 14.1 Input Document Controls in the New Color Setup dialog box (Continued)

Fields Description

Image only black This option controls whether solid black objects appear
in the process color separations other than Black when
the Overprint 100% black option is selected. If this box is
selected, the RIP ignores the other process color compo-
nents of black objects and no trace of the objects appears
in those separations. If this box is not selected, then the
other process color components are taken into account. If
this box is not selected, the objects appear in any separa-
tion where the color component is defined as non-zero in
the CMYK color space (or not 1 in the RGB color space).
Process color components defined as 0 in the CMYK
color space or 1 in the RGB color space are always over-
printed.
Use late color Color management modules prior to the Navigator RIP
management ™
Genesis Release instigated color management at the
front-end of the process, (with the exception of recom-
bine jobs where color management was applied at the
back-end of the process). Applying late color manage-
ment gives better quality results with blended colors.
See Section 14.8.2 on page 502 for more information.

Table 14.2 Input Separation Detention angles in Job options in Color Setup dialog box

Fields Description

Cyan The angles specified in these fields help the ColorPro

Magenta application detect the individual plates within a job. The
default angles will usually work.
Yellow
Black If you do change one of these values, for example Cyan
to 30.00, and the incoming job has Cyan at 15°, you will
encounter problems.

500 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

Table 14.3 Output Controls for RGB options in the New Color Setup dialog box

Fields Description

Black generation This is the process of computing how much, and where,
black should be added to the image.
This option determines how much black ink should be
used to reproduce colors. Select Ignore, Minimum,
Light, Medium, Heavy, Maximum or UCR from the menu.

Undercolor removal (UCR) is the process of reducing

the amount of other colors present where the black is
added.
Override black Rarely, a job will specify black generation itself. You can
generation in job force the scheme set in the Color Setup dialog box to
override those set by the job, by selecting this check box.
Max. ink This value constrains the maximum amount of all four
CMYK colors that will be generated in the conversion
process. Similarly, colors specified explicitly as black are
not affected by this.
Max. black This value is the maximum amount of black ink that will
be generated by the color conversion process. Note that
colors specified explicitly as black are not affected by
this setting.
®
Convert RGB to true Some applications, and especially Microsoft Word, use
black RGB colors for everything, including solid black—
coded as 0 0 0 setrgbcolor (or 0 0 0 in a
DeviceRGB color space). You should choose this option
to force the RIP to intercept blacks coded in this way and
convert them to (0 0 0 1 in) a CMYK color space.

After setting options in the New Color Setup dialog box, click Save As and assign a
name to this color setup. The Color Setup Manager dialog box displays the new color
setup that you have created. Note that you can also Edit, Copy, and Delete color setups
from the Color Setup Manager.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 501

 Color Separation

5. Click OK to confirm all the changes you have make in the Color Setup Manager
and New Color Setup dialog boxes.
The OK button saves the changes you have made and closes the Color Setup Manager.
If you opened the Color Setup Manager from the Edit Page Setup dialog box, you can
also save the changes by clicking the Select button. In addition to saving the changes,
the Select button displays the selected color setup in the Edit Page Setup dialog box.
Click Cancel to discard all changes.

14.8.2 Notes on Use late color management

The Use late color management option has been introduced in the Harlequin Genesis
™
Release to overcome problems with color managing blended colors. In this context,
blended colors means both the compositing of transparency in PDF jobs, and also the
overprinting of opaque objects in PostScript language and PDF files.
In order to color manage blending correctly, the blending must be performed in the
same color space that the designer worked in when creating the job. For example,
SWOP with a range of Pantone colors. In theory, if this type of job is printed on a
SWOP press that supports all the Pantone colors present in the job, the rendering of
the blends will be correct.
Problems arise when the job is printed to a device with different characteristics to the
color space the designer worked in. A typical usage is the need to color manage the
job when printing to a proofing device. In this case, to reproduce the blending the
designer intended, the blending should be performed in SWOP and result then color
managed to the proofing device. Historically, this has been difficult to do accurately
without using a form of “double pass” RIP processing. That is, the job is RIP pro-
cessed once to (for example) TIFF, in which the blending is in SWOP. The second RIP
pass then color converts the TIFF and outputs the result to the proofing device.
When the Use late color management option is off, the Navigator RIP will perform color
management of colors in the job before blending of either transparency or overprints.
The RIP performs blending by using the available information to make a “best guess”
at the blended colors, but at a late stage in the RIP process and without full knowledge
of the color values and other graphics state attributes. This method usually makes the
blended regions visible, although they are not correctly color managed. And if spot
colorants are converted to process colors, overprinting of these objects is disabled by
default. This form of color managed blending is used in the Navigator RIP v5.0
onwards.

502 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

When the Use late color management option is selected, color managed blending is per-
formed in a single pass of RIP processing with its obvious efficiency benefits. The
Use late color management option is available on both ColorPro and No color manage-
ment color setups.

The option is available in No color management setups to achieve better rendering of

overprinted spot colors. For accurate proofing of jobs containing transparency and/or
overprints, it is recommended that the Use late color management option is used.
Please note the following points when using late color management:
• The definitions of tint transforms of spot colors in the job (which are used to
derive the CMYK equivalents) will only be used to derive the CMYK equiva-
lent of the 100% color value. Tints will be rendered with CMYK values
derived from the 100% spot.
• If a job contains multiple color spaces of the same spot color, and where there
are multiple definitions of the tint transform, only the first tint transform
encountered will be used; as above.
• Special treatment of DeviceRGB and device independent colors in the job is
currently required. That is, the RIP will first color manage these color spaces to
a CMYK color space defined by the CMYK input profile. If this is not defined,
or a No color management setup is used, SWOP (CGATS TR001) will be used.
The downside of this method is that the CMYK input profile may restrict the
gamut of the colors in the job for these color spaces to less than the gamut of
the output device.
• Late color management is forced on when used with recombine and also when
outputting to a DeviceN device, such as a Hexachrome device.

14.8.3 Overprinting controls

Where 100% process black is present and in other circumstances, you may wish to
perform overprinting rather than causing knockouts in the other separations. This
applies both to composite color output and to screened output. (See “Knockouts and
overprinting” on page 473 for an introductory discussion.).

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 503

 Color Separation

14.8.3.1 Color managed overprints for DCS

DCS (Desktop Color Separation) jobs that contain spot color data must be overprinted
for good quality output. If the output device does not support those spot colorants, the
resulting output will be inaccurate, with a warning that the spot color is missing.
With the introduction of backdrop rendering the RIP has the ability to interpose a vir-
tual device which does support those spot colors, and where correct overprinting will
result. The RIP can then color convert the backdrop to the final output producing
accurate results.
A way of using backdrop rendering is to set Recombine within the RIP user interface.
For more information see Section 14.7.4 on page 492. You should note that RIP per-
formance is affected by backdrop rendering because the RIP implements color man-
aged overprints by compositing rather than direct rendering.

14.8.4 Black generation and undercolor removal

With regard to the CMYK color space, in principle, all colors can be represented with
cyan, magenta, and yellow. In practice, however, the theoretically correct combination
of these three colors will not produce the color expected when printed, because of the
limitations of inks.
To overcome this practical problem, pure black ink is used to improve color reproduc-
tion on the printed page. This is the role of the K or black separation. Black is added to
produce pure black on the page, because using a combination of cyan, magenta, and
yellow usually gives dark brown, rather than black, when printed. Therefore, black
text is printed with black ink.
Black is also added in color regions of an image to strengthen color tones. The appli-
cation of black can often be very effective for improving an image. The amount used
can be varied according to the effects you wish to achieve.
Black generation is the process of computing how much, and where, black should be
added to the image.
Note: If you have Harlequin ColorPro available, it is able to add black in ways more
subtle than the controls described here, using Color Rendering Intents. See the sepa-
rate Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for details.
When converting color descriptions expressed in RGB (or in HLS, device-indepen-
dent color, or other spaces which end up as RGB) to CMYK for printing, the RIP must

504 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

decide how much of a color is to be represented by black ink, and how much by the
others. Because a perfect theoretical description of the color image is provided by the
CMY components, if black is added without the appropriate removal of some of the
cyan, magenta, and yellow, the color produced on the printed page will not be the one
intended.
Undercolor removal (UCR) is the process of reducing the amount of other colors
present where the black is added. The legend ucr represents undercolor removal in the
graphs later in this section.
Note: The black generation settings in this dialog box operate in the RIP without Har-
lequin ColorPro. With ColorPro enabled, an alternative method is normally used. The
settings made here are used with ColorPro only when sending RGB data direct to a
four-color device, without first converting to a device-independent color space.

14.8.5 Black generation

You can specify how black generation and undercolor removal should be done in the
New Color Setup dialog box. The settings in this dialog box control the way the RIP
will apply black by constructing internal calls to the PostScript-language operators
setblackgeneration and setundercolorremoval. The dialog box offers a
number of black generation schemes. Factors that you should take into account when
selecting a scheme include the qualities of the various inks (discussed in
Section 14.8.6 on page 507) and printing media.
The scheme used is controlled by the Black generation drop-down list. The options are:
• Ignore
• Maximum
• None (the default)
• Light, Medium, and Heavy
• UCR
Sections 14.8.5.1 through 14.8.5.5 describe these options.
Rarely, a job will specify black generation itself. You can force the scheme set in the
dialog box to override those set by the job, by selecting the Override black generation in
job check box.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 505

 Color Separation

14.8.5.1 Ignore
This option does not set black generation and undercolor removal. It replaces as much
color as possible with black, while maintaining the intended color, irrespective of ink
densities. Because no PostScript-language code for performing undercolor removal is
generated, it is the fastest method.

14.8.5.2 Maximum

K, ucr

CMY

This option introduces a lot of black, taking into account the maximum black ink den-
sity. Specify the maximum black ink density in the adjacent Max black text box as a
percentage value, as described in Section 14.8.6 on page 507.

14.8.5.3 None
CMY

K, ucr

This option performs no black generation or undercolor removal. Black is represented

as a mixture of cyan, magenta, and yellow, leaving only those colors expressed explic-
itly in the PostScript-language job as black—rather than as a mixture of red, green,
and blue, or as device independent color—to be rendered on the black separation.

506 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.8 Color Setup

14.8.5.4 Light, Medium, and Heavy

Light Medium Heavy
K K K

CM ucr
CMY
ucr
CM
ucr

These options introduce black gradually, according to exponential functions, with pro-
portionately smaller amounts of black added and color removed for the lighter colors
than the darker ones. This is again subject to the constraints of maximum ink densi-
ties, specified in the adjacent boxes. See Section 14.8.6 for details of controlling these
ink densities.

14.8.5.5 UCR
K

CMY

ucr

Instead of an exponential curve, this option adds no black until the maximum colored
ink density is reached and then adds black linearly up to its maximum. The maximum
colored ink density is the maximum ink density value minus the maximum black den-
sity value. See Section 14.8.6 for details of controlling these ink densities.

14.8.6 Ink densities

Most of the black generation styles are affected by the ink densities set in the two Max
ink and Max black options in the black generation section of the Color Setup dialog
box.
You should select these values with consideration for paper and press characteristics.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 507

 Color Separation

14.9 Color separation angles in job

The RIP sometimes needs to identify which colors are represented in jobs: for exam-
ple, when recombining a preseparated job. Often there are well structured identifiers
that give the answer directly and unambiguously.
Where there is not an obvious identifier, the RIP analyzes the contents of the job to
decide a likely color. The screen angle is one of the items that the RIP analyzes.
Under the label Color separation angles in job, set the Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black
text fields to the screen angles that the incoming job uses for these colors.
Note: The angles in this section are the screen angles expected in the incoming job,
not the angles used for output. The angles used on output are set in the Edit Style dia-
log box, and can be entirely different.

14.10 Trapping features

Trapping options are found in the Trapping section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box
and gives some control over trapping; that is, overprinting edges of objects in the out-
put to avoid white gaps showing when printed due to slight misregistration.
If your copy of the RIP has the one of the optional TrapPro features enabled, you can
create sets of trapping rules and apply them within the RIP. TrapPro is fully described
in the separate TrapPro User Manual. (You must enable TrapPro by obtaining a key-
word and selecting the TrapPro item while following the procedure described in
Section 6.11.1 on page 235 of this manual.)
Making full use of trapping in the RIP can require the choice of appropriate options
both in the applications creating the PostScript-language job and in the RIP.
From Navigator RIP Eclipse SP1, PDF jobs containing PJTF (Portable Job Ticket For-
mat) structures that detail trapping parameters are supported with respect to making
the parameters available to TrapPro. Previously, PJTF structures were ignored. There-
fore, if TrapPro is enabled (that is, just the password entered, not necessarily any
parameters set established via the GUI), a PDF job containing trapping parameters
(via PJTF structures), will be trapped as dictated by those parameters.

508 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.11 Pages in the Output Controller

14.10.1 Trapping and QuarkXPress

The Navigator RIP supports trapping facilities provided by QuarkXPress and its set-
trap PostScript-language extension.

QuarkXPress has the ability to generate arbitrary trapping. It can do so in either of two
ways:
• By including explicit overprinted borders in the PostScript-language page
description it produces. This method works on all RIPs but may produce large
job files.
• By indicating that a capable RIP should generate the trapping. The RIP can do
this if you select the settrap (Quark) option. The QuarkXPress operator
must use a printer description file declaring that the RIP supports this feature.
Using this option allows QuarkXPress to generate more compact PostScript
code, which saves disk space and may lead to faster interpretation by the RIP.

14.10.2 Controls in the Navigator RIP

The Trapping drop-down list in the Trapping section of the Edit Page Setup dialog box
always provides the following options:

None This option performs no trapping.

settrap (Quark)
Use this option to have the RIP generate overprinted borders
according to instructions embedded in suitable jobs by
QuarkXPress. See Section 14.10.1 for details of how to pro-
duce suitable jobs.
If your copy of the RIP has one of the optional TrapPro features enabled, there may be
extra entries in this list and you also can create new sets of trapping rules that also
become entries in this list, as described in the separate TrapPro User Manual.

14.11 Pages in the Output Controller

In general, the RIP treats separations the same way whether they are the result of pro-
cessing a preseparated job or the result of separating a composite color job within the
RIP.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 509

 Color Separation

Depending on the separations style, each page of a composite color job can produce
several pages, one for each separation. Once these pages are in the Output Controller,
the RIP handles them in the same way as any other pages.
The pages are tagged with their color, which appears after the name in the Output
Controller. For example, the job picture.ps separated for CMYK printing would
have four entries in the queue, as follows:
picture.ps (C)
picture.ps (M)
picture.ps (Y)
picture.ps (K)

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black are abbreviated to C, M, Y, and K respectively. Red,
green, and blue are abbreviated to R, G, and B respectively. Spot color separations are
tagged with the full name of the separation.

14.11.1 Roaming separations

When you view a separation on a color display, using Roam, it is displayed in the
appropriate color, at least until you choose to change that display color. The Roam
window also displays the title of the page, an abbreviation for the color, and the reso-
lution. Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black are abbreviated to C, M, Y, and K respec-
tively. Red, green, and blue are abbreviated to R, G, and B respectively. An asterisk
character ( * ) indicates a spot color separation, and a percent character ( % ) indicates
grayscale.

Shift
You can view a block of several separations at once. Click to select the first one, then
hold down the Shift key and click to select the last one.
When you view multiple separations, the colors are overlaid to give an impression of
how they will look when combined on paper. For example, in a high-resolution
screened picture, you should be able to see the rosettes of the screen pattern. (See
Chapter 6, “Screening”, for more discussion of viewing superimposed screens.)
You can roam a separation in a different color, which can be useful, for example, if
you want to see the differences between two separations of the same color. To high-
light the differences, change the roam color of one page and then roam the pages
together. For details of changing the roam color, see Section 14.11.3

510 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 14.11 Pages in the Output Controller

For more information on roaming, see Section 5.5.3 on page 125.

14.11.2 Roaming composite pages

When you view a composite page using Roam, by default the RIP shows all the sepa-
rations in the composite page together.
You can reduce the number of separations that you can see in the Roam or Reduced
Roam window using the Roam Options dialog box. See Section 5.5.3.1 on page 126
for details.

14.11.3 Changing the color in Roam

You can inspect and change the colors displayed in the Roam window for the colo-
rants in individual separations and composite page buffers. To do this, select a page
buffer in the Output Controller, click Info, and in the Info dialog box click Change
roam color. Figure 14.12 shows the dialog box that appears.

Note: You cannot inspect or change the roam color while you are roaming a page
buffer from any page in the same job.

Figure 14.12 Change Roam Color dialog box

The Change Roam Color dialog box appears with a table displaying all the colorants
present in the selected page buffer. The columns in the table are:

Colorant This is the name of the colorant in the page buffer. In a sepa-
ration, there is only one colorant. In a composite page buffer,
all the included colorants appear. (Typical composite page
buffers contain only process colors but, for a small number of
output plugins, there can also be spot colors.)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 511

 Color Separation

Red This is the red component of the roam color, in the range 0
(zero) through 1.0.

Green This is the green component of the roam color, in the range 0
(zero) through 1.0.

Blue This is the blue component of the roam color, in the range 0
(zero) through 1.0.

Roam Color This is the name of the roam color. In an unchanged page
buffer this is the same name as appears in the Colorant col-
umn. In a changed page buffer, the color is the last one cho-
sen for this colorant. You can substitute any other color by
choosing from a list of common colors or by typing new val-
ues.
To change a color, first select it by clicking on its row in the table. The boxes at the
foot of the table display the RGB values and the name of the roam color for the
selected colorant. You can choose named colors from a list or specify any other color
by RGB values:
• To select a named color, use the drop-down list for Roam Color. The listed
values are any special colors represented in this page buffer, a list of default
colors for the RGB and CMYK spaces (Default Red and so on), and an entry
called Other. You cannot select Other: it shows only that you have edited the
RGB values to a color not in the list. To return to the original roam color for a
colorant, use the list to select the name that appears in the Colorant column.
• To specify any color not in the drop-down list, edit the values in the fields for
Red, Green, and Blue. Once you have edited a value then, as soon as you move
to another field (or select a different row in the table), the Roam Color name for
the edited colorant changes to Other. If you want to edit another color, click
on its row. (You can do this for all colorants if you wish; each can have its own
value for Other.)
Click OK in this dialog box and OK again in the Info dialog box to save your changes
to roam colors. Click Cancel in either dialog box to abandon your changes.

512 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Appendix A

0 Troubleshooting

This appendix provides solutions to common problems that can occur when running
the RIP.
The first sections contain information about the warning messages that can appear.
They are grouped according to where the messages appear in the RIP.
Section A.1, “Warning messages and what to do”, gives a list of some of the
major error messages that may occur when running the RIP. All of the messages
in this section appear in dialog boxes.
Section A.2, “Warnings in the Navigator RIP window”, describes the warnings
that appear in the system monitor. They are grouped according to the type of
problem.
Section A.3, “Warnings within the progress box”, describes the messages that
appear in the progress box. The progress box is part of the Output Controller in
either of the multiple modes, or a separate window in either of the single modes.
This list does not include the warnings generated by output plugins.
The remaining sections provide additional information on specific topics.
Section A.4 on page 524 contains information on imposition and media saving.
Section A.5 on page 524 describes Seybold test timings.
Section A.6 on page 525 describes solutions to problems when imaging TIFF/IT
files.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 513

 Section A.7 on page 527 describes solutions to problems when imaging PDF
jobs.
Section A.8 on page 533 describes solutions to network problems when config-
uring the RIP.
Section A.9 on page 534 describes how to set the access permissions for the
spool folder.

A.1 Warning messages and what to do

The following is a list of some of the major error messages that may occur when run-
ning the RIP. All of the messages in this section appear in dialog boxes.

514 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

A.1.1 Problems with starting the Navigator RIPNavigator RIP
Table A.1 Start-up messages

Message Problem Things to try

The RIP failed on bootup An error has occurred while Reset the RIP to the factory
the RIP was starting up. defaults.

The RIP startup failed An error occurred while Reset the RIP to the factory
starting up the RIP. defaults. Reboot the
machine. If this does not
help, reinstall the RIP.

Superpro, C Plus or Something concerning the Check that the dongle is

Activator dongle not dongle is incorrect. installed and plugged-in cor-
plugged in or invalid rectly.
Fatal error: Fatal security Check that the Sentinel
device failure device drivers have been
installed and started. If you
have both a Sentinel C-Plus
and a Sentinel SuperPro
dongle connected to the
same parallel port to protect
the RIP and another applica-
tion then they must be con-
nected in the order
“Computer: C-Plus: Super-
Pro”
If this does not help, shut the
PC down, disconnect the
dongle completely, and
reconnect it. Power-up the
PC again. If these sugges-
tions fail, you may have an
invalid or a failed dongle.

A.1.2 Problems with resources

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 515

 Table A.2 Resource messages

Message Problem Things to try

Could not access a resource The plugin driver for the Reset the RIP to the factory
for the current plugin device current device seems to have defaults.
driver been moved.
Move a copy of the device
driver into SW\Devices.

Could not access a Setup The setup file has been cor- Reset the RIP to the factory
resource rupted or is missing. defaults.

There are no devices There are no devices Reinstall the RIP.

installed in the setup file installed in the devices
folder.

A.1.3 Problems with files

Table A.3 File messages

Message Problem Things to try

Could not open the newly This probably means that Close some files.
created RIP setup file there are too many other
files open.

File too deeply buried inside The file pathname is too Move the file that you are
directories long for the RIP to cope trying to access to a point
Move it somewhere else with. higher up in the file system
so that the full pathname
becomes shorter.

Incompatible version of the The setup file you are using Find and install a copy of
RIP setup file used/ is associated with a different the correct setup file that
Old RIP setup file used version of the software. was supplied with the ver-
sion of the RIP that you are
running (this file must be
placed in the SW folder) or
reinstall the RIP.

Problem finding file— The RIP cannot find a file. Try running a disk repair
maybe disk is damaged utility.

516 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

A.1.4 Problems with networks
Network troubleshooting is a necessarily technical operation. Consult your network
manager if you have any doubts about your abilities in this area.

Table A.1 Network messages

Message Problem Things to try

A.1.5 Problems with sockets

Table A.4 Socket messages

Message Problem Things to try

No communication Suspect a bad configuration Check that both applications

in the receiving or sending are using the same port and
application. that the sending application
is using the expected proto-
col: basic TCP/IP socket
stream or Xinet PapConnect,
as configured in the Socket
Configuration dialog box.
Next check the network con-
nectivity using ping or an
equivalent network utility
program.

Bad jobs at the receiving The sending application Check that the sending
end may not be using the correct application is using the
protocol. expected protocol: basic
TCP/IP socket stream or
Xinet PapConnect. Check
that no other machine is
already using the same port
and sending something that
is not a PostScript-language
job.
Check that the sending
application is using the
expected protocol.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 517

 Table A.4 Socket messages (Continued)

Message Problem Things to try

Missing, bad, or corrupted The Socket plugin or the Check that the RIP Socket
status messages at the send- port is not configured cor- plugin is configured to
ing machine rectly. return the PostScript-lan-
guage standard output on the
correct port (Address).
Check that no other machine
is already using the same
port and sending something
that is not the standard
output from a PostScript-
language job.

Poor transfer rates An inappropriate protocol Deselect the Xinet protocol

may be in use. in the Socket Configuration
dialog box and the sending
application. Xinet PapCon-
nect does significant error
checking, which slows
transfers and may be
unnecessary for most jobs.

A.2 Warnings in the Navigator RIP window

The following warnings all appear as messages in the Navigator RIP window. Again,
the warnings are grouped here according to the type of problem.

A.2.1 Problems involving disk space

Table A.5 Disk space messages

Message Things to try

System warning—Insuffi- Create more free disk space before reprocessing the job that
cient Disk workspace gave the warning.

518 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

 Table A.5 Disk space messages (Continued)

Message Things to try

Error VMerror Offending This appears after a partial paint fails.

Command: renderbands
Make sure that compression is turned on in Configure RIP.
If this does not help, free-up some disk space.

System Warning: Free disk The RIP waits for some disk space to be freed.
space gone below requested
This is not a fatal error. It can happen, for example, if the
limit
RIP is outputting pages, or has pages waiting to be output in
the Active Queue. When these pages have been output, they
are deleted automatically and the RIP continues with its cur-
rent job.
If there are no pages waiting to be output, free up disk space
by doing some of the following things:
Delete some files.
Turn on page compression in the Configure RIP dialog box.
Reconfigure the PageBuffers folder by placing it on another
disk with more free space.
Ensure that there are no locked pages in the Output Control-
ler.

A.2.2 Problems involving fonts

Table A.6 Font messages

Message Things to try

Error: invalidfont; Offend- Check that the RIP has installed the font correctly.
ing Command: <command>
Try proofing the fonts using the Proof Fonts option on the
Fonts menu. If the font fails to proof it may be corrupt. If the
fonts proof correctly, the job itself may be corrupt.
If any job requires a particular font which is not installed, the
RIP attempts to use Courier as a substitute.

<FontName> Font not The font specified in the PostScript-language file is not actu-
found; using Courier ally loaded into the RIP. Courier is the default font in this
case.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 519

 Table A.6 Font messages (Continued)

Message Things to try

Courier Font not found; If this message appears, the RIP currently has no fonts
using Courier loaded at all. Use Install fonts to install some fonts—the
minimum font set that must be installed is Courier, Times,
Helvetica, and Symbol. Alternatively, reinstall the RIP.

A.2.3 Problems involving files

Table A.7 File messages

Message Things to try

ERROR IN CONFIG FILE The RIP failed to finish interpreting the file.
For example, you will see this message if you try to print a
TIFF file that is corrupt, unsupported, or of an unrecognized
type.
This can also occur if a file in the spool folder is locked by
another application. Close the file and try again.

Inappropriate compression This message appears if you try to print a file that has an
inappropriate compression format. For example, a color or
grayscale TIFF file with CCITT compression. CCITT com-
pression is only suitable for monochrome TIFF files.

A.3 Warnings within the progress box

When appropriate, the progress box may show the following warning messages,
together with the accompanying icons. The progress box is part of the Output Control-
ler in either of the multiple modes, or a separate window in either of the single modes.

520 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

Output plugins can supply their own warnings and icons, which are not listed here.

Table A.8 Progress box messages

Buffer full
The page buffer on the output device is full

Buffer space low

The output device is running out of buffering memory

Busy
The output device is working on another job

Busy or off-line
The output device is either busy or off-line

Communications failed
Communication between the RIP and the output device has either been
broken or was never established

Cover open
The cover of the output device is open

Data transfer failed

Image data transfer between the RIP and the output device has either
been broken or was never established

Data underrun
The output device has not received data from the RIP when it was
expected

Deleted cassette
The required cassette has been deleted, in the Cassette Manager.
COMMENT: from SW 4.5 onwards.

Ink low
The ink supply to the output device is running low

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 521

 Table A.8 Progress box messages (Continued)

Ink out
The ink supply to the output device has been exhausted

Interface card failed

Communication between the RIP and the interface card in the machine
has either been broken or was never established

Invalid clipping
An invalid clipping was requested of the output device

Invalid resolution
An invalid image resolution was requested of the output device

Laser diode failed

The laser diode of the output device is not working satisfactorily

Low power
The output device is low on power

Misplaced cassette
The required cassette is in another output device.

Missing cassette
There is no cassette in the output device

No cassette
The input media cassette requested is not available

No power
The output device has no power

No take-up cassette
There is no take-up cassette for the output device

522 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

 Table A.8 Progress box messages (Continued)

Not ready
The device is not ready, for an unspecified reason—perhaps unknown
or too complex to show. Look for an extra message in the Monitor
window.

Off-line
The RIP cannot communicate with the output device

Page stop-started
The RIP has supplied data quickly enough, but the device has
stop/started

Paper jam
Media has jammed in the output device

Paper low
The paper or film supply to the RIP output device is running low

Paper out
The paper or film supply to the output device has been exhausted

Printer caught up
There was a data underrun, and stop-start was either not selected or is
not supported by the printing device

Take-up full
The take-up cassette is full

Take-up space low

Space in the take-up cassette for the device is running low

Toner low
The toner supply to the’ output device is running low

Toner out
The toner supply to the output device has been exhausted

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 523

 Table A.8 Progress box messages (Continued)

Unknown error
An unknown condition has caused an error

Warming up
The output device is preparing itself for communication with the RIP

Wrong cassette
The wrong cassette is in the output device

A.4 Page imposition and media saving

On wide printers, using the media saving option (described under “Printing effects” on
page 169) can save both time and media. You must ensure that you set the media
width for the cassette being used correctly, because it is the media width that is used to
determine if the rotated page would fit on the media. See “Monitoring media” on page
346 for details of how to set this information.
Some pages may have surplus white space at the sides, and this could mean that film
saving will not rotate the page. You can force the rotation in the Edit Page Setup dia-
log box, and also tell the RIP to center the page if appropriate, so that only the white
space is clipped.
It is possible to set up automatic operations such as printing 4-up or 8-up. This is done
by adding fragments of PostScript-language code into the system that specify where to
lay out the pages. This could, for example, automatically fill a large sheet of film with
pages. This form of imposition only works within a single job.

A.5 Seybold timings

The Seybold test timings have to cover a large range of resolutions, so, for example,
two printers, with resolutions of 2000 and 2540 dpi respectively, would be compared
to one another directly. However, remember that there is more data in a higher resolu-
tion bitmap—a 2540 dpi bitmap contains 62.29% more data than a 2000 dpi bitmap.

524 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

The time taken to generate the 2540 dpi job, while probably not as much as 62%
longer, is certainly substantially longer.
If you really must reduce timings to be comparable across different resolution printers,
the only solution is to use the lowest resolution possible.

A.6 TIFF/IT troubleshooting

Various problems may occur and warning messages may appear when imaging
TIFF/IT files with the RIP. These are described and explained below.
Missing, duplicated, or partial images
A typical page is described by several files, which can go missing or be in unex-
pected places. The RIP finds files most quickly if the FP file and the subfiles are
in the same folder. It helps to use the correct file extension for each file type.
Duplicated (partial) images may be the result of printing subfiles independently.
Select only the FP file, not its subfiles, when you want to print a final page.
Poor image quality
Files have an embedded resolution, which the RIP must match in its page setup
if you want high-quality results. The best way to find the embedded resolution
(and page size) is to use a dedicated TIFF file analyzer.
If you try to use too high an output resolution, you will see the following mes-
sage:
Output resolution too high for this file. It should be no greater
than <number> DPI

%% WARNING: job continuing regardless.

Media wastage is possible.

Clipped images
The RIP does not take a page size from TIFF/IT files. You must select a suitable
page setup before printing the file. Use a TIFF analyzer to discover the page
size.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 525

 Failure to produce output
open: the TIFF 6.0 or TIFF/IT file
is either corrupt, unsupported, of an unrecognised
type or the appropriate file type is not enabled
in Configure RIP / Extras

The RIP displays this message if you attempt to image TIFF/IT data types that it
does not support or to image files that do not conform to the TIFF/IT-P1 profile.
If you attempt to print TIFF/IT-P1 files when the TIFF/IT option is not
enabled, then the TIFF 6.0 input option may attempt to process the parts of the
file that it recognizes as TIFF. If this message appears then the TIFF 6.0 input
option does not recognize any part of the file as TIFF.
Poor performance / Long imaging times
Text in the TIFF/IT file can lead to large numbers of line segments and very
large files. See the comments made in “Installation and requirements” on page
326.
Also, if the computer running the RIP is running other applications at the same
time, the other applications may be using memory that the RIP could use to
operate more quickly. Shut down any programs that you do not need, then stop
and restart the RIP to be sure that it is using as much memory as possible.
Problems with SCID files
Standard Color Image Data (SCID) primary data files are incompatible with the
TIFF/IT support in the RIP, but SCID alternate data is compatible. SCID pri-
mary data is incompatible because it uses the dot range 28 through 228. (See the
“Glossary” on page 549 for an explanation of dot range.) The ISO document
DIS 12640 describes the dot ranges and other differences between the primary
and alternate formats, but the next paragraph is sufficient to identify both types
of data.
Primary data files are named N1 through N8 and S1 through S10, and each is
visibly labeled ISO 400 in the image. The alternate data is calculated from the
primary data, has a lower spatial resolution, and is visibly labeled ISO 300 in
the image. The names of the alternate data files end in the letter A, resulting in
the names N1A, S1A, and so on.

526 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

A.7 PDF troubleshooting
The methods of control provided by the PDF Options dialog box mean that it is possi-
ble to reject PDF files that are valid, but that fail to meet strict criteria such as the
PDF/X-1 specification. It is also possible for PDF jobs to be badly constructed or for
required external files to be missing or in the wrong location. Always inspect the RIP
Monitor window or log file if you see problems with printed output.
You may see the following effects or messages.
No pages printed
Check in the PDF Options dialog box that the PDF job is of the required type
(for Accept type(s)) and that it contains at least one page matching the pages or
ranges in the Pages field.
Poor color matching
Check that you have an appropriate match of color spaces and management in
the PDF job and in the page setup in use. If the problem appears in an image,
also check that it is not a low-resolution OPI preview being used to substitute
for a missing OPI high-resolution image.
Areas missing from the page or printed at low resolution
Check that any files referenced by OPI are present and that OPI is enabled in the
RIP. (Files referenced by OPI must be embedded in a PDF/X-1 file.)
%%[ Warning: Skipping page 1 - not in requested page range ]%%

This is not an error. It is a reminder that the options chosen in the PDF Options
dialog box have caused a page to be omitted from the PDF job being printed.
This omission may be intentional.
%%[ Error: invalidaccess; Offending command: pdfexec ]%%

The PDF files may have been saved with security settings that require a pass-
word to be entered for printing. Obtain the password (from the supplier of the
PDF job) and enter the password in the text field in the Password section of the
PDF Options dialog box. Passwords are case-sensitive.
If you enter the correct password (in the Navigator RIP) and still see this error,
check that you have not entered one or more white space characters at the end of
the password. Another possible cause of this error is that the password uses

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 527

 characters from an extended (non-ASCII) character set. The way in which these
characters are represented can vary from platform to platform and the PDF pass-
word may have been set on a platform different from the one on which you are
running the RIP. Request a new file using a simpler password.
Finally, the PDF file may be damaged. Try using another application to view or
print the file, taking note of any messages given by that application.
High resolution file is embedded in PDF job file.

This is not an error nor a warning. It is information about the structure of an OPI
job. This message is most likely to occur when processing a PDF/X-1 job, but
could occur for a basic PDF file.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: text explaining the reason

The job is not a valid PDF/X-1 job. See the following messages for explanations
of the various reasons that can appear in messages of this form. The RIP may be
able to process the job as a PDF 1.3 file, if you have allowed this by a choice in
the Accept type(s) list.
Note: If you have used a creating or editing application that claims to be com-
pliant with PDF/X-1:1999, you should report these errors and warnings to your
supplier of that tool. The RIP performs strict checking of referenced files as well
as the basic PDF content of a PDF/X-1 job.
Note: RIP versions 5.3 and 5.5 included support for PDF/X-1:1999, this has been
dropped in Eclipse Release and later RIPs, and replaced with support for PDF/X-
1a:2001 and PDF/X-3:2002.
****** PDF/X-1 Warning: Clipped out 'stroke' operator in EPS

The job deviates from the file PDF/X-1 standard—in this example because of a
PostScript-language operator used in a referenced EPS file. (The operator is ille-
gal in an EPS file referenced from a PDF/X-1 job but harmless in this context.)
Any message starting “PDF/X-1 Warning:” has some problem, for the reason
given in the rest of the message, but will not cause the RIP to abort the PDF job.

528 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

****** PDF/X-1 Error: Invalid TIFF compression

An embedded TIFF file uses a compression method not allowed by PDF/X-1.

Many TIFF files use LZW compression, which is not allowed. Ask the creator
of the file to recreate the file using an allowed compression method; PDF/X-1
allows an embedded TIFF file to be compressed using the CCITT or (new)
JPEG methods.
Note: The new JPEG method is given the TIFF tag value Compression=7 and is
expected to be adopted as part of the forthcoming TIFF 7 specification. The new
method was designed (by the Independent JPEG Group) to overcome severe
problems in the method of JPEG compression as described in the TIFF 6.0 spec-
ification, dated 1992. The old scheme used the TIFF tag value Compression=6
and several related but separate fields.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: Vector painting operator in EPS: stroke

An embedded EPS file uses a vector painting operator. PDF/X-1 does not allow
embedded EPS files to contain vector painting operators: stroke, fill, show,
and so on.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: Invalid alternativeSpace in Separation
colorspace

****** PDF/X-1 Error: Invalid base colorspace in Indexed color-

space

The PDF job uses an illegal color space. PDF/X-1 places restrictions on the
alternative Space of Separation color space and the base color spaces of Indexed
color spaces in embedded EPS files.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: LZWDecode in EPS

An embedded EPS file uses LZW compression, which is illegal in PDF/X-1.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 529

 ****** PDF/X-1 Error: Missing Subtype in EF object

****** PDF/X-1 Error: Unknown Subtype in EF object

****** PDF/X-1 Error: Subtype incorrect for embedded file

The PDF/X-1 file must specify the type of an EF object (embedded file) using
the Subtype key. The Subtype key can be TIFF, EPS, DCS, and so on. The RIP
checks that the Subtype key is present, is one of those allowed, and matches the
actual type of the file.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: Invalid TIFF PhotometricInterpretation

The PDF job references a TIFF file of an illegal type. Embedded TIFF files
must be CMYK, monochrome, or gray scale. PDF/X-1 does not allow RGB,
Lab, or other color spaces.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: PDF referenced from PDF/X-1

****** PDF/X-1 Error: JPEG referenced from PDF/X-1

The PDF job references a file type that is illegal for PDF/X-1. The PDF/X-1
standard allows only TIFF, EPS, DCS, or TIFF/IT-P1 files to be embedded.
The following messages can appear as Errors or Warnings. They appear as Errors
if you have set up the RIP to accept only PDF/X-1 jobs.
In most cases, understanding the messages requires detailed knowledge of the PDF
specification but all the messages indicate that the job is not PDF/X-1 compliant. If
you see these errors when printing PDF/X-1 jobs, you have two alternatives: one alter-
native is to ask for the job to be re-created in a form that is compliant with PDF/X-1
and wait for that job to be supplied to you; the other alternative is to use a page setup
that accepts basic PDF (using the option Any PDF <= 1.3 as basic PDF) and
print the non-compliant version. (In rare cases, there may be a more fundamental error
in a PDF file that prevents you printing it at all; in such cases, you must use a different
PDF file.)

530 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

****** PDF/X-1 Error: unknown PDF/X version

****** PDF/X-1 Error: unexpected PDF/X version

****** PDF/X-1 Error: obsolete PDF/X version

****** PDF/X-1 Error: unexpected PDF version

The PDF version number is too low, too high, or otherwise unsuitable for use
with this version of the RIP and the settings in use.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: missing Info dictionary

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid Info dictionary

PDF/X-1 jobs must have a valid Info dictionary.

****** PDF/X-1 Error: missing trailer ID key

PDF/X-1 jobs must have an ID entry in their trailer object.

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid encryption

If encrypted, PDF/X-1 jobs must have a blank User password.

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid operator

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid HTP in ExtGState

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid TR in ExtGState

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid RI in ExtGState

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid TransferFunction in halftone

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid colorspace

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid file compression

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid function type

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid halftone type

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid pattern type

PDF/X-1 files have restrictions on the allowed PDF operators, parameters in the
graphics state, transfer functions, color spaces, methods of compression, half-
tones, and patterns. The job has tried to use an invalid option.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 531

 ****** PDF/X-1 Error: missing embedded font

PDF/X-1 jobs can use only embedded fonts. The job has tried to use a font with-
out embedding it.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid filespec

****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid embedded filespec

Files referenced through OPI in a PDF/X-1 file must be embedded within the
PDF/X-1 file itself. The job includes OPI references to files that are not embed-
ded.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid external file

PDF/X-1 jobs can use external files only for OPI. The job has tried to use an
external file for some other purpose.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid embedded file

PDF/X-1 jobs can embed a limited number of file types. The job has a file spec-
ification that is badly specified for Macintosh, UNIX, or DOS platforms, is not
embedded, or where the Subtype of the file indicates that the file is not TIFF/IT,
EPS, DCS, or TIFF.
****** PDF/X-1 Error: invalid PS XObject

A PDF/X-1 job cannot contain a PostScript XObject (PostScript code embedded

in the PDF page description).
****** PDF/X-1 Error: missing characterised printing condition

****** PDF/X-1 Error: multiple characterised printing condi-

tions

All data in a PDF/X-1 job must be prepared for exactly one characterized print-
ing condition, which is identified using embedded ICC profiles. (A job can
embed multiple ICC profiles and each must contain a characterized printing
condition but all conditions must be the same.) The RIP reports the first condi-
tion to the Monitor window, in a message similar to this example:
Prepared for printing condition "CGATS TR 001".

532 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

A.8 Network troubleshooting
This section covers solutions to network problems when configuring the Navigator
RIP.

A.8.1 Navigator RIP fails to publish

If the RIP is not publishing on the network, check the following.

H.1.0.1 Network connections

Ensure that the network cable is connected correctly to your. The easiest way to do
this is to check that the PC can see other things on the network. For example, are there
any printers on the network visible in the Print Manager? If not, check that connec-
tions have not been broken due to connectors being removed.
Restart the RIP once you have checked the connections and corrected any problems
with the network cable PC. Start the RIP, make sure that there is an AppleTalk channel
defined in the Input Controller that is On, and then choose Navigator RIP > Start Inputs.

H.1.0.2 Is the system software installed correctly?

It is difficult to check the correctness of an installation. If you have checked for faulty
connections, the most reliable procedure is to reinstall the software.

A.8.2 The Navigator RIP is not picking jobs up correctly

The software on either the printing PC or the RIP PC may need reinstalling. If the RIP
is published on the network, but jobs do not get processed correctly, check the follow-
ing:

Spooler problems
Some spoolers check for a specific product name. The RIP is
set to LaserWriter-Sim. If the spooler does not recognize
this, it may not send the job to the printer. This name has been
chosen to minimize such problems.

Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 533

 A.9 Spool folder problems and considerations
In cases where the spool folder is on a file server, you must ensure that the RIP has
permission to access the shared folder and all enclosed folders.

534 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0Release : March 2005

Appendix B

Jobs Containing Color

0

Management Data

Settings within the RIP, in the job, and in the images themselves can all control the
processing of images in a job. This appendix describes the settings that influence this
processing and explains which setting takes precedence in each particular case.
Section B.3 on page 537 summarizes this information.
Important: Different rules apply when you are using Color. See the Harlequin Color-
Pro Users’ Guide for details.
If you are not using ColorPro, the RIP checks the following for Photoshop and PDF
jobs, and allows independent control of what happens.
When processing jobs containing Photoshop EPS images:
• Is the Override color management in job option selected in the Color Setup dia-
log?
• Does the image contain a PostScript color space array?
• Is the UseCIEColor parameter set to true in the job?
See Section B.1 and Section B.2 for details.
When processing jobs containing PDF files:
• Is the Override color management in job option select in the Color Setup dialog?

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 535

 B.1 Override color management in job not selected
The Navigator RIP checks for color management information in the image and the job
in the following strict order.
• If the image contains a PostScript color space array (Photoshop EPS files only):
The Navigator RIP uses the color space array (CSA) to transform the image. It
treats the image as a device-independent color image.
• Otherwise, if the UseCIEColor parameter set to true in the job:
The Navigator RIP uses the DefaultGray, DefaultRGB, or DefaultCMYK
color space resources to transform the image colors. It treats the image as a
device-independent color image.
Otherwise, if the UseCIEColor parameter is set to false or has no value in the job,
the Navigator RIP treats the job as CMYK or RGB.

B.2 Override color management in selected job

• If the current page setup does not use a color setup:
The Navigator RIP checks the setting of the UseCIEColor parameter in the job.
• If the UseCIEColor parameter is set to true in the job:
The Navigator RIP uses the DefaultGray, DefaultRGB, or DefaultCMYK
color space resources to transform the image colors. It treats the image as a
device-independent color image.
• Otherwise, if the UseCIEColor parameter is set to false or has no value in the
job:
The Navigator RIP treats the job as CMYK or RGB.

536 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

B.3 Summary of options
Table B.1 Current page setup does not use a color management option

Override color Image contains a Job contains Result

management in job color space array UseCIEColor set to

Selected True Use the DefaultGray,

DefaultRGB or
DefaultCMYK color
space resources to
transform image colors

False Treat job as CMYK or

or no value RGB

Not selected Yes Use the CSA to

transform the image

No True Use the DefaultGray,

DefaultRGB or
DefaultCMYK color
space resources to
transform image colors

False Treat job as CMYK or

or no value RGB

Settings within the Navigator RIP, in the PostScript-language or PDF job, and in the
images themselves can all control the processing of images in a job.
Note: Some options apply only to EPS files produced by Adobe Photoshop.
Section B.5 on page 538 describes the cases specific to PDF jobs.

B.4 PostScript-language jobs and image files

The Navigator RIP checks the following when processing jobs containing Photoshop
EPS images or TIFF/JPEG images containing embedded ICC profiles:
• Does the current page setup use a color management option?
• Is the Override color management in job check box selected in the Color Setup
dialog box?
• Does the image contain a PostScript color space array? (Photoshop EPS files
only)

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 537

 • Does the image contain an embedded ICC profile?
• Is the UseCIEColor parameter set to true in the job?

B.5 PDF color management

PDF jobs can use a variety of color spaces, including device-dependent spaces such as
DeviceCMYK.

Typically, when using device-independent color spaces, PDF version 1.2 files use the
CalGray and CalRGB color spaces and PDF version 1.3 files use the ICCBased color
space but these usages are under the control of the creating applications — see the Job
Options dialog box: for the Advanced tab in Distiller 3.0; for the Color tab in
Distiller 4.0.
Full use of device-independent color requires ColorPro to be enabled.
Note: A PDF/X-3 file containing an OutputIntents dictionary will be color man-
aged using the ICC profile indicated by the OutputIntents dictionary, as long as
the job uses a device independent color space and the Override color management in job
option is not selected.

538 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Appendix C

0 Using Genlin

Genlin is a utility provided with the Navigator RIP to read calibration targets gener-
ated by the RIP.

C.1 Introduction
Genlin supports these measuring instruments:
• X-Rite 408
• X-Rite DTP41 series
• X-Rite DTP32
• X-Rite DTP34
• X-Rite DTP12
• X-Rite 938
• Gretag Macbeth Eye-One
The remaining sections show how to set up and use Genlin, and how to troubleshoot
any problems.
• Section C.2 describes set up and use
• Section C.3 on page 545 describes troubleshooting

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 539

 C.2 Using Genlin
The use of Genlin involves these stages:
• “Installing drivers for USB devices”. This stage is only necessary if you wish
to use a measuring instrument that connects to your computer via the USB port.
This includes variants of the DTP41, DTP34 and Eye-One measuring devices.
• “Starting a work session with Genlin”. This section describes the connections
and checks to make before you start measuring targets.
• “Measuring each target”. This section describes the steps involved in using
Genlin to measure a target.

C.2.1 Installing drivers for USB devices

If you wish to use a measuring instrument that connects to your computer via the USB
port (includes variants of DTP41, DTP34 and Eye-One), you must install some USB
drivers for the particular device, as described in the following procedure:
1. Plug the DTP41, DTP34 or Eye-One measuring instrument into a USB port. On
Windows 2000 machines, you may require administrator privileges in order to
be able to plug a device into a USB port.
If USB drivers are not already installed, Windows will automatically start the
Found New Hardware Wizard.
2. Select the Search for a suitable driver option in the Install Hardware Device Driv-
ers page and click Next.
3. Select the Specify a location check box in the Locate Drivers Files page and dese-
lect the other options.
4. In the Copy manufacturer’s files from dialog, click the Browse button and navi-
gate to the following folder:

For DTP41 and DTP34 devices:

<RIP installation folder>\Genlin\drivers\XrDtp

For Eye-One devices:

<RIP installation folder>\Genlin\drivers\EyeOne

540 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 5. Click Open to return to the Copy manufacturer’s files from dialog and then click
OK.
Windows will confirm that it has found drivers for the device.
6. Click Next to install the drivers.
Once you have you installed the USB drivers for your measuring device, you can use
Genlin as described in Section C.2.2.

C.2.2 Starting a work session with Genlin

Follow these steps to start a session using Genlin:
1. Connect your measuring instrument to the computer using a serial interface
(typically, the COM1 or COM2 communications port) or a USB port.
USB support is available for the Eye-One, DTP41, and DTP34 devices and
requires USB drivers to be installed, as described in Section C.2.1.
Note: When using the Eye-One device, you must choose Custom from the Port
menu in the Configuration dialog box. This is because Genlin communicates
with the device via third-party software.
2. If necessary, recalibrate the measuring instrument using the correct calibration
plaque or other white reference tool.
You should calibrate the first time you use an instrument with Genlin, or when-
ever you change measuring instruments. You should also recalibrate the mea-
suring instrument after periods of storage or heavy use.
Note: When using the Eye-One device, Genlin sends a request to the spectro-
photometer to calibrate itself so that Genlin can accurately read a new target.
This means that you must place the Eye-One device on its holder, which con-
tains a built-in white reference, whenever you begin the process of reading a tar-
get. Otherwise, Genlin will display a Calibration failed... error
message when trying to read the target, as described on page 547.
3. Start Genlin by opening the application file located in the Navigator RIP appli-
cation folder.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 541

 C.2.3 Measuring each target
Note: This procedure assumes that you printed an uncalibrated target.
Follow these steps to measure a target using Genlin:
1. Choose File > Configure to display the Configuration dialog box, as shown in
Figure C.1.

Figure C.1 Configuration dialog box

Select your desired settings, as explained here, and then click OK.

RIP Folder Identifies the SW folder of the RIP installation that you are
using to print targets and import data.
You can read targets that have been created by the RIP run-
ning on another computer if you have network access to the
corresponding SW folder. If you want to do this, click Change
and use the file browser to select the SW folder of the remote
the RIP installation.
The default is the relative path to the SW folder of the the RIP
with which Genlin is supplied (as shown in Figure C.1).

Instrument A list of supported measuring instruments. Choose your

desired measuring instrument and ensure that the correct Port
setting is selected.

Measure Measurement types supported by your chosen measuring

instrument. Choose a suitable measurement type.

542 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 Media A list of types of media that targets are printed on, including
press and imagesetter media. Choose the type of media that
your target is printed on. For example, choose Press Paper
when using a proofing printer.

Port A list of the interface ports available on your computer.

Choose the port to which your measuring instrument is con-
nected.
2. Choose File > Read Target, select the number of the target that you are reading
(printed as Reference Number: N on the target) and click OK.
3. In the Read Target dialog box, choose which channels you wish to measure, as
well as the filter type and measurement type that you wish to use.

Figure C.2 Read Target dialog box

To do this, select the channel you wish to edit and choose Yes or No from the
menu below the Read? column. If both your measuring instrument and target
support more than one measurement system you may also have a choice of
alternative filters and measurement types in the menu below the Measure As col-
umn. For example, choose Cyan Status T (X-Rite), then click OK. See
Section 13.12.5 on page 460 for details of measurement types.
4. Measure the target by referring to the details for your type of measuring instru-
ment. If you have repeated problems reading a patch or strip see “Troubleshoot-
ing” on page 545.
In particular, you must follow the screen prompts to measure the target. Note
that when using the DTP32 and DTP34 devices you must click OK in the Con-
firm to proceed dialog before loading the target. For DTP41 devices, you should
click OK after inserting the target.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 543

 Strip-readers and other semi-automatic instruments
Ensure that you scan the target in the right direction. When
reading strips, the instrument should be positioned so that
approximately an inch of blank paper is available at the end
of each strip. Try to avoid any marks outside the area of the
patches, such as the strip numbers.
You may see a Bad reading message appear if the instru-
ment has been unable to correctly measure the strip: if so,
click OK. If you wish to retry reading the strip, click Yes,
align the strip with the instrument and click OK. Click No if
you wish to abandon measuring the target.

Manual instruments
Follow the screen prompts to measure the target. If you are
using a manual instrument such as the X-Rite 938 you will
also see prompts in the display panel of the instrument to read
individual patches within strips. For example, the prompt
Move to: C100 means read the 100% Cyan patch.

Choose File > Abort Target if you wish to abandon reading a target.
5. Click OK when you have finished measuring the target.
At this point, Genlin has created a data file containing all the linearization data for the
target, which you can import into the RIP. (The file is named import and is located in
the caldata folder within the RIP’s SW folder.)
6. Use the menu option Output > Calibration Manager and, in the Calibration Man-
ager, choose the appropriate Device and Color Space for the target. (See
Section 13.11 on page 450 for details of the Calibration Manager.)

544 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 7. The next action depends on whether you are updating an existing calibration set
or creating a new one. Choose the appropriate action:
• If you are updating an existing calibration set, select it in the table listing.
This must be the calibration set that you used to print the target. Click
Edit from uncalibrated target. The Edit Calibration dialog box appears. Go
to step 8.
• Click New if you are creating a new calibration set. Then, if there are
entries in the Profile menu in the Edit Calibration dialog box, choose the
supplied calibration profile that you used to print the target. Enter a Name
for the new calibration set. You can use the same name as the supplied cali-
bration profile, but omitting the enclosing parentheses—( )—that sup-
plied calibration profiles use; this makes the link between the two profiles
more obvious.
8. Click Import; see the description on page 463 for more details. After importing
the data and making any other settings, exit the Edit Calibration dialog box and
Calibration Manager by clicking OK.
Warning: You must read the values from the data file (or copy the data file to another
location) before measuring another target for the same RIP installation. Genlin uses
the same file name for every data file so any existing measured data is lost when you
measure a new target.
Start again from Section C.2.3 on page 542 to read another target.
Note: If you no longer need to measure any of the targets that you have printed using
the RIP, you can choose File > Purge. This means that the numbering of targets can
restart from 1.

C.3 Troubleshooting
This is a list of some possible error messages and symptoms that you may see,
together with suggestions for avoiding them.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 545

 C.3.1 Error messages
All error messages are preceded by the details of the measuring instrument. For exam-
ple, you might see this full message when there is a problem with an X-Rite 938
instrument:
X-Rite 938 Error: No responding device attached to selected
serial line

Error: Returned data not recognised

There is a mismatch between the Instrument setting in the Configuration dialog
box and the measuring instrument that you are using. Check that you are using
the correct Instrument setting for your instrument.
Error: Open (interface details) error 0

There is a mismatch between the Port setting in the Configuration dialog box
and the port interface to which your measuring instrument is connected. Try
changing the Port setting or connecting your measuring instrument to the speci-
fied interface port.
Error: The USB device cannot be found
This message appears if Genlin is unable to locate the chosen USB device.
Ensure the measuring device is connected to the USB port and is powered on.
Ensure also that you have selected the correct Instrument and Port in the Config-
uration dialog box.
Error: No responding device attached to selected serial line
Error: The USB device is not responding
Either of these messages may appear if the measuring instrument does not have
any power supply. Check the power supply to the measuring instrument and
ensure that it is switched on. If the problem persists there may be a fault with the
power adapter or cabling.
Error: Number samples received, but Number expected
This message appears if the Eye-One software was unable to correctly detect the
boundaries of each of the patches on the calibration target. That is, the number
of patches read does not match the number of patches expected. You may have
scanned the calibration target too quickly or confused the software by scanning
part of the number at the top of a strip, and so on.

546 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 When reading strips, the guide should be positioned so that approximately an
inch of blank paper is available at the end of each strip. Try to avoid any marks
outside the area of the patches, such as the strip numbers.
Error: Calibration failed - place the device on its white refer-
ence and start again
This message may appear when calibrating the Gretag Macbeth Eye-One spec-
trophotometer. You must place the Eye-One device on its holder, which contains
a built-in white reference, whenever you begin the process of reading a target.
This allows Genlin to accurately read the target. Refer to the documentation
accompanying this device for further details.
Error: Unknown
This message may appear if you have used the File > Abort Target menu option.
This message may also appear if the RIP is unable to recognize the error gener-
ated by your measuring instrument. Check any display panel on a manual instru-
ment for more details.
In all cases, you will be asked whether you wish to re-try measuring the target.
If the error persists, consider recalibrating the measuring instrument or follow-
ing advice in the “Symptoms” section.

C.3.2 Symptoms
Failure to communicate with the measuring instrument
This may be due to a mismatch between configuration settings and the actual
instrument or interface port used. A break in cabling, or a failure in software
between the computer and the measuring instrument may also be the cause of a
communication failure. Check the connections and settings in the Configuration
dialog box. If these appear to be correct, try switching off or disconnecting the
measuring instrument for 30 seconds and then reconnecting it.
Alternatively, Genlin may not be able to communicate with the measuring
instrument due to the re-configuration of the interface port by another applica-
tion. If you think this is the case, close the application that you suspect is caus-
ing the conflict. If necessary, shut down and restart your computer.

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 547

 Failure to read the correct data from the target
A problem in this area is most likely to be a mismatch between the Target file
selected in Genlin and the type of target you are physically measuring. First
make sure that the number you select in the target list after clicking File > Read
Target matches the reference number printed on the target itself.

If recalibrating, you may have printed the target on the wrong paper type. Other-
wise, you may have read the wrong patches when using a manual instrument, or
incorrectly aligned the target when using a strip-reader. Finally, the target may
be incorrectly printed or the measuring instrument may need recalibration.
Failure to transfer correct data to the RIP
Ensure that the RIP Folder specified in the Configuration dialog box is the path
to the SW folder of the RIP installation into which you are importing data.
If the RIP Folder is correct, this problem may be due to a problem with the con-
tent of the caldata folder where target and import data is stored. This is very
unlikely event but if it happens, delete the caldata folder, which is a subfolder
of the Navigator RIP SW folder and print the target again.
Note: After deleting the caldata folder you cannot use Genlin to read targets
created before you deleted the folder—you must reprint the targets.
The reference number printed on the target does not appear in the list when you click
File > Read Target

This can happen if the target was printed using a different Navigator RIP instal-
lation. Ensure that the RIP Folder setting in the Configuration dialog box is the
correct path to the SW folder of the RIP installation used to print the target.
This can also happen because the caldata folder was deleted between printing
the file and trying to read it with Genlin—reprint the target and measure the new
print.

548 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Glossary

This glossary gives a brief description of many of the important terms and concepts
surrounding the Harlequin RIP. Italics are used to indicate terms with their own entry
elsewhere in the glossary.

active device
The active device is the imagesetter or other output device to which the RIP is
sending its output. This is the output device specified in the page setup for the
job. See also menu device.

anti-aliasing
A technique in which intermediate colors or grayscale tones are used to visually
smooth boundaries between different colors. Anti-aliasing is most useful at low
or medium resolutions and with boundaries between very different colors. The
Harlequin RIP TIFF output plugin can perform anti-aliasing, with a control
offering choices between more smoothing and faster preparation.

aspect ratio
The height-to-width ratio of a page.

banding
The white bands which can be produced if interpreted data is sent to certain
kinds of imagesetter too slowly (see also data underrun)—the result is that
media continues to feed through, but no image is available to print, leading to

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 549

 white bands in the output. The RIP uses a printer buffer which ensures that data
is sent to the imagesetter at a steady rate, in order to reduce the chances of this
problem occurring.
Banding will only occur in imagesetters which cannot stop–start successfully.

black generation
The process of adding black to CMYK images in variable amounts according to
printing effects required.

cassette
A container for output media. This cassette contains a roll of film or paper and
is slotted onto the top of an imagesetter in such a way that the media can be fed
through. Some versions of the Harlequin RIP include the Media Manager which
allows you to monitor the amount of media left in many different cassettes auto-
matically.
See also current cassette.

choke
The process of overprinting a small border on graphics to make them look
smaller. Spread and choke are often used as part of trapping to protect against
misregistration of color separations.

CIP3
CIP3 was a group called International Cooperation for Integration of Pre-press,
Press, and Post-press (CIP3). The CIP3 group developed the Print Production
Format (PPF) for files to contain information about print jobs including admin-
istrative data, information about inks and register marks, comments, and pre-
view images. CIP3 has become CIP4, and maintains a web site at
http://www.cip4.org/.
CIP4 is a similar group called International Cooperation for Integration of Pro-
cesses in Prepress, Press, and Postpress, formed to continue the work of CIP3
and to develop a new file format called Job Description Format (JDF).

550 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

CMYK
A color representation scheme (or color space) where cyan, magenta, yellow,
and black are combined to create full-color images.

color separation
A monochrome image that describes a component of a color image that has
been described using a particular color space. In printing, images are commonly
depicted in the CMYK space, leading to four separated pages for each full-color
page.

color space
A scheme of representation for color images, such as CMYK or RGB. Colors are
represented as a combination of a small set of other colors, or by other parame-
ters, for example: hue, saturation, and brightness (HSB).

composite font
A font which consists of more than 256 characters. Composite fonts are indis-
pensable for producing images which contain, for example, Japanese text. How-
ever, they need to be treated as separate from ordinary fonts.

core RIP
The Harlequin RIP PostScript-language compatible interpreter. This is the pro-
gram which takes PostScript-language page descriptions as input and produces
bitmaps as output.

crop marks
Marks, printed near the edges of an image, which indicate where the paper
should be trimmed.

current cassette
The cassette feeding media to the output device receiving commands. This can
be the active device (receiving a job) or the menu device (receiving commands
from options in the Device menu).

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 551

 current device
The term current device is ambiguous, because it can refer to two different
devices.
The active device is the imagesetter or other output device to which the RIP is
sending its output. This is the output device specified in the page setup for the
job.
The menu device is the output device that provides the name of the Device menu,
and receives the commands generated by choosing options from the Device
menu.
See also current cassette.

current color space

When you are creating or editing a page setup, the current color space is the
color space of the selected separations style.

data rate
The speed that an imagesetter receives data for imaging. It is important that the
RIP sends data to the imagesetter at approximately the data rate of the imageset-
ter, otherwise data underrun may result. You can find out the data rate for a par-
ticular imagesetter from the instructions for that imagesetter.

data underrun
The result of a RIP failing to supply data to an output device quickly enough. If
the output device cannot stop / start successfully, banding or other effects will
occur which may cause a loss of output quality.

DCS (Desktop Color Separation)

DCS is Quark Inc’s method of image substitution in PostScript-language jobs.
The Harlequin RIP supports both DCS 1.0 and 2.0, and the similar OPI scheme.

552 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

device driver
A piece of software, often provided by an output plugin, that helps the RIP com-
municate with a particular printer, imagesetter, or other output device. You can
link the RIP with any output device, given the correct device driver. This driver
could have been produced by you, or by Global Graphics. It is also possible to
use device drivers for input devices; see also input plugin.

device type
The Harlequin RIP’s concept of a multiple device driver means that you can use
a single device driver to run several different imagesetters or other output
device, rather than requiring a separate device driver for each one. One multiple
device driver can run several imagesetters which have the same device type.
The nature of the device type depends on the multiple device driver, and is
likely to consists of groups of imagesetters. For instance, Ultre may be one
device type, and Pelbox may be another.

DLD1 font
The Harlequin RIP’s own font format, into which most fonts can be converted.
Operations with DLD1-formatted fonts can be performed significantly faster
than they would be with normal font descriptions.

dot gain
A printing effect which results in dots being printed larger than they should be.
It occurs as a result of ink spreading on the printed page, and if not compensated
for, can lead to an image appearing too dark.

dot range
The range of numerical values used to represent color values. TIFF/IT-P1 uses a
dot range of zero (0) through 255.
Note: The value 0 may be associated with white and 255 with 100% black or
the full density of a particular ink, but this is not essential: in the MP data type,
for example, these end values can be associated with particular colors and the
intermediate values represent proportionate blends of these two colors.
See also TIFF (Tag Image File Format).

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 553

 dot shape
The shape in which dots on the image are generated. See Chapter 6, “Screen-
ing”.

dpi
Dots per inch. A measure of the resolution of an output device. Dots per centi-
meter (dpcm) and dots per millimeter (dpmm) are also offered by the Harlequin
RIP.

Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)

EPS is a subset of the PostScript language which allows images to be described
in a format which can be imported into other documents. EPS images are inde-
pendent of the format of the document, and so may be imported into documents
using a wide variety of applications, from within the application itself, or can
even be imported into other PostScript-language page descriptions.

error diffusion
A technique that can be used to screen contone images into a halftone reproduc-
tion. The technique works by calculating the error between the required (con-
tone) value and the achieved (halftone) value at each point (which might be a
single pixel or a halftone cell), distributing that error to neighboring points, and
using the error to modify the contone values for those points. This is repeated
for the errors at all points. The result is an irregular and non-repeating screening
pattern that shows very little color error.
Error diffusion is easy to implement on low resolution devices but can be diffi-
cult to use for high resolution or color output, where the irregularity makes it
difficult to predict moiré or dot gain effects. Another problem occurs where the
image is rendered in bands, which may be processed in an order that is different
to their spatial order: this can lead to visible discontinuities.
The Harlequin RIP does not support error diffusion directly but Harlequin Dis-
persed Screening has some of the same “random” visual qualities while remain-
ing predictable with respect to behavior on physical output devices. Also, output
plugins can implement error diffusion screening in their output, while accepting
contone page buffers from the RIP.

554 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

executive
A special mode in some versions of the Harlequin RIP which allows you to type
in PostScript-language code and to see the interpreted results. You should only
use this mode if you are familiar with the PostScript language.

exposure
Some imagesetters (for example, Pelbox) have an exposure setting which can
alter the strength of the laser which produces the image. In these cases, the
exposure may be set using the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

feature
A section of PostScript-language code that may be automatically interpreted
with any job, specified using the Edit Page Setup dialog box.

font
A set of type characters for use in a textual printing job. Fonts typically contain
alphabetical and numerical type, as well as common special symbols (such as
marks of punctuation). The Harlequin RIP is supplied with the industry standard
35 fonts for PostScript Level 2, and some special purpose fonts. Users can
install third-party fonts as required.

halftone
A complex image which has been broken up into a series of very small dots so
as to reproduce it. A newspaper photograph is a good example of a halftone
image. See Chapter 6, “Screening”.

halftone cell
A single dot in a halftone image.

hard copy
A physical copy of a document, on media such as paper or film.

hardware feed
Some imagesetters will automatically feed through media whenever a job is
completed. In versions where the Harlequin RIP’s media management facilities
are available, the RIP can take account of any devices that do this.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 555

 hinted font
When previewing images on a low resolution screen (or when printing them on
a low resolution printer) text can look odd when rendered, because of the size of
the output pixels becoming significant when compared to features in the charac-
ters. Hinted fonts can improve the appearance of text rendered at low resolution
or at very small sizes on higher resolution devices.

This figure shows a simple example for the letter h in low resolution without
hinting (left) and with (right). Here, the hinting has balanced the width of the
vertical strokes.
See also font.

HDLT (Harlequin Display List Technology)

Provides a programmatic interface for customization between interpretation and
rendering. HDLT appears as a password-enabled option but is most likely to be
used by your supplier as a way of providing functionality that is not otherwise
obvious in the RIP GUI.

HPS (Harlequin Precision Screening)

A proprietary technique used to reduce the effect of moiré interference and
improve the quality of a color separated image when using halftones. See Chap-
ter 6, “Screening”.

IFD (Image File Descriptor, Image File Directory)

This structure used for each collection of information within a TIFF file, A typ-
ical IFD contains several entries, most of which are pairs of tags and values.
There can be several IFDs in a TIFF file but the only type of TIFF/IT-P1 file to
contain more than one IFD is the Final Page (FP) file.
See also TIFF (Tag Image File Format).

556 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

input plugin
A device driver which controls an input device connected to the RIP.

Note to OEMS: Several input plugins are provided as standard with the Harle-
quin RIP, but OEMs can undertake to write their own, or can
contract Global Graphics to do so.
Input plugins have several uses—they are primarily used as methods in which
input can be sent to the RIP (for example, using a spool folder), but they can
also be used as PostScript-language devices or data manipulation filters, and
they can be used to perform asynchronous actions.

JDF (Job Definition Format)

JDF is an XML-based file format that is becoming the industry standard for the
definition of job tickets in pre-press workflows. Its main purpose is to facilitate
the exchange of information between printing applications and systems.

keyboard accelerator
A set of key presses which have the same effect as a mouse-based operation—
such as selecting a menu item—while probably taking less of a user’s time to
perform.

lpi
Lines per inch. A measurement of halftone screen frequency. Lines per centime-
ter (lpcm) and lines per millimeter (lpmm) are also offered by the RIP.

media
The various materials, such as paper or film, that are used in producing hard
copy.

menu device
The menu device is the output device that provides the name of the Device menu,
and receives the commands generated by choosing options from the Device
menu.
See also active device.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 557

 mirrorprint
An option in the Edit Page Setup dialog box which allows you to produce a
mirror-image copy of your job. See Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”.

moiré pattern
A printing effect that occurs when a color separation is printed with incorrect
screen angles. It is undesirable and can be minimized by the use of correct
screen angles. See also HPS (Harlequin Precision Screening).

multiple device driver

A device driver which can drive more than one output device. Normally, you
need a separate device driver for each output device you are using. By using a
multiple device driver, however, you can use this one driver to run all devices of
the types that it supports. For example, one multiple device driver might support
all your Ultre and ExxtraSetter devices.

N-color
N-color is a name representing a family of systems of process colors other than
the conventional four-color CMYK system (and CMY and RGB). N represents
a variable number of inks, which can be less than four for economy in simple
jobs such as forms printing or more than four for high quality or HiFi color.
Examples of N-color systems are the PANTONE Hexachrome Color Selector
system and Photo-ink technologies.

OPI (Open Prepress Interface)

OPI stands for Open Prepress Interface and was originally specified by Aldus
Corporation. Systems using OPI enable designers to use relatively low-resolu-
tion and easy to handle images on design workstations but to have higher qual-
ity images substituted for final output. The RIP supports both OPI and the
similar DCS scheme.

output device
A computer peripheral capable of producing printed copy of a document, such
as an imagesetter or laser printer. See also active device, menu device.

558 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

output plugin
A device driver that controls an output device connected to the RIP.

Note to OEMS: Several output plugins are provided as standard with the RIP,
but OEMs can write their own plugins or commission Global
Graphics to produce custom plugins.

page buffer
A file on disk used to store a page of interpreted output, before it is printed or
previewed. Depending on the page buffer mode in which you run the RIP, it can
produce page buffers always, or only when required. Once produced, page buff-
ers can either be retained on disk, to allow reprinting; or deleted after printing,
to save space on your hard disk.

page imposition
The process of printing several pages, of, say, a pamphlet, on one sheet of
media, so as to minimize the amount of trimming that needs to be done. For
example, two copies of a four page A5 pamphlet could be produced from a sheet
of A3 by printing the A5 pages in the pattern shown in this figure:
Page 1 Page 4

Page 2 Page 3

The pattern needs to be printed on both sides of the A3 sheet, reversed vertically
on one side. Two copies of the pamphlet could then be produced simply by cut-
ting the paper along the horizontal line, and folding along the vertical line. This
process is much simpler than producing and trimming each page separately and
rearranging them so as to form a booklet.
Imposition is one of the applications dealt with in the PostScript-language
extensions provided by the Harlequin RIP.

Note to OEMS: See the Using Harlequin RIP Extensions manual for details.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 559

 page setup
In the Harlequin RIP, a page setup is a named collection of settings used to pro-
cess a PostScript-language job. All page setups are visible in the Page Setup
Manager, which allows you to create new page setups and to copy or edit exist-
ing page setups. Using the Input Controller, you can create multiple ways of
sending a job to the RIP, each with an associated page setup, so that any user can
choose an input that applies the desired settings for each job. For full details, see
Chapter 5, “Configuring Output Formats”.

partial page buffer

An incomplete page buffer. A partial page buffer does not yet contain all of the
details of the page being rendered. The RIP produces partial page buffers when
there is insufficient physical memory to interpret a job while holding a complete
page in memory.

PDF
PDF has these meanings:
Portable Document Format. A PDF file describes pages, using graphic capabil-
ities similar to those in the PostScript language. Compared to PostScript-lan-
guage files, PDF files are typically smaller and more portable to different
printers while producing more predictable output. This is the most common
usage of PDF.
Printer Description File or Printer Definition File. Files, special to a creating
application or to the Netware operating system, that define the characteristics of
a printer. Many more applications support PPD files, which have a similar pur-
pose.

Photo-ink
Photo-ink technologies use different densities (light and dark versions) of one or
more colorants. A capable system is then able to use the light ink in highlight
areas and the dark ink where more colorant is required. A typical set of colors is
light cyan, dark cyan, light magenta, dark magenta, yellow, and black.

pica
A unit of measurement in printing. Usually, equal to 12 points or 0.166 inches.

560 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

pixel
A single element of a VDU’s display, or of an image.

plug-in module
A software product that can be interfaced with the RIP to provide extra features
or customizations.

point
A unit of measurement used in printing. There are 12 points to a pica. Histori-
cally, there have been several definitions of the point: a common definition is
0.01384 inches, or approximately 72 points to the inch. The PostScript language
uses a default user unit which is exactly 1/72 of an inch (0.01389 inches or
0.3528 mm). This unit is frequently called a point, and this is the definition used
by the RIP.

PPD
PostScript Printer Description. Each PPD is a file that defines the characteris-
tics of a printer. When installed correctly, a PPD customizes an operating
system printer driver or a creation or page layout application to optimize Post-
Script-language jobs for the printer described by the PPD. Many imagesetter
and printer manufacturers provide PPDs for the printers that they produce.

precision screening
See HPS (Harlequin Precision Screening).

prep file
A PostScript-language header file, which is interpreted before the main job pro-
cessing in order to provide a standard setup to be used by a range of different
jobs.

preview
To view an interpreted job on the screen before producing a hard copy of it.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 561

 profile
In printing and color science, a profile is a description of the color performance
of an input or output device such as a scanner, printer, or display monitor. With
suitable software, it is possible to transfer color definitions between different
devices, and to have the same colors appear on each.
There is an open standard for profiles promoted by the International Color
Consortium (ICC), supported by many device manufacturers and vendors of
profile creation tools. The ColorPro color management options within the
RIP are supplied with several profiles and can install additional ICC profiles.
There are several types of profile; see the Harlequin ColorPro User’s Guide for
more details.

progressive proof
A proof or series of proofs in which (some) intermediate stages of laying down
the colors are shown. For example, a CMYK page is usually printed in the order
yellow, magenta, cyan, and finally black. The full set of corresponding progres-
sive proofs would be Y, Y+M, Y+M+C, and Y+M+C+K. If the page is to be
printed with two passes on a two-color press, the most useful proofs are likely to
be the ones representing the product of each pass on the press: Y+M and
Y+M+C+K.

proof
A preview or hard copy of some or all of the characters in a font, or of an image.
The RIP can create various forms of proofs—as composite output, as a set of
separations, or as a progressive proof—to suit the needs of the situation.

Raster Image Processor

See RIP.

rendering
The term rendering refers to the process of creating a bitmap image or raster
from the interpreted page description. This bitmap can be used by the output
device to produce a visible image.

562 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

resolution
The degree of detail with which an image is reproduced, usually measured in
dots per inch (dpi). The higher the resolution, the greater the detail in which the
image will be reproduced. The resolution of a computer screen is usually around
72 dpi, whereas an image detailed enough to print in a magazine may be closer
to 2500 dpi.

RGB
A color representation scheme (or color space) where separations in red, green,
and blue are overlaid to create full-color images. The RGB scheme is usually
used by computer monitors and televisions, and by some printers.

RIP
Raster Image Processor. A standard term used to name programs or devices
which take an image of some description—text, line (vector) drawings, or pho-
tographic images—and convert it into a bitmap for display on a computer screen
or output on an imagesetter. The final bitmap is the raster referred to in the
name.

roam
To preview interpreted jobs in the Output Controller, available only in either of
the multiple modes. See also preview.

rosette
The pattern in which halftone cells are arranged in a separated image. This
figure shows how the RIP can produce rosettes which either have dark centers
(on the left of the diagram) or clear centers (on the right of the diagram, with the
central dot removed).

screen angles
The angles at which the halftone screens are placed in relation to one another.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 563

 screen frequency/ruling
The density of dots on the halftone screen, commonly measured in lines per
inch (lpi). This is sometimes called ‘raster’ or ‘mesh’.

spread
The process of printing a small border just outside the edges of graphics to make
them look bigger. Spread and choke are often used as part of trapping to protect
against misregistration of color separations.

stop / start
The ability of an output device to stop and restart during printing.

tag
In TIFF or TIFF/IT files, an Image File Descriptor (IFD) contains a number of
entries (tags), each consisting of an unique tag number from 0 to 65535, and its
corresponding value or values. Tag numbers are generally determined by the
TIFF 6.0 or TIFF/IT specifications, and each has a specific meaning. (In
TIFF 6.0, tag numbers above 32767 are vendor defined.) For example, the tag
number for the tag named DotRange is 336.

throughput
Generally, the efficiency with which images are interpreted and produced. In the
Harlequin RIP specifically, throughput is another term for Multiple (Parallel)
mode, where interpreting and output are carried out in parallel, and the Output
Controller is used to manage the printing of jobs. See Chapter 4, “Harlequin
RIP Output Methods”.

TIFF (Tag Image File Format)

The basic TIFF file format. Without further details, you cannot assume that
something described as being a TIFF file conforms to the TIFF 6.0, TIFF/IT, or
TIFF/IT-P1 standards.
Note: TIFF/IT is sometimes referred to as Transport Independent File Format
for Image Technology. This name refers to the same format as described in
Chapter 8, “Configuring Input”.

564 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005

trapping
Techniques used to tackle undesirable printing effects caused by misregistration
of printed separations, optical effects, and so on. See spread and choke. See also
Chapter 14, “Color Separation”.

virtual memory
Virtual memory has these meanings:
In PostScript terminology, virtual memory or VM is a pool of memory used for
the storage of composite objects such as strings, arrays, and dictionaries. Post-
Script-language compatible interpreters are free to implement VM using all
appropriate types of memory in their working environment.
In computer operating systems, virtual memory is disk memory used as an
extension to physical memory, built-in memory, or RAM. Many operating sys-
tems support the use of virtual memory.

Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005 OEM Manual 565

566 OEM Manual Harlequin RIP Genesis Release : March 2005
Index

A angles
Abort if calibration on screens expected in incoming job 508
page setup option 191 screens for process colors 214
Abort Printing File command 303 anti-aliasing
Abort the job if any fonts are missing defined 549
page setup option 191 AppleTalk 270
Accelerate displayed job names 96
Edit Page Setup option 202 input plugin 264
See also Harlequin Harpoon aspect ratio 549
accelerators asynchronous actions 264
hardware processor for the Harlequin RIP 23 Asynchronous Socket
keyboard equivalents for menus 17 input plugin 265
Accurate color display 127 Asynchronous Socket Quit
AcroForms 309 input plugin 265
Act on InDesign page comments when recom- Automatic cassette selection 158
bining... 197 Automatic Prep loading
Act on XPress page comments when recombin- Configure RIP option 256
ing... 198
active device 549 B
Active Queue 92 background reading 212
Add Channel dialog 459 band size
Add showpage at end of job for printing buffer 250
page setup option 190 banding 549
adding black generation 504, 550
a new input plugin 268 overriding in job 505
a new page feature 186 Bootlist file 55
See also installing bromide. See media
adjusting tone curves 202 Buffer full message 521
Advance n inches command 340 Buffer space low message 521
Advanced Media Saving 156 buffers
advancing media 338 network 252
Allow stop start page, defined 559
Configure RIP option 248 printer 253
Allow use of all available memory 257 Busy message 521
Always, delete option in Output Controller 98 Busy or off-line message 521

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 567

 C CMap folder 52
caldata folder 52 CMYK 34, 473, 478, 551
calibration color
and color process work 420 changing 102
calibration sets 424 colorrenderings folder 52
creating a calibration set 430 device-independent, and ColorPro 445
densitometer use 430 operators 189
entering data 432 color management
factors affecting accuracy 440 in a PDF job 535
for positive and negative 438 instructions in a job 535
maintenance strategies 435 supplied with an output plugin 200
printing a target 424 with ColorPro options 33
printing presses 442 Color menu
screen frequencies 438 summarized 64
smoothing 433 color process work
stopping output without calibration set 191 need for calibration 420
turning on in Edit Page Setup dialog 200, color separation 207, 551
201, 202 controlling separations 484
Calibration Manager dialog 434, 450 for HCS and HDS 243
saving calibration sets 439 identifying in the Output Controller 95
calibration sets knockouts 473, 503
copying 455 labeling pages in Output Controller 510
creating from imported files 463 misregistering separations 474
creating from published data 462 overprinting 475
editing 437 producing color images 475
naming 458 roaming color images 510
operating on several sets 454 roaming in false colors 510
saving 439 trapping 508
status in Calibration Manager 453 using Level 1 spot colors 489
Cassette Manager dialog 346, 347 color separations
Cassette Manager Edit dialog 348 overprinting 503
cassettes 550 Color Setup Manager dialog 494
changing 102 color space 551
creating or deleting 346 converting with ColorPro 471
media management 336 in PostScript-language jobs 478
setting up monitoring 346 reproducing 468
categories folder 52 colored separations 483
CFF fonts 401 ColorPro
chain screening 236 and press calibration 442
Change roam color device-independent color 445
button in Info dialog 511 introduction to color management 33
dialog 511 memory required 47
channels menu commands 64
in calibration sets 458 colors
character identifier fonts 401 accuracy in Roam and Preview 127
charstrings folder 52 colorspaces folder 52
choke 550 Communications failed message 521
CID fonts 401 compact font format fonts 401
CIDFont folder 52 compatibility setting
CIP3 for PostScript LanguageLevel 188
and PPF files 550 Complete folder 52
defined 550 composite fonts 41, 400, 410, 551

568 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 CID 401 Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black
efficient use of 410 See CMYK
installing 405
memory required 46 D
preloading 406 data rate 552
compressing Data transfer failed message 521
page buffers 39, 250 data underrun
setting required compression ratio 251 and printer buffer size 253
Config folder 53 avoiding with Multiple mode 107
configuration settings defined 552
backing up 56 Data underrun message 521
Configure RIP dialog 246 DCS
compressing page buffers 519 defined 552
Configure RIP options Delete Fonts command 409
Allow stop / start 248 deleting
automatic prep loading 256 fonts from the Harlequin RIP 409
band size for printer buffer 250 input plugins 270
minimum compression ratio 251 jobs after printing 98
minimum free disk space 258 page buffers 98, 247
Startup prep 256 densitometer
Configure RIP Options dialog 249 using for calibration 430
configuring Desktop Color Separation. See DCS
extras in Configure RIP 254 developer
for features of output devices 154 online processor 354
input plugins 269 deviated frequency 228
minimum free disk space 258 device driver 151, 553
number of parallel processes 252 Device Manager dialog 152
output to TIFF files 129 Device menu 59
Spool folder 281 device type 150, 553
Control key 17 device-independent color
controlling in PDF jobs 538
inputs 266 devices
output of jobs 91 None 128
separations 484 output, defined 558
conventions Preview 124, 128
fonts 18 TIFF 129
instructions in text 18 Devices folder 53, 516
copies dial, progress 73
number printed from page buffer 101 dialogs
number to print 101 language used in 259
Copy Channel Data dialog 460 directories
core RIP 551 structure used by the RIP 51
Cover open message 521 See also folders
Crdgen folder 53 Disable output check box 93
crop marks 551 disabling
current cassette 551 individual inputs 270
current color space 552 media management 342
current device 552 output of jobs 93
Cut media no feed command 340 stopping all enabled inputs 270
Cut media with feed command 340, 345 Disk space left for system option 258
cutting media disks
in Media Manager 343 failure to RIP to disk 519

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 569

 preserving free space 258 encodings folder 53
required data rate 51 Enfocus certified status check 320
DLD1 fonts 402, 553 Enfocus preflight checking 312
Don’t let files silently substitute Courier for EPSF
missing fonts check box 195 format files 190
dot gain 553 error diffusion
and screening options 212 defined 554
compensated by calibration 422 in output plugin 205
dot shapes 554 Error folder 53
elliptical 218 errors. See problems
line 219 excluding file names for spool folder 284
round Euclidean 216 executive 42
setting in Screening Setup 215 defined 555
square 218 starting up 333
square Euclidean 218 Executive window 333
dpcm (dots per centimeter) 554 exposure 555
dpi (dots per inch) 554 changing 102
dpmm (dots per millimeter) 554 choosing for calibration 426
Draft Edit Page Setup option 148
printing on each page 186 exposure sweeps
drum recorders 335, 340 printing 427
time saving 166 Extensions folder 53
duotones Extra grays
in Photoshop EPS files 195 enabling 227
Extras
E enabling optional features 255
Edit Calibration dialog 432, 455
Edit Page Setup dialog 115, 348 F
Accelerate button 202 Factory settings
retargeting press calibration 201 reverting to 258
turning on calibration 200, 424 Factory Settings folder 53
turning on press calibration 201 Fast color display
turning on tone curve calibration 202 in Roam and Preview 127
types of option 116 Fast patterns
Edit Plugin dialog 268, 269 page setup option 189
Edit Style dialog 484 Feature check box 184
extra grays 224 features 184, 555
with screening options 205 See also page features
editing feeding media in the Media Manager 344
calibration sets 432, 437 file names
EDS. See error diffusion mapping 56
elliptical dot shapes 218 prefix list for spool folder 284
Emulate old imagemask behavior FILEMAP.DAT file 56
page setup option 190 FILEMAP.PS file 56
emulsion up/down. See mirrorprint FILERED.PS file 56
Enable Feature dialog 326 files
enabling adding showpage to EPSF jobs 190
extra features in the Harlequin RIP 235 initialization (HqnStart) 406
extra grays in HPS 227 name mapping from PostScript names 56
input plugins 270 film. See media
optional features 255 FlatPgbDir folder 53
Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) 554 FM screening 237

570 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

folders fonts 40, 555
caldata 52 CFF 401
categories 52 CID (character identifier) 401
charstrings 52 compact font format 401
CIDFont 52 composite 41, 400, 406, 410
CMap 52 composite fonts 400
colorrenderings 52 DLD1 format 402
colorspaces 52 folder 53
Complete 52 hinted 400
Config 53 installing 402
Crdgen 53 installing composite fonts 405
Devices 53, 516 listing 406
encodings 53 minimum font set 520
Error 53 preloading 406
Extensions 53 problems with 519
Factory Settings 53 Proof fonts in long format option 409
FlatPgbDir 53 proofing 407
fonts 53 removing from the RIP 409
FontSet 53 response to jobs with missing fonts 191
forms 53 saving a backup file 56
halftones 53 TrueType 401
icccrd 54 Type 0 fonts 400
IdiomSet 54 Type 1 fonts 400
Inputs 54 Type 3 fonts 400
MediaSavingDir 54 Type 32 401
Messages 54 Type 4 fonts 400
NamedColor 54 Type 42 401
NamedColorOrder 54 types of 400
Page Features 54 FontSet folder 53
Page Setups 53 forms folder 53
PageBuffers 54, 247, 519 Frequency Modulation. See FM
Passwords 54 frequency, deviated 228
patterns 55
PrepFiles 55 G
procsets 55 Garbage collection 30
ReproductionCriteria 55 Genlin
Screenin 55 configuring 542
Screens 54, 55 introduction 539
Separation Features 55 GIF (Graphics Interchange Format) 323
Spool 55 gray levels
structure used by Harlequin RIP 51 increasing number with HPS 227
SW 247 introduction 220
Sys 55 limiting number of 224, 227
targeteps 55
tmp 56 H
TrapParams 56
Usr 56 halftone 555
Utilities 56 cells 208, 555
WorkSpace 56, 247 deviated frequency (HPS) 228
font conventions frequency 420
in this manual 18 strategies 206
instructions in text 18 halftones folder 53

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 571

 halftoning 476 Hold and Reprint command 107
description 206 HPS 556
See also screening and gray levels 227
Hand speed option 127 background reading 212
hard copy 555 enabling HPS 2.0 230
hardware feeds 555 introduction to Harlequin Precision Screen-
using 352 ing 226
Harlequin Chain Screening. See HCS memory required 46, 47
Harlequin Color Production Solutions. See options dialog 228
HCPS performance 233
Harlequin Dispersed Screening. See HDS problems and cures 231
Harlequin Micro Screening. See HMS used with pattern screens 233
Harlequin Precision Screening. See HPS HqnOEM
Harlequin Screening Library. See HSL initialization file 406
Harlequin Harpoon HqnOEM file 55
using 244 HqnProduct file 55
Harlequin RIP HqnStart file 55
failure to appear on the network 533 HSB 478
folder structure 51 HSL
monitoring 84 enabling screen sets 235
quitting 66 introduction to Harlequin Screening Library
resetting to standard configuration 259 235
starting up 57 problems and cures 243
Harlequin RIP window 85, 257, 406 selecting screen sets 236
Harpoon. See Harlequin Harpoon Hue, Saturation, Brightness. See HSB
HCS
introduction to Harlequin Chain Screening I
236 ICC
HDLT profiles, defined
password 255 ICC profiles
HDLT (Harlequin Display List Technology) definition 34
defined 556 icccrd folder 54
HDS ID 395
compared to lpi measures 239 IdiomSet folder 54
HDS-Light 235 Image interpolation 120
introduction 237 image replacement 184
varieties of 237 imagemask
height emulating old behavior of 190
page default 167 images
Held Queue 92 previewing 74
Hex printing color 475
N-color system 469 roaming 74
Hexachrome scaling 183
PANTONE Color System 469 imagesetters
HiFi color linearization 421
N-color system 469 required data rate 50
hinted fonts 400, 556 selecting output devices 119
HMS See also output devices
calibration for 242 Import Measurements dialog 463
introduction to Harlequin Micro Screening Importing PDF profiles 313
242 imposition 184
varieties of 242 See also page imposition

572 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

Imposition Manager 358 JDF (Job Definition Format) 557
Info dialog 102 JDF-Enabled RIP 381
access to Page Layout dialog 168 Delete all jobs 396
Ink low message 521 Delete selected job 396
Ink out message 522 Information 396
Input and output queues Input and output queues 393
Channel 395 Status 394
Job/File Name 395 Input Sort By 395
Time Stamp 395 Job’s RIP Monitor Log 396
Input Channel Edit dialog 270 Log out icon 392
Input Controller dialog 266 Logs screen 396
input methods Filter 397
JFIF files 323 First 397
JPEG files 323 Last 397
Input Modes Next 397
printer problems 533 Prev 397
input plugins 557 Managing queues 395
adding new 268 Monitor screen 390
configuring 269 Output Sort By 395
deleting 270 Pop-up blocking programs 388
editing 269 Refresh icon 392
enabling 270 RIP monitor 391
introduction to 36 Show 396
managing 266 Show Classic UI 384
types supplied 264 Sort queue last/first 395
Input Queue mode 80, 84 Sorting queues 395
input sources. See input plugins Starting the JDF Enabler 385
inputs Status (JDF Enabler workflow) 390
disabling individual inputs 270 Stopping the JDF Enabler 388
starting up 80 Viewing queues 395
stopping 60 Web UI 382
stopping all enabled inputs 270 JFIF files
Inputs folder 54 input methods 323
Install Fonts dialog 403 printing 323
installing Job Description Format
composite fonts 405 See JDF
fonts 402 jobs
printer interface card 51 altering parameters 99
installing Harlequin RIP altering parameters for all pages 104
ability to RIP a job 48 deleting automatically after printing 98
printer data rates 50 preserving from deletion 100
instructions in text 18 reprinting 94
Interface card failed message 522 screen settings and overrides 225
interface cards timeouts 251
installing 51 JPEG files
International Color Consortium. See ICC input methods 323
Invalid clipping message 522 printing 323
Invalid resolution message 522
K
J keyboard accelerators 17, 557
JDF keyboard shortcuts 17
and CIP4 550 knockouts 473, 503

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 573

 L saving film 186
language type 349
choice at first use 57 width 349
used in user interface 259 media management 41
LanguageLevel 1 configuring 187
setting compatibility 188 disabling 342
LanguageLevel 2 introduction 335
setting compatibility 188 Media Manager dialog 341
LanguageLevel 3 188 Media Monitor 355
setting compatibility 188 Media saving
Laser diode failed message 522 automatic cassette selection 158
Late color management 502 Fill whole drum (for part drum devices only)
Level 1 PostScript language jobs 160
compatibility setting 188 Margin between jobs 159
Level 2 PostScript language jobs Margin between pages 159
compatibility setting 188 Name flat after 162
Level 3 PostScript language jobs Order of pages on flat 161
compatibility setting 188 Print Flat 159
Limit number of distinct gray levels 227 Switch roam color to black 161
Limit screen levels 227 Time to wait between pages 160
line screening Track flat width (for roll fed devices only)
in halftoned images 219 160
linearization 421 Tracking media width 158
See also calibration MediaSavingDir folder 54
List Fonts command 406 memory
localization allocating 256
language in user interface 259 increasing 256
locking page buffers 100 requirements for disk space 48
LOGFILE 407 requirements for RAM 46
in SW folder 56 temporary allocation 256
messages from Harlequin RIP 85 Memory for RIP option 256
low media warnings 351 Memory reserve for RIP option 257
Low power message 522 menu device 557
lpcm (lines per centimeter) 557 menus
lpi (lines per inch) 557 changes in displayed commands 64
lpmm (lines per millimeter) 557 description of 59
language used in 259
M messages
in LOGFILE 85
margins language used in 259
setting in Page layout 167 warnings and errors 514
measurements Messages folder 54
choice for calibration data 460 Microsoft Windows
media 557 Help and manuals 17
advancing 338 Minimum free disk space
cutting 338, 339, 341, 343, 352, 353 Configure RIP option 258
feeding 339, 341, 344 Minimum memory left for system option 256,
hardware feeds 352 257
low media warnings 351 Mirrorprint
monitoring 346, 355 Edit Page Setup option 169
remaining length 349 mirrorprint 558
saving (optimization) 166 misregistering separations

574 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 effect 474 photo-ink 469
minimizing effect 508 negative
missing fonts calibrating for output 438
aborting jobs with 191 printing in 101
modes networks
Multiple 106 Harlequin RIP fails to publish 533
Multiple (Parallel) 105 problems with 517
page buffering in the Harlequin RIP 88 Never, delete option in Output Controller 98
Single 107 New Page Setup dialog
Single (If Required) 108 basic use 116
moiré pattern 558 example of use 70, 81
reducing 213 No cassette message 522
reducing with HPS 227 No power message 522
monitoring No take-up cassette message 522, 523
Harlequin RIP 84 None device 128
media 346, 355 NT Pipe
monochrome separations 483 input plugin 265
Multiple (Parallel) Mode NT Print
page buffer modes compared 89 input plugin 265
Multiple (Parallel) mode Number of copies to print
advanced details 105 page setup option 192
and data underrun 253
and Media Monitor 355 O
compared to Single (if required) 108 Off-line message 523
multiple copies online developer 354
printing 101 Open Prepress Interface
multiple device drivers 150 see OPI 558
adding a new device 153 OPI
changing configuration 153 defined 558
defined 558 OPI, support for 184
deleting a device 153 optional features
Multiple mode enabling 255
advanced details 106 Output Controller
and Media Monitor 351 disabling output 93
page buffer modes compared 88 labeling of color separation pages 510
multiprocessing warning messages in 520
number of parallel processes 252 Output Controller dialog 91, 168
Always option 98
N identifying color separations in 95
Name flat after 162 locked pages in 519
named pipes low media warnings in 351
as inputs 276 Never delete option 98
NamedColor folder 54 numbering of separation pages in 96
NamedColorOrder folder 54 warning messages in 520
N-color When necessary delete option 98
defined 558 output devices 19
N-color systems changing 102
distinct colorant 469 defined 558
HiFi color 469 Harlequin Harpoon 244
in job specification 478 printing to 147
introduction 469 selecting 119
output support for 34 output plugins

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 575

 defined 559 reordering list of page setups 114
introduction to 35 Page Setup Option Extras dialog 193
multiple, defined 558 Page Setup Options dialog 187
overprinting 475, 503 abort if calibration does not match 191
controls 503 abort if fonts are missing 191
Override angles in job 226, 490 add showpage 190
Override black generation in job box 505 emulate old imagemask behavior 190
Override dot shape in job 215, 226 fast patterns 189
Override frequency in job 220, 226 number of copies to print 192
Override separations in job 489 remove color operators 189
overriding job settings 225, 489 run prep at start of job 189
setting the LanguageLevel 188
P Page Setups folder 53
Pack Drum 186 page size
page buffers specifying default 167
altering all in job 104 Page stop-started message 523
altering parameters 99 PageBuffers folder 54, 247, 519
compressing 39, 250 Pantone Matching System 470
defined 559 Paper jam message 523
deleting 98, 247 Paper low message 523
from older versions of the Harlequin RIP 104 Paper out message 523
locking 100 paper. See media
modes 88 Input and output queues
moving in Output Controller 94 Job 395
resubmitting 186 partial page buffer 37, 257
roaming 100 defined 560
summary of modes 109 Passwords folder 54
page features patterns folder 55
adding 186 PDF
Draft 186 Enfocus certified status check 320
Image replacement 184 Enfocus preflight checking 312
imposition 184 PDF files
OPI 184 color management 535
Pack Drum 186 input methods 321
PGB hot folder 186 printing 304
printing Draft on each page 186 Printing PDF version 1.4 307
reporting on spot colors 184 setting options 314
resubmitting page buffers 186 special treatment 321
saving film 186 two definitions 560
Page Features folder 54 PDF jobs
page imposition 42, 184, 524, 559 color management in 538
Page Layout dialog 103, 167 PDF Options dialog 314
page setup PDF/X Color management 306
definition 560 PDF/X standards 305
Exposure 148 PDF/X-1
Mirrorprint effect 169 1999 and PDF/X-1
Negative effect 169 2001 compatibility 307
Rotate effect 169 PelBox. See imagesetters
saving configurations 117 performance
saving setups 37 Rainbow Islands test image 109
TIFF output device 129 requirements 46
Page Setup Manager dialog 112 Seybold Musicians test image 49

576 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

PGB hot folder 186 Print calibrated target 434, 439, 448
Photo-ink Print Calibration dialog 427, 447
defined 560 Print exposure sweep 448
photo-ink Print File command 302
N-color system 469 Print File dialog 302
Photoshop images Print File menu 303
processing jobs containing 535, 537 Print Production Format
pica 560 See PPF
pipes Print uncalibrated press target 448
named pipes as inputs 276 Print uncalibrated target 448
pixel 561 printer buffer 253
plug-in module 561 and data underrun 254
point 561 and roaming large page buffers 254
Portable Document Format. See PDF files 304 Printer Caught Up message 523
positive. See negative printers
post processing installing interface cards 51
TIFF files after output 143 required data rate 50
Post processing substitution codes 144 See also output devices
PostScript language Printing
access from executive 333 draft on each page 186
applied to jobs in page features 184 printing
handling Level 1 language jobs 188 calibration targets 448
handling Level 2 language jobs 188 color images 475
PostScript Printer Description. See PPD exposure sweeps 427
files 302
PPD in mirror image 169
defined 561 in negative 169
PPF in rotated orientation 169
file format and CIP3 550 JFIF files 323
precision screening. See HPS JPEG files 323
prefix list 284 multiple copies 101
preloading PDF files 304
composite fonts 406 PostScript-language files 304
fonts in the Harlequin RIP 406 setting PDF options 314
prep file 561 several copies 192
PrepFiles folder 55 several files 303
preseparated jobs size of buffer for band 250
recombining 490 TIFF/IT files 327
rejecting 490 using a different press 201, 423
Preserve monochrome and preseparated jobs using special effects 184
page setup option 191 Printing PDF files
press calibration Acroforms 309
alternative uses 445 PDF/X standards 305
in Edit Page Setup dialog 201 PDF/XColor management 306
introduction 442 Printing PDF version 1.4 307
See also calibration Trapping 306
preview problems
defined 561 curing 513, 525
images 39, 74 failure to RIP to disk 519
See also roaming with fonts 519
Preview window 125 with HPS 231
Print calibrated press target 448 with HSL 243

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 577

 with networks 517 page setup option 189
with TIFF/IT files 525 removing
process colors fonts from the RIP 409
changing the angles 214 rendering 562
process work. See color reordering
processor, online developer 354 page setups 114
procsets folder 55 reprinting jobs 94
profiles ReproductionCriteria folder 55
ColorPro feature 453 requirements
defined 562 data rate to printer 50
progress box 77, 96 disk data rate 51
media management 351 disk space 48
warning messages in 520 minimum font set 520
progress dial 73, 79 RAM 46
progressive proofs resetting
defined 562 Harlequin RIP 259
progressive separations 483 RIP configuration 258
Proof Fonts dialog 72, 408 Resetting the Harlequin RIP 258
proofing fonts 407 resolution 563
in long format 409 setting 120
proofs resubmitting, page buffers 186
defined 562 reverse. See negative
progressive, defined 562 Revert to Factory Settings 258
RGB 34, 563
Q in color composites 478
queues right reading. See mirrorprint
active 92 RIP
held 92 defined 563
transferring pages between 94 RIP configuration
quitting PageBuffers folder 247
Harlequin RIP 66 resetting 258
WorkSpace folder 247
R ripping to disk
failure 519
RAM. See memory Roam button 74, 100
Raster Image Processor Roam Options dialog 126
defined 562 Roam window 125
Read dial 73 roam, defined 563
recombination roaming
features requiring 479 accurate color display 127
Recombine preseparated jobs and disable output 100
and composite jobs 492 changing the displayed colors 511
check box 490 description of Reduced Roam window 125
memory requirements 47 description of Roam window 125
suitable jobs 491 hiding separations 126
Red, Green, Blue. See RGB images 74
Reduced Preview window 125 large or multiple pages and printer buffer 254
reduced roam 74, 100, 125 options 126
Reduced Roam window 125 reduced roam 74, 100, 125
reject preseparated jobs 490 separations 510
remaining length of media 349 setting hand speed 127
Remove color operators several pages 100, 125

578 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

rosette 563 plate
Rotate Illustrator 6 196
page setup effect 169 Illustrator 7 196
round Euclidean dot shapes 216 QuarkXPress 197
RS232. See Serial Separate spot color vignettes to the spot color
Run prep at start of job plate check box
page setup option 189 Macromedia FreeHand 198
Separation Features folder 55
S separations 207
Save Setup dialog 82 changing color 102
saving colored 483
a backup of all fonts 56 features needing recombination 479
all configuration settings 56 monochrome 483
media or time 166 page numbering in Output Controller 96
page setup configurations 117 progressive 483
separations styles 493 style and screening 203
scaling Separations Manager dialog 480
the output image 183 Serial
screen angles input plugin 265
definition of 208 Setting the PostScript LanguageLevel 188
expected in incoming job 508 settrap 509
glossary entry 563 Seybold
screen frequency 208, 564 Musicians test image 49
and calibration sets 438 Rainbow Islands test image 109
and gray levels 220 Shift key 17
overriding 220 shortcuts
specified in job 220 keyboard 17
screen levels showpage operator 190
limiting 227 Simple imposition 357
screen sets Annotations 372
selecting 236 Custom annotations 372
screening 212 Example impositions 374
and separations style 203 Front and back options 369
chain 236 Gutter options 368
error diffusion 205, 554 Marks 370
extra gray levels 227 Page options 366
FM 237 Registration marks 370
HDS 237 Schemes 362
HMS 242 Surface options 364
HPS 226 Single (if required) mode 108
HSL 235 compared to Multiple (Parallel) 109
overview of methods 32 page buffer modes compared 88
Screenin folder 55 Single mode
spot functions 215 advanced details 107
screens page buffer modes compared 88
defined 208 SMP
Screens folder 54, 55 number of parallel processes 252
searching for input symbol 267 Socket
Separate spot color duotones, tritones & quad- configuring the input plugin 290
tones to spot color plates check box input plugin 265
195 See also sockets
Separate spot color vignettes to the spot color sockets

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 579

 as input to the Harlequin RIP 286 substitute fonts
requirements for use with the Harlequin RIP in jobs from Illustrator 195
288 or aborting the job 191
special effects SW folder 247
applied to jobs using page features 184 symmetric multiprocessing 252
applied to jobs using page setup 169 Sys folder 55
specifying
default page size 167 T
image scale 183 Take-up full message 523
Spool folder 55 Take-up space low message 523
configuring 281 targeteps folder 55
excluding files from processing 284 TCP/IP 265
input plugin 265 testing
multiple inputs 37 calibration sets 434
Spool Folder Configuration dialog 282 serial line input 297
spot colors Threads
exact names required 487, 488 option in Configure RIP dialog 252
reporting on screen 184 throughput
spot functions 215 control 38
See also dot shape defined 564
spread 564 system 91
square dot shapes 218 ThroughPut Info dialog 99
square Euclidean dot shapes 218 TIFF
StandardCharStrings file 52 Post processing substitution codes 144
starting up TIFF (Tag Image File Format) 35, 129
executive 333 configuring files 129
Harlequin RIP 57 creating files 129
inputs 80 naming files 130
output of jobs after earlier disabling 93 output device 129
Startup prep post processing output files 143
Configure RIP option 256 See also TIFF/IT files
status TIFF 6.0 input 328
area in tool bar 62 TIFF/IT files
of a calibration set 453 data types 324
Status (JDF Enabler workflow) format and history 324
Available 391 installation and requirements 326
NO-RIP 391 password 255
Refreshing... 391 printing 327
Ripping 391 printing with spool folder 285
Stopped 391 troubleshooting 525
stop / start time saving (optimization) 166
defined 564 timeouts
Stop Executive command 334 on jobs 251
Stop Printing File command 303 tmp folder 56
stopping tone curves
a print job 303 adjusting 202
all enabled inputs 270 creating and using 441
all inputs 60 in Edit Page Setup dialog 202
Harlequin RIP 66 introduction 441
output of jobs temporarily 93 Toner low message 523
the computer running the Harlequin RIP 67 Toner out message 523
stripping. See page imposition tool bar

580 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005

 introduced 59 virtual memory 565
status area 62 allocating for the Harlequin RIP 257
Transparency 308 setting 47
PDF Check Abort 309
PDF Check Warning 308 W
PDF Page Alert 309 Warming up message 524
TrapParams folder 56 When necessary
trapping delete option in Output Controller 98
defined 565 width
in QuarkXPress jobs 509 of media 349
in the Harlequin RIP 508 page default 167
TrapPro Windows
menu commands 65 See Microsoft Windows
Trim Page check box workflows
in Page Setup dialog 166 for maintaining calibration 435
Trim page check box WorkSpace folder 56, 247
in Info dialog 102 wrong reading. See mirrorprint
troubleshooting. See problems
TrueType fonts 401
Type 0 fonts 400
Type 1 fonts 400
Type 3 fonts 400
Type 32 fonts 401
Type 4 fonts 400
Type 42 fonts 401

U
UCR 501, 505
Ultre. See imagesetters
undercolor removal 501, 505
uninstalling
fonts 409
units of measurement
dpcm 554
dpi 554
dpmm 554
lpcm 557
lpi 557
lpmm 557
pica 560
point 561
Unknown error message 524
Use late color management 502
Usr folder 56
Utilities folder 56

V
version
file in SW folder 57
vignettes
defined in spot colors 193

Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005 Operator Manual 581

582 Operator Manual Navigator RIP 7.0 Release : March 2005